Renesas H838099 Renesas 16-bit single-chip microcomputer h8 family / h8/300h tiny sery Datasheet

REJ09B0309-0200
The revision list can be viewed directly by
clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of
revisions and additions. Details should always
be checked by referring to the relevant text.
16
H8/38099Group
Hardware Manual
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
H8 Family / H8/300H Super Low Power Series
H8/38099F
H8/38099
H8/38098
Rev.2.00
Revision Date: Jul. 04, 2007
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page ii of xl
Notes regarding these materials
1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate
Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any
intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in
this document.
2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising
out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts,
programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples.
3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military
applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military
use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export
control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations.
4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and
application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this
document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular
and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed
through our website. (http://www.renesas.com )
5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas
assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information
included in this document.
6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in
light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application.
Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any
particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the
information in this document or Renesas products.
7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas
products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or
malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require
especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and
traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication
transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas
sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above.
8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below:
(1) artificial life support devices or systems
(2) surgical implantations
(3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.)
(4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life
Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who
elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas
Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all
damages arising out of such applications.
9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect
to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges.
10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific
characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use
conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and
injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for
hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention,
appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the
evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or
system manufactured by you.
11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas
products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very
high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your
products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment.
12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written
approval from Renesas.
13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page iii of xl
General Precautions on Handling of Product
1. Treatment of NC Pins
Note: Do not connect anything to the NC pins.
The NC (not connected) pins are either not connected to any of the internal circuitry or are
used as test pins or to reduce noise. If something is connected to the NC pins, the
operation of the LSI is not guaranteed.
2. Treatment of Unused Input Pins
Note: Fix all unused input pins to high or low level.
Generally, the input pins of CMOS products are high-impedance input pins. If unused pins
are in their open states, intermediate levels are induced by noise in the vicinity, a passthrough current flows internally, and a malfunction may occur.
3. Processing before Initialization
Note: When power is first supplied, the product's state is undefined.
The states of internal circuits are undefined until full power is supplied throughout the
chip and a low level is input on the reset pin. During the period where the states are
undefined, the register settings and the output state of each pin are also undefined. Design
your system so that it does not malfunction because of processing while it is in this
undefined state. For those products which have a reset function, reset the LSI immediately
after the power supply has been turned on.
4. Prohibition of Access to Undefined or Reserved Addresses
Note: Access to undefined or reserved addresses is prohibited.
The undefined or reserved addresses may be used to expand functions, or test registers
may have been be allocated to these addresses. Do not access these registers; the system's
operation is not guaranteed if they are accessed.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page iv of xl
Configuration of This Manual
This manual comprises the following items:
1. General Precautions on Handling of Product
2. Configuration of This Manual
3. Preface
4. Contents
5. Overview
6. Description of Functional Modules
•
CPU and System-Control Modules
•
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
The configuration of the functional description of each module differs according to the
module. However, the generic style includes the following items:
i) Feature
ii) Input/Output Pin
iii) Register Description
iv) Operation
v) Usage Note
When designing an application system that includes this LSI, take notes into account. Each section
includes notes in relation to the descriptions given, and usage notes are given, as required, as the
final part of each section.
7. List of Registers
8. Electrical Characteristics
9. Appendix
10. Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition (only for revised versions)
The list of revisions is a summary of points that have been revised or added to earlier versions.
This does not include all of the revised contents. For details, see the actual locations in this
manual.
11. Index
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page v of xl
Preface
H8/38099 Group is single-chip microcontrollers made up of the high-speed H8/300H CPU
employing Renesas Technology original architecture as their cores, and the peripheral functions
required to configure a system. The H8/300H CPU has an instruction set that is compatible with
the H8/300 CPU.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8/38099 Group in the
design of application systems. Target users are expected to understand the
fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical circuits, and microcontrollers.
Objective:
This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8/38099 Group to the target users.
Refer to the H8/300H Series Software Manual for a detailed description of the
instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions, and electrical characteristics.
• In order to understand the details of the CPU's functions
Read the H8/300H Series Software Manual.
• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
Read the index that is the final part of the manual to find the page number of the entry on the
register. The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in section 24,
List of Registers.
Example:
Register name:
The following notation is used for cases when the same or a
similar function, e.g. serial communications interface, is
implemented on more than one channel:
XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel
number)
Bit order:
The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page vi of xl
Notes:
When using an on-chip emulator (E8) for H8/38099 program development and debugging, the
following restrictions must be noted.
1. The NMI pin is reserved for the E8, and cannot be used.
2. Pins P16, P36, and P37 cannot be used. In order to use these pins, additional hardware must be
provided on the user board.
3. Area H'020000 to H'020FFF must on no account be accessed.
4. Area H′FFA000 to H′FFA7FF must on no account be accessed.
5. When the E8 is used, address breaks can be set as either available to the user or for use by the
E8. If address breaks are set as being used by the E8, the address break control registers must
not be accessed.
6. When the E8 is used, NMI is an input pin, P16 and P36 are input pins, and P37 is an output
pin.
7. When on-board programming/erasing is performed in boot mode, the SCI3_1 (P41/RXD and
P42/TXD) is used.
8. When using the E8, set the FROMCKSTP bit in clock halt register 1 to 1.
Related Manuals:
The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require
(http://www.renesas.com/)
H8/38099 Group manuals:
Document Title
Document No.
H8/38099 Group Hardware Manual
This manual
H8/300H Series Software Manual
REJ09B0213
User's manuals for development tools:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage Editor
User's Manual
REJ10B0058
H8S, H8/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User's Manual
ADE-702-037
H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3 Tutorial
REJ10B0024
H8S, H8/300 Series High-performance Embedded Workshop 3
User's Manual
REJ10B0026
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page vii of xl
Application notes:
Document Title
Document No.
H8S, H8/300 Series C/C++ Compiler Package Application Note
REJ05B0464
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page viii of xl
Contents
Section 1 Overview................................................................................................1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
Features.................................................................................................................................. 1
Internal Block Diagram.......................................................................................................... 3
Pin Assignment ...................................................................................................................... 4
Pin Functions ......................................................................................................................... 5
Section 2 CPU......................................................................................................11
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Address Space and Memory Map ........................................................................................ 13
Register Configuration......................................................................................................... 14
2.2.1 General Registers .................................................................................................... 15
2.2.2 Program Counter (PC) ............................................................................................ 16
2.2.3 Condition-Code Register (CCR) ............................................................................. 16
Data Formats........................................................................................................................ 18
2.3.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................... 18
2.3.2 Memory Data Formats ............................................................................................ 20
Instruction Set ...................................................................................................................... 21
2.4.1 Table of Instructions Classified by Function .......................................................... 21
2.4.2 Basic Instruction Formats ....................................................................................... 31
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation ........................................................ 32
2.5.1 Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 32
2.5.2 Effective Address Calculation ................................................................................ 36
Basic Bus Cycle ................................................................................................................... 38
2.6.1 Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)............................................................ 38
2.6.2 On-Chip Peripheral Modules .................................................................................. 39
CPU States ........................................................................................................................... 40
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 41
2.8.1 Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas ................................................................... 41
2.8.2 EEPMOV Instruction.............................................................................................. 41
2.8.3 Bit-Manipulation Instruction .................................................................................. 42
Section 3 Exception Handling .............................................................................47
3.1
3.2
3.3
Exception Sources and Vector Address ............................................................................... 48
Reset..................................................................................................................................... 49
3.2.1 Reset Exception Handling....................................................................................... 49
3.2.2 Interrupt Immediately after Reset ........................................................................... 50
Interrupts.............................................................................................................................. 51
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page ix of xl
3.4
3.5
Stack Status after Exception Handling................................................................................. 52
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 53
3.5.1 Notes on Stack Area Use ........................................................................................ 53
3.5.2 Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers ............................................................... 54
3.5.3 Method for Clearing Interrupt Request Flags ......................................................... 57
Section 4 Interrupt Controller..............................................................................59
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
Features................................................................................................................................ 59
Input/Output Pins................................................................................................................. 60
Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................... 60
4.3.1 Interrupt Edge Select Register (IEGR) ................................................................... 61
4.3.2 Wakeup Edge Select Register (WEGR).................................................................. 62
4.3.3 Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1) ...................................................................... 63
4.3.4 Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2) ...................................................................... 64
4.3.5 Interrupt Request Register 1 (IRR1) ....................................................................... 65
4.3.6 Interrupt Request Register 2 (IRR2) ....................................................................... 66
4.3.7 Wakeup Interrupt Request Register (IWPR) .......................................................... 68
4.3.8 Interrupt Priority Registers A to F (IPRA to IPRF) ................................................ 70
4.3.9 Interrupt Mask Register (INTM) ............................................................................ 71
Interrupt Sources.................................................................................................................. 71
4.4.1 External Interrupts .................................................................................................. 71
4.4.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................... 73
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table......................................................................... 73
Operation ............................................................................................................................. 77
4.6.1 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence ................................................................. 79
4.6.2 Interrupt Response Times ....................................................................................... 81
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 82
4.7.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling........................................ 82
4.7.2 Instructions that Disable Interrupts......................................................................... 83
4.7.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction............................................. 83
4.7.4 IENR Clearing ........................................................................................................ 83
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator......................................................................... 85
5.1
5.2
Register Description............................................................................................................. 86
5.1.1 SUB32k Control Register (SUB32CR)................................................................... 86
5.1.2 Oscillator Control Register (OSCCR) .................................................................... 87
System Clock Generator ...................................................................................................... 88
5.2.1 Connecting Crystal Resonator ................................................................................ 88
5.2.2 Connecting Ceramic Resonator .............................................................................. 89
5.2.3 External Clock Input Method.................................................................................. 89
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page x of xl
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.2.4 Selecting On-Chip Oscillator for System Clock ..................................................... 90
Subclock Generator.............................................................................................................. 91
5.3.1 Connecting 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator............................................. 91
5.3.2 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock.............................................................. 92
5.3.3 How to Input the External Clock ............................................................................ 93
Prescalers ............................................................................................................................. 94
5.4.1 Prescaler S .............................................................................................................. 94
5.4.2 Prescaler W ............................................................................................................. 94
Usage Notes ......................................................................................................................... 95
5.5.1 Note on Resonators and Resonator Circuits............................................................ 95
5.5.2 Notes on Board Design ........................................................................................... 97
5.5.3 Definition of Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time .................................................. 97
5.5.4 Note on Subclock Stop State................................................................................... 98
5.5.5 Note on the Oscillation Stabilization of Resonators ............................................... 99
5.5.6 Note on Using On-Chip Power-On Reset ............................................................... 99
5.5.7 Note on Using the On-Chip Emulator..................................................................... 99
Section 6 Power-Down Modes ..........................................................................101
6.1
6.2
6.3
Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 102
6.1.1 System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1) .................................................................. 102
6.1.2 System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2) .................................................................. 104
6.1.3 System Control Register 3 (SYSCR3) .................................................................. 105
6.1.4 Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3) ........................................ 107
Mode Transitions and States of LSI................................................................................... 110
6.2.1 Sleep Mode ........................................................................................................... 116
6.2.2 Standby Mode ....................................................................................................... 116
6.2.3 Watch Mode.......................................................................................................... 117
6.2.4 Subsleep Mode...................................................................................................... 117
6.2.5 Subactive Mode .................................................................................................... 118
6.2.6 Active (Medium-Speed) Mode ............................................................................. 118
Direct Transition ................................................................................................................ 119
6.3.1 Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active
(Medium-Speed) Mode......................................................................................... 119
6.3.2 Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode............... 120
6.3.3 Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Active
(High-Speed) Mode .............................................................................................. 120
6.3.4 Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode ......... 121
6.3.5 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode............... 121
6.3.6 Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode ......... 122
6.3.7 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Direct Transition............... 123
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xi of xl
6.4
6.5
Module Standby Function.................................................................................................. 123
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 124
6.5.1 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States .............................................................. 124
6.5.2 Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode................... 125
Section 7 ROM ..................................................................................................127
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
Block Configuration .......................................................................................................... 128
Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 129
7.2.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1) ..................................................... 129
7.2.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2) ..................................................... 130
7.2.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ............................................................................ 131
7.2.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ............................................................................ 132
7.2.5 Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR) ............................................. 132
7.2.6 Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)............................................................... 133
On-Board Programming Modes......................................................................................... 133
7.3.1 Boot Mode ............................................................................................................ 134
7.3.2 Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode...................................................... 137
Using RAM to Emulate Flash Memory ............................................................................. 138
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing ................................................................................ 140
7.5.1 Program/Program-Verify ...................................................................................... 140
7.5.2 Erase/Erase-Verify................................................................................................ 143
7.5.3 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory........................... 143
Program/Erase Protection .................................................................................................. 145
7.6.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................. 145
7.6.2 Software Protection............................................................................................... 145
7.6.3 Error Protection .................................................................................................... 145
Programmer Mode ............................................................................................................. 146
Power-Down States for Flash Memory.............................................................................. 146
Notes on Setting Module Standby Mode ........................................................................... 147
Section 8 RAM ..................................................................................................149
Section 9 I/O Ports.............................................................................................151
9.1
Port 1.................................................................................................................................. 151
9.1.1 Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)................................................................................. 152
9.1.2 Port Control Register 1 (PCR1) ............................................................................ 152
9.1.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)............................................................ 153
9.1.4 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) .............................................................................. 153
9.1.5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 154
9.1.6 Input Pull-Up MOS............................................................................................... 159
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xii of xl
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
Port 3.................................................................................................................................. 160
9.2.1 Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)................................................................................. 160
9.2.2 Port Control Register 3 (PCR3) ............................................................................ 161
9.2.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 3 (PUCR3)............................................................ 162
9.2.4 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) .............................................................................. 162
9.2.5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 163
9.2.6 Input Pull-Up MOS............................................................................................... 165
Port 4.................................................................................................................................. 166
9.3.1 Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)................................................................................. 166
9.3.2 Port Control Register 4 (PCR4) ............................................................................ 167
9.3.3 Port Mode Register 4 (PMR4) .............................................................................. 168
9.3.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 169
Port 5.................................................................................................................................. 170
9.4.1 Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)................................................................................. 171
9.4.2 Port Control Register 5 (PCR5) ............................................................................ 171
9.4.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)............................................................ 172
9.4.4 Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5) .............................................................................. 172
9.4.5 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 173
9.4.6 Input Pull-Up MOS............................................................................................... 174
Port 6.................................................................................................................................. 174
9.5.1 Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)................................................................................. 175
9.5.2 Port Control Register 6 (PCR6) ............................................................................ 175
9.5.3 Port Pull-Up Control Register 6 (PUCR6)............................................................ 176
9.5.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 176
9.5.5 Input Pull-Up MOS............................................................................................... 177
Port 7.................................................................................................................................. 178
9.6.1 Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)................................................................................. 178
9.6.2 Port Control Register 7 (PCR7) ............................................................................ 179
9.6.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 179
Port 8.................................................................................................................................. 180
9.7.1 Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)................................................................................. 181
9.7.2 Port Control Register 8 (PCR8) ............................................................................ 181
9.7.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 182
Port 9.................................................................................................................................. 183
9.8.1 Port Data Register 9 (PDR9)................................................................................. 183
9.8.2 Port Control Register 9 (PCR9) ............................................................................ 184
9.8.3 Port Mode Register 9 (PMR9) .............................................................................. 184
9.8.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 185
Port A................................................................................................................................. 186
9.9.1 Port Data Register A (PDRA)............................................................................... 187
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xiii of xl
9.10
9.11
9.12
9.13
9.14
9.15
9.16
9.9.2 Port Control Register A (PCRA) .......................................................................... 187
9.9.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 188
Port B ................................................................................................................................. 190
9.10.1 Port Data Register B (PDRB) ............................................................................... 190
9.10.2 Port Mode Register B (PMRB)............................................................................. 191
9.10.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 192
Port C ................................................................................................................................. 194
9.11.1 Port Data Register C (PDRC) ............................................................................... 194
9.11.2 Port Control Register C (PCRC)........................................................................... 195
9.11.3 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 195
Port E ................................................................................................................................. 196
9.12.1 Port Data Register E (PDRE)................................................................................ 196
9.12.2 Port Control Register E (PCRE) ........................................................................... 197
9.12.3 Port Mode Register E (PMRE) ............................................................................. 197
9.12.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 198
Port F ................................................................................................................................. 202
9.13.1 Port Data Register F (PDRF) ................................................................................ 202
9.13.2 Port Control Register F (PCRF)............................................................................ 203
9.13.3 Port Mode Register F (PMRF).............................................................................. 203
9.13.4 Pin Functions ........................................................................................................ 204
Input/Output Data Inversion .............................................................................................. 206
9.14.1 Serial Port Control Register, Serial Port Control Register 2 (SPCR, SPCR2)...... 206
Port Function Switch.......................................................................................................... 209
9.15.1 Port Function Control Register (PFCR)................................................................ 209
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 210
9.16.1 How to Handle Unused Pin .................................................................................. 210
9.16.2 Input Characteristics Difference due to Pin Function ........................................... 210
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC).....................................................................211
10.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 211
10.2 Input/Output Pin ................................................................................................................ 212
10.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 212
10.3.1 Second Data Register/Free Running Counter Data Register (RSECDR) ............. 213
10.3.2 Minute Data Register (RMINDR) ........................................................................ 214
10.3.3 Hour Data Register (RHRDR) .............................................................................. 215
10.3.4 Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR) ............................................................... 216
10.3.5 RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1) ..................................................................... 217
10.3.6 RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2) ..................................................................... 219
10.3.7 Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR) ............................................................. 220
10.3.8 RTC Interrupt Flag Register (RTCFLG) .............................................................. 221
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xiv of xl
10.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 222
10.4.1 Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On ......................................................... 222
10.4.2 Initial Setting Procedure ....................................................................................... 222
10.4.3 Data Reading Procedure ....................................................................................... 223
10.5 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 224
10.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 225
10.6.1 Note on Clock Count ............................................................................................ 225
10.6.2 Note when Using RTC Interrupts ......................................................................... 225
Section 11 Timer C ............................................................................................227
11.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 227
11.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 228
11.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 228
11.3.1 Timer Mode Register C (TMC) ............................................................................ 229
11.3.2 Timer Counter C (TCC)........................................................................................ 231
11.3.3 Timer Load Register C (TLC) .............................................................................. 231
11.3.4 Clock Halt Register 3 (CKSTPR3) ....................................................................... 231
11.4 Timer Operation................................................................................................................. 232
11.4.1 Interval Timer Operation ...................................................................................... 232
11.4.2 Auto-Reload Timer Operation .............................................................................. 233
11.4.3 Event Counter Operation ...................................................................................... 233
11.4.4 TCC Up/Down Control by the External Input Pin................................................ 233
11.5 Timer C Operation States................................................................................................... 234
Section 12 Timer F.............................................................................................235
12.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 235
12.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 236
12.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 237
12.3.1 Timer Counters FH and FL (TCFH, TCFL) ......................................................... 237
12.3.2 Output Compare Registers FH and FL (OCRFH, OCRFL) .................................. 238
12.3.3 Timer Control Register F (TCRF) ........................................................................ 239
12.3.4 Timer Control/Status Register F (TCSRF) ........................................................... 240
12.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 242
12.4.1 Timer F Operation ................................................................................................ 242
12.4.2 TCF Increment Timing ......................................................................................... 244
12.4.3 TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing ......................................................................... 245
12.4.4 TCF Clear Timing................................................................................................. 245
12.4.5 Timer Overflow Flag (OVF) Set Timing .............................................................. 246
12.4.6 Compare Match Flag Set Timing.......................................................................... 246
12.5 Timer F Operating States ................................................................................................... 247
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xv of xl
12.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 248
12.6.1 16-Bit Timer Mode ............................................................................................... 248
12.6.2 8-Bit Timer Mode ................................................................................................. 248
12.6.3 Flag Clearing ........................................................................................................ 249
12.6.4 Timer Counter (TCF) Read/Write ........................................................................ 251
Section 13 Timer G ........................................................................................... 253
13.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 253
13.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 255
13.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 255
13.3.1 Timer Counter G (TCG) ....................................................................................... 255
13.3.2 Input Capture Register GF (ICRGF)..................................................................... 256
13.3.3 Input Capture Register GR (ICRGR).................................................................... 256
13.3.4 Timer Mode Register G (TMG)............................................................................ 256
13.3.5 Clock Halt Register 3 (CKSTPR3) ....................................................................... 259
13.4 Noise Canceller.................................................................................................................. 259
13.5 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 261
13.5.1 Timer G Functions................................................................................................ 261
13.5.2 Count Timing........................................................................................................ 262
13.5.3 Input Capture Input Timing .................................................................................. 262
13.5.4 Timing of Input Capture by Input Capture Input.................................................. 263
13.5.5 TCG Clear Timing ................................................................................................ 264
13.6 Timer G Operation Modes ................................................................................................. 265
13.7 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 266
13.7.1 Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation...................................................... 266
13.7.2 Notes on Port Mode Register Modification .......................................................... 267
13.8 Timer G Application Example........................................................................................... 270
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU) .......................................................271
14.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 271
14.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 273
14.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 274
14.3.1 Timer Control Register (TCR).............................................................................. 275
14.3.2 Timer Mode Register (TMDR)............................................................................. 277
14.3.3 Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR) ...................................................................... 278
14.3.4 Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)............................................................... 283
14.3.5 Timer Status Register (TSR)................................................................................. 284
14.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)......................................................................................... 285
14.3.7 Timer General Register (TGR) ............................................................................. 285
14.3.8 Timer Start Register (TSTR) ................................................................................ 286
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xvi of xl
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.3.9 Timer Synchro Register (TSYR) .......................................................................... 287
Interface to CPU ................................................................................................................ 288
14.4.1 16-Bit Registers .................................................................................................... 288
14.4.2 8-Bit Registers ...................................................................................................... 288
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 290
14.5.1 Basic Functions..................................................................................................... 290
14.5.2 Synchronous Operation......................................................................................... 296
14.5.3 Operation with Cascaded Connection................................................................... 298
14.5.4 PWM Modes ......................................................................................................... 300
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 305
Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 306
14.7.1 Input/Output Timing ............................................................................................. 306
14.7.2 Interrupt Signal Timing......................................................................................... 309
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 311
14.8.1 Module Standby Function Setting......................................................................... 311
14.8.2 Input Clock Restrictions ....................................................................................... 311
14.8.3 Caution on Period Setting ..................................................................................... 312
14.8.4 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operation ....................................... 312
14.8.5 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operation ................................ 313
14.8.6 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match .......................................... 314
14.8.7 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture............................................... 315
14.8.8 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture.............................................. 316
14.8.9 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing ........................................... 317
14.8.10 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow .................................................. 318
14.8.11 Multiplexing of I/O Pins ....................................................................................... 318
14.8.12 Interrupts when Module Standby Function is Used .............................................. 318
14.8.13 Output Conditions for 0% Duty and 100% Duty .................................................. 318
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)...............................................319
15.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 319
15.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 320
15.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 321
15.3.1 Event Counter PWM Compare Register (ECPWCR) ........................................... 321
15.3.2 Event Counter PWM Data Register (ECPWDR) .................................................. 322
15.3.3 Input Pin Edge Select Register (AEGSR) ............................................................. 323
15.3.4 Event Counter Control Register (ECCR) .............................................................. 324
15.3.5 Event Counter Control/Status Register (ECCSR) ................................................. 325
15.3.6 Event Counter H (ECH)........................................................................................ 327
15.3.7 Event Counter L (ECL)......................................................................................... 327
15.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 328
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xvii of xl
15.4.1 16-Bit Counter Operation ..................................................................................... 328
15.4.2 8-Bit Counter Operation ....................................................................................... 329
15.4.3 IRQAEC Operation............................................................................................... 330
15.4.4 Event Counter PWM Operation............................................................................ 330
15.4.5 Operation of Clock Input Enable/Disable Function.............................................. 331
15.5 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter............................................................. 332
15.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 333
Section 16 Watchdog Timer.............................................................................. 335
16.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 335
16.2 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 336
16.2.1 Timer Control/Status Register WD1 (TCSRWD1)............................................... 337
16.2.2 Timer Control/Status Register WD2 (TCSRWD2)............................................... 339
16.2.3 Timer Counter WD (TCWD)................................................................................ 340
16.2.4 Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD) .................................................................... 341
16.3 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 342
16.3.1 Watchdog Timer Mode......................................................................................... 342
16.3.2 Interval Timer Mode............................................................................................. 343
16.3.3 Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting .............................................................. 343
16.4 Interrupt ............................................................................................................................. 344
16.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 344
16.5.1 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................. 344
16.5.2 Module Standby Mode Control ............................................................................ 344
16.5.3 Writing to Timer Counter WD (TCWD) with the On-Chip
Watchdog Timer Oscillator Selected .................................................................... 344
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)...........................345
17.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 345
17.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 351
17.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 351
17.3.1 Receive Shift Register (RSR) ............................................................................... 352
17.3.2 Receive Data Register (RDR) ............................................................................... 352
17.3.3 Transmit Shift Register (TSR) .............................................................................. 352
17.3.4 Transmit Data Register (TDR).............................................................................. 352
17.3.5 Serial Mode Register (SMR) ................................................................................ 353
17.3.6 Serial Control Register (SCR) .............................................................................. 356
17.3.7 Serial Status Register (SSR) ................................................................................. 358
17.3.8 Bit Rate Register (BRR) ....................................................................................... 361
17.3.9 Serial Port Control Register (SPCR)..................................................................... 373
17.3.10 Serial Port Control Register 2 (SPCR2)................................................................ 375
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xviii of xl
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
17.3.11 IrDA Control Register (IrCR) ............................................................................... 376
17.3.12 Serial Extended Mode Register (SEMR) .............................................................. 377
Operation in Asynchronous Mode ..................................................................................... 378
17.4.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 379
17.4.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................. 383
17.4.3 Data Transmission ................................................................................................ 384
17.4.4 Serial Data Reception ........................................................................................... 386
Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode............................................................................. 390
17.5.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 390
17.5.2 SCI3 Initialization................................................................................................. 390
17.5.3 Serial Data Transmission ...................................................................................... 391
17.5.4 Serial Data Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode) .............................................. 393
17.5.5 Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception........................................ 395
Multiprocessor Communication Function.......................................................................... 396
17.6.1 Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission ............................................................. 398
17.6.2 Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception .................................................................. 399
IrDA Operation .................................................................................................................. 401
17.7.1 Transmission......................................................................................................... 402
17.7.2 Reception .............................................................................................................. 403
17.7.3 High-Level Pulse Width Selection........................................................................ 403
Interrupt Requests .............................................................................................................. 404
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 407
17.9.1 Break Detection and Processing ........................................................................... 407
17.9.2 Mark State and Break Sending.............................................................................. 407
17.9.3 Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations
(Clock Synchronous Mode Only) ......................................................................... 407
17.9.4 Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous
Mode ..................................................................................................................... 408
17.9.5 Note on Switching SCK3 Pin Function ................................................................ 409
17.9.6 Relation between Writing to TDR and Bit TDRE ................................................ 409
17.9.7 Relation between RDR Reading and bit RDRF .................................................... 410
17.9.8 Transmit and Receive Operations when Making State Transition........................ 411
17.9.9 Setting in Subactive or Subsleep Mode ................................................................ 411
17.9.10 Oscillator when Serial Communications Interface 3 is Used................................ 411
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4) .......................................413
18.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 413
18.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 414
18.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 415
18.3.1 Serial Control Register 4 (SCR4).......................................................................... 415
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xix of xl
18.3.2 Serial Control/Status Register 4 (SCSR4) ............................................................ 418
18.3.3 Transmit Data Register 4 (TDR4)......................................................................... 421
18.3.4 Receive Data Register 4 (RDR4) .......................................................................... 421
18.3.5 Shift Register 4 (SR4)........................................................................................... 421
18.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 422
18.4.1 Clock..................................................................................................................... 422
18.4.2 Data Transfer Format............................................................................................ 422
18.4.3 Data Transmission/Reception ............................................................................... 423
18.4.4 Data Transmission ................................................................................................ 424
18.4.5 Data Reception...................................................................................................... 426
18.4.6 Simultaneous Data Transmission and Reception.................................................. 428
18.5 Interrupt Sources................................................................................................................ 429
18.6 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 430
18.6.1 Relationship between Writing to TDR4 and TDRE ............................................. 430
18.6.2 Receive Error Flag and Transmission................................................................... 430
18.6.3 Relationship between Reading RDR4 and RDRF ................................................ 430
18.6.4 SCK4 Output Waveform when Internal Clock of φ/2 is Selected......................... 431
Section 19 14-Bit PWM ....................................................................................433
19.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 433
19.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 434
19.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 434
19.3.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR) .......................................................................... 435
19.3.2 PWM Data Register (PWDR) ............................................................................... 436
19.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 436
19.4.1 Principle of Pulse-Division Type PWM ............................................................... 436
19.4.2 Setting for Pulse-Division Type PWM Operation ................................................ 437
19.4.3 Operation of Pulse-Division Type PWM.............................................................. 437
19.4.4 Setting for Standard PWM Operation................................................................... 438
19.4.5 PWM Operating States ......................................................................................... 439
19.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 439
19.5.1 Timing of Writing to PWDR and Reflection in the PWM Waveform.................. 439
Section 20 A/D Converter .................................................................................441
20.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 441
20.2 Input/Output Pins............................................................................................................... 443
20.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 443
20.3.1 A/D Result Register (ADRR) ............................................................................... 444
20.3.2 A/D Mode Register (AMR) .................................................................................. 444
20.3.3 A/D Start Register (ADSR) .................................................................................. 446
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xx of xl
20.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 446
20.4.1 A/D Conversion .................................................................................................... 446
20.4.2 External Trigger Input Timing.............................................................................. 447
20.4.3 Operating States of A/D Converter ....................................................................... 447
20.5 Example of Use.................................................................................................................. 448
20.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions .............................................................................. 451
20.7 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 453
20.7.1 Permissible Signal Source Impedance .................................................................. 453
20.7.2 Influences on Absolute Accuracy ......................................................................... 453
20.7.3 Other Usage Notes ................................................................................................ 454
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver.....................................................................455
21.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 455
21.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 457
21.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 457
21.3.1 LCD Port Control Register (LPCR)...................................................................... 458
21.3.2 LCD Control Register (LCR)................................................................................ 460
21.3.3 LCD Control Register 2 (LCR2)........................................................................... 462
21.3.4 LCD Trimming Register (LTRMR)...................................................................... 463
21.3.5 BGR Control Register (BGRMR)......................................................................... 465
21.4 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 466
21.4.1 Settings up to LCD Display .................................................................................. 466
21.4.2 Relationship between LCD RAM and Display ..................................................... 468
21.4.3 3-V Constant-Voltage Power Supply Circuit........................................................ 473
21.4.4 Operation in Power-Down Modes ........................................................................ 474
21.4.5 Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply and Fine Adjustment ................................... 476
21.5 Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 477
21.5.1 Pin Handling when LCD Controller/Driver is not Used ....................................... 477
21.5.2 Pin Handling when 3-V Constant-Voltage Power Supply Circuit is not Used ..... 477
2
Section 22 I C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2) ................................................................479
22.1 Features.............................................................................................................................. 479
22.2 Input/Output Pins ............................................................................................................... 481
22.3 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 482
2
22.3.1 I C Bus Control Register 1 (ICCR1) ..................................................................... 482
2
22.3.2 I C Bus Control Register 2 (ICCR2) ..................................................................... 485
2
22.3.3 I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)............................................................................ 487
2
22.3.4 I C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER) ........................................................... 489
2
22.3.5 I C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................. 491
22.3.6 Slave Address Register (SAR) .............................................................................. 494
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxi of xl
2
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
22.3.7 I C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT) ............................................................ 494
2
22.3.8 I C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR).............................................................. 494
2
22.3.9 I C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS)............................................................................ 494
Operation ........................................................................................................................... 495
2
22.4.1 I C Bus Format...................................................................................................... 495
22.4.2 Master Transmit Operation ................................................................................... 496
22.4.3 Master Receive Operation .................................................................................... 498
22.4.4 Slave Transmit Operation ..................................................................................... 500
22.4.5 Slave Receive Operation....................................................................................... 503
22.4.6 Clock Synchronous Serial Format ........................................................................ 504
22.4.7 Noise Canceller..................................................................................................... 507
22.4.8 Example of Use..................................................................................................... 507
Interrupt Request................................................................................................................ 512
Bit Synchronous Circuit..................................................................................................... 513
Usage Notes ....................................................................................................................... 514
22.7.1 Note on Issuing Stop Condition and Start (Re-Transmit) Condition .................... 514
2
22.7.2 Note on Setting WAIT Bit in I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)............................. 514
22.7.3 Restriction on Transfer Rate Setting in Multimaster Operation ........................... 514
22.7.4 Restriction on the Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions for MST and
TRS Setting in Multimaster Operation ................................................................. 515
22.7.5 Usage Note on Master Receive Mode................................................................... 515
Section 23 Power-On Reset Circuit................................................................... 517
23.1 Feature ............................................................................................................................... 517
23.2 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 518
23.2.1 Power-On Reset Circuit ........................................................................................ 518
Section 24 Address Break ................................................................................. 519
24.1 Register Descriptions ......................................................................................................... 520
24.1.1 Address Break Control Register 2 (ABRKCR2) .................................................. 520
24.1.2 Address Break Status Register 2 (ABRKSR2) ..................................................... 522
24.1.3 Break Address Registers 2 (BAR2E, BAR2H, BAR2L) ...................................... 522
24.1.4 Break Data Registers 2 (BDR2H, BDR2L) .......................................................... 522
24.2 Operation ........................................................................................................................... 523
24.3 Operating States of Address Break .................................................................................... 524
Section 25 List of Registers...............................................................................525
25.1 Register Addresses (Address Order).................................................................................. 526
25.2 Register Bits....................................................................................................................... 533
25.3 Register States in Each Operating Mode ........................................................................... 540
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxii of xl
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics .................................................................547
26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings for F-ZTAT Version............................................................. 547
26.2 Electrical Characteristics for F-ZTAT Version.................................................................. 548
26.2.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range........................................................ 548
26.2.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 554
26.2.3 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 562
26.2.4 A/D Converter Characteristics .............................................................................. 568
26.2.5 LCD Characteristics.............................................................................................. 570
26.2.6 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics................................................................ 571
26.2.7 Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 572
26.2.8 Flash Memory Characteristics .............................................................................. 573
26.3 Absolute Maximum Ratings for Masked ROM Version.................................................... 575
26.4 Electrical Characteristics for Masked ROM Version......................................................... 576
26.4.1 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range........................................................ 576
26.4.2 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 580
26.4.3 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 588
26.4.4 A/D Converter Characteristics .............................................................................. 594
26.4.5 LCD Characteristics.............................................................................................. 596
26.4.6 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics................................................................ 597
26.4.7 Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 597
26.5 Operation Timing............................................................................................................... 598
26.6 Output Load Circuit ........................................................................................................... 601
26.7 Recommended Resonators................................................................................................. 602
26.8 Usage Note......................................................................................................................... 602
Appendix
A.
B.
C.
D.
..........................................................................................................603
Instruction Set .................................................................................................................... 603
A.1
Instruction List...................................................................................................... 603
A.2
Operation Code Map............................................................................................. 618
A.3
Number of Execution States ................................................................................. 621
A.4
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes .......................................... 632
I/O Ports............................................................................................................................. 633
B.1
I/O Port Block Diagrams ...................................................................................... 633
B.2
Port States in Each Operating State ...................................................................... 661
Product Part No. Lineup..................................................................................................... 663
Package Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 664
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition .....................................................665
Index
..........................................................................................................689
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxiii of xl
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxiv of xl
Figures
Section 1 Overview
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38099 Group................................................................. 3
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignment of H8/38099 Group (PLQP0100KB-A) .............................................. 4
Section 2 CPU
Figure 2.1 Memory Map............................................................................................................... 13
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers ............................................................................................................. 14
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers ......................................................................................... 15
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area ................................................... 16
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1) .............................................................................. 18
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2) .............................................................................. 19
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats................................................................................................. 20
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats...................................................................................................... 31
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode ........................................... 35
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle.................................................................................. 38
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)..................................... 39
Figure 2.11 CPU Operating States................................................................................................ 40
Figure 2.12 State Transitions ........................................................................................................ 41
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to
Same Address ........................................................................................................... 42
Section 3
Figure 3.1
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3
Figure 3.4
Figure 3.5
Exception Handling
Reset Exception Handling Sequence ........................................................................... 50
Interrupt Sources and their Numbers........................................................................... 51
Stack Status after Exception Handling ........................................................................ 52
Operation when Odd Address is Set in SP .................................................................. 53
Port Mode Register (or AEGSR) Setting and Interrupt Request Flag
Clearing Procedure ..................................................................................................... 56
Section 4
Figure 4.1
Figure 4.2
Figure 4.3
Figure 4.4
Interrupt Controller
Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller ........................................................................ 59
Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance ................................................... 79
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence...................................................................... 80
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling ............................................ 82
Section 5
Figure 5.1
Figure 5.2
Figure 5.3
Clock Pulse Generator
Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator ................................................................... 85
Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator.................................................................... 88
Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator.................................................................. 89
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxv of xl
Figure 5.4 Example of External Clock Input ................................................................................ 89
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator................................ 91
Figure 5.6 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator.................................................. 92
Figure 5.7 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock .................................................................. 92
Figure 5.8 Pin Connection when Inputting External Clock .......................................................... 93
Figure 5.9 Example of Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Arrangement.......................................... 95
Figure 5.10 Negative Resistance Measurement and Circuit Modification Suggestions ............... 96
Figure 5.11 Example of Incorrect Board Design .......................................................................... 97
Figure 5.12 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time .......................................................................... 98
Section 6
Figure 6.1
Figure 6.2
Figure 6.3
Power-Down Modes
Mode Transition Diagram ......................................................................................... 111
Standby Mode Transition and Pin States................................................................... 124
External Input Signal Capture when Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode
or Watch Mode ......................................................................................................... 126
Section 7
Figure 7.1
Figure 7.2
Figure 7.3
Figure 7.4
Figure 7.5
Figure 7.6
ROM
Flash Memory Block Configuration.......................................................................... 128
Sample Flowchart of Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode........................ 137
Address Map of Overlaid RAM Area ....................................................................... 139
Program/Program-Verify Flowchart ......................................................................... 141
Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart ................................................................................... 144
Module Standby Mode Setting when RAM Emulation is not Used.......................... 148
Section 9 I/O Ports
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 151
Figure 9.2 Port 3 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 160
Figure 9.3 Port 4 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 166
Figure 9.4 Port 5 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 170
Figure 9.5 Port 6 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 174
Figure 9.6 Port 7 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 178
Figure 9.7 Port 8 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 180
Figure 9.8 Port 9 Pin Configuration............................................................................................ 183
Figure 9.9 Port A Pin Configuration........................................................................................... 186
Figure 9.10 Port B Pin Configuration......................................................................................... 190
Figure 9.11 Port C Pin Configuration......................................................................................... 194
Figure 9.12 Port E Pin Configuration ......................................................................................... 196
Figure 9.13 Port F Pin Configuration ......................................................................................... 202
Figure 9.14 Input/Output Data Inversion Function..................................................................... 206
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of RTC ........................................................................................... 211
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxvi of xl
Figure 10.2 Definition of Time Expression ................................................................................ 218
Figure 10.3 Initial Setting Procedure .......................................................................................... 222
Figure 10.4 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data............................................................ 223
Section 11 Timer C
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer C...................................................................................... 227
Section 12
Figure 12.1
Figure 12.2
Figure 12.3
Figure 12.4
Figure 12.5
Figure 12.6
Figure 12.7
Timer F
Block Diagram of Timer F ...................................................................................... 236
Count Timing for Internal Clock Operation ............................................................ 244
Count Timing for External Event Operation ........................................................... 244
TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing............................................................................ 245
TCF Clear Timing ................................................................................................... 245
Compare Match Flag Set Timing ............................................................................ 246
Clear Interrupt Request Flag when Interrupt Source Generation Signal is Valid... 251
Section 13
Figure 13.1
Figure 13.2
Figure 13.3
Figure 13.4
Figure 13.5
Figure 13.6
Figure 13.7
Figure 13.8
Timer G
Block Diagram of Timer G...................................................................................... 254
Noise Canceller Block Diagram .............................................................................. 259
Noise Canceller Timing (Example) ......................................................................... 260
Input Capture Input Timing (without Noise Cancellation Function)....................... 262
Input Capture Input Timing (with Noise Cancellation Function)............................ 263
Timing of Input Capture by Input Capture Input..................................................... 263
TCG Clear Timing................................................................................................... 264
Port Mode Register Manipulation and Interrupt Enable Flag
Clearing Procedure ................................................................................................. 269
Figure 13.9 Timer G Application Example ................................................................................ 270
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of TPU............................................................................................ 273
Figure 14.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)]................................. 288
Figure 14.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)] ............................ 288
Figure 14.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)] ........................ 289
Figure 14.5 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure .................................................. 290
Figure 14.6 Free-Running Counter Operation ............................................................................ 291
Figure 14.7 Periodic Counter Operation..................................................................................... 292
Figure 14.8 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match.............. 292
Figure 14.9 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation ............................................................... 293
Figure 14.10 Example of Toggle Output Operation ................................................................... 293
Figure 14.11 Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation.................................. 294
Figure 14.12 Example of Input Capture Operation..................................................................... 295
Figure 14.13 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure ........................................ 296
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxvii of xl
Figure 14.14
Figure 14.15
Figure 14.16
Figure 14.17
Figure 14.18
Figure 14.19
Figure 14.20
Figure 14.21
Figure 14.22
Figure 14.23
Figure 14.24
Figure 14.25
Figure 14.26
Figure 14.27
Figure 14.28
Figure 14.29
Figure 14.30
Figure 14.31
Figure 14.32
Figure 14.33
Figure 14.34
Figure 14.35
Figure 14.36
Figure 14.37
Example of Synchronous Operation...................................................................... 297
Setting Procedure for Operation with Cascaded Operation................................... 298
Example of Operation with Cascaded Connection................................................ 299
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure .......................................................... 301
Example of PWM Mode Operation (1) ................................................................. 302
Example of PWM Mode Operation (2) ................................................................. 303
Example of PWM Mode Operation (3) ................................................................. 304
Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation............................................................ 306
Count Timing in External Clock Operation .......................................................... 306
Output Compare Output Timing ........................................................................... 307
Input Capture Input Signal Timing........................................................................ 308
Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match) .............................................................. 308
Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture) .................................................................. 309
TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match) ............................................................... 309
TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture) ................................................................... 310
TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing.............................................................................. 310
Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU .............................................................. 311
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operation ........................................ 312
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operation................................. 313
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match........................................... 314
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture ............................................... 315
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture .............................................. 316
Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing............................................ 317
Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow................................................... 318
Section 15
Figure 15.1
Figure 15.2
Figure 15.3
Figure 15.4
Figure 15.5
Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
Block Diagram of Asynchronous Event Counter .................................................... 320
Software Procedure when Using ECH and ECL as 16-Bit Event Counter.............. 328
Software Procedure when Using ECH and ECL as 8-Bit Event Counters .............. 329
Event Counter Operation Waveform....................................................................... 330
Example of Clock Control Operation...................................................................... 331
Section 16
Figure 16.1
Figure 16.2
Figure 16.3
Figure 16.4
Watchdog Timer
Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer ........................................................................ 336
Example of Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................. 342
Interval Timer Mode Operation............................................................................... 343
Timing of OVF Flag Setting ................................................................................... 343
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Figure 17.1 (1) Block Diagram of SCI3_1 ................................................................................. 348
Figure 17.1 (2) Block Diagram of SCI3_2 ................................................................................. 349
Figure 17.1 (3) Block Diagram of SCI3_3 ................................................................................. 350
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxviii of xl
Figure 17.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication ...................................................... 378
Figure 17.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)............. 379
Figure 17.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart...................................................................... 383
Figure 17.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ........................................................................... 384
Figure 17.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)............................... 385
Figure 17.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit) ........................................................................... 387
Figure 17.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1) ...................... 388
Figure 17.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2) ...................... 389
Figure 17.9 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communications ............................................. 390
Figure 17.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clock Synchronous Mode.......... 391
Figure 17.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode)..................... 392
Figure 17.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode ................... 393
Figure 17.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode).......................... 394
Figure 17.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clock Synchronous Mode)................................................................................... 395
Figure 17.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format (Transmission of
Data H'AA to Receiving Station A) ...................................................................... 397
Figure 17.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart......................................... 398
Figure 17.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1) ........................................ 399
Figure 17.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit).............................. 400
Figure 17.19 IrDA Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 401
Figure 17.20 IrDA Transmission and Reception ........................................................................ 402
Figure 17.21 (a) RDRF Setting and RXI3 Interrupt ................................................................... 406
Figure 17.21 (b) TDRE Setting and TXI3 Interrupt ................................................................... 406
Figure 17.21 (c) TEND Setting and TEI3 Interrupt.................................................................... 406
Figure 17.22 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode ...................................... 408
Figure 17.23 Relation between RDR Read Timing and Data ..................................................... 410
Section 18
Figure 18.1
Figure 18.2
Figure 18.3
Figure 18.4
Figure 18.5
Figure 18.6
Figure 18.7
Figure 18.8
Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Block Diagram of SCI4 ........................................................................................... 414
Data Transfer Format .............................................................................................. 422
Flowchart Example of SCI4 Initialization............................................................... 423
Flowchart Example of Data Transmission .............................................................. 424
Transmit Operation Example................................................................................... 425
Flowchart Example of Data Reception.................................................................... 426
Receive Operation Example .................................................................................... 427
Flowchart Example of Simultaneous Transmission and Reception ........................ 428
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxix of xl
Figure 18.9 Relationship between Reading RDR4 and RDRF ................................................... 431
Figure 18.10 Transfer Format when Internal Clock of φ/2 is Selected ....................................... 431
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM .............................................................................. 433
Figure 19.2 Example of Waveform Produced by Pulse-Division Type PWM
(Division by 4) ........................................................................................................ 436
Figure 19.3 Waveform Output by PWM .................................................................................... 437
Section 20
Figure 20.1
Figure 20.2
Figure 20.3
Figure 20.4
Figure 20.5
Figure 20.6
Figure 20.7
Figure 20.8
A/D Converter
Block Diagram of A/D Converter ........................................................................... 442
External Trigger Input Timing ................................................................................ 447
Example of A/D Conversion Operation .................................................................. 449
Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Polling by Software) ............... 450
Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Interrupts Used) ...................... 450
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1) .............................................................. 452
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2) .............................................................. 452
Example of Analog Input Circuit ............................................................................ 453
Section 21
Figure 21.1
Figure 21.2
Figure 21.3
Figure 21.4
Figure 21.5
Figure 21.6
Figure 21.7
Figure 21.8
Figure 21.9
LCD Controller/Driver
Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver .............................................................. 456
Handling of LCD Drive Power Supply when Using 1/2 Duty ................................ 466
LCD RAM Map (1/4 Duty)..................................................................................... 468
LCD RAM Map (1/3 Duty)..................................................................................... 469
LCD RAM Map (1/2 Duty)..................................................................................... 469
LCD RAM Map (Static Mode) ............................................................................... 470
Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (A Waveform) ........................................ 471
Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (B Waveform) ........................................ 472
Capacitance Connection when Using 3-V Constant-Voltage
Power Supply Circuit.............................................................................................. 474
Figure 21.10 Connection of External Split Resistor ................................................................... 476
Section 22
Figure 22.1
Figure 22.2
Figure 22.3
Figure 22.4
Figure 22.5
Figure 22.6
Figure 22.7
Figure 22.8
Figure 22.9
I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface 2..................................................................... 480
External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins ................................................................ 481
I2C Bus Formats ...................................................................................................... 495
I2C Bus Timing........................................................................................................ 495
Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) ......................................................... 497
Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) ......................................................... 497
Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (1) .......................................................... 499
Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (2) .......................................................... 500
Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1) ........................................................... 501
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxx of xl
Figure 22.10
Figure 22.11
Figure 22.12
Figure 22.13
Figure 22.14
Figure 22.15
Figure 22.16
Figure 22.17
Figure 22.18
Figure 22.19
Figure 22.20
Figure 22.21
Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2) ......................................................... 502
Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)........................................................... 503
Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)........................................................... 504
Clock Synchronous Serial Transfer Format .......................................................... 504
Transmit Mode Operation Timing......................................................................... 505
Receive Mode Operation Timing .......................................................................... 506
Block Diagram of Noise Canceller........................................................................ 507
Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode....................................................... 508
Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode ........................................................ 509
Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode......................................................... 510
Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode .......................................................... 511
Timing of Bit Synchronous Circuit ....................................................................... 513
Section 23 Power-On Reset Circuit
Figure 23.1 Power-On Reset Circuit........................................................................................... 517
Figure 23.2 Power-On Reset Circuit Operation Timing ............................................................. 518
Section 24
Figure 24.1
Figure 24.2
Figure 24.2
Address Break
Block Diagram of Address Break............................................................................ 519
Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1)..................................................... 523
Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2)..................................................... 524
Section 26
Figure 26.1
Figure 26.2
Figure 26.3
Figure 26.4
Figure 26.5
Figure 26.6
Electrical Characteristics
Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (1) ................................. 548
Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (2) ................................. 549
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (1)................................... 550
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (2)................................... 551
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (3)................................... 552
Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (1).................................................................................................... 553
Figure 26.7 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (2).................................................................................................... 553
Figure 26.8 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (1) ................................. 576
Figure 26.9 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (2) ................................. 576
Figure 26.10 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (1)................................. 577
Figure 26.11 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (2)................................. 578
Figure 26.12 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (1).................................................................................................. 578
Figure 26.13 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (2).................................................................................................. 579
Figure 26.14 Clock Input Timing ............................................................................................... 598
Figure 26.15 RES Low Width Timing........................................................................................ 598
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxi of xl
Figure 26.16
Figure 26.17
Figure 26.18
Figure 26.19
Figure 26.20
Figure 26.21
Figure 26.22
Figure 26.23
Input Timing.......................................................................................................... 598
SCK3 Input Clock Timing .................................................................................... 599
SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clock Synchronous Mode...................................... 599
Clock Input Timing for TCLKA to TCLKC Pins ................................................. 600
I2C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing ................................................................. 600
UD Pin Minimum Transition Width Timing ......................................................... 600
Output Load Condition.......................................................................................... 601
Recommended Resonators .................................................................................... 602
Appendix
Figure B.1 (a) Port 1 Block Diagram (P16) (F-ZTATTM Version) ............................................. 633
Figure B.1 (b) Port 1 Block Diagram (P16) (Masked ROM Version)........................................ 634
Figure B.1 (c) Port 1 Block Diagram (P15 to P12)..................................................................... 634
Figure B.1 (d) Port 1 Block Diagram (P11, P10) ....................................................................... 635
Figure B.2 (a) Port 3 Block Diagram (P37) (F-ZTATTM Version) ............................................. 636
Figure B.2 (b) Port 3 Block Diagram (P37) (Masked ROM Version)........................................ 636
Figure B.2 (c) Port 3 Block Diagram (P36) (F-ZTATTM Version) ............................................. 637
Figure B.2 (d) Port 3 Block Diagram (P36) (Masked ROM Version)........................................ 637
Figure B.2 (e) Port 3 Block Diagram (P32)................................................................................ 638
Figure B.2 (f) Port 3 Block Diagram (P31) ................................................................................ 639
Figure B.2 (g) Port 3 Block Diagram (P30)................................................................................ 640
Figure B.3 (a) Port 4 Block Diagram (P42)................................................................................ 641
Figure B.3 (b) Port 4 Block Diagram (P41)................................................................................ 642
Figure B.3 (c) Port 4 Block Diagram (P40)................................................................................ 643
Figure B.4 Port 5 Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 644
Figure B.5 Port 6 Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 645
Figure B.6 Port 7 Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 645
Figure B.7 Port 8 Block Diagram ............................................................................................... 646
Figure B.8 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (P93)................................................................................ 646
Figure B.8 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (P92)................................................................................ 647
Figure B.8 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (P91, P90)........................................................................ 648
Figure B.9 Port A Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 648
Figure B.10 (a) Port B Block Diagram (PB7 to PB3)................................................................. 649
Figure B.10 (b) Port B Block Diagram (PB2 to PB0) ................................................................ 650
Figure B.11 Port C Block Diagram (PC7 to PC0) ...................................................................... 651
Figure B.12 (a) Port E Block Diagram (PE7) ............................................................................. 651
Figure B.12 (b) Port E Block Diagram (PE6)............................................................................. 652
Figure B.12 (c) Port E Block Diagram (PE5) ............................................................................. 652
Figure B.12 (d) Port E Block Diagram (PE4)............................................................................. 653
Figure B.12 (e) Port E Block Diagram (PE3) ............................................................................. 654
Figure B.12 (f) Port E Block Diagram (PE2) ............................................................................. 655
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxii of xl
Figure B.12 (g) Port E Block Diagram (PE1)............................................................................. 655
Figure B.12 (h) Port E Block Diagram (PE0)............................................................................. 656
Figure B.13 (a) Port F Block Diagram (PF3).............................................................................. 657
Figure B.13 (b) Port F Block Diagram (PF2) ............................................................................. 658
Figure B.13 (c) Port F Block Diagram (PF1).............................................................................. 659
Figure B.13 (d) Port F Block Diagram (PF0) ............................................................................. 660
Figure D.1 Package Dimensions (PLQP0100KB-A).................................................................. 664
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxiii of xl
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxiv of xl
Tables
Section 1 Overview
Table 1.1
Pin Functions ............................................................................................................ 5
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.1
Operation Notation ................................................................................................. 21
Table 2.2
Data Transfer Instructions....................................................................................... 22
Table 2.3
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1) ................................................................... 23
Table 2.3
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2) ................................................................... 24
Table 2.4
Logic Operations Instructions................................................................................. 25
Table 2.5
Shift Instructions..................................................................................................... 25
Table 2.6
Bit Manipulation Instructions ................................................................................. 26
Table 2.7
Branch Instructions ................................................................................................. 28
Table 2.8
System Control Instructions.................................................................................... 29
Table 2.9
Block Data Transfer Instructions ............................................................................ 30
Table 2.10
Addressing Modes .................................................................................................. 32
Table 2.11
Absolute Address Access Ranges ........................................................................... 34
Table 2.12
Effective Address Calculation (1)........................................................................... 36
Table 2.12
Effective Address Calculation (2)........................................................................... 37
Section 3 Exception Handling
Table 3.1
Exception Sources and Vector Address .................................................................. 48
Table 3.2
Interrupt Sources that Cause a Reset....................................................................... 49
Table 3.3
Conditions under which Interrupt Request Flag is Set to 1..................................... 55
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Table 4.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................... 60
Table 4.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities................................. 74
Table 4.3
Interrupt Control States........................................................................................... 77
Table 4.4
Interrupt Response Times (States) .......................................................................... 81
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Table 5.1
Selection of the System Clock Oscillator or On-Chip Oscillator for
the System Clock .................................................................................................... 90
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.1
Operating Frequency and Wait Time.................................................................... 106
Table 6.2
Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and
Interrupt Handling................................................................................................. 112
Table 6.3
Internal State in Each Operating Mode................................................................. 115
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxv of xl
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.1
Setting Programming Modes ................................................................................ 134
Table 7.2
Boot Mode Operation ........................................................................................... 136
Table 7.3
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of
LSI Bit Rate is Possible ........................................................................................ 137
Table 7.4
Reprogram Data Computation Table .................................................................... 142
Table 7.5
Additional-Program Data Computation Table ...................................................... 142
Table 7.6
Programming Time ............................................................................................... 142
Table 7.7
Flash Memory Operating States............................................................................ 147
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
Table 10.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 212
Table 10.2
Interrupt Sources................................................................................................... 224
Section 11 Timer C
Table 11.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 228
Table 11.2
Timer C Operation States ..................................................................................... 234
Section 12 Timer F
Table 12.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 236
Table 12.2
Timer F Operating States ...................................................................................... 247
Section 13 Timer G
Table 13.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 255
Table 13.2
Timer G Operation Modes .................................................................................... 265
Table 13.3
Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation...................................................... 266
Table 13.4
Input Capture Input Signal Input Edges Due to Input Capture
Input Pin Switching, and Conditions for Their Occurrence.................................. 268
Table 13.5
Input Capture Input Signal Input Edges Due to Noise Canceller Function
Switching, and Conditions for Their Occurrence ................................................. 268
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.1
TPU Functions ...................................................................................................... 272
Table 14.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 273
Table 14.3
CCLR1 and CCLR0 (Channels 1 and 2)............................................................... 276
Table 14.4
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1) .............................................................................. 276
Table 14.5
TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2) .............................................................................. 277
Table 14.6
MD1 to MD0 ........................................................................................................ 278
Table 14.7
TIOR_1 (Channel 1) ............................................................................................. 279
Table 14.8
TIOR_2 (Channel 2) ............................................................................................. 280
Table 14.9
TIOR_1 (Channel 1) ............................................................................................. 281
Table 14.10
TIOR_2 (Channel 2) ......................................................................................... 282
Table 14.11
Counter Combination in Operation with Cascaded Connection ....................... 298
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxvi of xl
Table 14.12
Table 14.13
PWM Output Registers and Output Pins .......................................................... 301
TPU Interrupts .................................................................................................. 305
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
Table 15.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 320
Table 15.2
Examples of Event Counter PWM Operation....................................................... 331
Table 15.3
Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter................................................ 332
Table 15.4
Maximum Clock Frequency ................................................................................. 333
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.1
SCI3 Channel Configuration................................................................................. 347
Table 17.2
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 351
Table 17.3
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (1)....................................................................................................... 362
Table 17.3
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (2)....................................................................................................... 363
Table 17.3
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (3)....................................................................................................... 364
Table 17.3
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (4)....................................................................................................... 365
Table 17.4
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (1)....................................................................................................... 366
Table 17.4
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (2)....................................................................................................... 367
Table 17.4
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (3)....................................................................................................... 368
Table 17.4
Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (4)....................................................................................................... 369
Table 17.5
Correspondence between n and Clock .................................................................. 369
Table 17.6
Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode) .......................... 370
Table 17.7
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (1) ................... 371
Table 17.7
BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (2) ................... 372
Table 17.8
Correspondence between n and Clock .................................................................. 373
Table 17.9
Data Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode) ..................................................... 380
Table 17.10
SMR Settings and Corresponding Data Transfer Formats ................................ 381
Table 17.11
SMR and SCR Settings and Clock Source Selection ........................................ 382
Table 17.12
SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling .................................................. 387
Table 17.13
IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Bit Settings......................................................................... 403
Table 17.14
SCI3 Interrupt Requests .................................................................................... 404
Table 17.15
Transmit/Receive Interrupts.............................................................................. 405
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxvii of xl
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Table 18.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 414
Table 18.2
Prescaler Division Ratio and Transfer Clock Cycle (Internal Clock) ................... 420
Table 18.3
SCI4 Interrupt Sources.......................................................................................... 429
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
Table 19.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 434
Table 19.2
Relationship between PWCR, PWDR and Output Waveform.............................. 438
Table 19.3
PWM Operating States ......................................................................................... 439
Section 20 A/D Converter
Table 20.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 443
Table 20.2
Operating States of A/D Converter....................................................................... 447
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Table 21.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 457
Table 21.2
Duty Cycle and Common Function Selection....................................................... 458
Table 21.3
Segment Driver Selection ..................................................................................... 459
Table 21.4
Frame Frequency Selection................................................................................... 461
Table 21.5
Output Levels........................................................................................................ 473
Table 21.6
Power-Down Modes and Display Operation ........................................................ 475
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Table 22.1
Pin Configuration.................................................................................................. 481
Table 22.2
Transfer Rate ........................................................................................................ 484
Table 22.3
Interrupt Requests ................................................................................................. 512
Table 22.4
Time for Monitoring SCL..................................................................................... 513
Section 24 Address Break
Table 24.1
Access and Data Bus Used ................................................................................... 521
Table 24.2
Operating States of Address Break ....................................................................... 524
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Table 26.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................................................................. 547
Table 26.2
DC Characteristics ................................................................................................ 554
Table 26.3
Control Signal Timing .......................................................................................... 562
Table 26.4
Serial Interface Timing ......................................................................................... 566
Table 26.5
I2C Bus Interface Timing ...................................................................................... 567
Table 26.6
A/D Converter Characteristics.............................................................................. 568
Table 26.7
LCD Characteristics.............................................................................................. 570
Table 26.8
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics ............................................................... 571
Table 26.9
Watchdog Timer Characteristics........................................................................... 572
Table 26.10
Flash Memory Characteristics .......................................................................... 573
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxviii of xl
Table 26.11
Table 26.12
Table 26.13
Table 26.14
Table 26.15
Table 26.16
Table 26.17
Table 26.18
Table 26.19
Appendix
Table A.1
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.3
Table A.4
Table A.5
Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................. 575
DC Characteristics ............................................................................................ 580
Control Signal Timing ...................................................................................... 588
Serial Interface Timing ..................................................................................... 592
I2C Bus Interface Timing .................................................................................. 593
A/D Converter Characteristics .......................................................................... 594
LCD Characteristics.......................................................................................... 596
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics............................................................ 597
Watchdog Timer Characteristics....................................................................... 597
Instruction Set ....................................................................................................... 605
Operation Code Map (1) ....................................................................................... 618
Operation Code Map (2) ....................................................................................... 619
Operation Code Map (3) ....................................................................................... 620
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction .................................................................. 622
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction .................................................................. 623
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes .......................................... 632
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xxxix of xl
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page xl of xl
Section 1 Overview
Section 1 Overview
1.1
Features
• High-speed H8/300H central processing unit with an internal 16-bit architecture
Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPU on an object level
Sixteen 16-bit general registers
62 basic instructions
• Various peripheral functions
RTC (can be used as a free-running counter)
Asynchronous event counter (AEC)
LCD controller/driver
Timer C
Timer F
Timer G
16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
14-bit PWM
Watchdog timer
SCI (Asynchronous or clock synchronous serial communications interface)
2
2
I C bus interface (conforms to the I C bus interface format that is advocated by Philips
Electronics)
10-bit A/D converter
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 1 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
• On-chip memory
Product Classification
Model
ROM
RAM
Flash memory version
(F-ZTATTM version)
H8/38099F
HD64F38099
128 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
Masked ROM version
H8/38099
HD64338099
128 Kbytes
4 Kbytes
H8/38098
HD64338098
96 Kbytes
2 Kbytes
Note: F-ZTAT
TM
is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
• General I/O ports
I/O pins: 75 I/O pins, including 4 large current ports (IOL = 15 mA, @VOL = 1.0 V)
Input-only pins: 8 input pins
• Supports various power-down states
• Compact package
Package
Code
Body Size
P-LQFP-100
PLQP100KB-A 14 × 14 mm
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 2 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Pitch
0.5 mm
Remarks
Section 1 Overview
Internal Block Diagram
X1
X2
OSC1
OSC2
Vcc
AVcc
Vss
Vss/AVss
RES
TEST/ADTRG
NMI *2
Subclock pulse generator
System clock pulse generator
H8/300H CPU
P60/SEG9
P61/SEG10
P62/SEG11
P63/SEG12
P64/SEG13
P65/SEG14
P66/SEG15
P67/SEG16
P70/SEG17
P71/SEG18
P72/SEG19
P73/SEG20
P74/SEG21
P75/SEG22
P76/SEG23
P77/SEG24
Timer pulse unit
Asynchronous
event counter
Timer C
Timer F
Timer G
Port 9
P90/PWM1
P91/PWM2
P92/IRQ4/PWM3
P93/PWM4
14-bit PWM1
14-bit PWM2
PA0/COM1
PA1/COM2
PA2/COM3
PA3/COM4
14-bit PWM3
14-bit PWM4
Port C
Port 8
Realtime Clock
Port A
Port 5
Watchdog timer
Port B
V1
V2
V3
C1
C2
LCD power
supply
P50/WKP0/SEG1
P51/WKP1/SEG2
P52/WKP2/SEG3
P53/WKP3/SEG4
P54/WKP4/SEG5
P55/WKP5/SEG6
P56/WKP6/SEG7
P57/WKP7/SEG8
Power-on reset circuit
P80/SEG25
P81/SEG26
P82/SEG27
P83/SEG28
P84/SEG29
P85/SEG30
P86/SEG31
P87/SEG32
PC0/SEG33
PC1/SEG34
PC2/SEG35
PC3/SEG36
PC4/SEG37
PC5/SEG38
PC6/SEG39
PC7/SEG40
LCD controller/
driver
10-bit A/D converter
I2C bus interface
SCI3_1/IrDA
SCI3_2
SCI3_3
Port 6
P40/SCK31/TMIF
P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH
Port 4
IRQAEC
RAM
Port E
Port 1
P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT
P31/RXD32/SDA
P32/TXD32/SCL
1 2
P36/SI4 * *
P37/SO4 *1*2
ROM
SCI4*1
Address break
Port F
P10/AEVH
P11/AEVL
P12/TIOCA1/TCLKA
P13/TIOCB1/TCLKB
P14/TIOCA2/TCLKC
P15/TIOCB2
P16/SCK4 *1*2
Port 3
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
Port 7
1.2
PB0/AN0/IRQ0
PB1/AN1/IRQ1
PB2/AN2/IRQ3
PB3/AN3
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
PE0/SCK33(/IRQ3)
PE1/RXD33
PE2/TXD33
PE3(/SCK32/IRQ1)
PE4(/RXD32)
PE5(/TXD32)
PE6/UD
PE7/TMIC(/IRQ0)
PF0/TMIG
PF1(/SCK31/IRQ4)
PF2(/RXD31/IrRXD)
PF3(/TXD31/IrTXD)
: Large current port (15 mA)
Notes: 1. The SCI4 pins, such as SCK4, SI4, and SO4, are supported only by the F-ZTAT version.
2. The SCK4, SI4, SO4, and NMI pins are not available when the E8 or on-chip
emulator debugger is used. These pins are not available as ports.
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8/38099 Group
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 3 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
Pin Assignment
51
52
54
53
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
76
50
77
49
78
48
79
47
80
46
81
45
82
44
83
43
84
42
85
41
86
40
39
87
PLQP0100KB-A
(Top view)
88
89
38
37
24
25
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
P40/SCK31/TMIF
C2
C1
V3
V2
V1 (also used for 3V booster)
PA3/COM4
PA2/COM3
PA1/COM2
PA0/COM1
PC7/SEG40
PC6/SEG39
PC5/SEG38
PC4/SEG37
PC3/SEG36
PC2/SEG35
PC1/SEG34
PC0/SEG33
P87/SEG32
P86/SEG31
P85/SEG30
P84/SEG29
P83/SEG28
P82/SEG27
P81/SEG26
P50/WKP0/SEG1
P51/WKP1/SEG2
P52/WKP2/SEG3
P53/WKP3/SEG4
P54/WKP4/SEG5
P55/WKP5/SEG6
P56/WKP6/SEG7
P57/WKP7/SEG8
P60/SEG9
P61/SEG10
P62/SEG11
P63/SEG12
P64/SEG13
P65/SEG14
P66/SEG15
P67/SEG16
P70/SEG17
P71/SEG18
P72/SEG19
P73/SEG20
P74/SEG21
P75/SEG22
P76/SEG23
P77/SEG24
P80/SEG25
14
26
13
27
100
12
28
99
11
29
98
9
10
30
97
8
31
96
7
32
95
6
33
94
5
34
93
4
35
92
3
36
91
2
90
1
IRQAEC
P10/AEVH
P11/AEVL
P12/TIOCA1/TCLKA
P13/TIOCB1/TCLKB
P14/TIOCA2/TCLKC
P15/TIOCB2
NMI
X1
X2
RES
OSC1
Vss
OSC2
Vcc
P16/SCK4
P37/SO4
P36/SI4
P32/TXD32/SCL
P31/RXD32/SDA
P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT
P90/PWM1
P91/PWM2
P92/IRQ4/PWM3
P93/PWM4
75
AVcc
PB0/AN0/IRQ0
PB1/AN1/IRQ1
PB2/AN2/IRQ3
PB3/AN3
PB4/AN4
PB5/AN5
PB6/AN6
PB7/AN7
Vss/AVss
TEST/ADTRG
PE7/TMIC(/IRQ0)
PE6/UD
PE5(/TXD32)
PE4(/RXD32)
PE3(/SCK32/IRQ1)
PE2/TXD33
PE1/RXD33
PE0/SCK33(/IRQ3)
PF3(/TXD31/IrTXD)
PF2(/RXD31/IrRXD)
PF1(/SCK31/IRQ4)
PF0/TMIG
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH
P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL
1.3
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignment of H8/38099 Group (PLQP0100KB-A)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 4 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
1.4
Pin Functions
Table 1.1
Pin Functions
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Functions
Power
supply pins
Vcc
90
Input
Power supply pin. Connect this pin to the system power
supply.
Vss
88, 66
(= AVss)
Input
Ground pins. Connect these pins to the system power
supply (0 V).
AVcc
75
Input
Analog power supply pin for the A/D converter. When the
A/D converter is not used, connect this pin to the system
power supply.
AVss
66
(= Vss)
Input
Ground pin for the A/D converter. Connect this pin to the
system power supply (0 V).
Clock pins
V1 to V3
45 to 47
Input
Power supply pins for the LCD controller/driver.
C1
48
Input
C2
49
Input
Capacitance pins for stepping up the LCD drive power
supply.
OSC1
87
Input
OSC2
89
Output
These pins connect crystal or ceramic resonator for the
system clock, or can be used to input an external clock.
See section 5, Clock Pulse Generator, for a connection.
X1
84
Input
X2
85
Output
CLKOUT 96
These pins connect a 32.768- or 38.4-kHz crystal
resonator for the subclock. See section 5, Clock Pulse
Generator, for a connection.
Output Pin for supplying the system clock to external devices
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 5 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Functions
System
control
RES
86
Input
Reset pin. The power-on reset circuit is incorporated.
When externally driven low, the chip is reset.
TEST
65
Input
Test pin. Also used as the ADTRG pin. When this pin is
not used as the ADTRG pin, users cannot use this pin.
Connect this pin to Vss. When this pin is used as the
ADTRG pin, see section 20.4.2, External Trigger Input
Timing.
NMI
83
Input
NMI interrupt request pin.
Interrupt
pins
Non-maskable interrupt request input pin.
IRQ0
74
(IRQ0)
64
IRQ1
73
(IRQ1)
60
IRQ3
72
(IRQ3)
57
IRQ4
99
(IRQ4)
54
IRQAEC
76
Input
External interrupt request input pins.
Sensing of rising or falling edges selectable.
Input
Input
Input
Input
Interrupt input pin for the asynchronous event counter.
This pin enables the asynchronous event input. This pin
turns on/off the on-chip oscillator for the system clock
during a reset.
WKP0 to
WKP7
1 to 8
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 6 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Input
Wakeup interrupt request input pins.
Sensing of rising or falling edges selectable.
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Functions
16-bit timer
pulse unit
(TPU)
TIOCA1
79
I/O
Pin for the TGR1A input capture input or output compare
output, or PWM output.
TIOCB1
80
I/O
Pin for the TGR1B input capture input or output compare
output, or PWM output.
TIOCA2
81
I/O
Pin for the TGR2A input capture input or output compare
output, or PWM output.
TIOCB2
82
I/O
Pin for the TGR2B input capture input or output compare
output, or PWM output.
TCLKA
79
Input
External clock input pins.
TCLKB
80
Input
TCLKC
81
Input
TMIC
64
Input
Event input pin for the timer C counter (TCC).
UD
63
Input
Selects whether the TCC counts up or down. TCC counts
up when the UD pin input is low, and counts down when
the input is high.
TMIF
50
Input
Event input pin for input to the timer F counter.
TMOFL
51
Output Output pin for waveforms generated by the timer FL output
compare function.
TMOFH
52
Output Output pin for waveforms generated by the timer FH
output compare function.
TMIG
53
Input
Pin for the timer G input capture input
AsynchAEVL
ronous event
counter
AEVH
(AEC)
78
Input
Event input pins for input to the asynchronous event
counter.
77
Input
RTC
96
Output Divided clock output pin for the RTC.
Timer C
Timer F
Timer G
TMOW
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 7 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
14-bit PWM
PWM1
97
PWM2
98
Output Output pins for waveforms generated by the 14-bit PWM in
PWM channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.
Output
PWM3
99
Output
PWM4
100
Output
Serial
SCK4
communications
interface 4
SI4
(SCI4)
(F-ZTAT
version only) SO4
91
I/O
Transfer clock pin for SCI4 data transmission/reception.
When the E8 or on-chip emulator debugger is used, this
pin is not available.
93
Input
SCI4 data input pin. When the E8 or on-chip emulator
debugger is used, this pin is not available.
92
Output SCI4 data output pin. When the E8 or on-chip emulator
debugger is used, this pin is not available.
Serial
communications
interface 3
(SCI3)
SCK31
50
I/O
SCI3_1 clock I/O pins.
(SCK31)
54
RXD31/IrRXD
51
Input
SCI3_1 data input pins or data input pins for the IrDA
format.
(RXD31/IrRXD) 55
TXD31/IrTXD
52
(TXD31/IrTXD) 56
Functions
Output SCI3_1 data output pins or data output pins for the IrDA
format.
SCK32
96
(SCK32)
60
RXD32
95
(RXD32)
61
TXD32
94
(TXD32)
62
SCK33
57
I/O
SCI3_3 clock I/O pin.
RXD33
58
Input
SCI3_3 data input pin.
TXD33
59
Output SCI3_3 data output pin.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 8 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
I/O
SCI3_2 clock I/O pins.
Input
SCI3_2 data input pins.
Output SCI3_2 data output pins.
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Functions
A/D
converter
AN0 to AN7
74 to 67
Input
Analog data input pins for the A/D converter.
ADTRG
65
Input
External trigger input pin for the A/D converter.
SDA
95
I/O
IIC data I/O pin.
SCL
94
I/O
IIC clock I/O pin.
COM1 to
COM4
41 to 44
Output LCD common output pins.
SEG1 to
SEG8
1 to 8
Output LCD segment output pins.
SEG9 to
SEG16
9 to 16
Output
SEG17 to
SEG24
17 to 24
Output
SEG25 to
SEG32
25 to 32
Output
SEG33 to
SEG40
33 to 40
Output
P10 to P16
77 to 82, 91
I/O
7-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 1 (PCR1).
P30 to P32,
P36, P37
96 to 92
I/O
5-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 3 (PCR3).
P40 to P42
50 to 52
I/O
3-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 4 (PCR4).
P50 to P57
1 to 8
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 5 (PCR5).
P60 to P67
9 to 16
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 6 (PCR6).
2
I C bus
interface 2
(IIC2)
LCD
controller/
driver
I/O ports
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 9 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 1 Overview
Type
Symbol
Pin No.
I/O
Functions
I/O ports
P70 to P77
17 to 24
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 7 (PCR7).
P80 to P87
25 to 32
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 8 (PCR8).
P90 to P93
97 to 100
I/O
4-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register 9 (PCR9).
PA0 to PA3
41 to 44
I/O
4-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register A (PCRA).
PB0 to PB7
74 to 67
Input
8-bit input-only pins
PC0 to PC7
33 to 40
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register C (PCRC).
PE0 to PE7
57 to 64
I/O
8-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register E (PCRE).
PF0 to PF3
53 to 56
I/O
4-bit I/O pins. Input or output can be designated for each
bit by means of the port control register F (PCRF).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 10 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Section 2 CPU
This LSI has an H8/300H CPU with an internal 32-bit architecture that is upward-compatible with
the H8/300 CPU. The H8/300H can handle a 16-Mbyte linear address space and is ideal for
realtime control.
• Upward-compatible with H8/300 CPUs
Can execute H8/300 CPUs object programs
Additional eight 16-bit extended registers
32-bit transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions are added
Signed multiply and divide instructions are added.
• General-register architecture
Sixteen 16-bit general registers also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers and eight 16-bit registers,
or eight 32-bit registers
• Sixty-two basic instructions
8/16/32-bit data transfer and arithmetic and logic instructions
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• Eight addressing modes
Register direct [Rn]
Register indirect [@ERn]
Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)]
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @–ERn]
Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24]
Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte linear address space
• High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions execute in two or four states
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract : 2 state
8 × 8-bit register-register multiply
: 14 states
16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide
: 14 states
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply
: 22 states
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide
: 22 states
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 11 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
• Two types of CPU operating modes
Normal mode
Advanced mode
Note: Normal mode cannot be used in this LSI.
• Power-down state
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 12 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.1
Address Space and Memory Map
The address space of this LSI is 16 Mbytes, which includes the program area and the data area.
Figure 2.1 shows the memory map.
HD64F38099
(Flash memory version)
H'000000
H'0000DF
H'0000E0
Interrupt vector
HD64338098
(Masked ROM version)
HD64338099
(Masked ROM version)
H'000000
H'0000DF
H'0000E0
On-chip ROM
(128 Kbytes)
Interrupt vector
H'000000
H'0000DF
H'0000E0
Interrupt vector
On-chip ROM
(96 Kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(128 Kbytes)
H'017FFF
H'018000
H'01FFFF
H'020000
H'01FFFF
H'020000
Not used
Not used
Not used
H'FFCF7F
H'FFCF80
H'FFD37F
H'FFD380
On-chip RAM (1)
(1 Kbyte)
H'FFCF7F
H'FFCF80
H'FFD37F
H'FFD380
Not used
Not used
Internal I/O registers (1)
H'FFF35F
H'FFF360
H'FFF373
H'FFF374
H'FFF37F
H'FFF380
Not used
LCDRAM
(20 bytes)
Not used
Internal I/O registers (1)
H'FFF09F
H'FFF0A0
H'FFF35F
H'FFF360
H'FFF373
H'FFF374
H'FFF37F
H'FFF380
Not used
LCDRAM
(20 bytes)
Not used
On-chip RAM (2)
(3 Kbytes)
On-chip RAM (2)
(3 Kbytes)
H'FFFF7F
H'FFFF80
H'FFFF7F
H'FFFF80
Internal I/O registers (2)
H'FFFFFF
H'FFEFDF
H'FFEFE0
H'FFEFDF
H'FFEFE0
H'FFEFDF
H'FFEFE0
H'FFF09F
H'FFF0A0
On-chip RAM (1)
(1 Kbyte)
Internal I/O registers (1)
H'FFF09F
H'FFF0A0
H'FFF35F
H'FFF360
H'FFF373
H'FFF374
Not used
LCDRAM
(20 bytes)
Not used
H'FFF77F
H'FFF780
On-chip RAM
(2 Kbytes)
H'FFFF7F
H'FFFF80
Internal I/O registers (2)
H'FFFFFF
Internal I/O registers (2)
H'FFFFFF
Figure 2.1 Memory Map
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 13 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.2
Register Configuration
The H8/300H CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.2. There are two types of registers;
general registers and control registers. The control registers are a 24-bit program counter (PC), and
an 8-bit condition-code register (CCR).
General Registers (ERn)
15
0 7
0 7
0
ER0
E0
R0H
R0L
ER1
E1
R1H
R1L
ER2
E2
R2H
R2L
ER3
E3
R3H
R3L
ER4
E4
R4H
R4L
ER5
E5
R5H
R5L
ER6
E6
R6H
R6L
ER7
E7
R7H
R7L
(SP)
Control Registers (CR)
23
0
PC
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCR I UI H U N Z V C
[Legend]
SP:
PC:
CCR:
I:
UI:
Stack pointer
Program counter
Condition-code register
Interrupt mask bit
User bit
H:
U:
N:
Z:
V:
C:
Half-carry flag
User bit
Negative flag
Zero flag
Overflow flag
Carry flag
Figure 2.2 CPU Registers
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 14 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.2.1
General Registers
The H8/300H CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally
identical and can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is
used as a data register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. Figure 2.3 illustrates
the usage of the general registers. When the general registers are used as 32-bit registers or address
registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7).
The ER registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R
(R0 to R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit
registers. The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers.
The R registers divide into 8-bit registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L
to R7L). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit
registers.
The usage of each register can be selected independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers
• 16-bit registers
• 8-bit registers
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.3 Usage of General Registers
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 15 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
General register ER7 has the function of the stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.4 shows the
relationship between the stack pointer and the stack area.
Empty area
SP (ER7)
Stack area
Figure 2.4 Relationship between Stack Pointer and Stack Area
2.2.2
Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0). The PC is initialized when the
start address is loaded by the vector address generated during reset exception-handling sequence.
2.2.3
Condition-Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags. The I bit is initialized to 1
by reset exception-handling sequence, but other bits are not initialized.
Some instructions leave flag bits unchanged. Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the
LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching
conditions for conditional branch (Bcc) instructions.
For the action of each instruction on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instruction List.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 16 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
I
1
R/W
Interrupt Mask Bit
Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. NMI is
accepted regardless of the I bit setting. The I bit is set
to 1 at the start of an exception-handling sequence.
6
UI
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
5
H
Undefined R/W
Half-Carry Flag
When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B,
or NEG.B instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or
NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if
there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.L, SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L
instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a
carry or borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
4
U
Undefined R/W
User Bit
Can be written and read by software using the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions.
3
N
Undefined R/W
Negative Flag
Stores the value of the most significant bit of data as a
sign bit.
2
Z
Undefined R/W
Zero Flag
Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to
indicate non-zero data.
1
V
Undefined R/W
Overflow Flag
Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and
cleared to 0 at other times.
0
C
Undefined R/W
Carry Flag
Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise. Used by:
•
Add instructions, to indicate a carry
•
Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
•
Shift and rotate instructions, to indicate a carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit
manipulation instructions.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 17 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.3
Data Formats
The H8/300H CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit
(longword) data. Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2,
…, 7) of byte operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two
digits of 4-bit BCD data.
2.3.1
General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.5 shows the data formats in general registers.
Data Type
General Register
Data Format
7
RnH
1-bit data
0
Don't care
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
7
1-bit data
RnL
4-bit BCD data
RnH
4-bit BCD data
RnL
Byte data
RnH
Don't care
7
4 3
Upper
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
Lower
Don't care
7
Don't care
7
4 3
Upper
0
Don't care
MSB
LSB
7
Byte data
RnL
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (1)
REJ09B0309-0200
0
Don't care
MSB
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 18 of 692
0
Lower
LSB
Section 2 CPU
Data Type
General
Register
Word data
Rn
Data Format
15
Word data
MSB
En
15
MSB
Longword
data
0
LSB
0
LSB
ERn
31
16 15
0
MSB
LSB
[Legend]
ERn: General register ER
En:
General register E
Rn:
General register R
RnH: General register RH
RnL: General register RL
MSB: Most significant bit
LSB: Least significant bit
Figure 2.5 General Register Data Formats (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 19 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.3.2
Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.6 shows the data formats in memory. The H8/300H CPU can access word data and
longword data in memory, however word or longword data must begin at an even address. If an
attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address, an address error does not
occur, however the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so access begins the
preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack area, the operand size should be
word or longword.
Data Type
Address
Data Format
7
1-bit data
Address L
7
Byte data
Address L
MSB
Word data
Address 2M
MSB
0
6
5
4
3
2
Address 2N
0
LSB
LSB
Address 2M+1
Longword data
1
MSB
Address 2N+1
Address 2N+2
Address 2N+3
Figure 2.6 Memory Data Formats
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 20 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
LSB
Section 2 CPU
2.4
Instruction Set
2.4.1
Table of Instructions Classified by Function
The H8/300H CPU has 62 instructions. Tables 2.2 to 2.9 summarize the instructions in each
functional category. The notation used in tables 2.2 to 2.9 is defined in table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Operation Notation
Symbol
Description
Rd
General register (destination)*
Rs
General register (source)*
Rn
General register*
ERn
General register (32-bit register or address register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
#IMM
Immediate data
disp
Displacement
+
Addition
–
Subtraction
×
Multiplication
÷
Division
∧
Logical AND
∨
Logical OR
⊕
Logical XOR
→
Move
¬
NOT (logical complement)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 21 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Symbol
Description
:3/:8/:16/:24
3-, 8-, 16-, or 24-bit length
Note:
*
General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers/address register (ER0 to ER7).
Table 2.2
Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
MOV
B/W/L
(EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general register
and memory, or moves immediate data to a general register.
MOVFPE
B
(EAs) → Rd
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOVTPE
B
Rs → (EAs)
Cannot be used in this LSI.
POP
W/L
@SP+ → Rn
Pops a general register from the stack. POP.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W @SP+, Rn. POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn.
PUSH
W/L
Rn → @–SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack. PUSH.W Rn is identical to
MOV.W Rn, @–SP. PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @–SP.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 22 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (1)
Instruction
Size*
Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L
Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers, or on
immediate data and data in a general register (immediate byte data
cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general register. Use the
SUBX or ADD instruction.)
ADDX
SUBX
B
Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two general
registers, or on immediate data and data in a general register.
INC
DEC
B/W/L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte operands
can be incremented or decremented by 1 only.)
ADDS
SUBS
L
Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit register.
DAA
DAS
B
Rd (decimal adjust) → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general register by
referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data.
MULXU
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers: either
8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
MULXS
B/W
Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers: either 8
bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits.
DIVXU
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers: either 16
bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits →
16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 23 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.3
Arithmetic Operations Instructions (2)
Instruction
Size*
Function
DIVXS
B/W
Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either 16 bits
÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷ 16 bits → 16-bit
quotient and 16-bit remainder.
CMP
B/W/L
Rd – Rs, Rd – #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general
register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to the
result.
NEG
B/W/L
0 – Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in a
general register.
EXTU
W/L
Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding with zeros on the
left.
EXTS
W/L
Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the lower 16
bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending the sign bit.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 24 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.4
Logic Operations Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
AND
B/W/L
Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
OR
B/W/L
Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and another
general register or immediate data.
XOR
B/W/L
Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data.
NOT
B/W/L
¬ (Rd) → (Rd)
Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general register
contents.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.5
Shift Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents.
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L
Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents.
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents.
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L
Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 25 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.6
Bit Manipulation Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
BSET
B
1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 1. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BCLR
B
0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to 0. The
bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of
a general register.
BNOT
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand. The bit
number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register.
BTST
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand and sets
or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is specified by 3-bit
immediate data or the lower three bits of a general register.
BAND
B
C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIAND
B
C ∧ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BOR
B
C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIOR
B
C ∨ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general register
or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BXOR
B
C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
BIXOR
B
C ⊕ ¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
XORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 26 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Instruction
Size*
Function
BLD
B
(<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to the
carry flag.
BILD
B
¬ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
BST
B
C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand.
BIST
B
¬ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 27 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.7
Branch Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
Bcc*

Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true. The
branching conditions are listed below.
Mnemonic
Description
Condition
BRA(BT)
Always (true)
Always
BRN(BF)
Never (false)
Never
BHI
High
C∨Z=0
BLS
Low or same
C∨Z=1
BCC(BHS)
Carry clear
(high or same)
C=0
BCS(BLO)
Carry set (low)
C=1
BNE
Not equal
Z=0
BEQ
Equal
Z=1
BVC
Overflow clear
V=0
BVS
Overflow set
V=1
BPL
Plus
N=0
BMI
Minus
N=1
BGE
Greater or equal
N⊕V=0
BLT
Less than
N⊕V=1
BGT
Greater than
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE
Less or equal
Z∨(N ⊕ V) = 1
JMP

Branches unconditionally to a specified address.
BSR

Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
JSR

Branches to a subroutine at a specified address.
RTS

Returns from a subroutine
Note:
*
Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 28 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.8
System Control Instructions
Instruction
Size*
Function
RTE

Returns from an exception-handling routine.
SLEEP

Causes a transition to a power-down state.
LDC
B/W
(EAs) → CCR
Moves the source operand contents to the CCR. The CCR size is one
byte, but in transfer from memory, data is read by word access.
STC
B/W
CCR → (EAd)
Transfers the CCR contents to a destination location. The condition
code register size is one byte, but in transfer to memory, data is written
by word access.
ANDC
B
CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR
Logically ANDs the CCR with immediate data.
ORC
B
CCR ∨ #IMM → CCR
Logically ORs the CCR with immediate data.
XORC
B
CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR
Logically XORs the CCR with immediate data.
NOP

PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter.
Note:
*
Refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 29 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.9
Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction
Size
Function
EEPMOV.B

if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4L–1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W

if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+,
R4–1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block. Starting from the address set in ER5, transfers
data for the number of bytes set in R4L or R4 to the address location set
in ER6.
Execution of the next instruction begins as soon as the transfer is
completed.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 30 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.4.2
Basic Instruction Formats
H8/300H CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an
operation field (op), a register field (r), an effective address extension (EA), and a condition field
(cc).
Figure 2.7 shows examples of instruction formats.
(1)
Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out
on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some
instructions have two operation fields.
(2)
Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, and data registers by 3 bits or
4 bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
(3)
Effective Address Extension
8, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement. A24-bit
address or displacement is treated as a 32-bit data in which the first 8 bits are 0 (H'00).
(4)
Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
(1) Operation field only
op
NOP, RTS, etc.
(2) Operation field and register fields
op
rm
rn
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
op
rn
rm
MOV.B @(d:16, Rn), Rm
EA(disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op
cc
EA(disp)
BRA d:8
Figure 2.7 Instruction Formats
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 31 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.5
Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.5.1
Addressing Modes
The H8/300H CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.10. Each instruction uses
a subset of these addressing modes. Addressing modes that can be used differ depending on the
instruction. For details, refer to appendix A.4, Combinations of Instructions and Addressing
Modes.
Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and immediate modes. Data transfer
instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter relative and memory indirect.
Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or the absolute addressing mode
(@aa:8) to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and BTST instructions)
or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.10 Addressing Modes
No.
Addressing Mode
Symbol
1
Register direct
Rn
2
Register indirect
@ERn
3
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn)/@(d:24,ERn)
4
Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@–ERn
5
Absolute address
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7
Program-counter relative
@(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8
Memory indirect
@@aa:8
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 32 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
(1)
Register DirectRn
The register field of the instruction specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing the
operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to E7
can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as 32-bit registers.
(2)
Register Indirect@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn), the lower 24 bits of
which contain the address of the operand on memory.
(3)
Register Indirect with Displacement@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:24, ERn)
A 16-bit or 24-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the lower 24 bits of the sum the address of a
memory operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
(4)
Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement@ERn+ or @-ERn
• Register indirect with post-increment@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) the lower 24 bits
of which contains the address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is
added to the address register contents (32 bits) and the sum is stored in the address register.
The value added is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word
or longword access, the register value should be even.
• Register indirect with pre-decrement@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the lower 24 bits of the result is the address of a memory operand.
The result is also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for
word access, or 4 for longword access. For the word or longword access, the register value
should be even.
(5)
Absolute Address@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24)
For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 16 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF). For a 16-bit
absolute address the upper 8 bits are a sign extension. A 24-bit absolute address can access the
entire address space.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 33 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.11 shows the access ranges of absolute addresses.
Table 2.11 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address
Access Range
8 bits (@aa:8)
H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
(16776960 to 16777215)
16 bits (@aa:16)
H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to H'FFFFFF
(0 to 32767, 16744448 to 16777215)
24 bits (@aa:24)
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
(0 to 16777215)
(6)
Immediate#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number.
(7)
Program-Counter Relative@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the BSR instruction. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in the
instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address. The
PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next instruction,
so the possible branching range is –126 to +128 bytes (–63 to +64 words) or –32766 to +32768
bytes (–16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should be an
even number.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 34 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
(8)
Memory Indirect@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The memory operand is accessed in words, generating a 16-bit branch address. Figure 2.8 shows
how to specify branch address for in memory indirect mode. The upper bits of the absolute address
are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255 (H'0000 to H'00FF).
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area.
Specified
by @aa:8
Branch address
Figure 2.8 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 35 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.5.2
Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.12 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode.
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (1)
No
1
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
op
2
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Register direct(Rn)
rm
Operand is general register contents.
rn
Register indirect(@ERn)
0
31
23
0
23
0
23
0
23
0
General register contents
op
3
r
Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:24,ERn)
0
31
General register contents
op
r
disp
0
31
Sign extension
4
Register indirect with post-increment or
pre-decrement
•Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
op
31
0
General register contents
r
•Register indirect with pre-decrement @-ERn
disp
1, 2, or 4
31
0
General register contents
op
r
1, 2, or 4
The value to be added or subtracted is 1 when the
operand is byte size, 2 for word size, and 4 for
longword size.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 36 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Table 2.12 Effective Address Calculation (2)
No
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Format
Effective Address Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
Absolute address
@aa:8
8 7
23
op
abs
0
H'FFFF
@aa:16
23
op
abs
16 15
0
Sign extension
@aa:24
op
0
23
abs
6
Immediate
#xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op
7
Operand is immediate data.
IMM
23
Program-counter relative
0
PC contents
@(d:8,PC)^@(d:16,PC)
op
disp
23
0
Sign
extension
8
disp
23
0
Memory indirect @@aa:8
23
op
abs
8 7
0
abs
H'0000
15
0
Memory contents
[Legend]
r, rm,rn :
op :
disp :
IMM :
abs :
23
16 15
0
H'00
Register field
Operation field
Displacement
Immediate data
Absolute address
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 37 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.6
Basic Bus Cycle
CPU operation is synchronized by a system clock (φ) or a subclock (φSUB). The period from a rising
edge of φ or φSUB to the next rising edge is called one state. A bus cycle consists of two states or
three states. The cycle differs depending on whether access is to on-chip memory or to on-chip
peripheral modules.
2.6.1
Access to On-Chip Memory (RAM, ROM)
Access to on-chip memory takes place in two states. The data bus width is 16 bits, allowing access
in byte or word size. Figure 2.9 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
φor φ SUB
Internal address bus
Address
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.9 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 38 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.6.2
On-Chip Peripheral Modules
On-chip peripheral modules are accessed in two states or three states. The data bus width is 8 bits
or 16 bits depending on the register. For description on the data bus width and number of
accessing states of each register, refer to section 25.1, Register Addresses (Address Order).
Registers with 16-bit data bus width can be accessed by word size only. Registers with 8-bit data
bus width can be accessed by byte or word size. When a register with 8-bit data bus width is
accessed by word size, a bus cycle occurs twice. In two-state access, the operation timing is the
same as that for on-chip memory.
Figure 2.10 shows the operation timing in the case of three-state access to an on-chip peripheral
module.
Bus cycle
T1 state
T2 state
T3 state
φ or φ SUB
Internal
address bus
Address
Internal
read signal
Internal
data bus
(read access)
Read data
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus
(write access)
Write data
Figure 2.10 On-Chip Peripheral Module Access Cycle (3-State Access)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 39 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.7
CPU States
There are four CPU states: the reset state, program execution state, program halt state, and
exception-handling state. The program execution state includes active (high-speed or mediumspeed) mode and subactive mode. For the program halt state, there are sleep (high-speed or
medium-speed) mode, standby mode, watch mode, and subsleep mode. These states are shown in
figure 2.11. Figure 2.12 shows the state transitions. For details on program execution state and
program halt state, refer to section 6, Power-Down Modes. For details on exception handling, refer
to section 3, Exception Handling.
CPU state
Reset state
The CPU is initialized
Program execution state
Active (high-speed) mode
The CPU executes successive program
instructions at high speed,
synchronized by the system clock
Active (medium-speed) mode
Subactive mode
The CPU executes successive
program instructions at reduced
speed, synchronized by the subclock
Program halt state
A state in which the CPU
operation is stopped to
reduce power consumption
Sleep (high-speed) mode
Sleep (medium-speed) mode
Standby mode
Watch mode
Subsleep mode
Exception-handling state
A transient state in which the CPU changes
the processing flow due to a reset or an interrupt
Figure 2.11 CPU Operating States
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 40 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Power-down modes
The CPU executes successive
program instructions at
reduced speed, synchronized
by the system clock
Section 2 CPU
Reset cleared
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Reset occurs
Reset
occurs
Reset
occurs
Interrupt
source
Program halt state
Interrupt
source
Exceptionhandling
complete
Program execution state
SLEEP instruction executed
Figure 2.12 State Transitions
2.8
Usage Notes
2.8.1
Notes on Data Access to Empty Areas
The address space of this LSI includes empty areas in addition to the ROM, RAM, and on-chip
I/O registers areas available to the user. When data is transferred from CPU to empty areas, the
transferred data will be lost. This action may also cause the CPU to malfunction. When data is
transferred from an empty area to CPU, the contents of the data cannot be guaranteed.
2.8.2
EEPMOV Instruction
EEPMOV is a block-transfer instruction and transfers the byte size of data indicated by R4 or
R4L, which starts from the address indicated by ER5, to the address indicated by ER6. Set R4 or
R4L and ER6 so that the end address of the destination address (value of ER6 + R4 or ER6 + R4L)
does not exceed H'00FFFFFF (the value of ER6 must not change from H'00FFFFFF to
H'01000000 during execution).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 41 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.8.3
Bit-Manipulation Instruction
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read data from the specified address in
byte units, manipulate the data of the target bit, and write data to the same address again in byte
units. Special care is required when using these instructions in cases where two registers are
assigned to the same address, or when a bit is directly manipulated for a port or a register
containing a write-only bit, because this may rewrite data of a bit other than the bit to be
manipulated.
(1)
Bit manipulation for two registers assigned to the same address
Example 1: Bit manipulation for the timer load register and timer counter
Figure 2.13 shows an example of a timer in which two timer registers are assigned to the same
address. When a bit-manipulation instruction accesses the timer load register and timer counter of
a reloadable timer, since these two registers share the same address, the following operations takes
place.
1. Data is read in byte units.
2. The CPU sets or resets the bit to be manipulated with the bit-manipulation instruction.
3. The written data is written again in byte units to the timer load register.
The timer is counting, so the value read is not necessarily the same as the value in the timer load
register. As a result, bits other than the intended bit in the timer counter may be modified and the
modified value may be written to the timer load register.
Read
Count clock
Timer counter
Reload
Write
Timer load register
Internal data bus
Figure 2.13 Example of Timer Configuration with Two Registers Allocated to Same
Address
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 42 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
Example 2: When the BSET instruction is executed for port 5
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins and output low-level signals. An example to output a high-level
signal at P50 with a BSET instruction is shown below.
• Prior to executing BSET instruction
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• BSET instruction executed
BSET
#0,
@PDR5:8
The BSET instruction is executed for port 5.
• After executing BSET instruction
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
• Description on operation
1. When the BSET instruction is executed, first the CPU reads port 5.
Since P57 and P56 are input pins, the CPU reads the pin states (low-level and high-level
input).
P55 to P50 are output pins, so the CPU reads the value in PDR5. In this example PDR5 has a
value of H'80, but the value read by the CPU is H'40.
2. Next, the CPU sets bit 0 of the read data to 1, changing the PDR5 data to H'41.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 43 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
3. Finally, the CPU writes H'41 to PDR5, completing execution of BSET instruction.
As a result of the BSET instruction, bit 0 in PDR5 becomes 1, and P50 outputs a high-level
signal. However, bits 7 and 6 of PDR5 end up with different values. To prevent this problem,
store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory. Perform the bit manipulation on the
data in the work area, then write this data to PDR5.
• Prior to executing BSET instruction
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
H'80, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PDR5
The PDR5 value (H'80) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• BSET instruction executed
BSET
#0,
@RAM0:8
The BSET instruction is executed designating the PDR5
work area (RAM0).
• After executing BSET instruction
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PDR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PDR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
RAM0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 44 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
(2)
Bit Manipulation in a Register Containing a Write-Only Bit
Example 3: BCLR instruction executed designating port 5 control register PCR5
P57 and P56 are input pins, with a low-level signal input at P57 and a high-level signal input at
P56. P55 to P50 are output pins that output low-level signals. An example of setting the P50 pin as
an input pin by the BCLR instruction is shown below. It is assumed that a high-level signal will be
input to this input pin.
• Prior to executing BCLR instruction
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• BCLR instruction executed
BCLR
#0,
@PCR5:8
The BCLR instruction is executed for PCR5.
• After executing BCLR instruction
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Input
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• Description on operation
1. When the BCLR instruction is executed, first the CPU reads PCR5. Since PCR5 is a write-only
register, the CPU reads a value of H'FF, even though the PCR5 value is actually H'3F.
2. Next, the CPU clears bit 0 in the read data to 0, changing the data to H'FE.
3. Finally, H'FE is written to PCR5 and BCLR instruction execution ends.
As a result of this operation, bit 0 in PCR5 becomes 0, making P50 an input port. However,
bits 7 and 6 in PCR5 change to 1, so that P57 and P56 change from input pins to output pins.
To prevent this problem, store a copy of the PDR5 data in a work area in memory and
manipulate data of the bit in the work area, then write this data to PDR5.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 45 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 2 CPU
• Prior to executing BCLR instruction
MOV.B
MOV.B
MOV.B
H'3F, R0L
R0L, @RAM0
R0L, @PCR5
The PCR5 value (H'3F) is written to a work area in
memory (RAM0) as well as to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
• BCLR instruction executed
BCLR
#0,
@RAM0:8
The BCLR instructions executed for the PCR5 work area
(RAM0).
• After executing BCLR instruction
MOV.B
MOV.B
@RAM0, R0L
R0L, @PCR5
The work area (RAM0) value is written to PCR5.
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
Input/output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Pin state
Low
level
High
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
Low
level
High
level
PCR5
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
PDR5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RAM0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 46 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
Section 3 Exception Handling
Exception handling may be caused by a reset or interrupts.
• Reset
A reset has the highest exception priority. Exception handling starts as soon as the reset is
cleared by the RES pin. The chip is also reset when the watchdog timer overflows, and
exception handling starts. Exception handling is the same as exception handling by the RES
pin.
• Interrupts
External interrupts other than NMI and internal interrupts other than address break are masked
by the I bit in CCR, and kept masked while the I bit is set to 1. Exception handling starts when
the current instruction or exception handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 47 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.1
Exception Sources and Vector Address
Table 3.1 shows the vector addresses and priority of each exception handling. When more than
one interrupt is requested, handling is performed from the interrupt with the highest priority.
Table 3.1
Exception Sources and Vector Address
Vector
Number
Vector Address
Priority
RES pin/Watchdog Reset
timer
0
H'000000 to H'000003
High

1, 2
H'000004 to H'00000B
Source Origin
Exception Sources
Reserved for system use
External interrupt
NMI
3
H'00000C to H'00000F

Reserved for system use
4
H'000010 to H'000013
Address break
Break conditions satisfied
5
H'000014 to H'000017
External interrupts
IRQ0
6
H'000018 to H'00001B
IRQ1
7
H'00001C to H'00001F
IRQAEC
8
H'000020 to H'000023
IRQ3
9
H'000024 to H'000027
IRQ4
10
H'000028 to H'00002B
WKP0
11
H'00002C to H'00002F
WKP1
12
H'000030 to H'000033
WKP2
13
H'000034 to H'000037
WKP3
14
H'000038 to H'00003B
WKP4
15
H'00003C to H'00003F
WKP5
16
H'000040 to H'000043
WKP6
17
H'000044 to H'000047
WKP7
18
H'000048 to H'00004B

19 to 55
H'00004C to H'0000DF Low
Internal interrupts*
Note:
*
For details on the vector table of internal interrupts, see section 4.5, Interrupt Exception
Handling Vector Table.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 48 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2
Reset
A reset has the highest exception priority. Table 3.2 shows the three sources that cause a reset.
Table 3.2
Interrupt Sources that Cause a Reset
Origin of Interrupt Source
Description
RES pin
Low-level input
Power-on reset circuit
Rising of the power-supply voltage (Vcc)
For details, see section 23, Power-On Reset
Circuit.
Watchdog timer
Counter overflow
For details, see section 16, Watchdog Timer.
3.2.1
Reset Exception Handling
When a reset is generated, all processing halts and this LSI enters the reset state. A reset initializes
the internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules.
To ensure that this LSI be reset, the RES pin has to be held low for the oscillation stabilization
time of the system clock oscillator either after power-on or when the system clock oscillator is
halted. If the system clock oscillator is functioning, the RES pin has to be held low for the number
of the tREL state as is specified by the electrical characteristics.
When a reset source has been generated, this LSI starts reset exception handling as follows.
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip peripheral modules are initialized
and the I bit in CCR is set to 1.
2. The reset exception handling vector address (H'000000 to H'000003) is read and transferred to
the PC, and then program execution starts from the address indicated by the PC.
The sequence of the reset exception handling caused by the RES pin is shown in figure 3.1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 49 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
Internal
processing
Vector fetch
Prefetch of
first program
instruction
φ
RES
Internal
address bus
(1)
(3)
(5)
Internal read
signal
Internal write
signal
Internal data
bus (16 bits)
(1), (3)
(2), (4)
(5)
(6)
(2)
(4)
(6)
Reset exception handling vector address (1) = H'000000, (3) = H'000002
Start address (contents of reset exception handling vector address)
Start address
Initial program instruction
Figure 3.1 Reset Exception Handling Sequence
3.2.2
Interrupt Immediately after Reset
Immediately after a reset, if an interrupt is accepted before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, PC
and CCR will not be pushed onto the stack correctly, resulting in program runaway. To prevent
this, immediately after reset exception handling all interrupts are masked. For this reason, the
initial program instruction is always executed immediately after a reset. This instruction should
initialize the stack pointer (e.g. MOV.L #xx: 32, SP).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 50 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.3
Interrupts
The interrupt sources include 14 external interrupts (NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQAEC,
and WKP7 to WKP0) and 28 internal interrupts (for the flash memory version) or 27 internal
interrupts (for the masked ROM version) from on-chip peripheral modules. Figure 3.2 shows the
interrupt sources and their numbers.
The on-chip peripheral modules which require interrupt sources are the watchdog timer (WDT),
address break, realtime clock (RTC), 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU), asynchronous event counter
(AEC), timer C, timer F, timer G, serial communication interface (SCI), and A/D converter.
Interrupt vector addresses are allocated to individual sources.
NMI is an interrupt with the highest priority and accepted at all times. Interrupts are controlled by
the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller sets interrupts other than NMI to three levels of
priorities in order to control multiple interrupts. The interrupt priority registers A to F (IPRA to
IPRF) of the interrupt controller set the interrupt priorities.
For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
External interrupts
NMI (1)
IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, and IRQAEC (5)
WKP0 to WKP7 (8)
Internal interrupts
WDT*1 (1)
Address break (1)
Realtime clock (8)
Asynchronous event counter (1)
16-bit timer pulse unit (6)
Timer C (1)
Timer F (2)
Timer G (1)
SCI3 (3)
SCI4*2 (1)
A/D converter (1)
SLEEP instruction execution (1)
IIC bus (1)
Interrupts
Notes: ( ) indicates the source number.
1. When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interrupt request
is generated each time the counter overflows.
2. Available only for the F-ZTAT version.
Figure 3.2 Interrupt Sources and their Numbers
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 51 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.4
Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figures 3.3 shows the stack after completion of interrupt exception handling.
SP – 4
SP (ER7)
CCR
SP – 3
SP + 1
PCE
SP – 2
SP + 2
PCH
SP – 1
SP + 3
PCL
SP (ER7)
SP + 4
Even address
Stack area
Prior to start of interrupt
exception handling
PC and CCR
saved to stack
After completion of interrupt
exception handling
[Legend]
Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC)
PC E:
Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC)
PCH:
Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC)
PCL :
Condition code register
CCR:
Stack pointer
SP:
Notes: 1. PC shows the address of the first instruction to be executed upon return from the interrupt
handling routine.
2. Register contents must always be saved and restored in word or longword units, starting from
an even-numbered address.
Figure 3.3 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 52 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.5
Usage Notes
3.5.1
Notes on Stack Area Use
When word data or longword data is accessed in this LSI, the least significant bit of the address is
regarded as 0. The stack must always be accessed in word units or longword units, and the stack
pointer (SP: ER7) should never indicate an odd address. Use PUSH.W Rn (MOV.W Rn, @–SP)
or PUSH.L ERn (MOV.L ERn, @–SP) to save register values. To restore register values, use
POP.W Rn (MOV.W @SP+, Rn) or POP.L ERn (MOV.L @SP+, ERn).
Setting an odd address in SP may cause a program to crash. An example is shown in figure 3.4.
SP →
SP →
CCR
PC E
PCH
PC L
R1L
PCE
PCH
PCL
SP →
H'FFFEFF
BSR instruction
SP set to H'FFFEFF
[Legend]
PC E :
PC H:
PC L :
R1L:
SP:
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
MOV. B R1L, @-ER7
Stack accessed beyond SP
Contents of CCR are lost
Bits 23 to 16 of program counter (PC)
Bits 15 to 8 of program counter (PC)
Bits 7 to 0 of program counter (PC)
General register R1L
Stack pointer
Figure 3.4 Operation when Odd Address is Set in SP
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 53 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.5.2
Notes on Rewriting Port Mode Registers
When a port mode register is rewritten to switch the functions of external interrupt pins and when
the value of the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is rewritten to switch between selection and nonselection of IRQAEC, the following points should be observed.
When a pin function is switched by rewriting a port mode register that controls an external
interrupt pin (IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, IRQ0, or WKP7 to WKP0), the interrupt request flag is set to 1
at the time the pin function is switched, even if no valid interrupt is input at the pin. Be sure to
clear the interrupt request flag to 0 after switching the pin function. When the value of the
ECPWME bit in AEGSR that sets selection or non-selection of IRQAEC is rewritten, the interrupt
request flag may be set to 1, even if a valid edge has not arrived on the selected IRQAEC or
IECPWM (PWM output for the AEC). Therefore, be sure to clear the interrupt request flag to 0
after switching the pin function.
Table 3.3 shows the conditions under which interrupt request flags are set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 54 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
Table 3.3
Conditions under which Interrupt Request Flag is Set to 1
Interrupt Request
Flags Set to 1
IRR1
IRRI4
Conditions
When the IRQ4 bit in PMR9 or PMRF is changed from 0 to 1 while the
IRQ4 pin is low and the IEG4 bit in IEGR is 0.
When the IRQ4 bit in PMR9 or PMRF is changed from 1 to 0 while the
IRQ4 pin is low and the IEG4 bit in IEGR is 1.
IRRI3
When the IRQ3 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 0 to 1 while the
IRQ3 pin is low and the IEG3 bit in IEGR is 0.
When the IRQ3 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 1 to 0 while the
IRQ3 pin is low and the IEG3 bit in IEGR is 1.
IRREC2
When an edge as designated by the AIEGS1 and AIEGS0 bits in AEGSR is
detected because the values of the IRQAEC pin and of IECPWM at
switching are different (e.g., when the rising edge has been selected and
the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is changed from 1 to 0 while the IRQAEC pin is
low and IECPWM is 1).
IRRI1
When the IRQ1 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 0 to 1 while the
IRQ1 pin is low and the IEG1 bit in IEGR is 0.
When the IRQ1 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 1 to 0 while the
IRQ1 pin is low and the IEG1 bit in IEGR is 1.
IRRI0
When the IRQ0 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 0 to 1 while the
IRQ0 pin is low and the IEG0 bit in IEGR is 0.
When the IRQ0 bit in PMRB or PMRE is changed from 1 to 0 while the
IRQ0 pin is low and the IEG0 bit in IEGR is 1.
IWPR
IWPF7
When the WKP7 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP7 pin is
low.
IWPF6
When the WKP6 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP6 pin is
low.
IWPF5
When the WKP5 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP5 pin is
low.
IWPF4
When the WKP4 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP4 pin is
low.
IWPF3
When the WKP3 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP3 pin is
low.
IWPF2
When the WKP2 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP2 pin is
low.
IWPF1
When the WKP1 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP1 pin is
low.
IWPF0
When the WKP0 bit in PMR5 is changed from 0 to 1 while the WKP0 pin is
low.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 55 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
Figure 3.5 shows the procedure for setting a bit in a port mode register and clearing the interrupt
request flag. This procedure also applies to AEGSR setting.
When switching a pin function, mask the interrupt before setting the bit in the port mode register
(or AEGSR). After accessing the port mode register (or AEGSR), execute at least one instruction
(e.g., NOP), then clear the interrupt request flag from 1 to 0. If the instruction to clear the flag to 0
is executed immediately after the port mode register (or AEGSR) access without executing an
instruction, the flag will not be cleared.
An alternative method is to avoid the setting of interrupt request flags when pin functions are
switched by keeping the pins at the high level so that the conditions in table 3.2 are not satisfied.
However, the procedure in figure 3.5 is recommended because IECPWM is an internal signal and
determining its value is complicated.
I bit in CCR ← 1
Interrupts masked. (Another possibility
is to disable the relevant interrupt in the
interrupt enable register 1.)
Set port mode register (or AEGSR) bit
Execute NOP instruction
After setting the port mode register
(or AEGSR) bit, first execute at least
one instruction (e.g., NOP), then clear
the interrupt request flag to 0
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
I bit in CCR ← 0
Interrupt mask cleared
Figure 3.5 Port Mode Register (or AEGSR) Setting and Interrupt Request Flag
Clearing Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 56 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.5.3
Method for Clearing Interrupt Request Flags
Use the recommended method given below when clearing the flags in interrupt request registers
(IRR1, IRR2, and IWPR).
(1)
Recommended method
Use a single instruction to clear flags. The bit manipulation instruction and byte-size data transfer
instruction can be used. Two examples of program code for clearing IRRI1 (bit 1 in IRR1) are
given below.
BCLR
#1,
@IRR1:8
MOV.B R1L, @IRR1:8 (set the value of R1L to B'11111101)
(2)
Example of a malfunction
When flags are cleared with multiple instructions, other flags might be cleared during execution of
the instructions, even though they are currently set, and this will cause a malfunction.
Here is an example in which IRRI0 is cleared and disabled in the process of clearing IRRI1 (bit 1
in IRR1).
MOV.B @IRR1:8,R1L ......... IRRI0 = 0 at this time
AND.B #B'11111101,R1L ..... Here, IRRI0 = 1
MOV.B R1L,@IRR1:8 ......... IRRI0 is cleared to 0
In the above example, it is assumed that an IRQ0 interrupt is generated while the AND.B
instruction is executing.
The IRQ0 interrupt is disabled because, although the original objective is clearing IRRI1, IRRI0 is
also cleared.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 57 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 3 Exception Handling
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 58 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.1
Features
This LSI includes an interrupt controller, which has the following features.
• Priorities settable with IPR
An interrupt priority register (IPR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three mask
levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except an NMI and address break.
• Interrupts can be enabled or disabled in three levels by the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in the
interrupt mask register (INTM).
• Fourteen external interrupts
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times. Rising or falling edge
sensing can be selected for NMI. Rising or falling edge sensing can be selected for IRQ0,
IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, and WKP0 to WKP7. Rising, falling, or both edge sensing can be selected
for IRQAEC.
A block diagram of the interrupt controller is shown in figure 4.1.
NMI/IRQ/
WKP input
External interrupt
input
IENR1
Interrupt request
Priority
determination
Internal interrupt source
TPU, SCI, etc.
Vector number
I
CCR
............
INTM
IPR
[Legend]
IENR1:
IPR:
CCR:
INTM:
IRQ enable register 1
Interrupt priority register
Condition code register
Interrupt mask register
Figure 4.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 59 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 4.1 shows the pin configuration of the interrupt controller.
Table 4.1
Pin Configuration
Pin Name
I/O
Function
NMI
Input
Nonmaskable external interrupt pin
Rising or falling edge can be selected
IRQAEC
Input
Maskable external interrupt pin
Rising, falling, or both edges can be selected
IRQ4
Input
IRQ3
Input
Maskable external interrupt pins
Rising or falling edge can be selected
IRQ1
Input
IRQ0
Input
WKP7 to WKP0
Input
4.3
Maskable external interrupt pins
Accepted at a rising or falling edge
Register Descriptions
The interrupt controller has the following registers.
• Interrupt edge select register (IEGR)
• Wakeup edge select register (WEGR)
• Interrupt enable register 1 (IENR1)
• Interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2)
• Interrupt request register 1 (IRR1)
• Interrupt request register 2 (IRR2)
• Wakeup interrupt request register (IWPR)
• Interrupt priority register A (IPRA)
• Interrupt priority register B (IPRB)
• Interrupt priority register C (IPRC)
• Interrupt priority register D (IPRD)
• Interrupt priority register E (IPRE)
• Interrupt priority register F (IPRF)
• Interrupt mask register (INTM)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 60 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.1
Interrupt Edge Select Register (IEGR)
IEGR selects the sense of an edge that generates interrupt requests of the NMI, TMIF, ADTRG,
IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and IRQ0 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Descriptions
7
NMIEG
0
R/W
NMI Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the NMI pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the NMI pin input
6
TMIFEG
0
R/W
TMIF Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the TMIF pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the TMIF pin input
5
ADTRGNEG 0
R/W
ADTRG Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the ADTRG pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the ADTRG pin input
4
IEG4
0
R/W
IRQ4 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the IRQ4 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the IRQ4 pin input
3
IEG3
0
R/W
IRQ3 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the IRQ3 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the IRQ3 pin input
2

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
1
IEG1
0
R/W
IRQ1 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the IRQ1 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the IRQ1 pin input
0
IEG0
0
R/W
IRQ0 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the IRQ0 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the IRQ0 pin input
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 61 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.2
Wakeup Edge Select Register (WEGR)
WEGR selects the sense of an edge that generates interrupt requests of the WKP7 to WKP0 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
WKEGS7
0
R/W
Description
WKP7 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP7 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP7 pin input
6
WKEGS6
0
R/W
WKP6 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP6 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP6 pin input
5
WKEGS5
0
R/W
WKP5 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP5 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP5 pin input
4
WKEGS4
0
R/W
WKP4 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP4 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP4 pin input
3
WKEGS3
0
R/W
WKP3 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP3 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP3 pin input
2
WKEGS2
0
R/W
WKP2 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP2 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP2 pin input
1
WKEGS1
0
R/W
WKP1 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP1 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP1 pin input
0
WKEGS0
0
R/W
WKP0 Edge Select
0: Detects a falling edge of the WKP0 pin input
1: Detects a rising edge of the WKP0 pin input
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 62 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.3
Interrupt Enable Register 1 (IENR1)
IENR1 enables the RTC, WKP7 to WKP0, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, and IRQAEC interrupts.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
IENRTC
0
R/W
Description
RTC Interrupt Request Enable
The RTC interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
6

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
5
IENWP
0
R/W
Wakeup Interrupt Request Enable
The WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt requests are enabled
when this bit is set to 1.
4
IEN4
0
R/W
IRQ4 Interrupt Request Enable
The IRQ4 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
3
IEN3
0
R/W
IRQ3 Interrupt Request Enable
The IRQ3 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
2
IENEC2
0
R/W
IRQAEC Interrupt Request Enable
The IRQAEC interrupt request is enabled when this bit
is set to 1.
1
IEN1
0
R/W
IRQ1 Interrupt Request Enable
The IRQ1 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
0
IEN0
0
R/W
IRQ0 Interrupt Request Enable
The IRQ0 interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 63 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.4
Interrupt Enable Register 2 (IENR2)
IENR2 enables the direct transition, A/D converter, timer G, timer F, timer C, and asynchronous
event counter interrupts.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IENDT
0
R/W
Direct Transition Interrupt Request Enable
The direct transition interrupt request is enabled when
this bit is set to 1.
6
IENAD
0
R/W
A/D Converter Interrupt Request Enable
The A/D converter interrupt request is enabled when
this bit is set to 1.
5
—
0
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to.
4
IENTG
0
R/W
Timer G Interrupt Request Enable
The timer G interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
3
IENTFH
0
R/W
Timer FH Interrupt Request Enable
The timer FH interrupt request is enabled when this bit
is set to 1.
2
IENTFL
0
R/W
Timer FL Interrupt Request Enable
The timer FL interrupt request is enabled when this bit
is set to 1.
1
IENTC
0
R/W
Timer C Interrupt Request Enable
The timer C interrupt request is enabled when this bit is
set to 1.
0
IENEC
0
R/W
Asynchronous Event Counter Interrupt Request Enable
The asynchronous event counter interrupt request is
enabled when this bit is set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 64 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.5
Interrupt Request Register 1 (IRR1)
IRR1 indicates the IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, and IRQAEC interrupt request status.
Bit
Initial
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5


Reserved
All 1
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4
IRRI4
0
R/W
IRQ4 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The IRQ4 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
3
IRRI3
0
R/W
IRQ3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The IRQ3 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
2
IRREC2
0
R/W
IRQAEC Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The IRQAEC pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
1
IRRI1
0
R/W
IRQ1 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The IRQ1 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 65 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Initial
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
0
IRRI0
R/W
IRQ0 Interrupt Request Flag
0
[Setting condition]
The IRQ0 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
4.3.6
Interrupt Request Register 2 (IRR2)
IRR2 indicates the state of the direct transition, A/D converter, timer G, timer F, timer C, and
asynchronous event counter interrupt requests.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IRRDT
0
R/W
Direct Transition Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
Execution of a SLEEP instruction while the DTON bit in
SYSCR2 is set to 1, so that a direct transition is made
to sleep mode
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
6
IRRAD
0
R/W
A/D Converter Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
When A/D conversion ends
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
5
—
0
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
4
IRRTG
0
R/W
Timer G Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The timer G input capture or overflow occurs.
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 66 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
IRRTFH
0
R/W
Timer FH Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The timer FH compare match or overflow occurs
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
2
IRRTFL
0
R/W
Timer FL Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The timer FL compare match or overflow occurs
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
1
IRRTC
0
R/W
Timer C Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The timer C overflow or underflow occurs.
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
0
IRREC
0
R/W
Asynchronous Event Counter Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The asynchronous event counter overflows
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 67 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.7
Wakeup Interrupt Request Register (IWPR)
IWPR has the WKP7 to WKP0 interrupt request status flags.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
IWPF7
0
R/W
Description
WKP7 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP7 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
6
IWPF6
0
R/W
WKP6 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP6 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
5
IWPF5
0
R/W
WKP5 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP5 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
4
IWPF4
0
R/W
WKP4 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP4 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
3
IWPF3
0
R/W
WKP3 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP3 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 68 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
IWPF2
0
R/W
WKP2 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP2 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
1
IWPF1
0
R/W
WKP1 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP1 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
0
IWPF0
0
R/W
WKP0 Interrupt Request Flag
[Setting condition]
The WKP0 pin is set as the interrupt input pin and the
specified edge is detected
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to this bit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 69 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.8
Interrupt Priority Registers A to F (IPRA to IPRF)
IPR sets mask levels (levels 2 to 0) for interrupts other than the NMI and address break. The
correspondence between interrupt sources and IPR settings is shown in table 4.2.
Setting a value in the range from H'0 to H'3 in the 2-bit groups of bits 7 and 6, 5 and 4, 3 and 2,
and 1 and 0 sets the mask level of the corresponding interrupt. Bits 3 to 0 in IPRE and bits 1 and 0
in IPRF are reserved.
Bit
Initial
Bit Name Value
R/W
Description
7
IPRn7
0
R/W
6
IPRn6
0
R/W
Set the mask level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
00: Mask level 0 (Lowest)
01: Mask level 1
1x: Mask level 2 (Highest)
5
IPRn5
0
R/W
4
IPRn4
0
R/W
Set the mask level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
00: Mask level 0 (Lowest)
01: Mask level 1
1x: Mask level 2 (Highest)
3
IPRn3
0
R/W
2
IPRn2
0
R/W
Set the mask level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
00: Mask level 0 (Lowest)
01: Mask level 1
1x: Mask level 2 (Highest)
1
IPRn1
0
R/W
0
IPRn0
0
R/W
Set the mask level of the corresponding interrupt
source.
00: Mask level 0 (Lowest)
01: Mask level 1
1x: Mask level 2 (Highest)
[Legend]
x: Don't care
n = A to F
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 70 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.3.9
Interrupt Mask Register (INTM)
INTM is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls 3-level interrupt masking depending on
the combination of the INTM0 and INTM1 bits.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 2

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
1
INTM1
0
R/W
Set the interrupt mask level.
0
INTM0
0
R/W
1x: Mask an interrupt with mask level 1 or less
01: Mask an interrupt with mask level 0
00: Accept all interrupts
[Legend]
x: Don't care
4.4
Interrupt Sources
4.4.1
External Interrupts
There are 14 external interrupts: NMI, WKP7 to WKP0, IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQAEC, IRQ1, and IRQ0.
(1)
NMI Interrupt
NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is always accepted by the CPU regardless of the state of
the I bit in CCR. The NMIEG bit in IEGR can be used to select whether an interrupt is requested
at a rising edge or a falling edge on the NMI pin.
(2)
WKP7 to WKP0 Interrupts
WKP7 to WKP0 interrupts are requested by the rising or falling edge input signals at the WKP7 to
WKP0 pins.
When the rising or falling edge is input while the WKP7 to WKP0 pin functions are selected by
PMR5, the corresponding bit in IWPR is set to 1 and an interrupt request is generated.
Clearing the IENWP bit in IENR1 to 0 disables the wakeup interrupt request to be accepted.
Setting the I bit in CCR to 1 masks all interrupts.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 71 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
When exception handling for the WKP7 to WKP0 interrupts is accepted, the I bit in CCR is set to
1. The interrupt mask level can be set by IPR.
(3)
IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and IRQ0 Interrupts
IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and IRQ0 interrupts are requested by input signals at IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and
IRQ0 pins.
Using the IEG4, IEG3, IEG1, and IEG0 bits in IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt
is generated by a rising or falling edge at IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and IRQ0 pins.
When the specified edge is input while the IRQ4, IRQ3, IRQ1, and IRQ0 pin functions are
selected by PFCR, PMRF, PMRE, PMRB, and PMR9, the corresponding bit in IRR1 is set to 1
and an interrupt request is generated.
Clearing the IEN4, IEN3, IEN1, and IEN0 bits in IENR1 to 0 disables the interrupt request to be
accepted. Setting the I bit in CCR to 1 masks all interrupts.
The interrupt mask level can be set by IPR.
(4)
IRQAEC Interrupts
An IRQAEC interrupt is requested by an input signal at the IRQAEC pin or IECPWM (PWM
output for the AEC). When the IRQAEC pin is used as an external interrupt pin, clear the
ECPWME bit in AEGSR to 0.
Using the AIEGS1 and AIEGS0 bits in AEGSR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is
generated by a rising edge, falling edge, or both edges.
When the IENEC2 bit in IENR1 is set to 1 and the specified edge is input, the corresponding bit in
IRR1 is set to 1 and an interrupt request is generated.
When exception handling for the IRQAEC interrupt is accepted, the I bit in CCR is set to 1.
The interrupt mask level can be set by IPR.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 72 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.4.2
Internal Interrupts
Internal interrupts generated from the on-chip peripheral modules have the following features:
• For each on-chip peripheral module, there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. Internal interrupts can be
controlled independently. If an enable bit is set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the interrupt
controller.
• The interrupt mask level can be set by IPR.
4.5
Interrupt Exception Handling Vector Table
Table 4.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the mask level. Priorities within a module
are fixed. Interrupt mask levels other than NMI and address break can be modified by IPR.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 73 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Table 4.2
Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Name
Vector
Number
Vector Address
IPR
Mask
Level
RES, WDT
Reset
0
H'000000

High
NMI
NMI
3
H'00000C
Address break
Break conditions satisfied
5
H'000014
External pins
IRQ0
6
H'000018
IPRA7, IPRA6
IRQ1
7
H'00001C
IPRA5, IPRA4
IRQAEC
8
H'000020
IPRA3, IPRA2
IRQ3
9
H'000024
IPRA1, IPRA0
IRQ4
10
H'000028
WKP0
11
H'00002C
WKP1
12
H'000030
WKP2
13
H'000034
WKP3
14
H'000038
WKP4
15
H'00003C
WKP5
16
H'000040
WKP6
17
H'000044
WKP7
18
H'000048
0.25-second overflow
19
H'00004C
0.5-second overflow
20
H'000050
Second periodic overflow
21
H'000054
Minute periodic overflow
22
H'000058
Hour periodic overflow
23
H'00005C
Day periodic overflow
24
H'000060
Week periodic overflow
25
H'000064
Free-running overflow
26
H'000068
RTC
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 74 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
IPRB7, IPRB6
IPRB5, IPRB4
Low
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Name
Vector
Number
Vector Address
IPR
Mask
Level
High
WDT
WDT overflow (interval
timer)
27
H'00006C
IPRB3, IPRB2
AEC
AEC overflow
28
H'000070
IPRB1, IPRB0
TPU_1
TG1A (TG1A input
capture/compare match)
29
H'000074
IPRC7, IPRC6
TG1B (TG1B input
capture/compare match)
30
H'000078
TCI1V (overflow 1)
31
H'00007C
TG2A (TG2A input
capture/compare match)
32
H'000080
TG2B (TG2B input
capture/compare match)
33
H'000084
TCI2V (overflow 2)
34
H'000088
Timer FL compare match
Timer FL overflow
35
H'00008C
Timer FH compare match
Timer FH overflow
36
H'000090
SCI4*
Receive data full/transmit 37
data empty
Transmit end/receive error
H'000094
IPRC1, IPRC0
SCI3_1
Transmit
completion/transmit data
empty
Receive data full/overrun
error
Framing error/parity error
38
H'000098
IPRD7, IPRD6
SCI3_2
Transmit
completion/transmit data
empty
Receive data full/overrun
error
Framing error/parity error
39
H'00009C
IPRD5, IPRD4
IIC2
Transmit data
empty/transmit end
Receive data full/stop
condition detection
NACK detection
Arbitration/overrun error
40
H'0000A0
IPRD3, IPRD2
10-bit A/D
A/D conversion end
42
H'0000A8
IPRE7, IPRE6
43
H'0000AC
IPRE5, IPRE4
TPU_2
Timer F
(SLEEP instruction Direct transition
execution)
IPRC5, IPRC4
IPRC3, IPRC2
Low
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 75 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Name
Vector
Number
Vector Address
IPR
Mask
Level
High
Timer C
Timer C
overflow/underflow
53
H'0000D4
IPRF7, IPRF6
Timer G
Timer G input capture
Timer G overflow
54
H'0000D8
IPRF5, IPRF4
SCI3_3
Transmit
completion/transmit data
empty
Receive data full/overrun
error
Framing error/parity error
55
H'0000DC
IPRF3, IPRF2
Note:
*
Supported only by the flash version.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 76 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Low
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.6
Operation
NMI and address break interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state. In the case of
IRQ interrupts, WKP interrupts, and on-chip peripheral module interrupts, an enable bit is
provided for each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt
request. Interrupt sources for which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt
controller.
Table 4.3 shows the interrupt control states. Figure 4.2 shows a flowchart of the interrupt
acceptance operation.
Four-level interrupt masking is controlled according to the combination of the I bit in CCR and the
INTM1 and INTM0 bits in INTM.
Table 4.3
Interrupt Control States
CCR
INTM
I
INTM1
INTM0
States
1
x
x
All interrupts other than NMI and address break are masked.
0
1
x
Interrupts with mask level 1 or less are masked.
0
1
Interrupts with mask level 0 are masked.
0
0
All interrupts are accepted.
[Legend]
x: Don't care
1. If an interrupt source whose enable bit is set to 1 occurs, an interrupt request is sent to the
interrupt controller.
2. With referring to the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in INTM and the I bit in CCR, control the
following.
 The interrupt request is held pending when the I bit is set to 1.
 When the I bit is cleared to 0 and INTM1 bit is set to 1, interrupts with mask level 1 or less
are held pending.
 When the I bit is cleared to 0, INTM1 bit is cleared to 0, and INTM0 bit is set to 1,
interrupt requests with mask level 0 are held pending.
 When the I bit, INTM1 bit, and INTM0 bit are all cleared to 0, all interrupt requests are
accepted.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 77 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
3. If a conflict occurs between interrupt requests that are not held pending due to the settings of
the IMTM1, IMTN0 bits in INTM or the I bit in CCR, the interrupt request with the highest
mask level according to table 4.2 is selected regardless of the IPR setting.
4. When the CPU accepts an interrupt request, it starts interrupt exception handling after
execution of the current instruction has been completed.
5. PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling.
6. Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI and address break.
7. The CPU generates a vector address for the accepted interrupt and starts interrupt handling by
reading the interrupt routine start address in the vector table.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 78 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Program execution state
Interrupt generated?
No
Yes
NMI or address
break?
No
Yes
No
INTM1 = 0?
INTM0 = 0?
INTM1 = 0?
INTM0 = 1?
Yes
Yes
No
I = 0?
Mask level 1 or 2
interrupt?
Yes
No
No
Mask level 2
interrupt?
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
I = 0?
I = 0?
Yes
Yes
Save PC and CCR
Held pending
I←1
Set vector address
Branch to interrupt
handling routine
Figure 4.2 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance
4.6.1
Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 4.3 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 79 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
REJ09B0309-0200
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 80 of 692
Internal
data bus
(4)
High
(3)
Internal
processing
(6)
(5)
Stack
(8)
(7)
(10)
(9)
Vector fetch
Figure 4.3 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
(14):
SP-4
(7):
(6)(8): Saved PC and saved CCR
(13):
SP-2
(5):
(12)
(11)
Internal
processing
(14)
(13)
Instruction prefetch
of interrupt handling
routine
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12))
(10)(12): Interrupt handling routine start address (Vector address contents)
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.)
(3):
(9)(11): Vector address
Instruction prefetch address (Not executed. This is the contents of the saved PC and the return address.)
(2)
(1)
(2)(4): Instruction code (Not executed.)
(1):
Internal
write signal
Internal
read signal
Internal
address
bus
Interrupt
request
signal
φ
Instruction
prefetch
Interrupt accepted
Interrupt level determination
Wait for end of instruction
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.6.2
Interrupt Response Times
Table 4.4 shows interrupt response times − the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine.
Table 4.4
Interrupt Response Times (States)
No.
Execution Status
Number of States
1
Interrupt mask level determination
1 or 2*
2
Maximum number of wait states until
executing instruction ends
1 to 23
3
PC, CCR stack
4
4
Vector fetch
1
4
2
5
Instruction fetch*
6
Internal processing*
Total
4
3
4
18 to 41
Notes: 1. One state in case of an internal interrupt (2 states in case of an external interrupt).
2. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
3. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 81 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.7
Usage Notes
4.7.1
Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction. When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction
such as BCLR or MOV, and if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the
interrupt concerned will still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt
exception handling for that interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However,
if there is an interrupt request with a higher mask level than that interrupt, interrupt exception
handling will be executed for the interrupt with a higher mask level, and the interrupt with a lower
mask level will be ignored. The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 4.4 shows an example in which the TGIEA bit in TIER of the 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU)
is cleared to 0.
TIER write cycle by CPU
TGIA exception handling
φ
Internal address
bus
TIER address
Internal write
signal
TGIEA
TGIA
TGIA interrupt
signal
Figure 4.4 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 82 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
4.7.2
Instructions that Disable Interrupts
The instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC.
When an interrupt request is generated, an interrupt is requested to the CPU after the interrupt
controller has determined the mask level. At that time, if the CPU is executing an instruction that
disables interrupts, the CPU always executes the next instruction after the instruction execution is
completed.
4.7.3
Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during transfer is
not accepted until the transfer is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, even if an interrupt request other than the NMI is issued during
transfer, the interrupt is not accepted until the transfer is completed. If the NMI interrupt request is
issued, NMI exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the
stack in this case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an NMI interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1: EEPMOV.W
4.7.4
MOV.W
R4,R4
BNE
L1
IENR Clearing
When an interrupt request is disabled by clearing the interrupt enable register or when the interrupt
request register is cleared, the interrupt request should be masked (I bit = 1). If the above operation
is executed while the I bit is 0 and contention between the instruction execution and the interrupt
request generation occurs, exception handling, which corresponds to the interrupt request
generated after instruction execution of the above operation is completed, is executed.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 83 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 84 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
The clock pulse generator incorporated into this LSI consists of a system clock pulse generator
circuit that consists of a system clock oscillator, system clock divider, and an on-chip oscillator for
the system clock, and a subclock pulse generator circuit that consists of a subclock oscillator and
subclock divider.
Figure 5.1 is a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
IRQAEC
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
*
ROSC
OSC1
OSC2
System
clock
oscillator
φOSC
φOSC
(fOSC)
(fOSC)
System
clock
divider
φOSC
φOSC/8
φOSC/16
φOSC/32
φOSC/64
System clock pulse generator circuit
φ
Prescaler S
(17 bits)
φ/2
to
φ/131072
φW
φW/2
X1
Subclock
φW
Subclock
φW/4
X2
oscillator
(fW)
divider
φW/8
φW/4
φSUB
Prescaler W
(8 bits)
φW/8
to
φW/1024
Subclock pulse generator circuit
φW/2
Note: * The system clock can be output from the on-chip oscillator for the system clock or system clock oscillator by the
input level of the IRQAEC pin during an internal reset except for the one by the watchdog timer.
Figure 5.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
The basic clock signals that drive the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules are the system clock
(φ) and subclock (φSUB). Prescaler S frequency-divides the clock signal S to produce clock signals
at rates from φ/131072 to φ/2, and prescaler W frequency-divides the watch clock φw/4, which is
the watch clock frequency-divided by four, to produce clock signals from at rates from φw/1024 to
φw/8. Both the system clock and subclock signals are provided to the on-chip peripheral modules.
Since the on-chip oscillator for the system clock is available, the system clock can be selected to
be output from the on-chip oscillator for the system clock or system clock oscillator by the input
level of the IRQAEC pin.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 85 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.1
Register Description
• SUB32k control register (SUB32CR)
• Oscillator Control Register (OSCCR)
5.1.1
SUB32k Control Register (SUB32CR)
SUB32CR controls whether the subclock oscillator is operating or stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
32KSTOP
0
R/W
Description
Subclock Oscillator Operation Control
Controls whether the subclock oscillator is operating or
stopped. When the subclock oscillator is not used, set
this bit to 1.
0: Subclock oscillator operates
1: Subclock oscillator stops
6

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to.
5 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 86 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.1.2
Oscillator Control Register (OSCCR)
OSCCR is used to control the built-in feedback resistor and includes the IRQAEC and OSC flags.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
—
0
R/W
Description
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to.
6
RFCUT
0
R/W
Built-In Feedback Resistor Control
Selects whether to use the built-in feedback resistor of
the system clock oscillator when the external clock is
being input or the on-chip oscillator for the system clock
is selected.
When the external clock is being input or the on-chip
oscillator for the system clock is in use, set this bit and
then temporarily enter standby mode, watch mode, or
subactive mode. After any of these modes is entered,
the built-in feedback oscillator is used or not used
according to this specification.
0: Built-in feedback resistor is used with the system
clock oscillator
1: Built-in feedback resistor is not used with the system
clock oscillator
5
—
0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
4
—
0
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to.
3
—
0
R/W
2
IRQAECF
—*
R
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
IRQAEC Flag
This bit indicates the level at which the IRQAEC pin is
to be set during resets.
0: IRQAEC pin set to GND during resets
1: IRQAEC pin set to Vcc during resets
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 87 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
OSCF
—*
R
OSC Flag
This bit indicates which oscillator is acting as the
system clock pulse generator.
0: The system clock oscillator is the generator
(operation of the on-chip oscillator for system clock
stopped)
1: The on-chip oscillator for the system clock is the
generator (system clock oscillator stopped)
0
—
0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
Note:
5.2
*
The initial value depends on the IRQAEC pin state. For details, see table 5.1.
System Clock Generator
Clock pulses can be supplied to the system clock divider either by connecting a crystal or ceramic
resonator, or by providing an external clock input.
The system clock oscillator or the on-chip oscillator for the system clock is selectable, as shown in
figure 5.1. For details on how to select the oscillator, see section 5.2.4, Selecting On-Chip
Oscillator for System Clock.
5.2.1
Connecting Crystal Resonator
Figure 5.2 shows a typical method of connecting a crystal resonator. An AT-cut parallel-resonance
crystal resonator should be used.
For precautionary notes on connection of the crystal resonator, see section 5.5.2, Notes on Board
Design.
C1
OSC1
OSC2
C2
Frequency
Manufacturer
4.19 MHz
NIHON DEMPA
KOGYO.,LTD.
C1, C2
Product Type Recommended Value
NR-18
12 pF ±20%
Figure 5.2 Typical Connection to Crystal Resonator
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 88 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.2.2
Connecting Ceramic Resonator
Figure 5.3 shows a typical method of connecting a ceramic resonator.
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
Frequency
Manufacturer
Product Type
C 1 , C2
Recommended Value
4.194 MHz Murata Manufacturing CSTLS4M19G53-B0 15 pF (on-chip)
CSTLS4M19G56-B0 47 pF (on-chip)
Co., Ltd.
Figure 5.3 Typical Connection to Ceramic Resonator
5.2.3
External Clock Input Method
Connect an external clock signal to pin OSC1, and leave pin OSC2 open. Figure 5.4 shows a
typical connection. The duty cycle of the external clock signal must be 45 to 55%.
OSC1
OSC2
External clock input
Open
Figure 5.4 Example of External Clock Input
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 89 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.2.4
Selecting On-Chip Oscillator for System Clock
The on-chip oscillator is selected by the input level on the IRQAEC pin during a reset*. The
selection of the system clock oscillator or on-chip oscillator for the system clock is as listed in
table 5.1. The level being input on the IRQAEC pin during a reset should be fixed to either Vcc or
GND, depending on the oscillator type to be selected. The level will be determined upon reset
cancellation
When the on-chip oscillator for the system clock is selected, connection of a resonator to OSC1 or
OSC2 is not necessary. In this case, the OSC1 pin should be fixed to Vcc or GND. The OSC2 pin
should be left open.
Notes: When programming or erasing the flash memory, e.g. by on-board programming, the
system clock oscillator should always be selected. Use of the on-chip emulator requires
either a connected resonator or the supply of an external clock signal, even if the on-chip
oscillator for the system clock is selected.
* This reset represents an external reset or power-on reset, but not a reset by the
watchdog timer.
Table 5.1
Selection of the System Clock Oscillator or On-Chip Oscillator for the System
Clock
IRQAEC Input Level
(During a Reset)
Oscillator of System Clock Pulse
Generator Circuit
OSCF
IRQAECF
Low
System clock oscillator
0
0
High
On-chip oscillator for system clock 1
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 90 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.3
Subclock Generator
Subclocks can be supplied either by connecting a crystal resonator, or by providing external clock
input.
5.3.1
Connecting 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator
Figure 5.5 shows an example of connection to a 32.768-kHz or 38.4-kHz crystal resonator. Notes
in section 5.5.2, Notes on Board Design, also apply to this connection.
C1
X1
X2
Note: Consult with the crystal resonator manufacturer
to determine the circuit constants.
C2
Frequency
Manufacturer
Product Name
Equivalent Series Resistance
38.4 kHz
Epson Toyocom
C-4-TYPE
30 kΩ (max.)
32.768 kHz
Epson Toyocom
C-001R
35 kΩ (max.)
C1 = C2 = 7 pF (typ.)
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to 32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator
1. When using a resonator other than the above, ensure optimal conditions by conducting
sufficient evaluation of consistency in cooperation with the manufacturer of the resonator.
Even if the above resonators or products equivalent to them are implemented, their oscillation
characteristics are affected by the board design. Be sure to use the actual board to evaluate
consistency as a system.
2. The consistency as a system has to be verified not only in a reset state (i.e., the RES pin is
driven low) but also in a state where a reset state has been exited (i.e., the low-level RES signal
has been driven high).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 91 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Figure 5.6 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator.
CS
LS
RS
X1
X2
CO
C O = 0.9 pF (typ.)
R S = 50 kΩ (typ.)
φW = 32.768 kHz/38.4kHz
Figure 5.6 Equivalent Circuit of 32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator
5.3.2
Pin Connection when not Using Subclock
When the subclock is not used, connect the X1 pin to GND and leave the X2 pin open, as shown
in figure 5.7.
X1
GND
X2
Open
Figure 5.7 Pin Connection when not Using Subclock
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 92 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.3.3
How to Input the External Clock
Connect the external clock to the X1 pin and leave the X2 pin open, as shown in figure 5.8.
X1
X2
External clock input
Open
Figure 5.8 Pin Connection when Inputting External Clock
Frequency
Subclock (φw)
Duty
45% to 55%
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 93 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.4
Prescalers
This LSI has two prescalers (prescaler S and prescaler W), and each has its own input clock signal.
Prescaler S is a 17-bit counter that has the system clock (φ) as its input clock. Its prescaled outputs
provide the internal clock signals that drive the on-chip peripheral modules.
Prescaler W is an 8-bit counter that has a frequency-divided signal (φW/4) derived from the watch
clock (φW) as its input clock. Its prescaled outputs provide the internal clock signals that drive the
on-chip peripheral modules.
5.4.1
Prescaler S
Prescaler S is a 17-bit counter using the system clock (φ) as its input clock. A divided output is
used as an internal clock of an on-chip peripheral module. Prescaler S is initialized to H'00000 at a
reset, and starts counting up on exit from the reset state. Prescaler S stops and is initialized to
H'00000 in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode. The CPU cannot
read from or write to prescaler S.
The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip peripheral modules. In active (mediumspeed) mode and sleep mode (medium-speed), the clock input to prescaler S is determined by the
division ratio designated by the MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR2.
5.4.2
Prescaler W
Prescaler W is an 8-bit counter that has a frequency-divided signal (φW/4) derived from the watch
clock (φW) as its input clock. This signal is further divided to produce internal clock signals for the
on-chip peripheral modules. Prescaler W is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and starts counting up on
exit from the reset state. Prescaler W stops in standby mode, but continues to operate in watch
mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 94 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.5
Usage Notes
5.5.1
Note on Resonators and Resonator Circuits
Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design. Therefore, resonators should be
assigned after being carefully evaluated by the user in the masked ROM version and flash memory
version, with referring to the examples shown in this section. Resonator circuit constants will
differ depending on a resonator, stray capacitance in its mounting circuit, and other factors.
Suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer. Design
the circuit so that the oscillator pin is never applied voltages exceeding its maximum rating. Figure
5.9 shows an example of crystal and ceramic resonator arrangement.
Vcc
OSC2
Vss
OSC1
RES
X2
X1
NMI
(Vss)
Figure 5.9 Example of Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Arrangement
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 95 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Figure 5.10 (1) shows an example measuring circuit with the negative resistance recommended by
the resonator manufacturer. Note that if the negative resistance of the circuit is less than that
recommended by the resonator manufacturer, it may be difficult to start the main oscillator.
If it is determined that oscillation does not occur because the negative resistance is lower than the
level recommended by the resonator manufacturer, the circuit must be modified as shown in figure
5.10 (2) through (4). Which of the modification suggestions to use and the capacitor capacitance
should be decided based upon evaluation results such as the negative resistance and the frequency
deviation.
Modification
point
OSC1
OSC1
C1
C1
OSC2
OSC2
C2
C2
Negative resistance,
addition of -R
(1) Negative Resistance Measuring Circuit
(2) Oscillator Circuit Modification Suggestion 1
Modification
point
Modification
point
C3
OSC1
C1
C2
OSC1
C1
OSC2
OSC2
(3) Oscillator Circuit Modification Suggestion 2
C2
(4) Oscillator Circuit Modification Suggestion 3
Figure 5.10 Negative Resistance Measurement and Circuit Modification Suggestions
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 96 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.5.2
Notes on Board Design
When using a crystal resonator (ceramic resonator), place the resonator and its load capacitors as
close as possible to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins. Other signal lines should be routed away from the
resonator circuit to prevent induction from interfering with correct oscillation (see figure 5.11).
Avoid
Signal A
Signal B
C1
OSC1
C2
OSC2
Figure 5.11 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Note: When a crystal resonator or ceramic resonator is connected, consult with the crystal
resonator and ceramic resonator manufacturers to determine the circuit constants because
the constants differ according to the resonator, stray capacitance of the mounting circuit,
and so on.
5.5.3
Definition of Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
Figure 5.12 shows the oscillation waveform (OSC2), system clock (φ), and microcontroller
operating mode when a transition is made from standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, to
active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, with a resonator connected to the system clock
oscillator.
As shown in figure 5.12, when a transition is made to active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode,
from standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, in which the system clock oscillator is
halted, the sum of the following two times (oscillation start time and wait time) is required.
(1)
Oscillation Stabilization Time
The time from the point at which the system clock oscillator oscillation waveform starts to change
when an interrupt is generated, until the system clock starts to be generated.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 97 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
(2)
Wait Time
After the system clock is generated, the time required for the amplitude of the oscillation
waveform to increase, the oscillation frequency to stabilize, and the CPU and peripheral functions
to begin operating.
Oscillation
waveform
(OSC2)
System clock
(φ)
Oscillation
start time
Wait time
Operating
mode
Standby mode,
watch mode,
or subactive
mode
Oscillation stabilization wait time
Active (high-speed) mode or
active (medium-speed) mode
Interrupt accepted
Figure 5.12 Oscillation Stabilization Wait Time
As the oscillation stabilization wait time required is the same as the oscillation stabilization time
(trc) at power-on, specified in the AC characteristics, set the STS2 to STS0 bits in SYSCR1 to
specify the time longer than the oscillation stabilization time (trc).
Therefore, when a transition is made from standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode, to
active (high-speed/medium-speed) mode, with an resonator connected to the system clock
oscillator, careful evaluation must be carried out on the mounting circuit before deciding the
oscillation stabilization wait time. For the wait time, secure the time required for the amplitude of
the oscillation waveform to increase and the oscillation frequency to stabilize. In addition, since
the oscillation start time differs according to mounting circuit constants, stray capacitance, and so
forth, suitable constants should be determined in consultation with the resonator manufacturer.
5.5.4
Note on Subclock Stop State
To stop the subclock, a state transition should not be made except to mode in which the system
clock operates. If the state transition is made to other mode, it may result in incorrect operation.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 98 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
5.5.5
Note on the Oscillation Stabilization of Resonators
When a microcontroller operates, the internal power supply potential fluctuates slightly in
synchronization with the system clock. Depending on the individual resonator characteristics, the
oscillation waveform amplitude may not be sufficiently large immediately after the oscillation
stabilization wait time, making the oscillation waveform susceptible to influence by fluctuations in
the power supply potential. In this state, the oscillation waveform may be disrupted, leading to an
unstable system clock and incorrect operation of the microcontroller.
If incorrect operation occurs, change the setting of the standby timer select bits 3 to 0 (STS3 to
STS0) (bit 0 in the system control register 3 (SYSCR3) and bits 6 to 4 in the system control
register 1 (SYSCR1)) to give a longer wait time.
For example, if incorrect operation occurs with a wait time setting of 1,024 states, check the
operation with a wait time setting of 2,048 states or more. If the same kind of incorrect operation
occurs after a reset as after a state transition, hold the RES pin low for a longer period.
5.5.6
Note on Using On-Chip Power-On Reset
The power-on reset circuit in this LSI adjusts the reset clear time by the capacitor capacitance,
which is externally connected to the RES pin. The external capacitor capacitance should be
adjusted to secure the oscillation stabilization time before reset clearing. For details, refer to
section 23, Power-On Reset Circuit.
5.5.7
Note on Using the On-Chip Emulator
When using the on-chip emulator, programming and erasure of the flash memory require an
accurate system clock signal. The frequency of the on-chip oscillator for the system clock varies
according to voltage and temperature conditions. Thus, when the on-chip emulator is in use, a
resonator must be connected between the OSC1 and OSC2 pins or an external clock signal must
be supplied. In this case, the on-chip emulator is driven by the on-chip oscillator for the system
clock in the execution of user programs, and by the system clock oscillator in the programming
and erasure of the flash memory. This selection is achieved by fixing the level of the IRQAEC pin
to the low level during the reset period of the on-chip emulator.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 99 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 100 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
This LSI has eight modes of operation after a reset. These include a normal active (high-speed)
mode and seven power-down modes, in which power consumption is significantly reduced. The
module standby function reduces power consumption by selectively halting on-chip module
functions.
• Active (medium-speed) mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system
clock frequency can be selected from φOSC/8, φOSC/16, φOSC/32, and φOSC/64.
• Subactive mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. The subclock
frequency can be selected from φW/2, φW/4, and φW/8.
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock.
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode
The CPU halts. On-chip peripheral modules are operable on the system clock. The system
clock frequency can be selected from φOSC/8, φOSC/16, φOSC/32, and φOSC/64.
• Subsleep mode
The CPU halts. The on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock. The subclock
frequency can be selected from φW/2, φW/4, and φW/8.
• Watch mode
The CPU halts. The on-chip peripheral modules are operable on the subclock.
• Standby mode
The CPU and all on-chip peripheral modules halt.
• Module standby function
Independent of the above modes, power consumption can be reduced by halting on-chip
peripheral modules that are not used in module units.
Note: In this manual, active (high-speed) mode and active (medium-speed) mode are collectively
called active mode, and sleep (high-speed) mode and sleep (medium-speed) mode are
collectively called sleep mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 101 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1
Register Descriptions
The registers related to power-down modes are as follows.
• System control register 1 (SYSCR1)
• System control register 2 (SYSCR2)
• System control register 3 (SYSCR3)
• Clock halt registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3)
6.1.1
System Control Register 1 (SYSCR1)
SYSCR1 controls the power-down modes with SYSCR2 and SYSCR3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
SSBY
0
R/W
Software Standby
Selects the mode to transit after the execution of the
SLEEP instruction.
0: A transition is made to sleep mode or subsleep
mode.
1: A transition is made to standby mode or watch mode.
For details, see table 6.2.
6
5
4
STS2
STS1
STS0
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
Specify the time the CPU and peripheral modules wait
for stable clock operation after exiting from standby
mode, subactive mode, or watch mode to active mode
or sleep mode. These bits should be specified together
with the STS3 bit in SYSCR3 according to the operating
frequency so that the wait time is at least equal to the
oscillation stabilization time. The relationship between
the specified value and the number of wait states is
shown in table 6.1.
When an external clock is to be used, the minimum
value (STS3 = 0, STS2 = 1, STS1 = 0, STS0 = 1) is
recommended. When the on-chip oscillator for the
system clock is to be used, four states (STS3 = 1, STS2
= 1, STS1 = 0, STS0 = 1) are recommended. If a
setting other than the recommended value is made,
operation may start before the end of the wait time.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 102 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
LSON
0
R/W
Selects the system clock (φ) or subclock (φSUB) as the
CPU operating clock when watch mode is cleared.
0: The CPU operates on the system clock (φ)
1: The CPU operates on the subclock (φSUB)
2
TMA3
0
R/W
Selects the mode to which the transition is made after
the SLEEP instruction is executed with bits SSBY and
LSON in SYSCR1 and bits DTON and MSON in
SYSCR2. For details, see table 6.2.
1
MA1
1
R/W
Active Mode Clock Select 1 and 0
0
MA0
1
R/W
Select the operating clock in active (medium-speed)
mode and sleep (medium-speed) mode. The MA1 and
MA0 bits should be written to in active (high-speed)
mode or subactive mode.
00: φOSC/8
01: φOSC/16
10: φOSC/32
11: φOSC/64
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 103 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.2
System Control Register 2 (SYSCR2)
SYSCR2 controls the power-down modes with SYSCR1 and SYSCR3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4
NESEL
1
R/W
Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select
This bit selects the sampling frequency of φOSC when φW
is sampled. When a system clock is used, clear this bit
to 0.When the on-chip oscillator is selected, set this bit
to 1.
0: Sampling rate is φOSC/16.
1: Sampling rate is φOSC/4.
3
DTON
0
R/W
Direct Transfer on Flag
Selects the mode to which the transition is made after
the SLEEP instruction is executed with bits SSBY,
TMA3, and LSON in SYSCR1 and bit MSON in
SYSCR2. For details, see table 6.2.
2
MSON
0
R/W
Medium Speed on Flag
After standby, watch, or sleep mode is cleared, this bit
selects active (high-speed) or active (medium-speed)
mode.
0: Operation in active (high-speed) mode
1: Operation in active (medium-speed) mode
1
SA1
0
R/W
Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0
0
SA0
0
R/W
Select the operating clock frequency in subactive and
subsleep modes. The operating clock frequency
changes to the set frequency after the SLEEP
instruction is executed.
00: φW/8
01: φW/4
10: φW/2
11: Setting prohibited
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 104 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.3
System Control Register 3 (SYSCR3)
SYSCR3 controls the power-down modes with SYSCR1 and SYSCR2.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 1

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
0
STS3
0
R/W
Standby Timer Select 3
Specifies the time the CPU and peripheral modules wait
for stable clock operation after exiting from standby
mode, subactive mode, or watch mode to active mode
or sleep mode. This bit should be specified together
with the STS2 to STS0 bits in SYSCR1 according to the
operating frequency so that the wait time is at least
equal to the oscillation stabilization time. The
relationship between the specified value and the
number of wait states is shown in table 6.1.
When an external clock is to be used, the minimum
value (STS3 = 0, STS2 = 1, STS1 = 0, STS0 = 1) is
recommended. When the on-chip oscillator for the
system clock is to be used, four states (STS3 = 1, STS2
= 1, STS1 = 0, STS0 = 1) is recommended. If a setting
other than the recommended value is made, operation
may start before the end of the wait time.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 105 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.1
Operating Frequency and Wait Time
Bit
Operating Frequency and Wait Time
Number of
STS3 STS2 STS1 STS0
Wait States
10 MHz
8 MHz
6 MHz
5 MHz
4.194 MHz 3 MHz
2 MHz
0
0
0
0
8,192 states
819.2
1,024.0
1,365.3
1,638.4
1,953.3
2,730.7
4,096.0
0
0
0
1
16,384 states
1,638.4
2,048.0
2,730.7
3,276.8
3,906.5
5,461.3
8,192.0
0
0
1
0
1,024 states
102.4
128.0
170.7
204.8
244.2
341.3
512.0
0
0
1
1
2,048 states
204.8
256.0
341.3
409.6
488.3
682.7
1,024.0
0
1
0
0
4,096 states
409.6
512.0
682.7
819.2
976.6
1,365.3
2,048.0
0
1
0
1
2 states
0.2
0.3
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
1.0
(external clock
input)
0
1
1
0
8 states
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.6
1.9
2.7
4.0
0
1
1
1
16 states
1.6
2.0
2.7
3.2
3.8
5.3
8.0
1
0
0
0
256 states
25.6
32.0
42.7
51.2
61.0
85.3
128.0
1
0
0
1
512 states
51.2
64.0
85.3
102.4
122.1
170.7
256.0
1
0
1
0
32,768 states
3,276.8
4,096.0
5,461.3
6,553.6
7,813.1
10,922.7
16,384.0
1
0
1
1
65,536 states
6,553.6
8,192.0
10,922.7
13,107.2
15,626.1
21,845.3
32,768.0
1
1
0
0
131,072 states 13,107.2
16,384.0
21,845.3
26,214.4
31,252.3
43,690.7
65,536.0
1
1
0
1
4 states
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.3
2.0
1
1
1
0
32 states
3.2
4.0
5.3
6.4
7.6
10.7
16.0
1
1
1
1
128 states
12.8
16.0
21.3
25.6
30.5
42.7
64.0
Note: Time unit is µs.
When an external clock is input, bits STS3 to STS0 should be set as external clock input
mode before mode transition is executed. When an external clock is not used, these bits
should not be set as external clock input mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 106 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.1.4
Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3)
CKSTPR1, CKSTPR2, and CKSTPR3 allow the on-chip peripheral modules to enter the standby
state in module units.
• CKSTPR1
Bit
7
Initial
Value R/W
Bit Name
1 3
S4CKSTP* * 1
R/W
Description
SCI4 Module Standby
The SCI4 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to
0.
6
S31CKSTP
1
R/W
SCI3_1 Module Standby*
2
The SCI3_1 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
5
S32CKSTP
1
R/W
SCI3_2 Module Standby*
2
The SCI3_2 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
1
to 0.*
4
ADCKSTP
1
R/W
A/D Converter Module Standby
The A/D converter enters standby mode when this bit is
cleared to 0.
3
—
1
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to.
2
TFCKSTP
1
R/W
Timer F Module Standby
Timer F enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to 0.
1
FROMCK
1 3
STP* *
1
R/W
Flash Memory Module Standby
Flash memory enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0. When the addresses H'000000 to H'0000FF of the
flash memory space is accessed while this bit is set to 0,
the RAM emulation function is enabled and the addresses
H'FFFC00 to H'FFFCFF of the RAM space can be
accessed. For details, see section 7.4, Using RAM to
Emulate Flash Memory.
The RAM emulation function is supported only by the FZTAT version.
0
RTCCKSTP
1
R/W
RTC Module Standby
RTC enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 107 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
• CKSTPR2
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ADBCKSTP
1
R/W
Address Break Module Standby
The address break enters standby mode when this bit is
cleared to 0.
6
TPUCKSTP
1
R/W
TPU Module Standby
The TPU enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to
0.
5
IICCKSTP
1
R/W
IIC2 Module Standby
The IIC2 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared to
0.
4
PW2CKSTP
1
R/W
PWM2 Module Standby
The PWM2 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
3
AECCKSTP
1
R/W
Asynchronous Event Counter Module Standby
The asynchronous event counter enters standby mode
when this bit is cleared to 0.
2
WDCKSTP
1
R/W*
4
Watchdog Timer Module Standby
The watchdog timer enters standby mode when this bit is
cleared to 0.
1
PW1CKSTP
1
R/W
PWM1 Module Standby
The PWM1 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
0
LDCKSTP
1
R/W
LCD Module Standby
The LCD controller/driver enters standby mode when this
bit is cleared to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 108 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
• CKSTPR3
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
S33CKSTP
1
R/W
SCI3_3 Module Standby*
2
The SCI3_3 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
6
TCCKSTP
1
R/W
Timer C Module Standby
The timer C enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
5
TGCKSTP
1
R/W
Timer G Module Standby
The timer G enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
4
PW4CKSTP
1
R/W
PWM4 Module Standby
The PWM4 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
3
PW3CKSTP
1
R/W
PWM3 Module Standby
The PWM3 enters standby mode when this bit is cleared
to 0.
2 to 0
—
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified in the masked ROM version.
When the SCI3 module standby is set, all registers in the SCI3 enter the reset state.
This bit must be set to 1 when the on-chip emulator is used.
This bit is valid when the WDON bit in TCSRW is 0. If this bit is cleared to 0 while the
WDON bit is set to 1 (while the watchdog timer is operating), this bit is cleared to 0.
However, the watchdog timer does not enter module standby mode and continues
operating. When the WDON bit is cleared to 0 by software, this bit is valid and the
watchdog timer enters module standby mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 109 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2
Mode Transitions and States of LSI
Figure 6.1 shows the possible transitions among these operating modes. A transition is made from
the program execution state to the program halt state of the program by executing a SLEEP
instruction. The program execution state is recovered from the program halt state by an interrupt.
A direct transition between active mode and subactive mode, which are both program execution
states, can be made without halting the program. The operating frequencies can be changed in the
same mode by a direct transition from active mode to active mode, or from subactive mode to
subactive mode. RES input enables transitions from a mode to the reset state. Table 6.2 shows the
transition conditions of each mode after the SLEEP instruction is executed and a mode to return
by an interrupt. Table 6.3 shows the internal states of the LSI in each mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 110 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Program
execution state
Reset state
Program
SLEEP d
instruction
halt state
Standby
Active
(high-speed
mode)
a
P n
E
E tio
SL truc
s
in
g
d SLEEP
instruction
f
SLEEP
instruction
P n
EE tio
SL truc
s
in
SLEEP
instruction
Sleep
(high-speed)
mode
3
4
mode
Program
halt state
SLEEP
instruction a
4
b
SLEEP b
instruction
Active
(medium-speed)
mode
e
SLEEP
instruction
1
j
SLEEP
instruction
S
ins LE
tru EP
cti
on
e
i
1
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction c
Subactive
: Transition is made after exception handling
is executed.
Mode Transition Conditions (1)
LSON
MSON SSBY
Subsleep
2
mode
1
mode
SLEEP
instruction
i
h
SLEEP
instruction
e
SLEEP
instruction
Watch
3
Sleep
(medium-speed)
mode
mode
Power-down modes
Mode Transition Conditions (2)
TMA3
DTON
0
Interrupt Sources
1
NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQAEC,
a
0
0
0
*
b
0
1
0
*
0
c
1
*
0
1
0
d
0
*
1
0
0
e
*
*
1
1
0
f
0
0
0
*
1
3
All interrupts
g
0
1
0
*
1
4
NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQAEC,
h
0
1
1
1
1
i
1
*
1
1
1
j
0
0
1
1
WKP0 to WKP7, RTC, WDT, AEC, Timer C,
Timer F, Timer G
2
All interrupts except for TPU, IIC2, A/D, address
break interrupts
WKP0 to WKP7, WDT, AEC
1
* Don't care
Note: A transition between different modes cannot be made to occur simply because an interrupt
request is generated. Make sure to enable the interrupt request.
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 111 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.2
Transition Mode after SLEEP Instruction Execution and Interrupt Handling
Transition
Mode after
SLEEP
State
Transition
Before
Instruction Mode due to
Transition LSON MSON SSBY TMA3 DTON Execution Interrupt
Active
(highspeed)
mode
Symbol in
Figure 6.1
0
0
0
x
0
Sleep
(highspeed)
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
a
0
1
0
x
0
Sleep
(mediumspeed)
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
b
0
0
1
0
0
Standby
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
d
0
1
1
0
0
Standby
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
d
0
0
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
e
0
1
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
e
1
x
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Subactive mode e
0
0
0
x
1
Active
(highspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)


0
1
0
x
1
Active
(mediumspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)

g
1
x
1
1
1
Subactive
mode
(direct
transition)

i
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 112 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Transition
Mode after
SLEEP
State
Transition
Before
Instruction Mode due to
Transition LSON MSON SSBY TMA3 DTON Execution Interrupt
Active
(mediumspeed)
mode
Symbol in
Figure 6.1
0
0
0
x
0
Sleep
(highspeed)
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
a
0
1
0
x
0
Sleep
(mediumspeed)
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
b
0
0
1
0
0
Standby
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
d
0
1
1
0
0
Standby
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
d
0
0
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
e
0
1
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
e
1
1
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Subactive mode e
0
0
0
x
1
Active
(highspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)

f
0
1
0
x
1
Active
(mediumspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)


1
x
1
1
1
Subactive
mode
(direct
transition)

i
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 113 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Transition
Mode after
SLEEP
State
Transition
Before
Instruction Mode due to
Transition LSON MSON SSBY TMA3 DTON Execution Interrupt
Subactive
mode
Symbol in
Figure 6.1
1
x
0
1
0
Subsleep
mode
Subactive mode c
0
0
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active (highspeed) mode
e
0
1
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Active
(mediumspeed) mode
e
1
x
1
1
0
Watch
mode
Subactive mode e
0
0
1
1
1
Active
(highspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)

j
0
1
1
1
1
Active
(mediumspeed)
mode
(direct
transition)

h
1
x
1
1
1
Subactive
mode
(direct
transition)


[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 114 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Table 6.3
Internal State in Each Operating Mode
Active Mode
Sleep Mode
MediumHigh-speed speed
High-speed
Mediumspeed
Subactive
Watch Mode Mode
System clock oscillator
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Subclock oscillator
Functioning/ Functioning/ Functioning/
halted
halted
halted
Functioning/
halted
Functioning
CPU
Functioning
Halted
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
Retained
Function
Instructions
Functioning
Functioning
RAM
Subsleep
Mode
Stand-by
Mode
Halted
Halted
Halted
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning/
halted
Functioning
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Functioning
Registers
Retained*1
I/O
External
interrupts
NMI
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning/
retained*2
Functioning/ Functioning/ Retained
retained*2
retained*2
Timers F, G
Functioning/
retained*3
Functioning/ Functioning/ Retained
retained*3
retained*3
Asynchronous
event counter
Functioning
Functioning
RTC
Functioning/
retained*8
Functioning/ Functioning/ Retained
retained*8
retained*8
TPU
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
WDT
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQAEC
WKP0 to WKP7
Peripheral
modules
Timer C
4
4
Functioning
4
Functioning
5
retained*
retained*
retained*
retained*
SCI3/IrDA
Reset
Functioning/
Functioning/
Reset
retained*
retained*
IIC2
Retained
Retained
Retained
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
6
6
Retained
PWM
A/D converter
LCD
7
Address break
Notes:
Retained
Retained
7
7
retained*
retained*
retained*
Retained
Functioning
Retained
1.
Register contents are retained. Output is the high-impedance state.
2.
Functioning if φW/4, φW/256, or φW/1024 is selected as an internal clock. Halted and retained otherwise.
3.
Functioning if φW/4 is selected as an internal clock. Halted and retained otherwise.
4.
Functioning if the on-chip WDT oscillator is selected or if φW/16, or φW/256 is selected as an internal clock. Halted
and retained otherwise.
5.
Functioning if the on-chip WDT oscillator is selected. Halted and retained otherwise.
6.
Functioning if φW/2 is selected as an internal clock. Halted and retained otherwise.
7.
Functioning if φW, φW/2, or φW/4 is selected as an internal clock. Halted and retained otherwise.
8.
Functions if the RTC operation is selected as a clock source. Halted and retained for the free-running counter.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 115 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2.1
Sleep Mode
In sleep mode, CPU operation is halted but the system clock oscillator, on-chip oscillator for the
system clock, subclock oscillator, and on-chip peripheral modules continues operating. In sleep
(medium-speed) mode, the on-chip peripheral modules function at the clock frequency set by the
MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR1. CPU register contents are retained.
Sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, sleep mode is cleared and
interrupt exception handling starts. Sleep mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the
requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable bit. After sleep mode is cleared, a transition
is made from sleep (high-speed) mode to active (high-speed) mode or from sleep (medium-speed)
mode to active (medium-speed) mode.
When the RES pin goes low, the CPU goes into the reset state and sleep mode is cleared. Since an
interrupt request signal is synchronous with the system clock, the maximum time of 2/φ (s) may be
delayed from the point at which an interrupt request signal occurs until the interrupt exception
handling is started.
6.2.2
Standby Mode
In standby mode, the system clock oscillator and on-chip oscillator for the system clock is halted,
so the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules except for WDT and asynchronous event counter stop
functioning. However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and
some on-chip peripheral module registers are retained. On-chip RAM contents will be retained as
long as the voltage set by the RAM data retention voltage is provided. The I/O ports go to the
high-impedance state.
Standby mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, the system clock
oscillator and on-chip oscillator for the system clock start. After the time set in the STS2 to STS0
bits in SYSCR1 and the STS3 bit in SYSCR3 has elapsed, standby mode is cleared and interrupt
exception handling starts. After standby mode is cleared, a transition is made to active (highspeed) or active (medium-speed) mode according to the MSON bit in SYSCR2. Standby mode is
not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt
enable bit.
When a reset source is generated in standby mode, the system clock oscillator and the on-chip
oscillator for the system clock start. The RES pin must be kept low until the system clock
oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has elapsed. The CPU starts reset exception handling
when the RES pin is driven high.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 116 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2.3
Watch Mode
In watch mode, the system clock oscillator, on-chip oscillator for the system clock, and CPU
operation stop and on-chip peripheral modules stop functioning except for the WDT, RTC, timer
C, timer F, timer G, asynchronous event counter, and LCD controller/driver. However, as long as
the rated voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, some on-chip peripheral module
registers, and on-chip RAM are retained. The I/O ports retain their state before the transition.
Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, watch mode is cleared and
interrupt exception handling starts. When watch mode is cleared by an interrupt, a transition is
made to active (high-speed) mode, active (medium-speed) mode, or subactive mode depending on
the settings of the LSON bit in SYSCR1 and the MSON bit in SYSCR2. When the transition is
made to active mode, after the time set in the STS2 to STS0 bits in SYSCR1 and the STS3 bit in
SYSCR3 has elapsed, interrupt exception handling starts. Watch mode is not cleared if the I bit in
CCR is set to 1 or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable register.
When a reset source is generated in watch mode, the system clock oscillator starts. The RES pin
must be kept low until the system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has elapsed.
The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES pin is driven high.
6.2.4
Subsleep Mode
In subsleep mode, the CPU operation stops but on-chip peripheral modules other than the TPU,
A/D converter, PWM, IIC2, and address break continue running. As long as a required voltage is
applied, the contents of CPU registers, the on-chip RAM, and some registers of the on-chip
peripheral modules are retained. I/O ports keep the same states as before the transition.
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt. When an interrupt is requested, subsleep mode is cleared
and interrupt exception handling starts. After subsleep mode is cleared, a transition is made to
subactive mode. Subsleep mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested
interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable register.
When a reset source is generated in subsleep mode, the system clock oscillator starts. The RES pin
must be kept low until the system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has elapsed.
The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES pin is driven high.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 117 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.2.5
Subactive Mode
In subactive mode, the system clock oscillator and the on-chip oscillator for the system clock stop
functioning but on-chip peripheral modules other than the A/D converter, PWM, TPU, and IIC2
continue to operate. As long as a required voltage is applied, the contents of some registers of the
on-chip peripheral modules are retained.
Subactive mode is cleared by the SLEEP instruction. When subacitve mode is cleared, a transition
to subsleep mode, active mode, or watch mode is made, depending on the combination of bits
SSBY, LSON, and TMA3 in SYSCR1 and bits MSON and DTON in SYSCR2.
When a reset source is generated in subactive mode, the system clock oscillator starts. The RES
pin must be kept low until the system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has
elapsed. The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES pin is driven high.
The operating frequency of subactive mode is selected from φW/2, φW/4, and φW/8 by the SA1 and
SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the SLEEP instruction is executed, the operating frequency changes to
the frequency which is set before the execution.
6.2.6
Active (Medium-Speed) Mode
In active (medium-speed) mode, the clock set by the MA1 and MA0 bits in SYSCR1 is used as the
system clock, and the CPU and on-chip peripheral modules function.
Active (medium-speed) mode is cleared by the SLEEP instruction. When active (medium-speed)
mode is cleared, a transition to standby mode is made depending on the combination of bits
SSBY, LSON, and TMA3 in SYSCR1, a transition to watch mode is made depending on the
combination of bits SSBY and TMA3 in SYSCR1, or a transition to sleep mode is made
depending on the combination of bits SSBY and LSON in SYSCR1. Moreover, a transition to
active (high-speed) mode or subactive mode is made by a direct transition. When a reset source is
generated in active (medium-speed) mode, the CPU goes into the reset state and active (mediumsleep) mode is cleared.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 118 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3
Direct Transition
The CPU can execute programs in two modes: active and subactive modes. A direct transition is
made between these two modes without stopping program execution. A direct transition can also
be made when the operating clock is changed in active and subactive modes. The transition is
made via the sleep or watch mode, by setting the DTON bit in SYSCR2 to 1 to execute a SLEEP
instruction. After the mode transition, direct transition interrupt exception handling starts.
Note that if a direct transition is attempted while the I bit in CCR is 1, the transition is made to the
sleep or watch mode, though not returning from the mode.
6.3.1
Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY and LSON
bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to 0 and the MSON and DTON bits in SYSCR2 are set to 1, a
transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode via sleep mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (1).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt
exception handling execution states) × (tcyc after transition) … ……(1)
Example: When φosc/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock after the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 1tosc + 14 × 8tosc = 115tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 119 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3.2
Direct Transition from Active (High-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode while the SSBY, TMA3, and
LSON bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1 and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made
to subactive mode via watch mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (2).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt
exception handling execution states) × (tsubcyc after transition) ……(2)
Example: When φw/8 is selected as the subactive operating clock after the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 1tosc + 14 × 8tw = 3tosc + 112tw
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
6.3.3
Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the SSBY and
LSON bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, and the DTON
bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made to active (high-speed) mode via sleep mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (3).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt
exception handling execution states) × (tcyc after transition) ………..(3)
Example: When φosc/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock before the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tosc + 14 × 1tosc = 38tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 120 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3.4
Direct Transition from Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to Subactive Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed) mode while the SSBY, LSON,
and TMA3 bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1 and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is
made to subactive mode via watch mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (4).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tcyc before transition) + (Number of interrupt
exception handling execution states) × (tsubcyc after transition) ……(4)
Example: When φosc/8 and φw/8 are selected as the CPU operating clock before and
after the transition, respectively
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tosc + 14 × 8tw = 24tosc + 112tw
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
6.3.5
Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (High-Speed) Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY and TMA3 bits in
SYSCR1 are set to 1, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is
cleared to 0, and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made directly to active (highspeed) mode via watch mode after the waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has
elapsed.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (5).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tsubcyc before transition) + (Wait time set in bits
STS2 to STS0) + (Number of interrupt exception handling execution
states) × (tcyc after transition) ………………………………………..(5)
Example: When φw/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock after the transition and wait
time = 8192 states
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + (8192 + 14) × 1tosc = 24tw + 8206tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 121 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3.6
Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to Active (Medium-Speed) Mode
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY and TMA3 bits in
SYSCR1 are set to 1, the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, and the MSON and DTON bits in
SYSCR2 are set to 1, a transition is made directly to active (medium-speed) mode via watch mode
after the waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end of interrupt exception handling
(the direct transition time) is calculated by equation (6).
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution states) + (Number of internal
processing states)} × (tsubcyc before transition) + (Wait time set in bits
STS2 to STS0) + (Number of interrupt exception handling execution
states) × (tcyc after transition) ………………………………………..(6)
Example: When φw/8 and φosc/8 are selected as the CPU operating clock before and
after the transition, respectively, and wait time = 8192 states
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + 8192 × 1tosc + 14 × 8tosc = 24tw + 8304tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 122 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.3.7
(1)
Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Direct Transition
Direct transition from active (high-speed) mode to subactive mode
Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 6.5.2, Notes on External Input
Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.
(2)
Direct transition from active (medium-speed) mode to subactive mode
Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 6.5.2, Notes on External Input
Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.
(3)
Direct transition from subactive mode to active (high-speed) mode
Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 6.5.2, Notes on External Input
Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.
(4)
Direct transition from subactive mode to active (medium-speed) mode
Since the mode transition is performed via watch mode, see section 6.5.2, Notes on External Input
Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode.
6.4
Module Standby Function
The module-standby function can be set to any peripheral module. In module standby mode, the
clock supply to modules stops to enter the power-down mode. Module standby mode enables each
on-chip peripheral module to enter the standby state by clearing a bit that corresponds to each
module in CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3 and cancels the mode by setting the bit to 1 (see section 6.1.4,
Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3)).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 123 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.5
Usage Notes
6.5.1
Standby Mode Transition and Pin States
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed)
mode while the SSBY and TMA3 bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1 and the LSON bit in SYSCR1 is
cleared to 0, a transition is made to standby mode. At the same time, pins go to the highimpedance state (except pins for which the pull-up MOS is designated as on). Figure 6.2 shows
the timing in this case.
φ
Internal data bus
SLEEP instruction fetch
Next instruction fetch
SLEEP instruction execution
Pins
Internal processing
Port output
Active (high-speed) mode or active (medium-speed) mode
Figure 6.2 Standby Mode Transition and Pin States
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 124 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
High-impedance
Standby mode
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
6.5.2
(1)
Notes on External Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode
When External Input Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode or Watch Mode
When an external input signal such as NMI, IRQ, WKP, or IRQAEC is input, both the high- and
low-level widths of the signal must be at least two cycles of system clock φ or subclock φSUB
(referred to together in this section as the internal clock). As the internal clock stops in standby
mode and watch mode, the width of external input signals requires careful attention when a
transition is made via these operating modes. Ensure that external input signals conform to the
conditions stated in (3), Recommended Timing of External Input Signals, below.
(2)
When External Input Signals cannot be Captured because Internal Clock Stops
The case of falling edge capture is shown in figure 6.3.
As shown in the case marked "Capture not possible," when an external input signal falls
immediately after a transition to active mode or subactive mode, after oscillation is started by an
interrupt via a different signal, the external input signal cannot be captured if the high-level width
at that point is less than 2 tcyc or 2 tsubcyc.
(3)
Recommended Timing of External Input Signals
To ensure dependable capture of an external input signal, high- and low-level signal widths of at
least 2 tcyc or 2 tsubcyc are necessary before a transition is made to standby mode or watch mode, as
shown in "Capture possible: case 1."
External input signal capture is also possible with the timing shown in "Capture possible: case 2"
and "Capture possible: case 3," in which a 2 tyc or 2 tsubcyc level width is secured.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 125 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
Active (high-speed, medium-speed)
Operating mode mode or subactive mode
tcyc
tsubcyc
tcyc
tsubcyc
Standby mode or
watch mode
Wait for oscActive (high-speed, medium-speed)
illation
mode or subactive mode
stabilization
tcyc
tsubcyc
tcyc
tsubcyc
φ or φSUB
External input signal
Capture possible: case 1
Capture possible: case 2
Capture possible: case 3
Capture not possible
Interrupt by different signal
Figure 6.3 External Input Signal Capture when Signal Changes before/after Standby Mode
or Watch Mode
(4)
Input Pins to which these Notes Apply
NMI, IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQAEC, WKP0 to WKP7, TMIC, TMIF, TMIG, ADTRG,
TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2, and TIOCB2.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 126 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Section 7 ROM
The features of the 128-Kbyte flash memory built into the flash memory (F-ZTAT) version are
summarized below.
• Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erase is performed in single-block units.
The flash memory is configured as follows: 1 Kbyte × 4 blocks, 28 Kbytes × 1 block, 16
Kbytes × 1 block, 8 Kbytes × 2 blocks, and 32 Kbytes × 2 blocks. To erase the entire flash
memory, each block must be erased in turn.
• On-board programming
On-board programming/erasing can be done in boot mode, in which the boot program built
into the chip is started to erase or program of the entire flash memory. In normal user program
mode, individual blocks can be erased or programmed.
• Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
• Automatic bit rate adjustment
For data transfer in boot mode, this LSI's bit rate can be automatically adjusted to match the
transfer bit rate of the host.
• Programming/erasing protection
Sets software protection against flash memory programming/erasing.
• Power-down mode
Operation of the power supply circuit can be partly halted in subactive mode. As a result, flash
memory can be read with low power consumption.
• Module standby mode
Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when not used (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function). When the on-chip
debugger is in use, the bit 1 (FROMCKSTP) in the clock stop register 1 (CKSTPR1) must be
set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 127 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.1
Block Configuration
Figure 7.1 shows the block configuration of flash memory. The thick lines indicate erasing units,
the narrow lines indicate programming units, and the values are addresses. The 128-Kbyte flash
memory is divided into 1 Kbyte × 4 blocks, 28 Kbytes × 1 block, 16 Kbytes × 1 block, 8 Kbytes ×
2 blocks, and 32 Kbytes × 2 blocks . Erasing is performed in these units. Programming is
performed in 128-byte units starting from an address with lower eight bits H'00 or H'80.
EB0
Erase unit
1 Kbyte
EB1
Erase unit
1 Kbyte
EB2
Erase unit
1 Kbyte
EB3
Erase unit
1 Kbyte
EB4
Erase unit
28 Kbytes
EB5
Erase unit
16 Kbytes
EB6
Erase unit
8 Kbytes
EB7
Erase unit
8 Kbytes
EB8
Erase unit
32 Kbytes
EB9
Erase unit
32 Kbytes
H'000000
H'000001
H'000002
H'000380
H'000381
H'000382
H'000400
H'000401
H'000402
H'000780
H'000781
H'000782
H'000800
H'000801
H'000802
H'000B80
H'000B81
H'000B82
H'000C00
H'000C01
H'000C02
H'000F80
H'000F81
H'000F82
H'001000
H'001001
H'001002
H'007F80
H'007F81
H'007F82
H'008000
H'008001
H'008002
H'00BF80
H'00BF81
H'00BF82
H'00C000
H'00C001
H'00C002
H'00DF80
H'00DF81
H'00DF82
H'00E000
H'00E001
H'00E002
H'00FF80
H'00FF81
H'00FF82
H'010000
H'010001
H'010002
H'017F80
H'017F81
H'017F82
H'018000
H'018001
H'018002
H'01FF80
H'01FF81
H'01FF82
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'0003FF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
REJ09B0309-0200
H'00047F
H'0007FF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00087F
H'000BFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'000C7F
H'000FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00107F
H'007FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00807F
H'00BFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00C07F
H'00DFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'00E07F
H'00FFFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
H'01007F
H'017FFF
Programming unit: 128 bytes
Figure 7.1 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 128 of 692
H'00007F
H'01807F
H'01FFFF
Section 7 ROM
7.2
Register Descriptions
The flash memory has the following registers.
• Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1)
• Flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2)
• Erase block register 1 (EBR1)
• Erase block register 2 (EBR2)
• Flash memory power control register (FLPWCR)
• Flash memory enable register (FENR)
7.2.1
Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
FLMCR1 is a register that makes the flash memory change to program mode, program-verify
mode, erase mode, or erase-verify mode. For details on register setting, refer to section 7.5, Flash
Memory Programming/Erasing.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0

Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
6
SWE
0
R/W
Software Write Enable
When this bit is set to 1, flash memory
programming/erasing is enabled. When this bit is
cleared to 0, other FLMCR1 register bits and all EBR1
bits cannot be set.
5
ESU
0
R/W
Erase Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
the erase setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the erase
setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before setting
the E bit to 1 in FLMCR1.
4
PSU
0
R/W
Program Setup
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
the program setup state. When it is cleared to 0, the
program setup state is cancelled. Set this bit to 1 before
setting the P bit in FLMCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 129 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
EV
0
R/W
Erase-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
erase-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, erase-verify
mode is cancelled.
2
PV
0
R/W
Program-Verify
When this bit is set to 1, the flash memory changes to
program-verify mode. When it is cleared to 0, programverify mode is cancelled.
1
E
0
R/W
Erase
When this bit is set to 1 while SWE=1 and ESU=1, the
flash memory changes to erase mode. When it is
cleared to 0, erase mode is cancelled.
0
P
0
R/W
Program
When this bit is set to 1 while SWE=1 and PSU=1, the
flash memory changes to program mode. When it is
cleared to 0, program mode is cancelled.
7.2.2
Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
FLMCR2 is a register that displays the state of flash memory programming/erasing. FLMCR2 is a
read-only register, and should not be written to.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
FLER
0
R
Flash Memory Error
Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation
on flash memory (programming or erasing). When
FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the errorprotection state.
See section 7.6.3, Error Protection, for details.
6 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 130 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.2.3
Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
EBR1 is a register that is used to specify the flash memory erase area block. EBR1 is initialized to
H'00 when the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit in EBR1 and EBR2 to 1 at
a time, or this will cause all the bits in EBR1 and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
EB7
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 8 Kbytes of EB7 (H'00E000 to
H'00FFFF) will be erased.
6
EB6
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 8 Kbytes of EB6 (H'00C000 to
H'00DFFF) will be erased.
5
EB5
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 16 Kbytes of EB5 (H'008000 to
H'00BFFF) will be erased.
4
EB4
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 28 Kbytes of EB4 (H'001000 to
H'007FFF) will be erased.
3
EB3
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB3 (H'000C00 to
H'000FFF) will be erased.
2
EB2
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB2 (H'000800 to
H'000BFF) will be erased.
1
EB1
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB1 (H'000400 to
H'0007FF) will be erased.
0
EB0
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 1 Kbyte of EB0 (H'000000 to
H'0003FF) will be erased.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 131 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.2.4
Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
EBR2 is a register that is used to specify the flash memory erase area block. EBR2 is initialized to
H'00 when the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is 0. Do not set more than one bit in EBR1 and EBR2 to 1 at
a time, or this will cause all the bits in EBR1 and EBR2 to be automatically cleared to 0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 2

All 0
R/(W)
Reserved
The initial value should not be changed.
1
EB9
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of EB9 (H'018000 to
H'01FFFF) will be erased.
0
EB8
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, 32 Kbytes of EB8 (H'010000 to
H'017FFF) will be erased.
7.2.5
Flash Memory Power Control Register (FLPWCR)
FLPWCR enables or disables a transition to the flash memory power-down mode when the LSI
switches to subactive mode. There are two modes: mode in which operation of the power supply
circuit of flash memory is partly halted in power-down mode and flash memory can be read, and
mode in which even if a transition is made to subactive mode, operation of the power supply
circuit of flash memory is retained and flash memory can be read.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PDWND
0
R/W
Power-Down Disable
When this bit is 0 and a transition is made to subactive
mode, the flash memory enters the power-down mode.
When this bit is 1, the flash memory remains in the
normal mode even after a transition is made to
subactive mode.
6 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 132 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.2.6
Flash Memory Enable Register (FENR)
Bit 7 (FLSHE) in FENR enables or disables the CPU access to the flash memory control registers,
FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, EBR2, and FLPWCR.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
FLSHE
0
R/W
Flash Memory Control Register Enable
Flash memory control registers can be accessed when
this bit is set to 1. Flash memory control registers
cannot be accessed when this bit is set to 0.
6 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
7.3
On-Board Programming Modes
There are two modes for programming/erasing of the flash memory; boot mode, which enables onboard programming/erasing, and programmer mode, in which programming/erasing is performed
with a PROM programmer. On-board programming/erasing can also be performed in user
program mode. At reset-start in reset mode, this LSI changes to a mode depending on the TEST
pin settings, NMI pin settings, and input level of each port, as shown in table 7.1. The input level
of each pin must be defined four states before the reset ends.
When changing to boot mode, the boot program built into this LSI is initiated. The boot program
transfers the programming control program from the externally-connected host to on-chip RAM
via SCI3 (channel 1). After erasing the entire flash memory, the programming control program is
executed. This can be used for programming initial values in the on-board state or for a forcible
return when programming/erasing can no longer be done in user program mode. In user program
mode, individual blocks can be erased and programmed by branching to the user program/erase
control program prepared by the user.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 133 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.1
TEST
Setting Programming Modes
NMI
P36
PB0
PB1
PB2
LSI State after Reset End
0
1
x
x
x
x
User mode
0
0
1
x
x
x
Boot mode
1
x
x
0
0
0
Programmer mode
[Legend]
x: Don't care
7.3.1
Boot Mode
Table 7.2 shows the boot mode operations between reset end and branching to the programming
control program.
1. When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in
the host beforehand. Prepare a programming control program in accordance with the
description in section 7.5, Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
2. SCI3 should be set to asynchronous mode, and the transfer format as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop
bit, and no parity. The inversion function of TXD and RXD pins by SPCR is set to “Not to be
inverted,” so do not put the circuit for inverting a value between the host and this LSI.
3. When the boot program is initiated, the chip measures the low-level period of asynchronous
SCI communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The chip then
calculates the bit rate of transmission from the host, and adjusts the SCI3 bit rate to match that
of the host. The reset should end with the RXD pin high. The RXD and TXD pins should be
pulled up on the board if necessary. After the reset is complete, it takes approximately 100
states before the chip is ready to measure the low-level period.
4. After matching the bit rates, the chip transmits one H'00 byte to the host to indicate the
completion of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end indication
(H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the chip. If reception could
not be performed normally, initiate boot mode again by a reset. Depending on the host's
transfer bit rate and system clock frequency of this LSI, there will be a discrepancy between
the bit rates of the host and the chip. To operate the SCI properly, set the host's transfer bit rate
and system clock frequency of this LSI within the ranges listed in table 7.3.
5. In boot mode, a part of the on-chip RAM area is used by the boot program. The area H'FFF380
to H'FFFE7F is the area to which the programming control program is transferred from the
host. The boot program area cannot be used until the execution state in boot mode switches to
the programming control program.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 134 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
6. Before branching to the programming control program, the chip terminates transfer operations
by SCI3 (by clearing the RE and TE bits in SCR to 0), however the adjusted bit rate value
remains set in BRR. Therefore, the programming control program can still use it for transfer of
program data or verify data with the host. The TXD pin is high (PCR42 = 1, P42 = 1). The
contents of the CPU general registers are undefined immediately after branching to the
programming control program. These registers must be initialized at the beginning of the
programming control program, as the stack pointer (SP), in particular, is used implicitly in
subroutine calls, etc.
7. Boot mode can be cleared by a reset. End the reset after driving the reset pin low, waiting at
least 20 states, and then setting the NMI pin. Boot mode is also cleared when a WDT overflow
occurs.
8.
Do not change the TEST pin and NMI pin input levels in boot mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 135 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Boot Mode Operation
Host Operation
Communication Contents
Processing Contents
Transfer of number of bytes of
programming control program
Flash memory erase
Bit rate adjustment
Boot mode initiation
Item
Table 7.2
LSI Operation
Processing Contents
Branches to boot program at reset-start.
Boot program initiation
Continuously transmits data H'00
at specified bit rate.
Transmits data H'55 when data H'00
is received error-free.
H'00, H'00 . . . H'00
H'00
H'55
Boot program
erase error
H'AA reception
Transmits number of bytes (N) of
programming control program to be
transferred as 2-byte data
(low-order byte following high-order
byte)
Transmits 1-byte of programming
control program (repeated for N times)
H'AA reception
H'FF
H'AA
Upper bytes, lower bytes
Echoback
H'XX
Echoback
H'AA
• Measures low-level period of receive data
H'00.
• Calculates bit rate and sets BRR in SCI3.
• Transmits data H'00 to host as adjustment
end indication.
H'55 reception.
Checks flash memory data, erases all flash
memory blocks in case of written data
existing, and transmits data H'AA to host.
(If erase could not be done, transmits data
H'FF to host and aborts operation.)
Echobacks the 2-byte data
received to host.
Echobacks received data to host and also
transfers it to RAM.
(repeated for N times)
Transmits data H'AA to host.
Branches to programming control program
transferred to on-chip RAM and starts
execution.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 136 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.3
System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of LSI Bit Rate is
Possible
Host Bit Rate
System Clock Frequency Range of LSI
9,600 bps
8 to 10 MHz
4,800 bps
4 to 10 MHz
2,400 bps
2 to 10 MHz
7.3.2
Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
On-board programming/erasing of an individual flash memory block can also be performed in user
program mode by branching to a user program/erase control program. The user must set branching
conditions and provide on-board means of supplying programming data. The flash memory must
contain the user program/erase control program or a program that provides the user program/erase
control program from external memory. As the flash memory itself cannot be read during
programming/erasing, transfer the user program/erase control program to on-chip RAM, as in boot
mode. Figure 7.2 shows a sample procedure for programming/erasing in user program mode.
Prepare a user program/erase control program in accordance with the description in section 7.5,
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing.
Reset-start
No
Program/erase?
Yes
Transfer user program/erase control
program to RAM
Branch to flash memory application
program
Branch to user program/erase control
program in RAM
Execute user program/erase control
program (flash memory rewrite)
Branch to flash memory application
program
Figure 7.2 Sample Flowchart of Programming/Erasing in User Program Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 137 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.4
Using RAM to Emulate Flash Memory
To use on-chip RAM in the realtime emulation of data to be written to the flash memory, the onchip RAM area can be overlaid on several blocks of flash memory (the emulation area).
Figure 7.3 shows an example where an area of on-chip RAM is overlaid on the emulation area of
the flash memory.
1. The area of on-chip RAM area to be overlaid on the emulation area (i.e. the overlay RAM
area) is fixed to the 256 bytes from H'FFFC00 to H'FFFCFF.
2. The block of flash memory on which the RAM can be overlaid (i.e. the emulation area) takes
up the 256 bytes from H'000000 to H'0000FF.
3. When the FROMCKSTP bit in CKSTPR1 is cleared to 0, the flash memory enters standby
mode. The overlay RAM area is overlaid on the emulation area and becomes the target for
access when the emulation area of the flash memory is accessed.
4. The overlay RAM area can be accessed at both the addresses within the flash memory area and
the original RAM addresses. When using RAM emulation, a vector table is required for the
overlaid RAM area.
5. Overlaying of the on-chip RAM is canceled when the FROMCKSTP bit in CKSTPR1 is set,
taking the flash memory out of standby mode. This should only be done after execution has
made the transition from the emulation area to the RAM area.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 138 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
H'000000
Flash memory
emulation area
(H'000000 to H'0000FF)
256 bytes
On-chip RAM
(shadow of H'FFFC00 to
H'FFFCFF)
256 bytes
Flash memory
Not used
On-chip RAM
overlay area
256 bytes
On-chip RAM
overlay area
256 bytes
Normal memory map
Memory map with
overlaid RAM area
H'0000FF
H'020000
H'FFFC00
H'FFFCFF
Figure 7.3 Address Map of Overlaid RAM Area
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 139 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.5
Flash Memory Programming/Erasing
A software method using the CPU is employed to program and erase flash memory in the onboard programming modes. Depending on the FLMCR1 setting, the flash memory operates in one
of the following four modes: Program mode, program-verify mode, erase mode, and erase-verify
mode. The programming control program in boot mode and the user program/erase control
program in user program mode use these operating modes in combination to perform
programming/erasing. Flash memory programming and erasing should be performed in
accordance with the descriptions in section 7.5.1, Program/Program-Verify and section 7.5.2,
Erase/Erase-Verify, respectively.
7.5.1
Program/Program-Verify
When writing data or programs to the flash memory, the program/program-verify flowchart shown
in figure 7.4 should be followed. Performing programming operations according to this flowchart
will enable data or programs to be written to the flash memory without subjecting the chip to
voltage stress or sacrificing program data reliability.
1. Programming must be done to an empty address. Do not reprogram an address to which
programming has already been performed.
2. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a time. A 128-byte data transfer must be
performed even if writing fewer than 128 bytes. In this case, H'FF data must be written to the
extra addresses.
3. Prepare the following data storage areas in RAM: A 128-byte programming data area, a 128byte reprogramming data area, and a 128-byte additional-programming data area. Perform
reprogramming data computation according to table 7.4, and additional programming data
computation according to table 7.5.
4. Consecutively transfer 128 bytes of data in byte units from the reprogramming data area or
additional-programming data area to the flash memory. The program address and 128-byte
data are latched in the flash memory. The lower 8 bits of the start address in the flash memory
destination area must be H'00 or H'80.
5. The time during which the P bit is set to 1 is the programming time. Table 7.6 shows the
allowable programming times.
6. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overprogramming due to program runaway, etc.
An overflow cycle of approximately 6.6 ms is allowed.
7.
For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower 2
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in words or in longwords from the address to which a
dummy write was performed.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 140 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
8.
The maximum number of repetitions of the program/program-verify sequence of the same bit
is 1,000.
Write pulse application subroutine
Apply Write Pulse
START
WDT enable
Set SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 1 µs
Set PSU bit in FLMCR1
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
*
Wait 50 µs
n←1
Set P bit in FLMCR1
m←0
Wait (Wait time=programming time)
Write 128-byte data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutively to flash memory
Clear P bit in FLMCR1
Wait 5 µs
Apply Write pulse
Set PV bit in FLMCR1
Clear PSU bit in FLMCR1
Wait 4 µs
Wait 5 µs
Disable WDT
Set block start address as
verify address
End Sub
H'FF dummy write to verify address
n←n+1
Wait 2 µs
*
Read verify data
Increment address
Verify data =
write data?
No
m←1
Yes
n≤6?
Yes
No
Additional-programming data computation
Reprogram data computation
No
128-byte
data verification
completed?
Yes
Clear PV bit in FLMCR1
Wait 2 µs
n ≤ 6?
Yes
No
Successively write 128-byte data from additionalprogramming data area in RAM to flash memory
Sub-Routine-Call
Apply Write Pulse
No
m= 0 ?
Yes
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Yes
n ≤ 1000 ?
No
Clear SWE bit in FLMCR1
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of programming
Programming failure
Note: *The RTS instruction must not be used during the following 1. and 2. periods.
1. A period between 128-byte data programming to flash memory and the P bit clearing
2. A period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading
Figure 7.4 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 141 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.4
Reprogram Data Computation Table
Program Data
Verify Data
Reprogram Data
Comments
0
0
1
Programming completed
0
1
0
Reprogram bit
1
0
1

1
1
1
Remains in erased state
Table 7.5
Additional-Program Data Computation Table
Reprogram Data
Verify Data
Additional-Program
Data
Comments
0
0
0
Additional-program bit
0
1
1
No additional programming
1
0
1
No additional programming
1
1
1
No additional programming
n
Programming
(Number of Writes) Time
In Additional
Programming
Comments
1 to 6
30
10
7 to 1,000
200

Table 7.6
Programming Time
Note: Time shown in µs.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 142 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.5.2
Erase/Erase-Verify
When erasing flash memory, the erase/erase-verify flowchart shown in figure 7.5 should be
followed.
1. Prewriting (setting erase block data to all 0s) is not necessary.
2. Erasing is performed in block units. Make only a single-bit specification in the erase block
register 1 (EBR1) or the erase block register 2 (EBR2). To erase multiple blocks, each block
must be erased in turn.
3. The time during which the E bit is set to 1 is the flash memory erase time.
4. The watchdog timer (WDT) is set to prevent overerasing due to program runaway, etc. An
overflow cycle of approximately 19.8 ms is allowed.
5. For a dummy write to a verify address, write 1-byte data H'FF to an address whose lower two
bits are B'00. Verify data can be read in longwords from the address to which a dummy write
was performed.
6. If the read data is not erased successfully, set erase mode again, and repeat the erase/eraseverify sequence as before. The maximum number of repetitions of the erase/erase-verify
sequence is 100.
7.5.3
Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts, including the NMI interrupt, are disabled while flash memory is being programmed
or erased, or while the boot program is executing, for the following three reasons:
1. Interrupt during programming/erasing may cause a violation of the programming or erasing
algorithm, with the result that normal operation cannot be assured.
2. If interrupt exception handling starts before the vector address is written or during
programming/erasing, a correct vector cannot be fetched and the CPU malfunctions.
3. If an interrupt occurs during boot program execution, normal boot mode sequence cannot be
carried out.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 143 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Erase start
SWE bit ← 1
Wait 1 µs
n←1
Set EBR1
Enable WDT
ESU bit ← 1
Wait 100 µs
E bit ← 1
Wait 10 ms
E bit ← 0
Wait 10 µs
ESU bit ← 0
10 µs
Disable WDT
EV bit ← 1
Wait 20 µs
Set block start address as verify address
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Wait 2 µs
*
n←n+1
Read verify data
Verify data = all '1'?
Increment address
No
Yes
No
Last address of block ?
Yes
No
EV bit ← 0
EV bit ← 0
Wait 4 µs
Wait 4µs
All erase block erased ?
n ≤100 ?
Yes
No
Yes
SWE bit ← 0
SWE bit ← 0
Wait 100 µs
Wait 100 µs
End of erasing
Erase failure
Note: * The RTS instruction must not be used during a period between dummy writing of H'FF to a verify address and verify data reading.
Figure 7.5 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 144 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.6
Program/Erase Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection; hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
7.6.1
Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted because of a transition to reset, subactive mode, subsleep mode, or standby
mode. Flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1), flash memory control register 2 (FLMCR2),
erase block register 1 (EBR1), and erase block register 2 (EBR2) are initialized. In a reset via the
RES pin, the reset state is not entered unless the RES pin is held low until oscillation stabilizes
after powering on. In the case of a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for the RES pulse
width specified in the AC Characteristics section.
7.6.2
Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented against programming/erasing of all flash memory blocks
by clearing the SWE bit in FLMCR1. When software protection is in effect, setting the P or E bit
in FLMCR1 does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode. By setting the erase block
register 1 (EBR1) or the erase block register 2 (EBR2), erase protection can be set for individual
blocks. When EBR1 and EBR2 are set to H'00, erase protection is set for all blocks.
7.6.3
Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when CPU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is forcibly aborted. Aborting the program/erase
operation prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing.
When the following errors are detected during programming/erasing of flash memory, the FLER
bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1, and the error protection state is entered.
• When the flash memory of the relevant address area is read during programming/erasing
(including vector read and instruction fetch)
• Immediately after exception handling excluding a reset during programming/erasing
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed during programming/erasing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 145 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are retained, however program mode or erase
mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred. Program mode or erase mode cannot be
re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV and EV bit settings are retained, and a
transition can be made to verify mode. Error protection can be cleared only by a reset.
7.7
Programmer Mode
In programmer mode, a PROM programmer can be used to perform programming/erasing via a
socket adapter, just as a discrete flash memory. Use a PROM programmer that supports the MCU
device type with the on-chip 128-Kbyte flash memory (FZTAT128V3).
7.8
Power-Down States for Flash Memory
In user mode, the flash memory will operate in either of the following states:
• Normal operating mode
The flash memory can be read and written to at high speed.
• Power-down operating mode
The power supply circuit of flash memory can be partly halted. As a result, flash memory can
be read with low power consumption.
• Standby mode
All flash memory circuits are halted.
Table 7.7 shows the correspondence between the operating modes of this LSI and the flash
memory. In subactive mode, the flash memory can be set to operate in power-down mode with the
PDWND bit in FLPWCR. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state from
power-down mode or standby mode, a period to stabilize operation of the power supply circuits
that were stopped is needed. When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, bits
STS3 to STS0 in SYSCR1 and SYSCR3 must be set to provide a wait time of at least 20 µs, even
when the external clock is in use.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 146 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Table 7.7
Flash Memory Operating States
Flash Memory Operating State
LSI Operating State
PDWND = 0 (Initial Value)
PDWND = 1
Active mode
Normal operating mode
Normal operating mode
Sleep mode
Normal operating mode
Normal operating mode
Subactive mode
Power-down mode
Normal operating mode
Subsleep mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Module standby mode*
Standby mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Standby mode
Note: *
7.9
When the flash memory returns to its normal operating state, a wait time of not less than
100 µs is required.
Notes on Setting Module Standby Mode
When the flash memory is set to enter module standby mode, the system clock supply is stopped
to the module, the function is stopped, and the state is the same as that in standby mode. Also
program operation is stopped in the flash memory. Therefore operation program should be
transferred to the RAM and the program should run in the RAM. Then the flash memory should
be set to enter module standby mode.
When the RAM emulation is not in use, if an interrupt is generated in module standby mode, the
vector address cannot be fetched. As a result, the program may run away.
Before the flash memory is set to enter module standby mode, the corresponding bit in the
interrupt enable register should be cleared to 0 and the I bit in CCR should be set to 1. Then after
the flash memory enters module standby mode, NMI and address break interrupt requests should
not be generated. Figure 7.6 shows a module standby mode setting when the RAM emulation is
not used.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 147 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 7 ROM
Transfer execution program
to RAM (user area)
Clear corresponding bit in
interrupt enable register to 0
Set I bit in CCR to 1
Jump to address of
execution program in RAM
Clear FROMCKSTP
bit in CRSTPR1 to 0
Figure 7.6 Module Standby Mode Setting when RAM Emulation is not Used
When the RAM emulation is used (an interrupt vector is provided), if an interrupt is generated in
module standby mode, the vector address can be set by assigning the interrupt vector to the RAM,
and this prevents the program to run away. For details, see section 7.4, Using RAM to Emulate
Flash Memory.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 148 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 8 RAM
Section 8 RAM
Microcontrollers of the H8/38099 Group include an on-chip high-speed static RAM. The RAM is
connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling two-cycle access by the CPU to both byte
and word data.
Product Classification
RAM Size
RAM Address Ranges
Flash memory version
H8/38099F 4 Kbytes
H'FFCF80 to H'FFD37F, H'FFF380 to H'FFFF7F
Masked ROM version
H8/38099
4 Kbytes
H'FFCF80 to H'FFD37F, H'FFF380 to H'FFFF7F
H8/38098
2 Kbytes
H'FFF780 to H'FFFF7F
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 149 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 8 RAM
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 150 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Section 9 I/O Ports
Microcontrollers of the H8/38099 Group incorporate 75 general I/O ports and eight general inputonly ports. Port 9 is a large current port, which can drive 15 mA (@VOL = 1.0 V) when a low level
signal is output. Any of these ports can become an input port immediately after a reset. They can
also be used as I/O pins of the on-chip peripheral modules or external interrupt input pins, and
these functions can be switched depending on the register settings. The registers for selecting these
functions can be divided into two types: those included in I/O ports and those included in each onchip peripheral module. General I/O ports are comprised of the port control register for controlling
inputs/outputs and the port data register for storing output data and can select inputs/outputs in bit
units.
For details on the execution of bit manipulation instructions to the port data register (PDR), see
section 2.8.3, Bit-Manipulation Instruction. For details on block diagrams for each port, see
appendix B.1, I/O Port Block Diagrams.
9.1
Port 1
Port 1 is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as an SCI4 I/O pin, TPU I/O pins,
and asynchronous event counter input pins. Figure 9.1 shows the pin configuration.
P16/SCK4
Port 1
P15/TIOCB2
P14/TIOCA2/TCLKC
P13/TIOCB1/TCLKB
P12/TIOCA1/TCLKA
P11/AEVL
P10/AEVH
Figure 9.1 Port 1 Pin Configuration
Port 1 has the following registers.
• Port data register 1 (PDR1)
• Port control register 1 (PCR1)
• Port pull-up control register 1 (PUCR1)
• Port mode register 1 (PMR1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 151 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.1
Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
PDR1 is a register that stores data of port 1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
6
P16
0
R/W
5
P15
0
R/W
4
P14
0
R/W
3
P13
0
R/W
2
P12
0
R/W
1
P11
0
R/W
0
P10
0
R/W
9.1.2
Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
If port 1 is read while PCR1 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR1 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 1 is read while PCR1 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
PCR1 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
6
PCR16
0
W
5
PCR15
0
W
4
PCR14
0
W
3
PCR13
0
W
2
PCR12
0
W
1
PCR11
0
W
0
PCR10
0
W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 152 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Setting a PCR1 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin
(P16 to P10) an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR1 and in
PDR1 are valid when the corresponding pin is
designated as a general I/O pin.
PCR1 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.3
Port Pull-Up Control Register 1 (PUCR1)
PUCR1 controls the pull-up MOS of the port 1 pins in bit units.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7

1

Description
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
6
PUCR16
0
R/W
5
PUCR15
0
R/W
4
PUCR14
0
R/W
3
PUCR13
0
R/W
2
PUCR12
0
R/W
1
PUCR11
0
R/W
0
PUCR10
0
R/W
9.1.4
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
When a PCR1 bit is cleared to 0, setting the
corresponding PUCR1 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS
for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0
turns off the pull-up MOS.
PMR1 controls the selection of functions for port 1 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 2

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
1
AEVL
0
R/W
P11/AEVL Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P11/AEVL is used as P11 or as
AEVL.
0: P11 I/O pin
1: AEVL input pin
0
AEVH
0
R/W
P10/AEVH Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P10/AEVH is used as P10 or as
AEVH.
0: P10 I/O pin
1: AEVH input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 153 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.1.5
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P16/SCK4 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
SCSR4*
CKS3*
1*
1
1
1
PCR1
1
CKS2 to CKS0*
Other than B'111*
B'111*
0*
1
x*
1
1
PCR16
1
0
P16 input pin
1
P16 output pin
x
SCK4 input pin*
x
SCK4 output pin*
[Legend]
x: Don't care
TM
Notes: 1. Supported only by the F-ZTAT version.
2. Only port function is available for the masked ROM version.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 154 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
2
2
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P15/TIOCB2 pin
Register
Name
TMDR_2
TIOR_2
TCR_2
PCR1
Bit Name
MD1, MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
PCR15
B'00
B'0x00
B'xx
0
P15 input pin
1
P15 output pin
0
P15 input/TIOCB2 input pin
1
P15 output/TIOCB2 input pin
x
TIOCB2 output pin
Setting
Value
B'1xxx
B'0001 to B'0011,
B'0101 to B'0111
B'01
B'xxxx
B'10
B'11
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'10
Other than
B'10
Pin Function
0
P15 input pin
1
P15 output pin
0
P15 input pin
1
P15 output pin
0
P15 input pin
1
P15 output pin
0
P15 input pin
1
P15 output pin
x
TIOCB2 output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 155 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P14/TIOCA2/TCLKC pin
Register
Name
TMDR_2
TIOR_2
TCR_2
PCR1
Bit Name
MD1,
MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
PCR14
Setting
Value
B'00
B'0x00
B'xx
0
P14 input pin/
TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/
TCLKC*1 input pin
0
P14 input pin/TIOCA2/
TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/TIOCA2/
TCLKC*1 input pin
B'0001 to B'0011,
B'0101 to B'0111
x
TIOCA2 output pin*2/
TCLKC*1 input pin
B'xxxx
0
P14 input pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
0
P14 input pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
Other than B'xx00
x
TIOCA2 output pin*2/
TCLKC*1 input pin
B'xx00
0
P14 input pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
0
P14 input pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
1
P14 output pin/TCLKC*1 input pin
x
TIOCA2 output pin/
TCLKC*1 input pin
B'1xxx
B'01
B'10
B'11
B'xx00
Other than B'xx00
B'01
Other than
B'01
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. When the TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits in TCR_2 are set to B'110, the pin function becomes
the TCLKC input pin.
2. The output of the TIOCB2 pin is disabled.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 156 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P13/TIOCB1/TCLKB pin
Register
Name
TMDR_1
TIOR_1
TCR_1
PCR1
Bit Name
MD1,
MD0
IOB3 to IOB0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
PCR13
Setting
Value
B'00
B'0x00
B'xx
0
P13 input pin/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
0
P13 input pin/TIOCB1/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TIOCB1/TCLKB* input pin
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
x
TIOCB1 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
B'xxxx
0
P13 input pin/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
0
P13 input pin/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
B'1xxx
B'01
B'10
B'11
B'xx00
Other than
B'xx00
B'10
Other than
B'10
Pin Function
0
P13 input pin/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
0
P13 input pin/TCLKB* input pin
1
P13 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
x
TIOCB1 output pin/TCLKB* input pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Note: * When the TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits in either TCR_1 or TCR_2 are set to B'101, the pin
function becomes the TCLKB input pin.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 157 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P12/TIOCA1/TCLKA pin
Register
Name
TMDR_1
TIOR_1
TCR_1
PCR1
Bit Name
MD1, MD0
IOA3 to IOA0
CCLR1,
CCLR0
PCR12
B'00
B'0x00
B'xx
0
P12 input pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
0
P12 input pin/TIOCA1/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TIOCA1/TCLKA*1 input pin
B'0001 to
B'0011,
B'0101 to
B'0111
x
TIOCA1 output pin*2/TCLKA*1 input pin
B'xxxx
0
P12 input pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
0
P12 input pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
Other than
B'xx00
x
TIOCA1 output pin*2/TCLKA*1 input pin
B'xx00
0
P12 input pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
0
P12 input pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
1
P12 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
x
TIOCA1 output pin/TCLKA*1 input pin
Setting
Value
B'1xxx
B'01
B'10
B'11
B'xx00
Other than
B'xx00
B'01
Other than
B'01
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Notes: 1. When the TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits in either TCR_1 or TCR_2 are set to B'100, the pin
function becomes the TCLKA input pin.
2. The output of the TIOCB1 pin is disabled.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 158 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P11/AEVL pin
Register Name
PMR1
PCR1
Bit Name
AEVL
PCR11
0
0
P11 input pin
1
P11 output pin
1
x
AEVL input pin
Register Name
PMR1
PCR1
Pin Function
Bit Name
AEVH
PCR10
0
0
P10 input pin
1
P10 output pin
x
AEVH input pin
Setting Value
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P10/AEVH pin
Setting Value
1
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.1.6
Input Pull-Up MOS
Port 1 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When a
PCR1 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR1 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.
(n = 6 to 0)
PCR1n
0
1
PUCR1n
0
1
x
Input Pull-Up MOS
Off
On
Off
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 159 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2
Port 3
Port 3 is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as an SCI4 I/O pin, SCI3_2 I/O
pin, IIC2 I/O pin, and RTC output pin. Figure 9.2 shows the pin configuration.
P37/SO4
Port 3
P36/SI4
P32/TXD32/SCL
P31/RXD32/SDA
P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT
Figure 9.2 Port 3 Pin Configuration
Port 3 has the following registers.
• Port data register 3 (PDR3)
• Port control register 3 (PCR3)
• Port pull-up control register 3 (PUCR3)
• Port mode register 3 (PMR3)
9.2.1
Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)
PDR3 is a register that stores data of port 3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
P37
0
R/W
6
P36
0
R/W
If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR3 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
5 to 3

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
P32
0
R/W
1
P31
0
R/W
0
P30
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 160 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR3 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 3 is read while PCR3 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.2
Port Control Register 3 (PCR3)
PCR3 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port 3.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCR37
0
W
6
PCR36
0
W
Setting a PCR3 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin
(P37 or P36) an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR3 and in
PDR3 are valid when the corresponding pin is
designated as a general I/O pin.
PCR3 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
5 to 3

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
PCR32
0
W
1
PCR31
0
W
0
PCR30
0
W
Setting a PCR3 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pins
(P32 to P30) an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR3 and in
PDR3 are valid when the corresponding pin is
designated as a general I/O pin.
PCR3 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 161 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.3
Port Pull-Up Control Register 3 (PUCR3)
PUCR3 controls the pull-up MOS of port 3 pins in bit units.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PUCR37
0
R/W
6
PUCR36
0
R/W
When a PCR3 bit is cleared to 0, setting the
corresponding PUCR3 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS
for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0
turns off the pull-up MOS.
5 to 1

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
0
PUCR30
0
R/W
9.2.4
Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
When a PCR3 bit is cleared to 0, setting the
corresponding PUCR3 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS
for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0
turns off the pull-up MOS.
PMR3 controls the selection of functions for port 3 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 1

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
0
TMOW
0
R/W
P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT is
used as P30/SCK32 or as TMOW/CLKOUT.
0: P30/SCK32 I/O pin
1: TMOW/CLKOUT output pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 162 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.2.5
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P37/SO4 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
SCR4*
TE*
0*
1
1*
1
1
1
PCR3
Pin Function
PCR37
0
P37 input pin
1
P37 output pin
x
SO4 output pin*
2
[Legend]
x: Don't care
TM
Notes: 1. Supported only by the F-ZTAT version.
2. Only port function is available for the masked ROM version.
• P36/SI4 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
SCR4*
RE*
0*
1
1*
1
1
1
PCR3
Pin Function
PCR36
0
P36 input pin
1
P36 output pin
x
SI4 input pin*
2
[Legend]
x: Don't care
TM
Notes: 1. Supported only by the F-ZTAT version.
2. Only port function is available for the masked ROM version.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 163 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P32/TXD32/SCL pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
ICCR1
PFCR
SPCR
PCR3
ICE
SC32S
SPC32
PCR32
0
0
0
0
P32 input pin
1
P32 output pin
x
TXD32 output pin
1
1
1
x
x
Pin Function
0
P32 input pin
1
P32 output pin
x
SCL I/O pin
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P31/RXD32/SDA pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
ICCR1
PFCR
SCR3_2
PCR3
ICE
SC32S
RE
PCR31
0
0
0
0
P31 input pin
1
P31 output pin
1
x
RXD32 input pin
x
0
P31 input pin
1
P31 output pin
x
SDA I/O pin
1
1
x
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 164 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT pin
Register
PMR3
PFCR
SMR3_2
SCR3_2
PCR3
Pin Function
Name
Bit Name
Setting
TMOW
CLKOUT1 CLKOUT0
0
x
x
SC32S
COM
CKE1
CKE0
PCR30
0
0
0
0
0
Value
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
x
x
x
P30 input pin
1
P30 output pin
x
SCK32 output pin
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
0
P30 input pin
1
P30 output pin
x
CLKOUT output pin (φOSC)
1
CLKOUT output pin (φOSC/2)
0
CLKOUT output pin (φOSC/4)
1
TMOW output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.2.6
Input Pull-Up MOS
Port 3 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When a
PCR3 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR3 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.
(n = 7, 6, 0)
PCR3n
PUCR3n
Input Pull-Up MOS
0
1
0
1
x
Off
On
Off
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 165 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3
Port 4
Port 4 is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as SCI3_1 I/O pins and timer F I/O
pins. Figure 9.3 shows its pin configuration.
Port 4
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH
P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL
P40/SCK31/TMIF
Figure 9.3 Port 4 Pin Configuration
Port 4 has the following registers.
• Port data register 4 (PDR4)
• Port control register 4 (PCR4)
• Port mode register 4 (PMR4)
9.3.1
Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)
PDR4 is a register that stores data of port 4.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 3

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
P42
0
R/W
1
P41
0
R/W
0
P40
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 166 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
If port 4 is read while PCR4 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR4 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 4 is read while PCR4 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.2
Port Control Register 4 (PCR4)
PCR4 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 4.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 3

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
PCR42
0
W
1
PCR41
0
W
0
PCR40
0
W
Setting a PCR4 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCR4 and in PDR4 are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
PCR4 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 167 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.3
Port Mode Register 4 (PMR4)
PMR4 controls the selection of functions for port 4 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 3

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
TMOFH
0
R/W
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH is used
as P42 or TXD31/IrTXD, or as TMOFH.
0: P42 I/O pin or TXD31/IrTXD output pin
1: TMOFH output pin
1
TMOFL
0
R/W
P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL is used
as P41 or RXD31/IrRXD, or as TMOFL.
0: P41 I/O pin or RXD31/IrRXD input pin
1: TMOFL output pin
0
TMIF
0
R/W
P40/SCK31/TMIF Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P40/SCK31/TMIF is used as
P40/SCK31 or as TMIF.
0: P40/SCK31 I/O pin
1: TMIF input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 168 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.3.4
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH pin
Pin Function
Register
Name
PMR4
PFCR
SPCR
IrCR
PCR4
Bit Name
TMOFH
SC31S
SPC31
IrE
PCR42
0
0
0
x
0
P42 input pin
1
P42 output pin
x
TXD31 output pin
Setting Value
1
0
1
1
1
x
x
x
IrTXD output pin
0
P42 input pin
1
P42 output pin
x
TMOFH output pin
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P41/RXD31/IrRXD/TMOFL pin
Register
Name
PMR4
PFCR
SCR3_1
IrCR
PCR4
Bit Name
TMOFL
SC31S
RE
IrE
PCR41
0
0
0
x
0
P41 input pin
1
P41 output pin
x
RXD31 output pin
Setting Value
1
0
1
1
1
x
x
x
IrRXD output pin
0
P41 input pin
1
P41 output pin
x
TMOFL output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 169 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P40/SCK31/TMIF pin
Register
Name
PMR4
PFCR
SMR3_1
Bit Name
TMIF
SC31S
COM
CKE1
CKE0
PCR40
0
0
0
0
0
0
Setting Value
SCR3_1
PCR4
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
x
x
Pin Function
P40 input pin
1
P40 output pin
x
SCK31 output pin
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
x
0
P40 input pin
1
P40 output pin
x
TMIF input pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.4
Port 5
Port 5 is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as wakeup interrupt input pins and
LCD segment output pins. Figure 9.4 shows the pin configuration.
P57/WKP7/SEG8
P56/WKP6/SEG7
Port 5
P55/WKP5/SEG6
P54/WKP4/SEG5
P53/WKP3/SEG4
P52/WKP2/SEG3
P51/WKP1/SEG2
P50/WKP0/SEG1
Figure 9.4 Port 5 Pin Configuration
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 170 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Port 5 has the following registers.
• Port data register 5 (PDR5)
• Port control register 5 (PCR5)
• Port pull-up control register 5 (PUCR5)
• Port mode register 5 (PMR5)
9.4.1
Port Data Register 5 (PDR5)
PDR5 is a register that stores data of port 5.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
P57
0
R/W
6
P56
0
R/W
5
P55
0
R/W
If port 5 is read while PCR5 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR5 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 5 is read while PCR5 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
4
P54
0
R/W
3
P53
0
R/W
2
P52
0
R/W
1
P51
0
R/W
0
P50
0
R/W
9.4.2
Port Control Register 5 (PCR5)
PCR5 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 5.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCR57
0
W
6
PCR56
0
W
5
PCR55
0
W
4
PCR54
0
W
Setting a PCR5 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCR5 and in PDR5 are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
3
PCR53
0
W
2
PCR52
0
W
1
PCR51
0
W
0
PCR50
0
W
PCR5 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 171 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.3
Port Pull-Up Control Register 5 (PUCR5)
PUCR5 controls the pull-up MOS of the port 5 pins in bit units.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PUCR57
0
R/W
6
PUCR56
0
R/W
5
PUCR55
0
R/W
When a PCR5 bit is cleared to 0, setting the
corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS
for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0
turns off the pull-up MOS.
4
PUCR54
0
R/W
3
PUCR53
0
R/W
2
PUCR52
0
R/W
1
PUCR51
0
R/W
0
PUCR50
0
R/W
9.4.4
Port Mode Register 5 (PMR5)
PMR5 controls the selection of functions for port 5 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
WKP7
0
R/W
P5n/WKPn/SEGn+1 Pin Function Switch
6
WKP6
0
R/W
5
WKP5
0
R/W
These bits select whether the pin is used as P5n or
WKPn when the pin is not used as SEGn+1 pin.
4
WKP4
0
R/W
0: P5n I/O pin
3
WKP3
0
R/W
1: WKPn input pin
2
WKP2
0
R/W
(n = 7 to 0)
1
WKP1
0
R/W
0
WKP0
0
R/W
[Legend]
For details on the SEGn+1 output pin, refer to section 21.3.1, LCD Port Control Register (LPCR).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 172 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.5
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P57/WKP7/SEG8 to P54/WKP4/SEG5 pins
(n = 7 to 4)
Register
Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PMR5
PCR5
SGS3 to SGS0
WKPn
PCR5n
B'000x, B'101x, B'11xx
0
0
P5n input pin
1
P5n output pin
0
WKPn input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
SEGn+1 output pin
1
Other than B'000x,
B'101x, B'11xx
x
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P53/WKP3/SEG4 to P50/WKP0/SEG1 pins
(m = 3 to 0)
Register
Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PMR5
PCR5
SGS3 to SGS0
WKPm
PCR5m
B'0000, B'1001, B'101x,
B'11xx
0
0
P5m input pin
1
P5m output pin
0
WKPm input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
SEGm+1 output pin
1
Other than B'0000,
B'1001, B'101x, B'11xx
x
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 173 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.4.6
Input Pull-Up MOS
Port 5 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When the
PCR5 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR5 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.
(n = 7 to 0)
PCR5n
0
1
PUCR5n
0
1
x
Input Pull-Up MOS
Off
On
Off
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.5
Port 6
Port 6 is an I/O pins; its pins can also be configured to function as LCD segment output pins.
Figure 9.5 shows the pin configuration.
P67/SEG16
P66/SEG15
Port 6
P65/SEG14
P64/SEG13
P63/SEG12
P62/SEG11
P61/SEG10
P60/SEG9
Figure 9.5 Port 6 Pin Configuration
Port 6 has the following registers.
• Port data register 6 (PDR6)
• Port control register 6 (PCR6)
• Port pull-up control register 6 (PUCR6)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 174 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.1
Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)
PDR6 is a register that stores data of port 6.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
P67
0
R/W
6
P66
0
R/W
5
P65
0
R/W
If port 6 is read while PCR6 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR6 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 6 is read while PCR6 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
4
P64
0
R/W
3
P63
0
R/W
2
P62
0
R/W
1
P61
0
R/W
0
P60
0
R/W
9.5.2
Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)
PCR6 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port 6.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCR67
0
W
6
PCR66
0
W
5
PCR65
0
W
4
PCR64
0
W
Setting a PCR6 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCR6 and in PDR6 are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
3
PCR63
0
W
2
PCR62
0
W
1
PCR61
0
W
0
PCR60
0
W
PCR6 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 175 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.5.3
Port Pull-Up Control Register 6 (PUCR6)
PUCR6 controls the pull-up MOS of the port 6 pins in bit units.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PUCR67
0
R/W
6
PUCR66
0
R/W
5
PUCR65
0
R/W
When a PCR6 bit is cleared to 0, setting the
corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the pull-up MOS
for the corresponding pin, while clearing the bit to 0
turns off the pull-up MOS.
4
PUCR64
0
R/W
3
PUCR63
0
R/W
2
PUCR62
0
R/W
1
PUCR61
0
R/W
0
PUCR60
0
R/W
9.5.4
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P67/SEG16 to P64/SEG13 pins
(n = 7 to 4)
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR6
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR6n
Setting Value
B'00xx, B'11xx
0
Other than B'00xx, B'11xx
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 176 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
P6n input pin
1
P6n output pin
x
SEGn+9 output pin
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P63/SEG12 to P60/SEG9 pins
(m = 3 to 0)
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR6
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR6m
B'000x, B'0010, B'1011,
B'11xx
0
P6m input pin
1
P6m output pin
Other than B'000x, B'0010,
B'1011, B'11xx
x
SEGm+9 output pin
Setting Value
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.5.5
Input Pull-Up MOS
Port 6 has an on-chip input pull-up MOS function that can be controlled by software. When the
PCR6 bit is cleared to 0, setting the corresponding PUCR6 bit to 1 turns on the input pull-up MOS
for that pin. The input pull-up MOS function is in the off state after a reset.
(n = 7 to 0)
PCR6n
0
1
PUCR6n
0
1
x
Input Pull-Up MOS
Off
On
Off
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 177 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6
Port 7
Port 7 is an I/O pins; its pins can also be configured to function as LCD segment output pins.
Figure 9.6 shows the pin configuration.
P77/SEG24
P76/SEG23
Port 7
P75/SEG22
P74/SEG21
P73/SEG20
P72/SEG19
P71/SEG18
P70/SEG17
Figure 9.6 Port 7 Pin Configuration
Port 7 has the following registers.
• Port data register 7 (PDR7)
• Port control register 7 (PCR7)
9.6.1
Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
PDR7 is a register that stores data of port 7.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
P77
0
R/W
6
P76
0
R/W
5
P75
0
R/W
If port 7 is read while PCR7 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR7 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 7 is read while PCR7 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
4
P74
0
R/W
3
P73
0
R/W
2
P72
0
R/W
1
P71
0
R/W
0
P70
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 178 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.6.2
Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
PCR7 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port 7.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCR77
0
W
6
PCR76
0
W
5
PCR75
0
W
4
PCR74
0
W
Setting a PCR7 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCR7 and in PDR7 are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
3
PCR73
0
W
2
PCR72
0
W
1
PCR71
0
W
0
PCR70
0
W
9.6.3
Pin Functions
PCR7 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P77/SEG24 to P74/SEG21 pins
(n = 7 to 4)
Pin Function
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR7
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR7n
B'00xx, B'010x, B'111x
0
P7n input pin
1
P7n output pin
x
SEGn+17 output pin
Setting Value
Other than B'00xx, B'010x,
B'111x
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 179 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P73/SEG20 to P70/SEG17 pins
(m = 3 to 0)
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR7
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR7m
B'00xx, B'0100, B'1101,
B'111x
0
P7m input pin
1
P7m output pin
Other than B'00xx, B'0100,
B'1101, B'111x
x
SEGm+17 output pin
Setting Value
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.7
Port 8
Port 8 is an I/O pins; its pins can also be configured to function as LCD segment output pins.
Figure 9.7 shows the pin configuration.
P87/SEG32
P86/SEG31
Port 8
P85/SEG30
P84/SEG29
P83/SEG28
P82/SEG27
P81/SEG26
P80/SEG25
Figure 9.7 Port 8 Pin Configuration
Port 8 has the following registers.
• Port data register 8 (PDR8)
• Port control register 8 (PCR8)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 180 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.1
Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
PDR8 is a register that stores data of port 8.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
P87
0
R/W
6
P86
0
R/W
5
P85
0
R/W
If port 8 is read while PCR8 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR8 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 8 is read while PCR8 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
4
P84
0
R/W
3
P83
0
R/W
2
P82
0
R/W
1
P81
0
R/W
0
P80
0
R/W
9.7.2
Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
PCR8 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port 8.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCR87
0
W
6
PCR86
0
W
5
PCR85
0
W
4
PCR84
0
W
Setting a PCR8 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin
(P87 to P80) an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0
makes the pin an input pin. The settings in PCR8 and in
PDR8 are valid when the corresponding pin is
designated as a general I/O pin.
3
PCR83
0
W
2
PCR82
0
W
1
PCR81
0
W
0
PCR80
0
W
PCR8 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 181 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.7.3
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P87/SEG32 to P84/SEG29 pins
(n = 7 to 4)
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR8
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR8n
B'0xxx
0
P8n input pin
1
P8n output pin
x
SEGn+25 output pin
Pin Function
Setting Value
B'1xxx
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P83/SEG28 to P80/SEG25 pins
(m = 3 to 0)
Register
Name
LPCR
PCR8
Bit Name
SGS3 to SGS0
PCR8m
B'00xx, B'010x, B'0110,
B'1111
0
P8m input pin
1
P8m output pin
x
SEGm+25 output pin
Setting Value
Other than B'00xx, B'010x,
B'0110, B'1111
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 182 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8
Port 9
Port 9 is a general I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as an external interrupt
input pin and PWM output pins. Figure 9.8 shows the pin configuration.
P93/PWM4
Port 9
P92/PWM3/IRQ4
P91/PWM2
P90/PWM1
Figure 9.8 Port 9 Pin Configuration
Port 9 has the following registers.
• Port data register 9 (PDR9)
• Port control register 9 (PCR9)
• Port mode register 9 (PMR9)
9.8.1
Port Data Register 9 (PDR9)
PDR9 is a register that stores data of port 9.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
P93
1
R/W
2
P92
1
R/W
1
P91
1
R/W
0
P90
1
R/W
If port 9 is read while PCR9 bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDR9 are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port 9 is read while PCR9 bits are cleared to 0,
the pin states are read.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 183 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.8.2
Port Control Register 9 (PCR9)
PCR9 selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port 9.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 4

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
PCR93
0
W
2
PCR92
0
W
1
PCR91
0
W
0
PCR90
0
W
Setting a PCR9 bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCR9 and in PDR9 are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
PCR9 is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
9.8.3
Port Mode Register 9 (PMR9)
PMR9 controls the selection of functions for port 9 pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3

0
R/W
Reserved
Although this bit is readable/writable, 1 should not be
written to this bit.
2
IRQ4
0
R/W
P92/IRQ4 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P92/IRQ4 is used as P92 or as
IRQ4.
0: P92 I/O pin
1: IRQ4 input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 184 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
PWM2
0
R/W
P9n/PWMn+1 Pin Function Switch
0
PWM1
0
R/W
Select whether pin P9n/PWMn+1 is used as P9n or as
PWMn+1. (n = 1, 0)
0: P9n I/O pin
1: PWMn+1 output pin
9.8.4
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• P93/PWM4 pin
Register Name
PFCR
PCR9
Bit Name
PWM4
PCR93
0
0
P93 input pin
1
P93 output pin
x
PWM4 output pin
Setting Value
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• P92/PWM3/IRQ4 pin
Register Name
PMR9
PFCR
PCR9
Bit Name
IRQ4
PMW3
PCR92
0
0
0
P92 input pin
1
P92 output pin
1
x
PWM3 output pin
x
0
IRQ4 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Setting Value
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 185 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• P91/PWM2 and P90/PWM1 pins
(n = 1, 0)
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
PMR9
PCR9
PWMn+1
PCR9n
0
0
P9n input pin
1
P9n output pin
x
PWMn+1 output pin
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
9.9
Port A
Port A is an I/O pins; its pins can also be configured to function as LCD common output pins.
Figure 9.9 shows the pin configuration.
Port A
PA3/COM4
PA2/COM3
PA1/COM2
PA0/COM1
Figure 9.9 Port A Pin Configuration
Port A has the following registers.
• Port data register A (PDRA)
• Port control register A (PCRA)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 186 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.1
Port Data Register A (PDRA)
PDRA is a register that stores data of port A.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 4

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
PA3
0
R/W
2
PA2
0
R/W
1
PA1
0
R/W
0
PA0
0
R/W
9.9.2
Port Control Register A (PCRA)
If port A is read while PCRA bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDRA are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port A is read while PCRA bits are cleared to
0, the pin states are read.
PCRA selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port A.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
3
PCRA3
0
W
2
PCRA2
0
W
1
PCRA1
0
W
0
PCRA0
0
W
Setting a PCRA bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin
an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin
an input pin.
PCRA is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 187 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.9.3
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• PA3/COM4 pin
Register
Name
Bit Name
LPCR
PCRA
Pin Function
SGS3 to SGS0
DTS1, DTS0
CMX
PCRA3
B'0000
B'xx
x
0
PA3 input pin
1
PA3 output pin
0
PA3 input pin
1
PA3 output pin
x
COM4 output pin
Setting Value
Other than
B'0000
Other than B'11
Other than B'10
0
1
B'10
Disabled
B'11
x
COM4 output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PA2/COM3 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PCRA
SGS3 to SGS0
DTS1, CMX
PCRA2
B'0000
B'xx
0
PA2 input pin
1
PA2 output pin
0
PA2 input pin
1
PA2 output pin
x
COM3 output pin
Other than
B'0000
B'00
Other than B'00
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 188 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PA1/COM2 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PCRA
Pin Function
SGS3 to SGS0
DTS1, DTS0, CMX
PCRA1
B'0000
x
0
PA1 input pin
1
PA1 output pin
0
PA1 input pin
Other than
B'0000
B'000
Other than B'000
1
PA1 output pin
x
COM2 output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PA0/COM1 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PCRA
SGS3 to SGS0
PCRA0
B'0000
0
PA0 input pin
1
PA0 output pin
x
COM1 output pin
Other than B'0000
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 189 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10
Port B
Port B is an input-only port: its pins can also be configured to function as an interrupt input pin
and analog input pin. Figure 9.10 shows the pin configuration.
PB7/AN7
PB6/AN6
Port B
PB5/AN5
PB4/AN4
PB3/AN3
PB2/AN2/IRQ3
PB1/AN1/IRQ1
PB0/AN0/IRQ0
Figure 9.10 Port B Pin Configuration
Port B has the following registers.
• Port data register B (PDRB)
• Port mode register B (PMRB)
9.10.1
Port Data Register B (PDRB)
PDRB is a register that stores data of port B.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
7
PB7
Undefined R
6
PB6
Undefined R
5
PB5
Undefined R
4
PB4
Undefined R
3
PB3
Undefined R
2
PB2
Undefined R
1
PB1
Undefined R
0
PB0
Undefined R
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 190 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Description
Reading PDRB always gives the pin states. However, if
a port B pin is selected as an analog input channel by
the CH3 to CH0 bits in AMR of the A/D converter, that
pin is read as 0 regardless of the input voltage.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.2
Port Mode Register B (PMRB)
PMRB controls the selection of the port B pin functions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 5

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4
ADTSTCHG 0
R/W
TEST/ADTRG Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin TEST/ADTRG is used as TEST or
as ADTRG.
0: TEST pin
1: ADTRG input pin
For details on the setting of the ADTRG input pin, refer
to section 20.4.2, External Trigger Input Timing.

3
1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
2
IRQ3
0
R/W
PB2/AN2/IRQ3* Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin PB2/AN2/IRQ3 is used as
PB2/AN2 or as IRQ3.
0: PB2/AN2 input pin
1: IRQ3 input pin
1
IRQ1
0
R/W
PB1/AN1/IRQ1* Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin PB1/AN1/IRQ1 is used as
PB1/AN1 or as IRQ1.
0: PB1/AN1 input pin
1: IRQ1 input pin
0
IRQ0
0
R/W
PB0/AN0/IRQ0* Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin PB0/AN0/IRQ0 is used as
PB0/AN0 or as IRQ0.
0: PB0/AN0 input pin
1: IRQ0 input pin
Note:
*
For information on the power supply voltage (VCC) and analog power supply voltage
(AVCC) when using this pin as an IRQn (n = 0, 1, 3) pin, see section 26.2.2 or 26.4.2,
DC Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 191 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.10.3
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• PB7/AN7 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
AMR
Pin Function
CH3 to CH0
Other than B'1011
PB7 input pin
B'1011
AN7 input pin
AMR
Pin Function
• PB6/AN6 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
CH3 to CH0
Other than B'1010
PB6 input pin
B'1010
AN6 input pin
AMR
Pin Function
• PB5/AN5 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
CH3 to CH0
Other than B'1001
PB5 input pin
B'1001
AN5 input pin
AMR
Pin Function
• PB4/AN4 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
CH3 to CH0
Other than B'1000
PB4 input pin
B'1000
AN4 input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 192 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PB3/AN3 pin
Register Name
AMR
Bit Name
Pin Function
CH3 to CH0
Setting Value
Other than B'0111
PB3 input pin
B'0111
AN3 input pin
• PB2/AN2/IRQ3 pin
Register Name
PMRB
AMR
Bit Name
IRQ3
CH3 to CH0
0
Other than B'0110
PB2 input pin
B'0110
AN2 input pin
Other than B'0110
IRQ3 input pin
B'0110
Setting prohibited
Pin Function
Setting Value
1
Pin Function
• PB1/AN1/IRQ1 pin
Register Name
PMRB
AMR
Bit Name
IRQ1
CH3 to CH0
0
Other than B'0101
PB1 input pin
B'0101
AN1 input pin
Other than B'0101
IRQ1 input pin
B'0101
Setting prohibited
Pin Function
Setting Value
1
• PB0/AN0/IRQ0 pin
Register Name
PMRB
AMR
Bit Name
IRQ0
CH3 to CH0
0
Other than B'0100
PB0 input pin
B'0100
AN0 input pin
Setting Value
1
Other than B'0100
IRQ0 input pin
B'0100
Setting prohibited
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 193 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.11
Port C
Port C is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as LCD segment output pins.
Figure 9.11 shows the pin configuration.
PC7/SEG40
PC6/SEG39
Port C
PC5/SEG38
PC4/SEG37
PC3/SEG36
PC2/SEG35
PC1/SEG34
PC0/SEG33
Figure 9.11 Port C Pin Configuration
Port C has the following registers.
• Port data register C (PDRC)
• Port control register C (PCRC)
9.11.1
Port Data Register C (PDRC)
PDRC is a register that stores data of port C.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PC7
0
R/W
6
PC6
0
R/W
5
PC5
0
R/W
If port C is read while PCRC bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDRC are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port C is read while PCRC bits are cleared to
0, the pin states are read.
4
PC4
0
R/W
3
PC3
0
R/W
2
PC2
0
R/W
1
PC1
0
R/W
0
PC0
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 194 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.11.2
Port Control Register C (PCRC)
PCRC selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins to be used as general I/O ports of port C.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCRC7
0
W
6
PCRC6
0
W
5
PCRC5
0
W
Setting a PCRC bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin
an output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin
an input pin.
4
PCRC4
0
W
3
PCRC3
0
W
2
PCRC2
0
W
1
PCRC1
0
W
0
PCRC0
0
W
9.11.3
Pin Functions
PCRC is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• PC7/SEG40 to PC0/SEG33 pins
(n = 7 to 0)
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
LPCR
PCRC
SGS3 to SGS0
PCRCn
B'0xxx
0
PCn input pin
1
PCn output pin
x
SEGn+33 output pin
B'1xxx
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 195 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.12
Port E
Port E is an I/O port; its pins can also be configured to function as external interrupt input pins,
SCI3_2 I/O pins, SCI3_3 I/O pins, and timer C input pin. Figure 9.12 shows its pin configuration.
PE7/TMIC(/IRQ0)
PE6/UD
Port E
PE5(/TXD32)
PE4(/RXD32)
PE3(/SCK32/IRQ1)
PE2/TXD33
PE1/RXD33
PE0/SCK33(/IRQ3)
Figure 9.12 Port E Pin Configuration
Port E has the following registers.
• Port data register E (PDRE)
• Port control register E (PCRE)
• Port mode register E (PMRE)
9.12.1
Port Data Register E (PDRE)
PDRE is a register that stores data of port E.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PE7
0
R/W
6
PE6
0
R/W
5
PE5
0
R/W
If port E is read while PCRE bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDRE are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port E is read while PCRE bits are cleared to
0, the pin states are read.
4
PE4
0
R/W
3
PE3
0
R/W
2
PE2
0
R/W
1
PE1
0
R/W
0
PE0
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 196 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.12.2
Port Control Register E (PCRE)
PCRE selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port E.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
PCRE7
0
W
6
PCRE6
0
W
5
PCRE5
0
W
4
PCRE4
0
W
Setting a PCRE bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCRE and in PDRE are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
3
PCRE3
0
W
2
PCRE2
0
W
1
PCRE1
0
W
0
PCRE0
0
W
9.12.3
Port Mode Register E (PMRE)
PCRE is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
PMRE controls the selection of the port E pin functions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
4
TMIC
0
R/W
PE7/TMIC Pin Function Switch
0: PE7 I/O pin
1: TMIC input pin
3
IRQ0
0
R/W
PE7/IRQ0 Pin Function Switch
0: PE7 I/O pin
1: IRQ0 input pin
2
UD
0
R/W
PE6/UD Pin Function Switch
0: PE6 I/O pin
1: UD input pin
1
IRQ1
0
R/W
PE3/IRQ1 Pin Function Switch
0: PE3 I/O pin
1: IRQ1 input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 197 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
IRQ3
0
R/W
PE0/IRQ3 Pin Function Switch
0: PE0 I/O pin
1: IRQ3 input pin
9.12.4
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• PE7/TMIC (/IRQ0) pin
Register Name
PMRB
Bit Name
IRQ0
IRQ0
TMIC
PCRE7
0
1
x
x
IRQ0 input pin
0
0
PE7 input pin
1
PE7 output pin
x
TMIC input pin
Setting Value
PMRE
PCRE
Other than above
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PE6/UD pin
Register Name
Bit Name
Setting Value
PMRE
PCRE
UD
PCRE6
0
0
PE6 input pin
1
PE6 output pin
x
UD input pin
1
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 198 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PE5 (/TXD32) pin
Register Name
PFCR
SPCR
PCRE
Bit Name
SC32S
SPC32
PCRE5
0
x
0
PE5 input pin
1
PE5 output pin
0
PE5 input pin
Setting Value
1
0
Pin Function
1
PE5 output pin
1
x
TXD32 output pin
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PE4 (/RXD32) pin
Register Name
PFCR
SCR3_2
PCRE
Bit Name
SC32S
RE
PCRE4
0
x
0
PE4 input pin
1
PE4 output pin
0
PE4 input pin
1
PE4 output pin
x
RXD32 input pin
Setting Value
1
0
1
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 199 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PE3 (/SCK32/IRQ1) pin
Register
Name
PMRB
PMRE
PFCR
SMR3_2
Bit Name
IRQ1
IRQ1
SC32S
COM
CKE1
CKE0
PCRE3
0
1
x
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
x
0
PE3 input pin
1
PE3 output pin
0
PE3 input pin
1
PE3 output pin
x
SCK32 output pin
Setting
Value
Other than above
1
0
SCR3_2
0
PCRE
0
1
1
0
1
1
Pin Function
IRQ1 input pin
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PE2/TXD33 pin
Register Name
SPCR2
PCRE
Bit Name
SPC33
PCRE2
0
0
PE2 input pin
1
PE2 output pin
x
TXD33 output pin
Setting Value
1
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 200 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PE1/RXD33 pin
Register Name
Bit Name
SCR3_3
PCRE
RE
PCRE1
0
0
PE1 input pin
1
PE1 output pin
x
RXD33 input pin
Setting Value
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PE0/SCK33 (/IRQ3) pin
PMRB
PMRE
SMR3_3
Bit Name
IRQ3
IRQ3
COM
CKE1
CKE0
PCRE0
0
1
x
x
x
x
IRQ3 input pin
0
0
0
0
PE0 input pin
1
PE0 output pin
x
SCK33 output pin
Setting
Value
Other than above
SCR3_3
PCRE
Pin Function
Register
Name
1
1
1
0
1
Setting prohibited
0
0
SCK33 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK33 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
1
SCK33 input pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 201 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.13
Port F
Port F is an I/O port: its pins can also be configured to function as an external interrupt input pin,
SCI3_1 I/O pins, and timer G input pin. Figure 9.13 shows the pin configuration.
Port F
PF3(/TXD31/IrTXD)
PF2(/RXD31/IrRXD)
PF1(/SCK31/IRQ4)
PF0/TMIG
Figure 9.13 Port F Pin Configuration
Port F has the following registers.
• Port data register F (PDRF)
• Port control register F (PCRF)
• Port mode register F (PMRF)
9.13.1
Port Data Register F (PDRF)
PDRF is a register that stores data of port F.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4



Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
3
PF3
0
R/W
2
PF2
0
R/W
1
PF1
0
R/W
0
PF0
0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 202 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
If port F is read while PCRF bits are set to 1, the values
stored in PDRF are read, regardless of the actual pin
states. If port F is read while PCRF bits are cleared to
0, the pin states are read.
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.13.2
Port Control Register F (PCRF)
PCRF selects inputs/outputs in bit units for pins of port F.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4



Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
3
PCRF3
0
W
2
PCRF2
0
W
1
PCRF1
0
W
0
PCRF0
0
W
Setting a PCRF bit to 1 makes the corresponding pin an
output pin, while clearing the bit to 0 makes the pin an
input pin. The settings in PCRF and in PDRF are valid
when the corresponding pin is designated as a general
I/O pin.
PCRF is a write-only register. These bits are always
read as 1.
9.13.3
Port Mode Register F (PMRF)
PMRF controls the selection of the pin functions on port F.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 3

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
IRQ4
0
R/W
PF1/IRQ4 Pin Function Switch
0: PF1 I/O pin
1: IRQ4 input pin
1
NCS
0
R/W
Controls usage of the TMIG noise cancellation circuit.
0: Noise cancellation is disabled
1: Noise cancellation is enabled
0
TMIG
0
R/W
PF0/TMIG Pin Function Switch
0: PF0 I/O pin
1: TMIG input pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 203 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.13.4
Pin Functions
The relationship between the register settings and the port functions is shown below.
• PF3 (/TXD31/IrTXD) pin
Pin Function
Register
Name
PFCR
SPCR
IrCR
PCRF
Bit Name
SC31S
SPC31
IrE
PCRF3
0
x
x
0
PF3 input pin
1
PF3 output pin
1
0
0
PF3 input pin
1
PF3 output pin
x
TXD31 output pin
Setting
Value
1
0
1
IrTXD output pin
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PF2 (/RXD31/IrRXD) pin
Register
Name
PFCR
SCR3_1
IrCR
PCRF
Bit Name
SC31S
RE
IrE
PCRF2
0
x
x
Setting
Value
1
0
1
0
1
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 204 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
0
PF2 input pin
1
PF2 output pin
0
PF2 input pin
1
PF2 output pin
x
RXD31 input pin
IrRXD input pin
Section 9 I/O Ports
• PF1 (/SCK31/IRQ4) pin
Register
Name
PMR9
PMRF
PFCR
SMR3_1
Bit Name
IRQ4
IRQ4
SC31S
COM
CKE1
CKE0
PCRF1
0
1
x
x
x
x
x
0
x
x
x
0
PF1 input pin
1
PF1 output pin
0
PF1 input pin
1
PF1 output pin
x
SCK31 output pin
Setting
Value
Other than above
0
1
SCR3_1
0
PCRF
0
1
1
1
0
1
Pin Function
IRQ4 input pin
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
[Legend]
x: Don't care
• PF0/TMIG pin
Register Name
PMRF
PCRF
Bit Name
TMIG
PCRF0
0
0
PF0 input pin
1
PF0 output pin
x
TMIG input pin
Setting Value
1
Pin Function
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 205 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.14
Input/Output Data Inversion
9.14.1
Serial Port Control Register,
Serial Port Control Register 2 (SPCR, SPCR2)
SPCR switches input/output data inversion of the RXD (IrRXD) and TXD (IrTXD) pins.
Figure 9.14 shows a input/output data inversion function.
SCINV0
SCINV2
SCINV4
PE1/RXD33
P31/RXD32
(PE4/RXD32)
P41/RXD31/IrRXD
(PF2/RXD31/IrRXD)
PE2/TXD33
P32/TXD32
(PE5/TXD32)
P42/TXD31/IrTXD
(PF3/TXD31/IrTXD)
RXD33
RXD32
RXD31/IrRXD
SCINV1
SCINV3
SCINV5
TXD33
TXD32
TXD31/IrTXD
Figure 9.14 Input/Output Data Inversion Function
• SPCR
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

1

Reserved
6

1

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
5
SPC32
0
R/W
P32/TXD32/SCL (PE5/TXD32) Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P32/TXD32/SCL (PE5/TXD32) is
used as P32/SCL (PE5) or as TXD32.
0: P32/ SCL (PE5) I/O pin
1: TXD32 output pin*
Note: Set the TE bit in SCR3_2 after having set this
bit to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 206 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
SPC31
0
R/W
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH (PF3/TXD31/IrTXD) Pin
Function Switch
Selects whether pin P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH
(PF3/TXD31/IrTXD) is used as P42/TMOFH (PF3) or as
TXD31/IrTXD.
0: P42 (PF3) I/O pin or TMOFH output pin
1: TXD31/IrTXD output pin*
Note: Set the TE bit in SCR3_1 after having set this bit
to 1.
3
SCINV3
0
R/W
TXD32 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD32 pin is to be inverted or not.
0: TXD32 output data is not inverted
1: TXD32 output data is inverted
2
SCINV2
0
R/W
RXD32 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD32 pin is to be inverted or not.
0: RXD32 input data is not inverted
1: RXD32 input data is inverted
1
SCINV1
0
R/W
TXD31/IrTXD Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD31/IrTXD pin is to be inverted or not.
0: TXD31/IrTXD output data is not inverted
1: TXD31/IrTXD output data is inverted
0
SCINV0
0
R/W
RXD31/IrRXD Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD31/IrRXD pin is to be inverted or not.
0: RXD31/IrRXD input data is not inverted
1: RXD31/IrRXD input data is inverted
Note: When the serial port control register is modified, the data being input or output up to that
point is inverted immediately after the modification, and an invalid data change is input or
output. When modifying the serial port control register, modification must be made in a state
in which data changes are invalidated.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 207 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
• SPCR2
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4
SPC33
0
R/W
PE2/TXD33 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin PE2/TXD33 is used as PE2 or as
TXD33.
0: PE2 I/O pin
1: TXD33 output pin
Set the TE bit in SCR3_3 after having set this bit
to 1.
3

1

Reserved
2

1

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
1
SCINV5
0
R/W
TXD33 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD33 pin is inverted.
0: TXD33 output data is not inverted
1: TXD33 output data is inverted
0
SCINV4
0
R/W
RXD33 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD33 pin is inverted.
0: RXD33 input data is not inverted
1: RXD33 input data is inverted
Note: When the serial port control register 2 is modified, the data being input or output up to that
point is inverted immediately after the modification, and an invalid data change is input or
output. When modifying the serial port control register 2, modification must be made in a
state in which data changes are invalidated.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 208 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
9.15
Port Function Switch
9.15.1
Port Function Control Register (PFCR)
PFCR controls the assignments of pins for SCI3_1 and SCI3_2 and the functions of other pins.
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
CLKOUT1 1
R/W
TMOW/CLKOUT Pin Function Switch
CLKOUT0 1
R/W
00: CLKOUT output pin (φOSC)
Bit
Bit Name
7
6
01: CLKOUT output pin (φOSC/2)
10: CLKOUT output pin (φOSC/4)
11: TMOW output pin
5

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
4
PWM4
0
R/W
P93/PWM4 Pin Function Switch
0: P93 I/O pin
1: PWM4 output pin
3
PWM3
0
R/W
P92/PWM3 Pin Function Switch
0: P92 I/O pin
1: PWM3 output pin
2

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
1
SC32S
0
R/W
SCI3_2 Pin Assignment Select
0: TXD32 is assigned to P32
RXD32 is assigned to P31
SCK32 is assigned to P30
1: TXD32 is assigned to PE5
RXD32 is assigned to PE4
SCK32 is assigned to PE3
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 209 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 9 I/O Ports
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
0
SC31S
0
R/W
SCI3_1 Pin Assignment Select
0: TXD31 is assigned to P42
RXD31 is assigned to P41
SCK31 is assigned to P40
1: TXD31 is assigned to PF3
RXD31 is assigned to PF2
SCK31 is assigned to PF1
9.16
Usage Notes
9.16.1
How to Handle Unused Pin
If an I/O pin not used by the user system is floating, pull it up or down.
• If an unused pin is an input pin, it is recommended to handle it in one of the following ways:
 Pull it up to Vcc with an on-chip pull-up MOS.
 Pull it up to Vcc with an external resistor of approximately 100 kΩ.
 Pull it down to Vss with an external resistor of approximately 100 kΩ.
 For a pin also used by the A/D converter, pull it up to AVcc. With an external resistor of
approximately 100 kΩ.
• If an unused pin is an output pin, it is recommended to handle it in one of the following ways:
 Set the output of the unused pin to high and pull it up to Vcc with an external resistor of
approximately 100 kΩ.
 Set the output of the unused pin to low and pull it down to GND with an external resistor of
approximately 100 kΩ.
9.16.2
Input Characteristics Difference due to Pin Function
When the functions of pins IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQACE, WKP0 to WKP7, AEVL,
AEVH, TMIC, TMIF, TMIG, SCK31 to SCK33, SDA, and SCL are selected, the corresponding
pins have the schmitt-trigger input characteristics, which are different from the ones when they are
used as the port input pins.
For example, the input high voltage and the input low voltage of the PB0/AN0/IRQ0 pin differ
when the pin is used as PB0 input or IRQ0 input. For details, refer to tables 26.2 and 26.12.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 210 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
The realtime clock (RTC) is a timer used to count periods of time ranging from a second to a
week. Interrupts can be generated at intervals ranging from 0.25 seconds to a week. Figure 10.1 is
a block diagram of the RTC.
10.1
Features
• Counts seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week
• Start/stop function
• Reset function
• Readable/writable counter of seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week with BCD codes
• Periodic (0.25 seconds, 0.5 seconds, one second, minute, hour, day, and week) interrupts
• 8-bit free running counter
• Selection of clock source
• Module standby mode allows this module to enter standby mode independently when it is not
in use (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
PSS
32-kHz
oscillator
circuit
RTCCSR
1/4
RMINDR
RHRDR
TMOW
Clock count
control circuit
RWKDR
Internal data bus
RSECDR
RTCCR1
RTCCR2
RTCFLG
[Legend]
RTCCSR: Clock source select register
RSECDR: Second date register/
free running counter data register
RMINDR: Minute date register
RHRDR: Hour date register
Interrupt
control circuit
RWKDR:
RTCCR1:
RTCCR2:
RTCFLG:
PSS:
Interrupt
Day-of-week date register
RTC control register 1
RTC control register 2
RTC interrupt flag register
Prescaler S
Figure 10.1 Block Diagram of RTC
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 211 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.2
Input/Output Pin
Table 10.1 shows the RTC input/output pin.
Table 10.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Clock output
TMOW
Output
RTC divided clock output
10.3
Register Descriptions
The RTC has the following registers.
• Second data register/free running counter data register (RSECDR)
• Minute data register (RMINDR)
• Hour data register (RHRDR)
• Day-of-week data register (RWKDR)
• RTC control register 1 (RTCCR1)
• RTC control register 2 (RTCCR2)
• Clock source select register (RTCCSR)
• RTC Interrupt flag register (RTCFLG)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 212 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.1
Second Data Register/Free Running Counter Data Register (RSECDR)
RSECDR counts the BCD-coded second value. The setting range is decimal 00 to 59. It is an 8-bit
read register used as a counter, when it operates as a free running counter. For more information
on reading seconds, minutes, hours, and day-of-week, see section 10.4.3, Data Reading Procedure.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BSY
—/(0)*
R
RTC Busy
This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)
the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data
registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,
hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.
6
SC12
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting Ten's Position of Seconds
5
SC11
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-second counting.
4
SC10
—/(0)*
R/W
3
SC03
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting One's Position of Seconds
2
SC02
—/(0)*
R/W
1
SC01
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 9 once per second. When a carry is
generated, 1 is added to the ten's position.
0
SC00
—/(0)*
R/W
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 213 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.2
Minute Data Register (RMINDR)
RMINDR counts the BCD-coded minute value on the carry generated once per minute by the
RSECDR counting. The setting range is decimal 00 to 59.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BSY
—/(0)*
R
RTC Busy
This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)
the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data
registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,
hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.
6
MN12
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting Ten's Position of Minutes
5
MN11
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 5 for 60-minute counting.
4
MN10
—/(0)*
R/W
3
MN03
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting One's Position of Minutes
2
MN02
—/(0)*
R/W
1
MN01
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 9 once per minute. When a carry is
generated, 1 is added to the ten's position.
MN00
—/(0)*
R/W
0
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 214 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.3
Hour Data Register (RHRDR)
RHRDR counts the BCD-coded hour value on the carry generated once per hour by RMINDR.
The setting range is either decimal 00 to 11 or 00 to 23 by the selection of the 12/24 bit in
RTCCR1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BSY
—/(0)*
R
RTC Busy
This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)
the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data
registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,
hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.
6
—
0
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0.
5
HR11
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting Ten's Position of Hours
4
3
HR10
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 2 for ten's position of hours.
HR03
—/(0)*
R/W
Counting One's Position of Hours
2
HR02
—/(0)*
R/W
1
HR01
—/(0)*
R/W
Counts on 0 to 9 once per hour. When a carry is
generated, 1 is added to the ten's position.
HR00
—/(0)*
R/W
0
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 215 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.4
Day-of-Week Data Register (RWKDR)
RWKDR counts the BCD-coded day-of-week value on the carry generated once per day by
RHRDR. The setting range is decimal 0 to 6 using bits WK2 to WK0.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BSY
—/(0)*
R
RTC Busy
This bit is set to 1 when the RTC is updating (operating)
the values of second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data
registers. When this bit is 0, the values of second, minute,
hour, and day-of-week data registers must be adopted.
6 to 3
—
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
2
WK2
—/(0)*
R/W
Day-of-Week Counting
1
WK1
—/(0)*
R/W
Day-of-week is indicated with a binary code
0
WK0
—/(0)*
R/W
000: Sunday
001: Monday
010: Tuesday
011: Wednesday
100: Thursday
101: Friday
110: Saturday
111: Setting prohibited
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 216 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.5
RTC Control Register 1 (RTCCR1)
RTCCR1 controls start/stop and reset of the clock timer. For the definition of time expression, see
figure 10.2.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
RUN
—/(0)*
R/W
RTC Operation Start
0: Stops RTC operation
1: Starts RTC operation
6
12/24
—/(0)*
R/W
Operating Mode
0: RTC operates in 12-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0
to 11.
1: RTC operates in 24-hour mode. RHRDR counts on 0
to 23.
5
PM
—/(0)*
R/W
A.m./P.m.
0: Indicates a.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode.
1: Indicates p.m. when RTC is in the 12-hour mode.
4
RST
0
R/W
Reset
0: Normal operation
1: Resets registers and control circuits except RTCCSR
and this bit. Clear this bit to 0 after having been set
to 1.
3
—
—
R/W
Reserved
The write value should be 0.
2 to 0
—
All 0
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 0.
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 217 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
Noon
24-hour count 0
12-hour count 0
PM
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5 6 7
5 6 7
0 (Morning)
8
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5
1 (Afternoon)
24-hour count 18 19 20 21 22 23 0
12-hour count 6 7 8 9 10 11 0
1 (Afternoon)
0
PM
Figure 10.2 Definition of Time Expression
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 218 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.6
RTC Control Register 2 (RTCCR2)
RTCCR2 controls RTC periodic interrupts of week, day, hour, minute, one second, 0.5 seconds,
and 0.25 seconds. Enabling interrupts of week, day, hour, minute, one second, 0.5 seconds, and
0.25 seconds sets the corresponding flag to 1 in the RTC interrupt flag register (RTCFLG) when
an interrupt occurs. It also controls an overflow interrupt of a free running counter when RTC
operates as a free running counter.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
FOIE
—/(0)*
R/W
Description
Free Running Counter Overflow Interrupt Enable
0: Disables an overflow interrupt
1: Enables an overflow interrupt
6
WKIE
—/(0)*
R/W
Week Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a week periodic interrupt
1: Enables a week periodic interrupt
5
DYIE
—/(0)*
R/W
Day Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a day periodic interrupt
1: Enables a day periodic interrupt
4
HRIE
—/(0)*
R/W
Hour Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables an hour periodic interrupt
1: Enables an hour periodic interrupt
3
MNIE
—/(0)*
R/W
Minute Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a minute periodic interrupt
1: Enables a minute periodic interrupt
2
1SEIE
—/(0)*
R/W
One-Second Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a one-second periodic interrupt
1: Enables a one-second periodic interrupt
1
05SEIE
—/(0)*
R/W
0.5-Second Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a 0.5-second periodic interrupt
1: Enables a 0.5-second periodic interrupt
0
025SEIE
—/(0)*
R/W
0.25-Second Periodic Interrupt Enable
0: Disables a 0.25-second periodic interrupt
1: Enables a 0.25-second periodic interrupt
Note:
*
This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 219 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.7
Clock Source Select Register (RTCCSR)
RTCCSR selects clock source. A free running counter controls start/stop of counter operation by
the RUN bit in RTCCR1. When a clock other than φw/4 is selected, the RTC is disabled and
operates as an 8-bit free running counter. When the RTC operates as an 8-bit free running counter,
RSECDR enables counter values to be read. An interrupt can be generated by setting 1 to the
FOIE bit in RTCCR2 and enabling an overflow interrupt of the free running counter. A clock in
which the system clock is divided by 32, 16, 8, or 4 is output in active or sleep mode. The φw clock
is output in active, sleep, subactive, subsleep, and watch modes.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
—
—/(0)*
R
Reserved
This bit cannot be modified.
6
RCS6
0
R/W
Clock Output Selection
5
RCS5
0
R/W
4
SUB32K
0
R/W
Select a clock output from the TMOW pin when setting
the TMOW bit in PMR3 to 1.
000: φ/4
010: φ/8
100: φ/16
110: φ/32
xx1: φw
3
RCS3
1
R/W
Clock Source Selection
2
RCS2
0
R/W
0000: φ/8⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
1
RCS1
0
R/W
0001: φ/32⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0
RCS0
0
R/W
0010: φ/128⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0011: φ/256⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0100: φ/512⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0101: φ/2048⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0110: φ/4096⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
0111: φ/8192⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Free running counter operation
1000 : φw/4⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ RTC operation
1001 to 1111: Setting prohibited
[Legend]
x: Don't care.
Note: * This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 220 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.3.8
RTC Interrupt Flag Register (RTCFLG)
RTCFLG sets the corresponding flag when an interrupt occurs. Each flag is not cleared
automatically even if the interrupt is accepted. To clear the flag, 0 should be written to the flag.
Initial
Value
Bit
7
Bit Name
FOIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W
1
R/W*
6
WKIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
5
DYIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
4
HRIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
3
MNIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
2
SEIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
1
05SEIFG
/(0)*
2
R/W*
1
0
025SEIFG /(0)*
2
R/W*
1
Description
[Setting condition]
A free running counter overflows
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to FOIFG when FOIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A week periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to WKIFG when WKIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A day periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to DYIFG when DYIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
An hour periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to HRIFG when HRIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A minute periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to MNIFG when MNIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A one-second periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to SEIFG when SEIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A 0.5-second periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to 05SEIFG when 05SEIFG = 1
[Setting condition]
A 0.25-second periodic interrupt occurs
[Clearing condition]
0 is written to 025SEIFG when 025SEIFG = 1
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written here, to clear the flag.
2. This is the initial value after a reset by the RST bit in RTCCR1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 221 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.4
Operation
10.4.1
Initial Settings of Registers after Power-On
The RTC registers that store second, minute, hour, and day-of-week data, control registers, and
interrupt registers are not initialized by a RES input, or by a reset source caused by a watchdog
timer. Therefore, all registers must be set to their initial values after power-on. Once the register
settings are made, the RTC provides an accurate time as long as power is supplied regardless of a
RES input.
10.4.2
Initial Setting Procedure
Figure 10.3 shows the procedure for the initial setting of the RTC. To set the RTC again, also
follow this procedure.
RUN in RTCCR1 = 0
RTC operation is stopped.
RST in RTCCR1 = 1
RST in RTCCR1 = 0
Set RTCCSR, RSECDR,
RMINDR, RHRDR,
RWKDR, 12/24 in
RTCCR1, and PM
RUN in RTCCR1 = 1
RTC registers and clock count
controller are reset.
Clock output and clock source are
selected and second, minute, hour,
day-of-week, operating mode, and
a.m/p.m are set.
RTC operation is started.
Figure 10.3 Initial Setting Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 222 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.4.3
Data Reading Procedure
When the seconds, minutes, hours, or day-of-week datum is updated while time data is being read,
the data obtained may not be correct, and so the time data must be read again. Figure 10.4 shows
an example in which correct data is not obtained. In this example, since only RSECDR is read
after data update, about 1-minute inconsistency occurs.
To avoid reading in this timing, the following processing must be performed.
1. Check the setting of the BSY bit, and when the BSY bit changes from 1 to 0, read from the
second, minute, hour, and day-of-week registers. When about 62.5 ms is passed after the BSY
bit is set to 1, the registers are updated, and the BSY bit is cleared to 0.
2. Making use of interrupts, read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers after
the corresponding flag of RTCFLG is set to 1 and the BSY bit is confirmed to be 0.
3. Read from the second, minute, hour, and day-of week registers twice in a row, and if there is
no change in the read data, the read data is used.
Before update
RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'46, RSECDR = H'59
Processing flow
BSY bit = 0
(1) Day-of-week data register read
H'03
(2) Hour data register read
H'13
(3) Minute data register read
H'46
BSY bit -> 1 (under data update)
After update
RWKDR = H'03, RHDDR = H'13, RMINDR = H'47, RSECDR = H'00
BSY bit -> 0
(4) Second data register read
H'00
Figure 10.4 Example: Reading of Inaccurate Time Data
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 223 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.5
Interrupt Sources
There are eight kinds of RTC interrupts: a free-running counter overflow, week interrupt, day
interrupt, hour interrupt, minute interrupt, one-second interrupt, 0.5-second interrupt, and 0.25second interrupt.
When using an interrupt, set the IENRTC (RTC interrupt request enable) bit in IENR1 to 1 last
after other registers are set.
When an interrupt request of the RTC occurs, the corresponding flag in RTCFLG is set to 1. When
clearing the flag, write 0.
Table 10.2 shows a interrupt sources.
Table 10.2 Interrupt Sources
Interrupt Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Enable Bit
Overflow interrupt
Occurs when the free running counter is
overflowed.
FOIE
Week periodic interrupt
Occurs every week when the day-of-week date WKIE
register value becomes 0.
Day periodic interrupt
Occurs every day when the day-of-week date
register is counted.
Hour periodic interrupt
Occurs every hour when the hour date register HRIE
is counted.
Minute periodic interrupt
Occurs every minute when the minute date
register is counted.
MNIE
One-second periodic
interrupt
Occurs every second when the one-second
date register is counted.
1SEIE
0.5-second periodic
interrupt
Occurs every 0.5 seconds.
05SEIE
0.25-second periodic
interrupt
Occurs every 0.25 seconds.
025SEIE
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 224 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
DYIE
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
10.6
Usage Notes
10.6.1
Note on Clock Count
The subclock must be connected to the 32.768-kHz resonator. When the 38.4-kHz resonator etc. is
connected, the correct time count is not possible.
10.6.2
Note when Using RTC Interrupts
The RTC registers are not reset by a RES input, power-on, or overflow of the watchdog timer, and
their values are undefined after power-on.
When using RTC interrupts, make sure to initialize the values before setting the IENRTC bit in
IENR1 to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 225 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 10 Realtime Clock (RTC)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 226 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
Section 11 Timer C
Timer C is an 8-bit timer that increments or decrements each time a clock pulse is input. This
timer has two operation modes, interval and auto reload.
11.1
Features
Features of timer C are given below.
• Choice of nine internal clock sources (φ/8192, φ/2048, φ/512, φ/64, φ/16, φ/4, φW/4, φW/256,
and φW/1024) or an external clock (can be used to count external events).
• An interrupt is requested when the counter overflows.
• Up/down-counter switching is selected either by the register specification or the external input
level specification.
• Subactive mode or subsleep mode operation is possible when φW/4, φW/256, or φW/1024 is
selected as the internal clock, or when an external clock is selected.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when not used (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
UD
φ
TCC
PSS
Internal data bus
TMC
TMIC
TLC
φw/4
PSW
IRRTC
[Legend]
TMC: Timer mode register C
TCC: Timer counter C
TLC: Timer load register C
IRRTC: Timer C overflow interrupt request flag
PSS: Prescaler S
PSW: Prescaler W
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer C
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 227 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 11.1 shows the input/output pins of the timer C.
Table 11.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
Timer C event input
TMIC
Input
Input pin for event input to TCC
Timer C up/down select
UD
Input
Timer C up/down-count selection
11.3
Register Descriptions
Timer C has the following registers. For details on clock halt register 3 (CKSTPR3), see section
6.1.4, Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3).
• Timer mode register C (TMC)
• Timer counter C (TCC)
• Timer load register (TLC)
• Clock halt register 3 (CKSTPR3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 228 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.3.1
Timer Mode Register C (TMC)
TMC is an 8-bit read/write register for selecting the auto-reload function and input clock, and
performing up/down-counter control.
Upon reset, TMC is initialized to H'10.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TMC7
0
R/W
Auto-Reload Function Select
Selects whether timer C is used as an interval timer or
auto-reload timer.
0: Interval timer function
1: Auto-reload function
6
5
TMC6
TMC5
0
0
R/W
R/W
Counter Up/Down Control
Specifies whether TCC functions as an up-counter or
down-counter, or whether selection of counting up or
down is controlled by the input signal level on the UD pin.
00: TCC is an up-counter
01: TCC is a down-counter
1x: Selection through the signal level on the UD pin
UD pin input high: Down-counter
UD pin input low: Up-counter
4
—
1
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 229 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
3
2
1
0
TMC3
TMC2
TMC1
TMC0
0
0
0
0
R/W
Description
R/W
Clock Select
TMC3 to TMC0 select the clock input for TCC. For the
counting of external events, either the rising or falling
edge can be selected.
x000: Internal clock counting on φ/8192
x001: Internal clock counting on φ/2048
x010: Internal clock counting on φ/512
x011: Internal clock counting on φ/64
x100: Internal clock counting on φ/16
0101: Internal clock counting on φ/4
0110: Internal clock counting on φW/1024
1101: Internal clock counting on φW/256
1110: Internal clock counting on φW/4
0111: Counting falling edges of external events (TMIC)*
1111: Counting rising edges of external events (TMIC)*
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Note: * The TMIC bit in the port mode register E (PMRE) must be set to 1 before the TMC3 to
TMC0 bits are set to B'x111.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 230 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.3.2
Timer Counter C (TCC)
TCC is an 8-bit read-only up/down-counter, which is incremented or decremented by internal
clock or external event input. The clock source for input to this counter is selected by bits TMC3
to TMC0 in the timer mode register C (TMC). TCC values can be read by the CPU at any time.
When TCC overflows from H'FF to H'00 or to the value set in TLC, or underflows from H'00 to
H'FF or to the value set in TLC, the IRRTC bit in IRR2 is set to 1.
TCC is allocated to the same address as TLC.
Upon reset, TCC is initialized to H'00.
11.3.3
Timer Load Register C (TLC)
TLC is an 8-bit write-only register for setting the reload value of timer counter C (TCC).
When a reload value is set in TLC, the same value is loaded into timer counter C as well, and TCC
starts counting up/down from that value. When TCC overflows or underflows during operation in
auto-reload mode, the TLC value is loaded into TCC. Accordingly, overflow/underflow period can
be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks.
The same address is allocated to TLC as to TCC.
Upon reset, TLC is initialized to H'00.
11.3.4
Clock Halt Register 3 (CKSTPR3)
For details on placing timer C in and taking it out of standby mode (this is controlled by the
TCCKSTP bit in CKSTPR3) see section 6.1.4, Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to
CKSTPR3).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 231 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.4
Timer Operation
11.4.1
Interval Timer Operation
When bit TMC7 in timer mode register C (TMC) is cleared to 0, timer C functions as an 8-bit
interval timer.
Upon reset, TCC is initialized to H'00 and TMC to H'10, so TCC continues up-counting as an
interval up-counter without halting immediately after a reset. The timer C operating clock is
selected from nine internal clock signals output by prescalers S and W, or an external clock input
at pin TMIC. The selection is made by bits TMC3 to TMC0 in TMC.
TCC up/down-count control can be specified by bits TMC6 and TMC5 in TMC, or selected by the
input signal level on the UD pin.
After the count value in TCC reaches H'FF (H'00), the next clock input causes timer C to overflow
(underflow), setting bit IRRTC in IRR2 to 1. If IENTC = 1 in interrupt enable register 2 (IENR2),
a CPU interrupt is requested.
At overflow (underflow), TCC returns to H'00 (H'FF) and starts counting up (down) again.
During interval timer operation (TMC7 = 0), when a value is set in timer load register C (TLC),
the same value is set in TCC.
Note: For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 232 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.4.2
Auto-Reload Timer Operation
Setting bit TMC7 in TMC to 1 causes timer C to function as an 8-bit auto-reload timer. When a
reload value is set in TLC, the same value is loaded into TCC, becoming the value from which
TCC starts its count.
After the count value in TCC reaches H'FF (H'00), the next clock signal input causes timer C to
overflow/underflow. The TLC value is then loaded into TCC, and the count continues from that
value. The overflow/underflow period can be set within a range from 1 to 256 input clocks,
depending on the TLC value.
The clock sources, up/down control, and interrupts in auto-reload mode are the same as in interval
mode.
In auto-reload mode (TMC7 = 1), when a new value is set in TLC, the TLC value is also set in
TCC.
11.4.3
Event Counter Operation
Timer C can operate as an event counter, with the TMIC pin as the event input pin. External event
counting is selected by setting bits TMC3 to TMC0 in the timer mode register C (TMC) to B'0111
or B'1111, and setting the TMIC bit in PMRE to 1. TCC counts up/down at the rising/falling edge
of an external event signal input at the TMIC pin.
The external event input signal is not counted correctly if it does not satisfy the high width or low
width of the input pin.
11.4.4
TCC Up/Down Control by the External Input Pin
With timer C, TCC up/down control can be performed by UD pin input. When bit TMC6 in TMC
is set to 1, TCC functions as an up-counter when UD pin input is low, and as a down-counter
when high.
When using UD pin input, set the UD bit in PMRE to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 233 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 11 Timer C
11.5
Timer C Operation States
Table 11.2 summarizes the timer C operation states.
Table 11.2 Timer C Operation States
Module
Operation Mode
TCC
Interval
Reset
Reset
Active
Sleep
1
Functioning*
Watch
1
Functioning*
Functioning/
2
Auto reload
Reset
1
Functioning*
1
Functioning*
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Sub-sleep
Standby
Standby
Functioning/
Functioning/
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
3
3
Halted*
Halted*
Halted*
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
2
TMC
Sub-active
3
3
Halted*
Halted*
Halted*
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Notes: 1. When φW/4, φ W/256, or φ W/1024 is selected as the TCC internal clock in active mode or
sleep mode, since the system clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous,
synchronization is maintained by a synchronization circuit. This results in a maximum
count cycle error of 1/φ (s).
2. When the counter is operated in watch mode, select φW/4, φW/256, or φW/1024 as the
clock.
3. When the counter is operated in subactive mode or subsleep mode, either select
φW/4, φW/256, or φW/1024 as the internal clock or select an external clock. The counter
will not operate on any other internal clock. If φ W /4 is selected as the internal clock for
the counter when φW/8 has been selected as subclock φSUB, the lower 2 bits of the
counter operate on the same cycle, and the operation of the least significant bit is
unrelated to the operation of the counter.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 234 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Section 12 Timer F
The timer F is a 16-bit timer having an output compare function. The timer F also provides for
external event counting, and counter resetting, interrupt request generation, toggle output, etc.,
using compare match signals. Thus, it can be applied to various systems. The timer F can also be
used as two independent 8-bit timers (timer FH and timer FL). Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram
of the timer F.
12.1
Features
• Choice of five counter input clocks
Internal clocks (φ/32, φ/16, φ/4, and φW/4) or external clocks can be selected.
• Toggle output function
Toggle output is performed to the TMOFH or TMOFL pin using a compare match signal.
The initial value of toggle output can be set.
• Counter resetting by a compare match signal
• Two interrupt sources: One compare match, one overflow
• Choice of 16-bit or 8-bit mode by settings of bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 in TCRF
• Can operate in watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode
When φW/4 is selected as an internal clock, the timer F can operate in watch mode, subactive
mode, and subsleep mode.
• Module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently when
it is not in use (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 235 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
φ
PSS
IRRTFL
TCRF
φW/4
TMIF
TCFL
Toggle
circuit
Comparator
Internal data bus
TMOFL
OCRFL
TCFH
Toggle
circuit
TMOFH
Comparator
[Legend]
TCRF:
TCSRF:
TCFH:
TCFL:
OCRFH:
OCRFL:
IRRTFH:
IRRTFL:
PSS:
OCRFH
Timer control register F
Timer control status register F
8-bit timer counter FH
8-bit timer counter FL
Output compare register FH
Output compare register FL
Timer FH interrupt request flag
Timer FL interrupt request flag
Prescaler S
TCSRF
IRRTFH
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Timer F
12.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 12.1 shows the input/output pins of the timer F.
Table 12.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Timer F event input
TMIF
Input
Event input pin to TCFL
Timer FH output
TMOFH
Output
Timer FH toggle output pin
Timer FL output
TMOFL
Output
Timer FL toggle output pin
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 236 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Match
Section 12 Timer F
12.3
Register Descriptions
The timer F has the following registers.
• Timer counters FH and FL (TCFH, TCFL)
• Output compare registers FH and FL (OCRFH, OCRFL)
• Timer control register F (TCRF)
• Timer control/status register F (TCSRF)
12.3.1
Timer Counters FH and FL (TCFH, TCFL)
TCF is a 16-bit read/write up-counter configured by cascaded connection of 8-bit timer counters
TCFH and TCFL. In addition to the use of TCF as a 16-bit counter with TCFH as the upper 8 bits
and TCFL as the lower 8 bits, TCFH and TCFL can also be used as independent 8-bit counters.
TCFH and TCFL are initialized to H'00 upon a reset.
(1)
16-Bit Mode (TCF)
When CKSH2 is cleared to 0 in TCRF, TCF operates as a 16-bit counter. The TCF input clock is
selected by bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF.
TCF can be cleared in the event of a compare match by means of CCLRH in TCSRF.
When TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, OVFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. If OVIEH in TCSRF
is 1 at this time, IRRTFH is set to 1 in IRR2, and if IENTFH in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is
sent to the CPU.
(2)
8-Bit Mode (TCFH/TCFL)
When CKSH2 is set to 1 in TCRF, TCFH and TCFL operate as two independent 8-bit counters.
The TCFH (TCFL) input clock is selected by bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 (CKSL2 to CKSL0) in
TCRF.
TCFH (TCFL) can be cleared in the event of a compare match by means of CCLRH (CCLRL) in
TCSRF.
When TCFH (TCFL) overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVFH (OVFL) is set to 1 in TCSRF. If
OVIEH (OVIEL) in TCSRF is 1 at this time, IRRTFH (IRRTFL) is set to 1 in IRR2, and if
IENTFH (IENTFL) in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 237 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.3.2
Output Compare Registers FH and FL (OCRFH, OCRFL)
OCRF is a 16-bit read/write register composed of the two registers OCRFH and OCRFL. In
addition to the use of OCRF as a 16-bit register with OCRFH as the upper 8 bits and OCRFL as
the lower 8 bits, OCRFH and OCRFL can also be used as independent 8-bit registers.
(1)
16-Bit Mode (OCRF)
When CKSH2 is cleared to 0 in TCRF, OCRF operates as a 16-bit register. OCRF contents are
constantly compared with TCF, and when both values match, CMFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. At the
same time, IRRTFH is set to 1 in IRR2. If IENTFH in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request
is sent to the CPU.
Toggle output can be provided from the TMOFH pin by means of compare matches, and the
output level can be set by means of the TOLH bit in TCRF.
(2)
8-Bit Mode (OCRFH/OCRFL)
When CKSH2 is set to 1 in TCRF, OCRFH and OCRFL operate as two independent 8-bit
registers. OCRFH contents are compared with TCFH, and OCRFL contents are with TCFL. When
the OCRFH (OCRFL) and TCFH (TCFL) values match, CMFH (CMFL) is set to 1 in TCSRF. At
the same time, IRRTFH (IRRTFL) is set to 1 in IRR2. If IENTFH (IENTFL) in IENR2 is 1 at this
time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Toggle output can be provided from the TMOFH pin (TMOFL pin) by means of compare
matches, and the output level can be set by means of the TOLH (TOLL) bit in TCRF.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 238 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.3.3
Timer Control Register F (TCRF)
TCRF switches between 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode, selects the input clock from among four
counter input clock sources, and selects the output level of the TMOFH and TMOFL pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TOLH
0
W
Toggle Output Level H
Sets the TMOFH pin output level.
0: Low level
1: High level
6
5
4
CKSH2
CKSH1
CKSH0
0
0
0
W
W
W
Clock Select H
Select the clock input to TCFH from among four internal
clock sources or TCFL overflow.
000: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal
001: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal
010: 16-bit mode, counting on TCFL overflow signal
011: Using prohibited
100: 8-bit mode, counting on φ/32
101: 8-bit mode, counting on φ/16
110: 8-bit mode, counting on φ/4
111: 8-bit mode, counting on φW/4
3
TOLL
0
W
Toggle Output Level L
Sets the TMOFL pin output level.
0: Low level
1: High level
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 239 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
1
0
CKSL2
CKSL1
CKSL0
0
0
0
W
W
W
Clock Select L
Select the clock input to TCFL from among four internal
clock sources or external event input.
000: Counting on a rising or falling edge of an external
event (on the TMIF pin)*
001: Counting on a rising or falling edge of an external
event (on the TMIF pin)*
010: Counting on a rising or falling edge of an external
event (on the TMIF pin)*
011: Using prohibited
100: Internal clock: counting on φ/32
101: Internal clock: counting on φ/16
110: Internal clock: counting on φ/4
111: Internal clock: counting on φW/4
Note:
12.3.4
*
The TMIFEG bit in IEGR selects which edge of an external event is used for counting.
Timer Control/Status Register F (TCSRF)
TCSRF performs counter clear selection, overflow flag setting, and compare match flag setting,
and controls enabling of overflow interrupt requests.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
OVFH
0
R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag H
Description
[Setting condition]
TCFH overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit OVFH after reading OVFH = 1
6
CMFH
0
R/(W)* Compare Match Flag H
This is a status flag indicating that TCFH has matched
OCRFH.
[Setting condition]
The TCFH value matches the OCRFH value
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit CMFH after reading CMFH = 1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 240 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
OVIEH
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable H
Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt generation
when TCFH overflows.
0: TCFH overflow interrupt request is disabled
1: TCFH overflow interrupt request is enabled
4
CCLRH
0
R/W
Counter Clear H
In 16-bit mode, this bit selects whether TCF is cleared
when TCF and OCRF match. In 8-bit mode, this bit
selects whether TCFH is cleared when TCFH and
OCRFH match.
In 16-bit mode:
0: TCF clearing by compare match is disabled
1: TCF clearing by compare match is enabled
In 8-bit mode:
0: TCFH clearing by compare match is disabled
1: TCFH clearing by compare match is enabled
3
OVFL
0
R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag L
This is a status flag indicating that TCFL has
overflowed.
[Setting condition]
TCFL overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit OVFL after reading OVFL = 1
2
CMFL
0
R/(W)* Compare Match Flag L
This is a status flag indicating that TCFL has matched
OCRFL.
[Setting condition]
The TCFL value matches the OCRFL value
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit CMFL after reading CMFL = 1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 241 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
OVIEL
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable L
Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt generation
when TCFL overflows.
0: TCFL overflow interrupt request is disabled
1: TCFL overflow interrupt request is enabled
0
CCLRL
0
R/W
Counter Clear L
Selects whether TCFL is cleared when TCFL and
OCRFL match.
0: TCFL clearing by compare match is disabled
1: TCFL clearing by compare match is enabled
Note:
*
12.4
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Operation
The timer F is a 16-bit counter that increments on each input clock pulse. The timer F value is
constantly compared with the value set in the output compare register F, and the counter can be
cleared, an interrupt requested, or port output toggled, when the two values match. The timer F
can also be used as two independent 8-bit timers.
12.4.1
Timer F Operation
The timer F has two operating modes, 16-bit timer mode and 8-bit timer mode. The operation in
each of these modes is described below.
(1)
Operation in 16-Bit Timer Mode
When the CKSH2 bit is cleared to 0 in TCRF, the timer F operates as a 16-bit timer.
Following a reset, TCF is initialized to H'0000, OCRF to H'FFFF, and TCRF and TCSRF to H'00.
The counter is incremented by an input signal from an external event (TMIF pin). The TMIFEG
bit in IEGR selects which edge of an external event is used for counting.
The timer F counter input clock can be selected from internal clocks or external events according
to settings of bits CKSL2 to CKSL0 in TCRF.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 242 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
OCRF contents are constantly compared with TCF, and when both values satisfy the compare
match condition, CMFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. If IENTFH in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU, and at the same time, TMOFH pin output is toggled. If CCLRH in
TCSRF is 1, TCF is cleared. The output level of the TMOFH pin can be set by the TOLH bit in
TCRF.
When TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000, OVFH is set to 1 in TCSRF. If OVIEH in TCSRF
and IENTFH in IENR2 are both 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
(2)
Operation in 8-Bit Timer Mode
When CKSH2 is set to 1 in TCRF, TCF operates as two independent 8-bit timers, TCFH and
TCFL. The TCFH/TCFL input clock is selected by CKSH2 to CKSH0/CKSL2 to CKSL0 in
TCRF.
When the OCRFH/OCRFL and TCFH/TCFL values match, CMFH/CMFL is set to 1 in TCSRF. If
IENTFH/IENTFL in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU, and at the same time,
TMOFH pin/TMOFL pin output is toggled. If CCLRH/CCLRL in TCSRF is 1, TCFH/TCFL is
cleared. The output level of the TMOFH pin/TMOFL pin can be set by TOLH/TOLL in TCRF.
When TCFH/TCFL overflows from H'FF to H'00, OVFH/OVFL is set to 1 in TCSRF. If
OVIEH/OVIEL in TCSRF and IENTFH/IENTFL in IENR2 are both 1, an interrupt request is sent
to the CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 243 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.4.2
(1)
TCF Increment Timing
Internal Clock Operation
TCF is incremented by internal clock or external event input. Bits CKSH2 to CKSH0 or CKSL2 to
CKSL0 in TCRF select one of internal clock sources (φ/32, φ/16, φ/4, or φW/4) created by dividing
the system clock (φ or φW).
φ
Count input
clock (φ/4)
TCF
N-1
N
N+1
Figure 12.2 Count Timing for Internal Clock Operation
(2)
External Event Operation
When the CKSL2 bit in TCRF is cleared to 0, external event input is selected. The counter is
incremented at both rising and falling edges of external events. The TMIFEG bit in IEGR selects
which edge of an external event is used for counting. The external event pulse width requires
clock time longer than 2 system clocks (φ), or 2 subclocks (φSUB), depending on the operating
mode. Note that an external event does not operate correctly with the lower pulse width.
φ
TMIF
(TMIFEG = 1)
Count input
clock
TCF
N-1
N
Figure 12.3 Count Timing for External Event Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 244 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.4.3
TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing
In TMOFH/TMOFL output, the value set in TOLH/TOLL in TCRF is output. The output is
toggled by the occurrence of a compare match.
Figure 12.4 shows the output timing.
φ
Count input
clock (φ/4)
N-1
TCF
OCRF
0
N
N
Compere match
signal
TMOFH, TMOFL
Figure 12.4 TMOFH/TMOFL Output Timing
12.4.4
TCF Clear Timing
TCF can be cleared by a compare match with OCRF.
φ
Count input
clock (φ/4)
TCF
OCRF
N-1
N
0
N
Compare match
signal
Figure 12.5 TCF Clear Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 245 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.4.5
Timer Overflow Flag (OVF) Set Timing
OVF is set to 1 when TCF overflows from H'FFFF to H'0000.
12.4.6
Compare Match Flag Set Timing
The compare match flag (CMFH or CMFL) is set to 1 when the TCF and OCRF values match.
The compare match signal is generated in the last state during which the values match (when TCF
is updated from the matching value to a new value). When TCF matches OCRF, the compare
match signal is not generated until the next counter clock.
φ
Count input
clock (φ/4)
TCF
N-1
OCRF
N
N
Compare match
signal
CMFH, CMFL
Figure 12.6 Compare Match Flag Set Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 246 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
N+1
Section 12 Timer F
12.5
Timer F Operating States
The timer F operating states are shown in table 12.2.
Table 12.2 Timer F Operating States
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
TCF
Reset
Functioning* Functioning* Functioning/ Functioning/ Functioning/ Halted
Sleep
Watch
Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby
Halted*
Halted*
Halted*
Module
Standby
Halted
OCRF
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
TCRF
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
TCSRF
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Note:
*
When φW/4 is selected as the TCF input clock in active mode or sleep mode, since the
system clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, synchronization is
maintained by a synchronization circuit. This results in a maximum count cycle error of
1/φ (s). When the counter is operated in subactive mode, watch mode, or subsleep
mode, φW /4 must be selected as the internal clock. The counter will not operate if any
other internal clock is selected.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 247 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
12.6
Usage Notes
The following types of contention and operation can occur when the timer F is used.
12.6.1
16-Bit Timer Mode
In toggle output, TMOFH pin output is toggled when all 16 bits match and a compare match
signal is generated. If a TCRF write by a MOV instruction and generation of the compare match
signal occur simultaneously, TOLH data is output to the TMOFH pin as a result of the TCRF
write. TMOFL pin output is unstable in 16-bit mode, and should not be used; the TMOFL pin
should be used as a port pin.
If an OCRFL write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare
match signal is invalid. However, if the written data and the counter value match, there is a
probability of a compare match signal being generated and not being generated. As the compare
match signal is output in synchronization with the TCFL clock, a compare match will not result in
compare match signal generation if the clock is stopped.
Compare match flag CMFH is set when all 16 bits match and a compare match signal is generated.
Compare match flag CMFL is set if the setting conditions for the lower 8 bits are satisfied.
When TCF overflows, OVFH is set. OVFL is set if the setting conditions are satisfied when the
lower 8 bits overflow. If a TCFL write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the
overflow signal is not output.
12.6.2
(1)
8-Bit Timer Mode
TCFH, OCRFH
In toggle output, TMOFH pin output is toggled when a compare match occurs. If a TCRF write by
a MOV instruction and generation of the compare match signal occur simultaneously, TOLH data
is output to the TMOFH pin as a result of the TCRF write.
If an OCRFH write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare
match signal is invalid. However, even if the written data and the counter value match, there is a
probability of a compare match signal being generated and not being generated. The compare
match signal is output in synchronization with the TCFH clock.
If a TCFH write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the overflow signal is not
output.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 248 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
(2)
TCFL, OCRFL
In toggle output, TMOFL pin output is toggled when a compare match occurs. If a TCRF write by
a MOV instruction and generation of the compare match signal occur simultaneously, TOLL data
is output to the TMOFL pin as a result of the TCRF write.
If an OCRFL write and compare match signal generation occur simultaneously, the compare
match signal is invalid. However, even if the written data and the counter value match, there is a
probability of a compare match signal being generated and not being generated. As the compare
match signal is output in synchronization with the TCFL clock, a compare match will not result in
compare match signal generation if the clock is stopped.
If a TCFL write and overflow signal output occur simultaneously, the overflow signal is not
output.
12.6.3
Flag Clearing
When φW/4 is selected as the internal clock, "Interrupt source generation signal" will be operated
with φW and the signal will be outputted with φW width. And, "Overflow signal" and "Compare
match signal" are controlled with 2 cycles of φW signals. Those signals are output with 2-cycle
width of φW (figure 12.7)
In active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode, even if you cleared interrupt request flag during the
term of validity of "Interrupt source generation signal", same interrupt request flag is set. (1 in
figure 12.7) And, the timer overflow flag and compare match flag cannot be cleared during the
term of validity of "Overflow signal" and "Compare match signal".
For interrupt request flag is set right after interrupt request is cleared, interrupt process to one time
timer FH, timer FL interrupt might be repeated. (2 in figure 12.7) Therefore, to definitely clear
interrupt request flag in active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode, clear should be processed after
the time that calculated with below (1) formula. And, to definitely clear timer overflow flag and
compare match flag, clear should be processed after read timer control status register F (TCSRF)
after the time that calculated with below (1) formula.
For ST of (1) formula, please substitute the longest number of execution states in used instruction.
(10 states of RTE instruction when MULXS, DIVXS instruction is not used, 24 states when
MULXS, DIVXS instruction is used)
In subactive mode, there are not limitation for interrupt request flag, timer overflow flag, and
compare match flag clear.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 249 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
The term of validity of "Interrupt source generation signal"
= 1 cycle of φW + waiting time for completion of executing instruction
+ interrupt time synchronized with φ
= 1/φW + ST × (1/φ) + (2/φ) (second).....(1)
ST: Executing number of execution states
Method 1 is recommended to operate for time efficiency.
Method 1
1.
Prohibit interrupt in interrupt handling routine (set IENFH, IENFL to 0).
2.
After program process returned normal handling, clear interrupt request flags (IRRTFH,
IRRTFL) after more than that calculated with (1) formula.
3.
After reading the timer control status register F (TCSRF), clear the timer overflow flags
(OVFH, OVFL) and compare match flags (CMFH, CMFL).
4.
Enable interrupts (set IENFH, IENFL to 1).
Method 2
1.
Set interrupt handling routine time to more than time that calculated with (1) formula.
2.
Clear interrupt request flags (IRRTFH, IRRTFL) at the end of interrupt handling routine.
3.
After read timer control status register F (TCSRF), clear timer overflow flags (OVFH,
OVFL) and compare match flags (CMFH, CMFL).
All above attentions are also applied in 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 250 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Interrupt request
flag clear
2
Program processing
Interrupt
Interrupt request
flag clear
Interrupt
Normal
φW
Interrupt source generation
signal (internal signal,
nega-active)
Overflow signal, compare
match signal (internal signal,
nega-active)
Interrupt request flag
(IRRTFH, IRRTFL)
1
Figure 12.7 Clear Interrupt Request Flag when
Interrupt Source Generation Signal is Valid
12.6.4
Timer Counter (TCF) Read/Write
When the internal clock φW/4 is selected as the counter input clock in active (high-speed, mediumspeed) mode, normal write is not performed on TCF. And when reading TCF, as the system clock
and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, TCF synchronizes with synchronization circuit.
This results in a maximum TCF read value error of ±1.
In subactive mode, even if φW/4 is selected as the input clock, TCF can be read from or written to
normally.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 251 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 12 Timer F
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 252 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
Section 13 Timer G
Timer G is an 8-bit timer with dedicated input capture functions for the rising/falling edges of
pulses input from the input capture input pin (input capture input signal). High-frequency
component noise in the input capture input signal can be eliminated by a noise canceller, enabling
accurate measurement of the input capture input signal duty cycle. If input capture input is not set,
timer G functions as an 8-bit interval timer.
13.1
Features
• Choice of four internal clock sources (φ/64, φ/32, φ/2, φW/4)
• Dedicated input capture functions for rising and falling edges
• Level detection at counter overflow
It is possible to detect whether overflow occurred when the input capture input signal was high
or when it was low.
• Selection of whether or not the counter value is to be cleared at the input capture input signal
rising edge, falling edge, or both edges
• Two interrupt sources: one input capture, one overflow. The input capture input signal rising
or falling edge can be selected as the interrupt source.
• A built-in noise canceller eliminates high-frequency component noise in the input capture
input signal.
• Watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode operation is possible when φW/4 is selected as
the internal clock.
• Module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently when
it is not in use (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 253 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
φ
PSS
Level
detector
φW/4
ICRGF
TMIG
Noise
canceler
Edge
detector
NCS
Internal data bus
TMG
TCG
ICRGR
IRRTG
[Legend]
TMG:
TCG:
ICRGF:
ICRGR:
IRRTG:
NCS:
PSS:
Timer mode register G
Timer counter G
Input capture register GF
Input capture register GR
Timer G interrupt request flag
Noise canceler select
Prescaler S
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer G
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 254 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 13.1 shows the timer G pin configuration.
Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Input capture input
TMIG
Input
Input capture input pin
13.3
Register Descriptions
The timer G has the following registers. For details on the clock halt register 3 (CKSTPR3), see
section 6.1.4, Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3).
• Timer counter G (TCG)
• Input capture register GF (ICRGF)
• Input capture register GR (ICRGR)
• Timer mode register G (TMG)
• Clock halt register 3 (CKSTPR3)
13.3.1
Timer Counter G (TCG)
TCG is an 8-bit up-counter which is incremented by clock input. The input clock is selected by
bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG.
TMIG in PMRF is set to 1 to operate TCG as an input capture timer, or cleared to 0 to operate
TCG as an interval timer*. In input capture timer operation, the TCG value can be cleared by the
rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture input signal, according to the setting
made in TMG.
When TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00, if OVIE in TMG is 1, IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if
IENTG in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
TCG cannot be read or written by the CPU. It is initialized to H'00 upon reset.
Note: An input capture signal may be generated when TMIG is modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 255 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.3.2
Input Capture Register GF (ICRGF)
ICRGF is an 8-bit read-only register. When a falling edge of the input capture input signal is
detected, the current TCG value is transferred to ICRGF. If IIEGS in TMG is 1 at this time,
IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if IENTG in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
To ensure dependable input capture operation, the pulse width of the input capture input signal
must be at least 2φ or 2φSUB (when the noise canceller is not used).
ICRGF is initialized to H'00 upon reset.
13.3.3
Input Capture Register GR (ICRGR)
ICRGR is an 8-bit read-only register. When a rising edge of the input capture input signal is
detected, the current TCG value is transferred to ICRGR. If IIEGS in TMG is 0 at this time,
IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if IENTG in IENR2 is 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
To ensure dependable input capture operation, the pulse width of the input capture input signal
must be at least 2φ or 2φSUB (when the noise canceller is not used).
ICRGR is initialized to H'00 upon reset.
13.3.4
Timer Mode Register G (TMG)
TMG is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs TCG clock selection from four internal
clock sources, counter clear selection, and edge selection for the input capture input signal
interrupt request, controls enabling of overflow interrupt requests, and also contains the overflow
flags.
TMG is initialized to H'00 upon reset.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 256 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
OVFH
0
R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag H
Description
Indicates that TCG has overflowed from H'FF to H'00
when the input capture input signal is high. This flag is
set by hardware and cleared by software. It cannot be
set by software.
[Setting condition]
Set when input capture input signal is high level and
TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
Writing 0 to OVFH after reading OVFH = 1
6
OVFL
0
R/(W)* Timer Overflow Flag L
Indicates that TCG has overflowed from H'FF to H'00
when the input capture input signal is low, or in interval
operation. This flag is set by hardware and cleared by
software. It cannot be set by software.
[Setting condition]
Set when TCG overflows from H'FF to H'00 while input
capture input signal is low level or during interval
operation
[Clearing condition]
Writing 0 to OVFL after reading OVFL = 1
5
OVIE
0
R/W
Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable
Selects enabling or disabling of interrupt generation
when TCG overflows.
0: TCG overflow interrupt request is disabled
1: TCG overflow interrupt request is enabled
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 257 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
IIEGS
0
R/W
Input Capture Interrupt Edge Select
Selects the input capture input signal edge that
generates an interrupt request.
0: Interrupt generated on rising edge of input capture
input signal
1: Interrupt generated on falling edge of input capture
input signal
3
CCLR1
0
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0
2
CCLR0
0
R/W
Specify whether or not TCG is cleared by the rising
edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture
input signal.
00: TCG clearing is disabled
01: TCG cleared by falling edge of input capture input
signal
10: TCG cleared by rising edge of input capture input
signal
11: TCG cleared by both edges of input capture input
signal
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select
0
CKS0
0
R/W
Select the clock input to TCG from four internal clock
sources.
00: Internal clock: counting on φ/64
01: Internal clock: counting on φ/32
10: Internal clock: counting on φ/2
11: Internal clock: counting on φW/4
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 258 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.3.5
Clock Halt Register 3 (CKSTPR3)
For details on placing timer G in and taking it out of module standby mode (this is controlled by
the TGCKSTP bit in CKSTPR3) see section 6.1.4, Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 (CKSTPR1 to
CKSTPR3).
13.4
Noise Canceller
The noise canceller consists of a digital low-pass filter that eliminates high-frequency component
noise from the pulses input from the input capture input pin. The noise canceller is set by NCS* in
PMRF.
Figure 13.2 shows a block diagram of the noise canceller.
Sampling
clock
input signal
C
C
Input capture
D
D
Q
Latch
Q
Latch
C
D
C
Q
Latch
D
C
Q
Latch
D
Q
Latch
Match
detector
Noise
canceler
output
∆t
Sampling clock
∆t: Set by CKS1 and CKS0
Figure 13.2 Noise Canceller Block Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 259 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
The noise canceller consists of five latch circuits connected in series and a match detector circuit.
When the noise cancellation function is not used (NCS = 0), the system clock is selected as the
sampling clock. When the noise cancellation function is used (NCS = 1), the sampling clock is the
internal clock selected by CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG, the input capture input is sampled on the
rising edge of this clock, and the data is judged to be correct when all the latch outputs match. If
all the outputs do not match, the previous value is retained. After a reset, the noise canceller output
is initialized when the falling edge of the input capture input signal has been sampled five times.
Therefore, after making a setting for use of the noise cancellation function, a pulse with at least
five times the width of the sampling clock is a dependable input capture signal. Even if noise
cancellation is not used, an input capture input signal pulse width of at least 2φ or 2φSUB is
necessary to ensure that input capture operations are performed properly.
Note: * An input capture signal may be generated when the NCS bit is modified.
Figure 13.3 shows an example of noise canceller timing.
In this example, high-level input of not more than five times the width of the sampling clock at the
input capture input pin is eliminated as noise.
Input capture
input signal
Sampling clock
Noise canceler
output
Eliminated as noise
Figure 13.3 Noise Canceller Timing (Example)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 260 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.5
Operation
Timer G is an 8-bit timer with built-in input capture and interval functions.
13.5.1
Timer G Functions
Timer G is an 8-bit up-counter with two functions, an input capture timer function and an interval
timer function.
The operation of these two functions is described below.
(1)
Input Capture Timer Operation
When the TMIG bit in the port mode register F (PMRF) is set to 1, timer G functions as an input
capture timer*.
Upon reset, the timer mode register G (TMG), timer counter G (TCG), input capture register GF
(ICRGF), and input capture register GR (ICRGR) are all initialized to H'00.
Following a reset, TCG starts counting on the φ/64 internal clock.
The input clock can be selected from four internal clock sources by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG.
When a rising edge/falling edge is detected in the input capture signal input from the TMIG pin,
the TCG value at that time is transferred to ICRGR/ICRGF. When the edge selected by IIEGS in
TMG is input, IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if the IENTG bit in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an
interrupt request is sent to the CPU. For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
TCG can be cleared by a rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture signal,
according to the setting of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TMG. If TCG overflows when the input
capture signal is high, the OVFH bit in TMG is set; if TCG overflows when the input capture
signal is low, the OVFL bit in TMG is set. If the OVIE bit in TMG is 1 when these bits are set,
IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if the IENTG bit in IENR2 is 1, timer G sends an interrupt request
to the CPU. For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
Timer G has a built-in noise canceller that enables high-frequency component noise to be
eliminated from pulses input from the TMIG pin. For details, see section 13.4, Noise Canceller.
Note: * An input capture signal may be generated when TMIG is modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 261 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
(2)
Interval Timer Operation
When the TMIG bit in PMRF is cleared to 0, timer G functions as an interval timer.
Following a reset, TCG starts counting on the φ/64 internal clock. The input clock can be selected
from four internal clock sources by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG. TCG increments on the
selected clock, and when it overflows from H'FF to H'00, the OVFL bit in TMG is set to 1. If the
OVIE bit in TMG is 1 at this time, IRRTG in IRR2 is set to 1, and if the IENTG bit in IENR2 is 1,
timer G sends an interrupt request to the CPU. For details on interrupts, see section 4, Interrupt
Controller.
13.5.2
Count Timing
TCG is incremented by internal clock input. Bits CKS1 and CKS0 in TMG select one of four
internal clock sources (φ/64, φ/32, φ/2, or φW/4) created by dividing the system clock (φ) or watch
clock (φW).
13.5.3
(1)
Input Capture Input Timing
Without Noise Cancellation Function
For input capture input, dedicated input capture functions are provided for rising and falling edges.
Figure 13.4 shows the timing for rising/falling edge input capture input.
φ
Input capture
input signal
Input capture
signal F
Input capture
signal R
Figure 13.4 Input Capture Input Timing (without Noise Cancellation Function)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 262 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
(2)
With Noise Cancellation Function
When noise cancellation is performed on the input capture input, the passage of the input capture
signal through the noise canceller results in a delay of five sampling clock cycles from the input
capture input signal edge.
Figure 13.5 shows the timing in this case.
Input capture
input signal
Sampling clock
Noise canceler
output
Input capture
signal R
Figure 13.5 Input Capture Input Timing (with Noise Cancellation Function)
13.5.4
Timing of Input Capture by Input Capture Input
Figure 13.6 shows the timing of input capture by input capture input.
φ
Input capture
signal
TCG
Input capture
register
N-1
N+1
N
H'xx
N
Figure 13.6 Timing of Input Capture by Input Capture Input
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 263 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.5.5
TCG Clear Timing
TCG can be cleared by the rising edge, falling edge, or both edges of the input capture input
signal.
Figure 13.7 shows the timing for clearing by both edges.
φ
Input capture
input signal
Input capture
signal F
Input capture
signal R
TCG
N
H'00
Figure 13.7 TCG Clear Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 264 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
N'
H'00
Section 13 Timer G
13.6
Timer G Operation Modes
Timer G operation modes are shown in table 13.2.
Table 13.2 Timer G Operation Modes
Module
Operation Mode
TCG
Reset
Input capture Reset
Active
Sleep
1
Functioning*
Watch
1
Functioning* Functioning/ Functioning/
halted*
Interval
Reset
Functioning*
1
Reset
Reset
Functioning*
1
Note:
Reset
3
2
halted*
3
Functioning
2
halted*3
1
Functioning* Functioning/ Functioning/
halted*
TMG
halted*
Functioning*1 Functioning*1 Functioning/ Functioning/
halted*
ICRGR
2
1
Functioning* Functioning/ Functioning/
halted*
ICRGF
Subactive
Retained
2
Retained
Subsleep
Standby
Functioning/h Halted
Standby
Halted
3
alted*
Functioning/h Halted
Halted
3
alted*
Functioning/h Retained
Retained
alted*3
Functioning/h Retained
halted*3
alted*3
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
1. When φW/4 is selected as the TCG internal clock in active mode or sleep mode, since
the system clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, synchronization is
maintained by a synchronization circuit. This results in a maximum count cycle error of
1/φ(s).
2. When φW/4 is selected as the TCG internal clock in watch mode, TCG and the noise
canceller operate on the φW/4 internal clock without regard to the φSUB subclock (φW/8,
φW/4, φW/2). Note that when another internal clock is selected, TCG and the noise
canceller do not operate, and input of the input capture input signal does not result in
input capture.
3. To operate the timer G in subactive mode or subsleep mode, select φW/4 as the TCG
internal clock and φW/2 as the subclock φSUB. Note that when other internal clock is
selected, or when φW/8 or φW/4 is selected as the subclock φSUB, TCG and the noise
canceller do not operate.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 265 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.7
Usage Notes
13.7.1
Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation
Depending on the timing, TCG may be incremented by a switch between different internal clock
sources. Table 13.3 shows the relation between internal clock switchover timing (by write to bits
CKS1 and CKS0) and TCG operation.
When TCG is internally clocked, an increment pulse is generated on detection of the falling edge
of an internal clock signal, which is divided from the system clock (φ) or subclock (φW). For this
reason, in a case like No.3 in table 13.3 where the switch is from a high clock signal to a low clock
signal, the switchover is seen as a falling edge, causing TCG to increment.
Table 13.3 Internal Clock Switching and TCG Operation
No.
Clock Levels Before and After
Modifying Bits CKS1 and CKS0
TCG Operation
1
Goes from low level to low level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count
clock
TCG
N
N+1
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
2
Goes from low level to high level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count
clock
TCG
N
N+1
N+2
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 266 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
No.
Clock Levels Before and After
Modifying Bits CKS1 and CKS0
TCG Operation
3
Goes from high level to low level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
*
Count
clock
TCG
N
N+1
N+2
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
4
Goes from high level to high level
Clock before
switching
Clock after
switching
Count
clock
TCG
N
N+1
N+2
Write to CKS1 and CKS0
Note:
13.7.2
*
The switchover is seen as a falling edge, and TCG is incremented.
Notes on Port Mode Register Modification
The following points should be noted when a port mode register is modified to switch the input
capture function or the input capture input noise canceller function.
• Switching input capture input pin function
Note that when the pin function is switched by modifying TMIG in the port mode register F
(PMRF), which performs input capture input pin control, an edge will be regarded as having
been input at the pin even though no valid edge has actually been input. Input capture input
signal input edges, and the conditions for their occurrence, are summarized in table 13.4.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 267 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
Table 13.4 Input Capture Input Signal Input Edges Due to Input Capture Input Pin
Switching, and Conditions for Their Occurrence
Input Capture Input
Signal Input Edge
Conditions
Generation of rising edge
TMIG is modified from 0 to 1 while the TMIG pin is high
NCS is modified from 0 to 1 while the TMIG pin is high, then TMIG is
modified from 0 to 1 before the signal is sampled five times by the
noise canceller
Generation of falling edge
TMIG is modified from 1 to 0 while the TMIG pin is high
NCS is modified from 0 to 1 while the TMIG pin is low, then TMIG is
modified from 0 to 1 before the signal is sampled five times by the
noise canceller
NCS is modified from 0 to 1 while the TMIG pin is high, then TMIG is
modified from 1 to 0 after the signal is sampled five times by the noise
canceller
Note:
When the PF0 pin is not set as an input capture input pin, the timer G input capture input
signal is low.
• Switching input capture input noise canceller function
When performing noise canceller function switching by modifying NCS in the port mode
register F (PMRF), which controls the input capture input noise canceller, TMIG should first
be cleared to 0. Note that if NCS is modified without first clearing TMIG, an edge will be
regarded as having been input at the pin even though no valid edge has actually been input.
Input capture input signal input edges, and the conditions for their occurrence, are summarized
in table 13.5.
Table 13.5 Input Capture Input Signal Input Edges Due to Noise Canceller Function
Switching, and Conditions for Their Occurrence
Input Capture Input
Signal Input Edge
Conditions
Generation of rising edge
TMIG pin is modified from 0 to 1 while TMIG is 1, then NCS is
modified from 0 to 1 before the signal is sampled five times by the
noise canceller
Generation of falling edge
TMIG pin is modified from 1 to 0 while TMIG is 1, then NCS is
modified from 1 to 0 before the signal is sampled five times by the
noise canceller
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 268 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
When the pin function is switched and an edge is generated in the input capture input signal, if this
edge matches the edge selected by the input capture interrupt select (IIEGS) bit, the interrupt
request flag will be set to 1. The interrupt request flag should therefore be cleared to 0 before use.
Figure 13.8 shows the procedure for handling of the port mode register and clearing of the
interrupt request flag. When switching the pin function, set the interrupt-disabled state before
handling the port mode register, then, after the port mode register operation has been performed,
wait for the time required to confirm the input capture input signal as an input capture signal (at
least two system clocks when the noise canceller is not in use; at least five sampling clocks when
the noise canceller is used), before clearing the interrupt enable flag to 0. There are two ways of
preventing interrupt request flag setting when the pin function is switched: by controlling the pin
level so that the conditions shown in tables 13.4 and 13.5 are not satisfied, or by setting the
opposite of the generated edge in the IIEGS bit in TMG.
Set I bit in CCR to 1
Manipulate port mode register
*TMIG confirmation time
Clear interrupt request flag to 0
Clear I bit in CCR to 0
Disable interrupts. (Interrupts can also be disabled by
manipulating the interrupt enable bit in interrupt enable
register 2.)
After manipulating the port mode register, wait for the
TMIG confirmation time* (at least two system clocks when
the noise canceler is not used; at least five sampling
clocks when the noise canceler is used), then clear the
interrupt enable flag to 0.
Enable interrupts
Figure 13.8 Port Mode Register Manipulation and Interrupt Enable Flag Clearing
Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 269 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 13 Timer G
13.8
Timer G Application Example
Using timer G, it is possible to measure the high and low widths of the input capture input signal
as absolute values. For this purpose, CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TMG should both be set to 1.
Figure 13.9 shows an example of the operation in this case.
Input capture
input signal
H'FF
Input capture
register GF
Input capture
register GR
H'00
TCG
Counter cleared
Figure 13.9 Timer G Application Example
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 270 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Microcontrollers of the H8/38099 Group have an on-chip 16-bit timer pulse unit (TPU) that
comprises two 16-bit timer channels. The function list of the TPU is shown in table 14.1. A block
diagram of the TPU is shown in figure 14.1.
14.1
Features
• Maximum 4-pulse input/output
• Selection of 7 or 8 counter input clocks for each channel
• The following operations can be set for each channel:
Waveform output at compare match
Input capture function
Counter clear operation
Multiple timer counters (TCNT) can be written to simultaneously
Simultaneous clearing by compare match and input capture is possible
Register synchronous input/output is possible by synchronous counter operation
PWM output with any duty level is possible
A maximum 3-phase PWM output is possible in combination with synchronous operation
• Operation with cascaded connection
• Fast access via internal 16-bit bus
• 6-type interrupt sources
• Module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently when
it is not in use (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 271 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.1 TPU Functions
Item
Channel 1
Channel 2
Count clock
φ/1
φ/1
φ/4
φ/4
φ/16
φ/16
φ/64
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKB
TCLKC
General registers (TGR)
TGRA_1
TGRA_2
TGRB_1
TGRB_2
TIOCA1
TIOCA2
TIOCB1
TIOCB2
Counter clear function
TGR compare match or input
capture
TGR compare match or input
capture
Compare
match
output
0 output
Available
Available
1 output
Available
Available
Toggle output
Available
Available
Input capture function
Available
Available
Synchronous operation
Available
Available
PWM mode
Available
Available
Interrupt sources
3 sources
3 sources
•
Compare match or input
capture 1A
•
Compare match or
input capture 2A
•
Compare match or
input capture 1B
•
Compare match or
input capture 2B
•
Overflow
•
Overflow
I/O pins
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 272 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
TGRB
TGRB
TCNT
TCNT
TGRA
TSR
Module data bus
TIER
TIER
TSR
TIOR
TIOR
TGRA
Bus
interface
Internal data bus
TSTR
Control logic
TMDR
Channel 2
TCR
TMDR
Common
[Legend]
TSTR: Timer start register
TSYR: Timer synchro register
TCR: Timer control register
TMDR: Timer mode register
TCNT: Timer counter
Channel 1
Channel 2:
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
TIOCB2
TCR
Input/output pins
Channel 1:
Control logic for channels 1 and 2
External clock:
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
φ/256
φ/1024
TCLKA
TCLKB
TCLKC
TSYR
Clock input
Internal clock: φ/1
Interrupt request signals
Channel 1: TGI1A
TGI1B
TCI1V
Channel 2: TGI2A
TGI2B
TCI2V
TIOR:
Timer I/O control registers
TIER:
Timer interrupt enable register
TSR:
Timer status register
TGR (A, B): TImer general registers (A, B)
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of TPU
14.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 14.2 Pin Configuration
Channel
Symbol
I/O
Function
Common
TCLKA
Input
External clock A input pin
TCLKB
Input
External clock B input pin
TCLKC
Input
External clock C input pin
TIOCA1
I/O
TGRA_1 input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
TIOCB1
I/O
TGRB_1 input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
TIOCA2
I/O
TGRA_2 input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
TIOCB2
I/O
TGRB_2 input capture input/output compare
output/PWM output pin
1
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 273 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3
Register Descriptions
The TPU has the following registers for each channel.
Channel 1:
• Timer control register_1 (TCR_1)
• Timer mode register_1 (TMDR_1)
• Timer I/O control register_1 (TIOR_1)
• Timer interrupt enable register_1 (TIER_1)
• Timer status register_1 (TSR_1)
• Timer counter_1 (TCNT_1)
• Timer general register A_1 (TGRA_1)
• Timer general register B_1 (TGRB_1)
Channel 2:
• Timer control register_2 (TCR_2)
• Timer mode register_2 (TMDR_2)
• Timer I/O control register_2 (TIOR_2)
• Timer interrupt enable register_2 (TIER_2)
• Timer status register_2 (TSR_2)
• Timer counter_2 (TCNT_2)
• Timer general register A_2 (TGRA_2)
• Timer general register B_2 (TGRB_2)
Common:
• Timer start register (TSTR)
• Timer synchro register (TSYR)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 274 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3.1
Timer Control Register (TCR)
TCR controls TCNT operation for each channel. The TPU has a total of two TCR registers, one
for each channel. TCR should be set when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0

Reserved
6
CCLR1
0
R/W
Counter Clear 1 and 0
5
CCLR0
0
R/W
These bits select the TCNT counter clearing source.
See table 14.3 for details.
4
CKEG1
0
R/W
Clock Edge 1 and 0
3
CKEG0
0
R/W
These bits select the input clock edge. When the
internal clock is counted using both edges, the input
clock period is halved (e.g. φ/4 both edges = φ/2 rising
edge). Internal clock edge selection is valid when the
input clock is φ/4 or slower. If the input clock is φ/1, this
setting is ignored and count at a rising edge is selected.
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
00: Count at rising edge
01: Count at falling edge
1x: Count at both edges
[Legend] x: Don't care
2
TPSC2
0
R/W
Timer Prescaler 2 to 0
1
TPSC1
0
R/W
0
TPSC0
0
R/W
These bits select the TCNT counter clock. The clock
source can be selected independently for each channel.
See tables14.4 and 14.5 for details.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 275 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.3 CCLR1 and CCLR0 (Channels 1 and 2)
Channel
Bit 6
CCLR1
Bit 5
CCLR0
Description
1, 2
0
0
TCNT clearing disabled
1
TCNT cleared by TGRA compare match/input capture
0
TCNT cleared by TGRB compare match/input capture
1
TCNT cleared by counter clearing for another channel
performing synchronous clearing/synchronous
operation*
1
Note:
*
Synchronous operation is selected by setting the SYNC bit in TSYR to 1.
Table 14.4 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 1)
Bit 2
Channel TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
1
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1
Counts on TCNT_2 overflow
0
1
1
0
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 276 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.5 TPSC2 to TPSC0 (Channel 2)
Bit 2
Channel TPSC2
Bit 1
TPSC1
Bit 0
TPSC0
Description
2
0
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/1
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/4
0
Internal clock: counts on φ/16
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/64
0
External clock: counts on TCLKA pin input
1
External clock: counts on TCLKB pin input
0
External clock: counts on TCLKC pin input
1
Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
0
1
1
0
1
14.3.2
Timer Mode Register (TMDR)
TMDR sets the operating mode for each channel. The TPU has a total of two TMDR registers, one
for each channel. TMDR should be set when TCNT operation is stopped.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
5, 4

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
3, 2

All 0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
1
MD1
0
R/W
Modes 1 and 0
0
MD0
0
R/W
These bits set the timer operating mode.
See table 14.6 for details.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 277 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.6 MD1 to MD0
Bit 1
MD1
Bit 0
MD0
Description
0
0
Normal operation
1
Reserved
0
PWM mode 1
1
PWM mode 2
1
14.3.3
Timer I/O Control Register (TIOR)
TIOR controls TGR. The TPU has a total of two TIOR registers, one for each channel. Care is
required as TIOR is affected by the TMDR setting.
The initial output specified by TIOR is valid when the counter is stopped (the CST bit in TSTR is
cleared to 0). Note also that, in PWM mode 2, the output at the point at which the counter is
cleared to 0 is specified.
• TIOR_1, TIOR_2
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
IOB3
All 0
R/W
I/O Control B3 to B0
6
IOB2
R/W
Specify the function of TGRB.
5
IOB1
R/W
For details, refer to tables 14.7 and 14.8.
4
IOB0
R/W
3
IOA3
2
All 0
R/W
I/O Control A3 to A0
IOA2
R/W
Specify the function of TGRA.
1
IOA1
R/W
For details, refer to tables 14.9 and 14.10.
0
IOA0
R/W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 278 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.7 TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB1 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
Input capture Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin
register
Input capture at rising edge
1
Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCB1 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
x
x
Setting prohibited
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 279 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.8 TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 7
IOB3
Bit 6
IOB2
Bit 5
IOB1
Bit 4
IOB0
TGRB_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCB2 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
x
0
0
Input capture Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin
register
Input capture at rising edge
1
Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCB2 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 280 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.9 TIOR_1 (Channel 1)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_1
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA1 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
0
1
Input
capture
register
Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at rising edge
Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCA1 pin
Input capture at both edges
1
x
x
Setting prohibited
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 281 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.10 TIOR_2 (Channel 2)
Description
Bit 3
IOA3
Bit 2
IOA2
Bit 1
IOA1
Bit 0
IOA0
TGRA_2
Function
0
0
0
0
Output
compare
register
1
TIOCA2 Pin Function
Output disabled
Initial output is 0
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 0
1
Initial output is 0
1 output at compare match
Toggle output at compare match
1
0
0
Output disabled
1
Initial output is 1
0 output at compare match
1
0
Initial output is 1
1 output at compare match
1
Initial output is 1
Toggle output at compare match
1
x
0
0
Input capture Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin
register
Input capture at rising edge
1
Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at falling edge
1
x
Capture input source is TIOCA2 pin
Input capture at both edges
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 282 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3.4
Timer Interrupt Enable Register (TIER)
TIER controls enabling or disabling of interrupt requests for each channel. The TPU has a total of
two TIER registers, one for each channel.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

0
R/W
Reserved
6

1

This bit is readable/writable.
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
5

0

Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
4
TCIEV
0
R/W
Overflow Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TCIV) by the
TCFV flag when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TCIV) by TCFV enabled
3, 2

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
1
TGIEB
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable B
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIB) by the
TGFB bit when the TGFB bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIB) by TGFB bit enabled
0
TGIEA
0
R/W
TGR Interrupt Enable A
Enables or disables interrupt requests (TGIA) by the
TGFA bit when the TGFA bit in TSR is set to 1.
0: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit disabled
1: Interrupt requests (TGIA) by TGFA bit enabled
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 283 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3.5
Timer Status Register (TSR)
TSR indicates the status for each channel. The TPU has a total of two TSR registers, one for each
channel.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7, 6

All 1

Reserved
5

0

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
4
TCFV
0
R/(W)* Overflow Flag
Status flag that indicates that TCNT overflow has
occurred.
[Setting condition]
The TCNT value overflows (changes from H'FFFF to
H'0000 )
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit TCFV after reading TCFV = 1
3, 2

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
1
TGFB
0
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag B
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRB input
capture or compare match.
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = TGRB and TGRB is functioning as output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to TGRB by input
capture signal and TGRB is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
•
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 284 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Writing of 0 to bit TGFB after reading TGFB = 1
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
value
R/W
0
TGFA
0
R/(W)* Input Capture/Output Compare Flag A
Description
Status flag that indicates the occurrence of TGRA input
capture or compare match.
[Setting conditions]
•
TCNT = TGRA and TGRA is functioning as output
compare register
•
The TCNT value is transferred to TGRA by input
capture signal and TGRA is functioning as input
capture register
[Clearing condition]
•
Note:
14.3.6
*
Writing of 0 to bit TGFA after reading TGFA = 1
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable counter. The TPU has a total of two TCNT counters, one for
each channel.
TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or in standby mode.
TCNT cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; it must always be accessed in 16-bit units.
14.3.7
Timer General Register (TGR)
TGR is a 16-bit readable/writable register, functioning as either output compare or input capture
register. The TPU has a total of four TGR registers, two for each channel. TGR is initialized to
H'FFFF by a reset. TGR cannot be accessed in 8-bit units; it must always be accessed in 16-bit
units.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 285 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3.8
Timer Start Register (TSTR)
TSTR selects TCNT operation/stoppage for channels 1 and 2. TCNT starts counting for channel in
which the corresponding bit is set to 1. When setting the operating mode in TMDR or setting the
TCNT count clock in TCR, first stop the TCNT operation.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 3

All 0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
2
CST2
0
R/W
Counter Start 2 and 1
1
CST1
0
R/W
These bits select operation or stoppage for TCNT.
If 0 is written to the CST bit during operation with the
TIOC pin designated for output, the counter stops but the
output compare output level of the TIOC pin is retained. If
TIOR is written to when the CST bit is cleared to 0, the
pin output level will be changed to the set initial output
value.
0: TCNT_n count operation is stopped
1: TCNT_n performs count operation
[Legend] n = 2 or 1
0

0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 286 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.3.9
Timer Synchro Register (TSYR)
TSYR selects independent operation or synchronous operation of TCNT for each channel.
Synchronous operation is performed for channel in which the corresponding bit in TSYR is set to
1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 3

All 0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
2
SYNC2
0
R/W
Timer Synchro 2 and 1
1
SYNC1
0
R/W
These bits select whether operation is independent of
or synchronized with other channels.
When synchronous operation is selected, the TCNT
synchronous presetting of multiple channels, and
synchronous clearing by counter clearing on another
channel, are possible.
To set synchronous operation, the SYNC bits must be
set to 1. To set synchronous clearing, in addition to the
SYNC bit, the TCNT clearing source must also be set
by means of bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR.
0: TCNT_n operates independently (TCNT presetting/
clearing is unrelated to other channels)
1: TCNT_n performs synchronous operation
TCNT synchronous presetting/synchronous clearing
is possible
[Legend] n = 2 or 1
0

0
R/W
Reserved
The write value should always be 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 287 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.4
Interface to CPU
14.4.1
16-Bit Registers
TCNT and TGR are 16-bit registers. As the data bus to the CPU is 16 bits wide, these registers
cannot be read or written to in 8-bit units; 16-bit access must always be used.
An example of 16-bit register access operation is shown in figure 14.2.
Internal data bus
H
CPU
L
Module data bus
Bus interface
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
TCNT
Figure 14.2 16-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TCNT (16 Bits)]
14.4.2
8-Bit Registers
Registers other than TCNT and TGR are 8-bit. They can be read and written to in 8-bit units.
Examples of 8-bit register access operation are shown in figure 14.3 and 14.4.
Internal data bus
CPU
H
L
Module data bus
Bus interface
TCR
Figure 14.3 8-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TCR (Upper 8 Bits)]
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 288 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
CPU
Internal data bus
H
L
Module data bus
Bus interface
TMDR
Figure 14.4 8-Bit Register Access Operation [CPU ↔ TMDR (Lower 8 Bits)]
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 289 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.5
Operation
14.5.1
Basic Functions
Each channel has TCNT and TGR. TCNT performs up-counting, and is also capable of freerunning operation, periodic counting, and external event counting.
TGR can be used as an input capture register or output compare register.
(1)
Counter Operation
When one of bits CST1 and CST2 is set to 1 in TSTR, TCNT for the corresponding channel
begins counting. TCNT can operate as a free-running counter, periodic counter, for example.
(a)
Example of Count Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 14.5 shows an example of the count operation setting procedure.
Operation selection
Select counter clock
[1]
Periodic counter
Select counter clearing source
Free-running counter
[2]
[3]
Select output compare register
Set period
[4]
Start count operation
[5]
<Periodic counter>
Start count operation
<Free-running counter>
[1] Select the counter
clock with bits
TPSC2 to TPSC0 in
TCR. At the same
time, select the
input clock edge
with bits CKEG1
and CKEG0 in TCR.
[2] For periodic counter
operation, select
TGR to be used as
the TCNT clearing
source with bits
CCLR1 and CCLR0 in
TCR.
[3] Designate TGR
selected in [2] as an
output compare
register by means of
TIOR.
[4] Set the periodic
counter cycle in
TGR selected in [2].
[5] Set the CST bit in
TSTR to 1 to start
the counter
operation.
Figure 14.5 Example of Counter Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 290 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Free-Running Count Operation and Periodic Count Operation
Immediately after a reset, the TPU's TCNT counters are all designated as free-running counters.
When the relevant bit in TSTR is set to 1, the corresponding TCNT starts up-count operation as a
free-running counter. When TCNT overflows (from H'FFFF to H'0000), the TCFV bit in TSR is
set to 1. If the value of the corresponding TCIEV bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests
an interrupt. After overflow, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Figure 14.6 illustrates free-running counter operation.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
H'0000
Time
CST bit
TCFV
Figure 14.6 Free-Running Counter Operation
When compare match is selected as the TCNT clearing source, TCNT for the relevant channel
performs periodic count operation. TGR for setting the period is designated as an output compare
register, and counter clearing by compare match is selected by means of bits CCLR0 and CCLR1
in TCR. After the settings have been made, TCNT starts up-count operation as a periodic counter
when the corresponding bit in TSTR is set to 1. When the count value matches the value in TGR,
the TGF bit in TSR is set to 1 and TCNT is cleared to H'0000.
If the value of the corresponding TGIE bit in TIER is 1 at this point, the TPU requests an interrupt.
After a compare match, TCNT starts counting up again from H'0000.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 291 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 14.7 illustrates periodic counter operation.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGR
compare match
TGR
H'0000
Time
CST bit
Flag cleared by software
TGF
Figure 14.7 Periodic Counter Operation
(2)
Waveform Output by Compare Match
The TPU can perform 0, 1, or toggle output from the corresponding output pin using compare
match.
(a)
Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Figure 14.8 shows an example of the setting procedure for waveform output by compare match.
Input selection
[1]
Select waveform output mode
[2]
[3]
Set output timing
[1] Select 0 output or 1 output for initial value, and
0 output, 1 output, or toggle output, by for compare
match output value means of TIOR. The set
initial value is output at the TIOC pin until the
first compare match occurs.
[2] Set the timing for compare match generation in
TGR.
[3] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
Start count operation
< Waveform output >
Figure 14.8 Example of Setting Procedure for Waveform Output by Compare Match
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 292 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Examples of Waveform Output Operation
Figure 14.9 shows an example of 0 output/1 output.
In this example, TCNT has been designated as a free-running counter, and settings have been
made such that 1 is output by compare match A, and 0 is output by compare match B. When the
set level and the pin level match, the pin level does not change.
TCNT value
H'FFFF
TGRA
TGRB
Time
H'0000
No change
No change
1 output
TIOCA
TIOCB
No change
No change
0 output
Figure 14.9 Example of 0 Output/1 Output Operation
Figure 14.10 shows an example of toggle output.
In this example, TCNT has been designated as a periodic counter (with counter clearing on
compare match B), and settings have been made such that the output is toggled by both compare
match A and compare match B.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by TGRB compare match
H'FFFF
TGRB
TGRA
Time
H'0000
Toggle output
TIOCB
Toggle output
TIOCA
Figure 14.10 Example of Toggle Output Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 293 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(3)
Input Capture Function
The TCNT value can be transferred to TGR on detection of the TIOC pin input edge.
Rising edge, falling edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge.
(a)
Example of Input Capture Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 14.11 shows an example of the setting procedure for input capture operation.
Input selection
Select input capture input
Start count
[1] Designate TGR as an input capture register by
means of TIOR, and select the input capture source
and, rising edge, falling edge, or both edges as the
input signal edge.
[1] [2] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 to start the count
operation.
[2]
<Input capture operation>
Figure 14.11 Example of Setting Procedure for Input Capture Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 294 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(b)
Example of Input Capture Operation
Figure 14.12 shows an example of input capture operation.
In this example, both rising and falling edges have been selected as the input capture input edge of
the TIOCA pin, the falling edge has been selected as the input capture input edge of the TIOCB
pin, and counter clearing by TGRB input capture has been designated for TCNT.
Counter cleared by TIOCB
input (falling edge)
TCNT value
H'0180
H'0160
H'0010
H'0005
Time
H'0000
TIOCA
TGRA
H'0005
H'0160
H'0010
TIOCB
TGRB
H'0180
Figure 14.12 Example of Input Capture Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 295 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.5.2
Synchronous Operation
In synchronous operation, the values in multiple TCNT counters can be rewritten simultaneously
(synchronous presetting). Also, multiple TCNT counters can be cleared simultaneously by making
the appropriate setting in TCR (synchronous clearing).
Synchronous operation enables TGR to be incremented with respect to a single time base.
Synchronous operation can be set for each channel.
(1)
Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Figure 14.13 shows an example of the synchronous operation setting procedure.
Synchronous operation
selection
Set synchronous
operation
[1]
Synchronous presetting
Set TCNT
Synchronous clearing
[2]
Clearing
source generation
channel?
No
Yes
<Synchronous presetting>
Select counter
clearing source
[3]
Set synchronous
counter clearing
[4]
Start count
[5]
Start count
[5]
<Counter clearing>
<Synchronous clearing>
[1] Set 1 to the SYNC bits in TSYR corresponding to the channels to be designated for synchronous
operation.
[2] When the TCNT counter of any of the channels designated for synchronous operation is
written to, the same value is simultaneously written to the other TCNT counters.
[3] Use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to specify TCNT clearing by input capture/output compare,
etc.
[4] Use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to designate synchronous clearing for the counter clearing
source.
[5] Set 1 to the CST bits in TSTR for the relevant channels, to start the count operation.
Figure 14.13 Example of Synchronous Operation Setting Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 296 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Example of Synchronous Operation
Figure 14.14 shows an example of synchronous operation.
In this example, synchronous operation and PWM mode 1 have been designated for channels 1
and 2, TGRB_1 compare match has been set as the channel 1 counter clearing source, and
synchronous clearing has been set for the channel 2 counter clearing source.
Two-phase PWM waveforms are output from pins TIOC1A and TIOC2A. At this time,
synchronous presetting, and synchronous clearing by TGRB_1 compare match, are performed for
channel 1 and 2 TCNT counters, and the data set in TGRB_1 is used as the PWM cycle.
For details on PWM modes, see section 14.5.4, PWM Modes.
Synchronous clearing by TGRB_1 compare match
TCNT_1 and TCNT_2
TGRB_1
TGRB_2
TGRA_1
TGRA_2
Time
H'0000
TIOCA1
TIOCA2
Figure 14.14 Example of Synchronous Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 297 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.5.3
Operation with Cascaded Connection
Operation as a 32-bit counter can be performed by cascading two 16-bit counter channels.
This function is enabled when the TPSC2 to TPSC0 bits in TCR are set to count on TCNT2
overflow for the channel 1 counter clock.
Table 14.11 shows the counter combination used in operation with the cascaded connection.
Table 14.11 Counter Combination in Operation with Cascaded Connection
Combination
Upper 16 bits
Lower 16 bits
Channel 1 and channel 2
TCNT1
TCNT2
(1)
Setting Procedure for Operation with Cascaded Connection
Figure 14.15 shows the setting procedure for cascaded connection operation.
Operation with cascaded
connection
[1] Set bits TPSC2 to TPSC0 in TCR in
channel 1 to B'111 to select to count
on TCNT2 overflow.
Set operation with cascaded
connection
[1]
Start count
[2]
[2] Set 1 to the CST bit in TSTR corresponding
the upper and lower channels to start
counting.
<Operation with cascaded connection>
Figure 14.15 Setting Procedure for Operation with Cascaded Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 298 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Example of Operation with Cascaded Connection
Figure 14.16 shows an example of operation with cascaded connection, where TCNT1 is set to
count TCNT2 overflow, TCRA_1 and TCRA_2 are set to be input capture registers, and the TIOC
pin rising edge is selected.
If rising edges are input simultaneously to the TIOCA1 and TIOCA2 pins, the upper 16 bits of 32bit data are transferred to TGRA_1 and the lower 16 bits are transferred to TGRA_2.
TCNT1
clock
TCNT1
H'03A1
H'03A2
TCNT2
clock
TCNT2
H'FFFF
H'0000
H'0001
TIOCA1
TIOCA2
TGRA_1
TGRA_2
H'03A2
H'0000
Figure 14.16 Example of Operation with Cascaded Connection
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 299 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.5.4
PWM Modes
In PWM mode, PWM waveforms are output from the output pins. The output level can be selected
as 0, 1, or toggle output in response to a compare match of each TGR.
Designating TGR compare match as the counter clearing source enables the period to be set in that
register. All channels can be designated for PWM mode independently. Synchronous operation is
also possible.
There are two PWM modes, as described below.
(1)
PWM Mode 1
PWM output is generated from the TIOCA pin by pairing TGRA with TGRB. The level specified
by bits IOA0 to IOA3 in TIOR is output from the TIOCA pin at compare match A, and the level
specified by bits IOB0 to IOB3 in TIOR is output at compare match B. The initial output value is
the value set in TGRA. If the set values of paired TGRs are identical, the output value does not
change even if a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 1, PWM output is enabled up to 2 phases.
(2)
PWM Mode 2
PWM output is generated using one TGR as the cycle register and the others as duty registers. The
output specified in TIOR is performed by means of compare matches. Upon counter clearing by a
synchronization register compare match, the output value of each pin is the initial value set in
TIOR. If the set values of the cycle and duty registers are identical, the output value does not
change even if a compare match occurs.
In PWM mode 2, PWM output is enabled up to 3 phases.
The correspondence between PWM output pins and registers is shown in table 14.12.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 300 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Table 14.12 PWM Output Registers and Output Pins
Output Pins
Channel
Registers
PWM Mode 1
1
TGRA_1
TIOCA1
PWM Mode 2*
TIOCA1
TGRB_1
2
TIOCB1
TGRA_2
TIOCA2
TIOCA2
TGRB_2
Note:
(3)
*
TIOCB2
In PWM mode 2, PWM output is not possible for TGR in which the period is set.
Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Figure 14.17 shows an example of the PWM mode setting procedure.
PWM mode
Select counter clock
[1]
Select counter clearing source
[2]
Select waveform output level
[3]
Set TGR
[4]
Set PWM mode
[5]
Start count
[6]
[1] Select the counter clock with bits TPSC2 to
TPSC0 in TCR. At the same time, select the
input clock edge with bits CKEG1 and CKEG0
in TCR.
[2] Use bits CCLR1 and CCLR0 in TCR to select the
TGR to be used as the TCNT clearing source.
[3] Use TIOR to designate the TGR as an output
compare register, and select the initial value and
output value.
[4] Set the cycle in the TGR selected in [2], and set
the duty in the other TGR.
[5] Select the PWM mode with bits MD3 to MD0 in
TMDR.
[6] Set the CST bit in TSTR to 1 start the count
operation.
<PWM mode>
Figure 14.17 Example of PWM Mode Setting Procedure
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 301 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(4)
Examples of PWM Mode Operation
Figure 14.18 shows an example of PWM mode 1 operation. In this example, TGRA compare
match is set as the TCNT clearing source, 0 is set for the TGRA initial output value and output
value, and 1 is set as the TGRB output value.
In this case, the value set in TGRA is used as the period, and the values set in TGRB are used as
the duty levels.
TCNT value
Counter cleared by
TGRA compare match
TGRA
TGRB
H'0000
Time
TIOCA
Figure 14.18 Example of PWM Mode Operation (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 302 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
Figure 14.19 shows an example of PWM mode 2 operation. In this example, synchronous
operation is designated for channels 1 and 2, TGRB_2 compare match is set as the TCNT clearing
source, and 0 is set for the initial output value and 1 for the output value of the other TGR registers
(TGRA_1, TGRB_1, and TGRA_2), outputting a 3-phase PWM waveform.
In this case, the value set in TGRB_2 is used as the cycle, and the values set in the other TGRs are
used as the duty levels.
Synchronous clearing by
TGRB_2 compare match
TCNT_1 and TCNT_2
TGRB_2
TGRA_2
TGRB_1
TGRA_1
Time
H'0000
TIOCA1
TIOCB1
TIOCA2
Figure 14.19 Example of PWM Mode Operation (2)
Figure 14.20 shows examples of PWM waveform output with 0% duty and 100% duty in PWM
mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 303 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(1) When the value of the duty register is larger than that of the cycle register
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
rewritten
Time
H'0000
0% duty
TIOCA
(2) When the values of the duty and cycle registers are identical
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register
compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
H'0000
Time
100% duty
TIOCA
(3) When the value of the duty register is made larger than that of the cycle register,
after the values of the duty and cycle registers are set identical
Output does not change when cycle register and duty register
compare matches occur simultaneously
TCNT value
TGRB rewritten
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
TGRB rewritten
Time
H'0000
100% duty
TIOCA
0% duty
(4) When the value of the duty register is made smaller than that of TCNT,
before duty register compare match occurs
TCNT value
TGRA
TGRB rewritten
TGRB
H'0000
Time
0% duty
TIOCA
Figure 14.20 Example of PWM Mode Operation (3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 304 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.6
Interrupt Sources
There are two kinds of TPU interrupt source; TGR input capture/compare match and TCNT
overflow. Each interrupt source has its own status flag and enable/disable bit, allowing the
generation of interrupt request signals to be enabled or disabled individually.
When an interrupt source is generated, the corresponding status flag in TSR is set to 1. If the
corresponding enable/disable bit in TIER is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt is requested. The
interrupt request is cleared by clearing the status flag to 0.
Mask levels within a channel can be changed by the interrupt controller. For details, see section 4,
Interrupt Controller.
Table 14.13 lists the TPU interrupt sources.
Table 14.13 TPU Interrupts
Channel
Name
Interrupt Source
Interrupt Flag Priority
1
TGI1A
TGRA_1 input capture/compare match
TGFA_1
TGI1B
TGRB_1 input capture/compare match
TGFB_1
TCI1V
TCNT_1 overflow
TCFV_1
TGI2A
TGRA_2 input capture/compare match
TGFA_2
TGI2B
TGRB_2 input capture/compare match
TGFB_2
TCI2V
TCNT_2 overflow
TCFV_2
2
(1)
High
Low
Input Capture/Compare Match Interrupt
An interrupt is requested if the TGIE bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TGF flag in TSR is set to 1
by the occurrence of a TGR input capture/compare match on a particular channel. The interrupt
request is cleared by clearing the TGF flag to 0. The TPU has a total of four input capture/compare
match interrupts, two for each channel.
(2)
Overflow Interrupt
An interrupt is requested if the TCIEV bit in TIER is set to 1 when the TCFV flag in TSR is set to
1 by the occurrence of TCNT overflow on a channel. The interrupt request is cleared by clearing
the TCFV flag to 0. The TPU has a total of two overflow interrupts, one for each channel.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 305 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.7
Operation Timing
14.7.1
Input/Output Timing
(1)
TCNT Count Timing
Figure 14.21 shows TCNT count timing in internal clock operation, and figure 14.22 shows TCNT
count timing in external clock operation.
φ
Internal clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N-1
N
N+1
N+2
Figure 14.21 Count Timing in Internal Clock Operation
φ
External clock
Falling edge
Rising edge
Falling edge
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
N-1
N
N+1
Figure 14.22 Count Timing in External Clock Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 306 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
N+2
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
Output Compare Output Timing
A compare match signal is generated in the last state in which TCNT and TGR match (the point at
which the count value matched by TCNT is updated). When a compare match signal is generated,
the output value set in TIOR is output at the output compare output pin (TIOC pin). After a match
between TCNT and TGR, the compare match signal is not generated until the TCNT input clock is
generated.
Figure 14.23 shows output compare output timing.
φ
TCNT
input clock
TCNT
TGR
N
N+1
N
Compare
match signal
TIOC pin
Figure 14.23 Output Compare Output Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 307 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(3)
Input Capture Signal Timing
Figure 14.24 shows input capture signal timing.
φ
Input capture
input
Input capture
signal
TCNT
N
N+1
N+2
N
TGR
N+2
Figure 14.24 Input Capture Input Signal Timing
(4)
Timing for Counter Clearing by Compare Match/Input Capture
Figure 14.25 shows the timing when counter clearing on compare match is specified, and figure
14.26 shows the timing when counter clearing on input capture is specified.
φ
Compare
match signal
Counter
clear signal
TCNT
N
TGR
N
H'0000
Figure 14.25 Counter Clear Timing (Compare Match)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 308 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
φ
Input capture
signal
Counter clear
signal
H'0000
N
TCNT
N
TGR
Figure 14.26 Counter Clear Timing (Input Capture)
14.7.2
(1)
Interrupt Signal Timing
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Compare Match
Figure 14.27 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on compare match, and TGI
interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
TGR
N
N+1
Compare
match signal
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 14.27 TGI Interrupt Timing (Compare Match)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 309 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(2)
TGF Flag Setting Timing in Case of Input Capture
Figure 14.28 shows the timing for setting of the TGF flag in TSR on input capture, and TGI
interrupt request signal timing.
φ
Input capture
signal
N
TCNT
TGR
N
TGF flag
TGI interrupt
Figure 14.28 TGI Interrupt Timing (Input Capture)
(3)
TCFV Flag Setting Timing
Figure 14.29 shows the timing for setting of the TCFV flag in TSR on overflow, and TCIV
interrupt request signal timing.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
(overflow)
H'FFFF
H'0000
Overflow
signal
TCFV flag
TCIV interrupt
Figure 14.29 TCIV Interrupt Setting Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 310 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
(4)
Status Flag Clearing Timing
After a status flag is read as 1 by the CPU, it is cleared by writing 0 to it. Figure 14.30 shows the
timing for status flag clearing by the CPU.
TSR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TSR address
Address
Write signal
Status flag
Interrupt
request
signal
Figure 14.30 Timing for Status Flag Clearing by CPU
14.8
Usage Notes
14.8.1
Module Standby Function Setting
TPU operation can be disabled or enabled using the clock stop register. The initial setting is for
the TPU to operate. Register access is enabled by clearing the module standby function. For
details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function.
14.8.2
Input Clock Restrictions
The input clock pulse width must be at least 1.5 states in the case of single-edge detection, and at
least 2.5 states in the case of both-edge detection. The TPU will not operate properly at narrower
pulse widths.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 311 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.3
Caution on Period Setting
When counter clearing on compare match is set, TCNT is cleared in the last state in which it
matches the TGR value (the point at which the count value matched by TCNT is updated).
Consequently, the actual counter frequency is given by the following formula:
φ
f=
(N + 1)
Where
14.8.4
f: Counter frequency
φ: Operating frequency
N: TGR set value
Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operation
If the counter clear signal is generated in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, TCNT clearing takes
priority and the TCNT write is not performed.
Figure 14.31 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
Counter clear
signal
TCNT
N
H'0000
Figure 14.31 Contention between TCNT Write and Clear Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 312 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.5
Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operation
If incrementing occurs in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle, the TCNT write takes priority and
TCNT is not incremented.
Figure 14.32 shows the timing in this case.
TCNT write cycle
T1
T2
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
N
M
TCNT write data
Figure 14.32 Contention between TCNT Write and Increment Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 313 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.6
Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
If a compare match occurs in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the TGR write takes priority and
the compare match signal is inhibited. A compare match does not occur even if the previous value
is written.
Figure 14.33 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Write signal
Compare
match signal
Inhibited
TCNT
N
N+1
TGR
N
M
TGR write data
Figure 14.33 Contention between TGR Write and Compare Match
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 314 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.7
Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T1 state of a TGR read cycle, data that is read will be
data after input capture transfer.
Figure 14.34 shows the timing in this case.
TGR read cycle
T2
T1
φ
TGR address
Address
Read signal
Input capture
signal
TGR
Internal
data bus
X
M
M
Figure 14.34 Contention between TGR Read and Input Capture
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 315 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.8
Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
If an input capture signal is generated in the T2 state of a TGR write cycle, the input capture
operation takes priority and the write to TGR is not performed.
Figure 14.35 shows the timing in this case.
TGR write cycle
T2
T1
φ
Address
TGR address
Write signal
Input capture
signal
TCNT
TGR
M
M
Figure 14.35 Contention between TGR Write and Input Capture
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 316 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.9
Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
If overflow and counter clearing occur simultaneously, the TCFV flag in TSR is not set and TCNT
clearing takes priority.
Figure 14.36 shows the operation timing when a TGR compare match is specified as the clearing
source, and when H'FFFF is set in TGR.
φ
TCNT input
clock
TCNT
H'FFFF
H'0000
Counter
clear signal
TGF
TCFV
Disabled
Figure 14.36 Contention between Overflow and Counter Clearing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 317 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse Unit (TPU)
14.8.10 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
If there is an up-count in the T2 state of a TCNT write cycle and overflow occurs, the TCNT write
takes priority and the TCFV flag in TSR is not set.
Figure 14.37 shows the operation timing when there is contention between TCNT write and
overflow.
TCNT write cycle
T2
T1
φ
TCNT address
Address
Write signal
TCNT
TCNT write data
H'FFFF
M
TCFV flag
Figure 14.37 Contention between TCNT Write and Overflow
14.8.11 Multiplexing of I/O Pins
The TIOCA1 I/O pin is multiplexed with the TCLKA input pin, the TIOCB1 I/O pin with the
TCLKB input pin, and the TIOCA2 I/O pin with the TCLKC input pin. When an external clock is
input, compare match output should not be performed from a multiplexed pin.
14.8.12 Interrupts when Module Standby Function is Used
If the module standby function is used when an interrupt has been requested, it will not be possible
to clear the CPU interrupt source with the interrupt request enabled. Interrupts should therefore be
disabled before using the module standby function.
14.8.13 Output Conditions for 0% Duty and 100% Duty
When TGR is rewritten to change the duty in PWM mode, 0% duty or 100% duty is specified
depending on the TCT value when rewritten, the TGR value before rewritten, and the TGR value
after rewritten. For derails, refer to figure 14.20.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 318 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
The asynchronous event counter (AEC) is an event counter that is incremented by external event
clock or internal clock input. Figure 15.1 shows a block diagram of the asynchronous event
counter.
15.1
Features
• Can count asynchronous events
Can count external events input asynchronously without regard to the operation of system
clocks (φ) or subclocks (φSUB).
• Can be used as two-channel independent 8-bit event counter or single-channel independent 16bit event counter.
• Event/clock input is enabled when IRQAEC goes high or event counter PWM output
(IECPWM) goes high.
• Falling edge, rising edge, or both edges can be selected as the detected edge for IRQAEC or
event counter PWM output (IECPWM) interrupts. When the asynchronous counter is not used,
they can be used as independent interrupts.
• When an event counter PWM is used, event clock input enabling/disabling can be controlled at
a constant cycle.
• Selection of four clock sources
Three internal clocks (φ/2, φ/4, or φ/8) or external event can be selected.
• Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge counting is possible for the AEVL and AEVH pins.
• Counter resetting and halting of the count-up function can be controlled by software.
• Automatic interrupt generation on detection of an event counter overflow
• Module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently when
it is not in use (For details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 319 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
IRREC
φ
ECCR
PSS
ECCSR
OVH
AEVH
AEVL
Edge sensing
circuit
OVL
ECH
(8 bits)
CK
ECL
(8 bits)
CK
Edge sensing
circuit
IRQAEC
Edge sensing
circuit
IECPWM
To CPU interrupt
(IRREC2)
ECPWCR
PWM waveform generator
φ/2, φ/4,
φ/8, φ/16,
φ/32, φ/64
ECPWDR
AEGSR
[Legend]
ECPWCR:
ECPWDR:
AEGSR:
ECCSR:
Event counter PWM compare register
Event counter PWM data register
Input pin edge select register
Event counter control/status register
ECL:
ECCR:
ECH:
PSS:
Event counter L
Event counter control register
Event counter H
Prescaler S
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of Asynchronous Event Counter
15.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 15.1 shows the pin configuration of the asynchronous event counter.
Table 15.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Asynchronous event AEVH
input H
Input
Event input pin for input to event counter H
Asynchronous event AEVL
input L
Input
Event input pin for input to event counter L
Event input enable
interrupt input
Input
Input pin for interrupt enabling event input
IRQAEC
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 320 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
φ/2
φ/4, φ/8
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3
Register Descriptions
The asynchronous event counter has the following registers.
• Event counter PWM compare register (ECPWCR)
• Event counter PWM data register (ECPWDR)
• Input pin edge select register (AEGSR)
• Event counter control register (ECCR)
• Event counter control/status register (ECCSR)
• Event counter H (ECH)
• Event counter L (ECL)
15.3.1
Event Counter PWM Compare Register (ECPWCR)
ECPWCR sets the one conversion period of the event counter PWM waveform. ECPWCR should
be read from or written to in word units.
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
ECPWCR15 1
R/W
14
ECPWCR14 1
R/W
One Conversion Period of Event Counter PWM
Waveform
13
ECPWCR13 1
R/W
12
ECPWCR12 1
R/W
11
ECPWCR11 1
R/W
10
ECPWCR10 1
R/W
9
ECPWCR9
1
R/W
8
ECPWCR8
1
R/W
7
ECPWCR7
1
R/W
6
ECPWCR6
1
R/W
5
ECPWCR5
1
R/W
4
ECPWCR4
1
R/W
3
ECPWCR3
1
R/W
2
ECPWCR2
1
R/W
1
ECPWCR1
1
R/W
0
ECPWCR0
1
R/W
Bit
Bit Name
15
When the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is 1, the event
counter PWM is operating and therefore ECPWCR
should not be modified.
When changing the conversion period, the event
counter PWM must be halted by clearing the ECPWME
bit in AEGSR to 0 before modifying ECPWCR.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 321 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3.2
Event Counter PWM Data Register (ECPWDR)
ECPWDR controls data of the event counter PWM waveform generator. ECPWDR should be read
from or written to in word units.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
15
ECPWDR15
0
W
14
ECPWDR14
0
W
Data Control of Event Counter PWM Waveform
Generator
13
ECPWDR13
0
W
12
ECPWDR12
0
W
11
ECPWDR11
0
W
10
ECPWDR10
0
W
9
ECPWDR9
0
W
When the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is 1, the event
counter PWM is operating and therefore ECPWDR
should not be modified.
When changing the conversion cycle, the event
counter PWM must be halted by clearing the
ECPWME bit in AEGSR to 0 before modifying
ECPWDR.
8
ECPWDR8
0
W
The read value is undefined.
7
ECPWDR7
0
W
6
ECPWDR6
0
W
5
ECPWDR5
0
W
4
ECPWDR4
0
W
3
ECPWDR3
0
W
2
ECPWDR2
0
W
1
ECPWDR1
0
W
0
ECPWDR0
0
W
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 322 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3.3
Input Pin Edge Select Register (AEGSR)
AEGSR selects rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the AEVH, AEVL, and IRQAEC pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
AHEGS1
0
R/W
AEC Edge Select H
6
AHEGS0
0
R/W
Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the AEVH
pin.
00: Falling edge on AEVH pin is sensed
01: Rising edge on AEVH pin is sensed
10: Both edges on AEVH pin are sensed
11: Setting prohibited
5
ALEGS1
0
R/W
AEC Edge Select L
4
ALEGS0
0
R/W
Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the AEVL
pin.
00: Falling edge on AEVL pin is sensed
01: Rising edge on AEVL pin is sensed
10: Both edges on AEVL pin are sensed
11: Setting prohibited
3
AIEGS1
0
R/W
IRQAEC Edge Select
2
AIEGS0
0
R/W
Select rising, falling, or both edge sensing for the
IRQAEC pin.
00: Falling edge on IRQAEC pin is sensed
01: Rising edge on IRQAEC pin is sensed
10: Both edges on IRQAEC pin are sensed
11: Setting prohibited
1
ECPWME
0
R/W
Event Counter PWM Enable
Controls operation of event counter PWM and selection
of IRQAEC.
0: AEC PWM halted, IRQAEC selected
1: AEC PWM enabled, IRQAEC not selected
0

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to. However, this bit
should not be set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 323 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3.4
Event Counter Control Register (ECCR)
ECCR controls the counter input clock and IRQAEC/IECPWM.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ACKH1
0
R/W
AEC Clock Select H
6
ACKH0
0
R/W
Select the clock used by ECH.
00: AEVH pin input
01: φ/2
10: φ/4
11: φ/8
5
ACKL1
0
R/W
AEC Clock Select L
4
ACKL0
0
R/W
Select the clock used by ECL.
00: AEVL pin input
01: φ/2
10: φ/4
11: φ/8
3
PWCK2
0
R/W
Event Counter PWM Clock Select
2
PWCK1
0
R/W
Select the event counter PWM clock.
1
PWCK0
0
R/W
000: φ/2
001: φ/4
010: φ/8
011: φ/16
1x0: φ/32
1x1: φ/64
When changing the event counter PWM clock, stop the
PWM by setting the ECPWME bit in AEGSR to 0, and
then change the value of these bits.
0

0
R/W
Reserved
This bit can be read from or written to. However, this bit
should not be set to 1.
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 324 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3.5
Event Counter Control/Status Register (ECCSR)
ECCSR controls counter overflow detection, counter resetting, and count-up function.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
OVH
0
R/(W)*
Counter Overflow H
This is a status flag indicating that ECH has overflowed.
[Setting condition]
ECH overflows from H'FF to H'00
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit OVH after reading OVH = 1
6
OVL
0
R/(W)*
Counter Overflow L
This is a status flag indicating that ECL has overflowed.
[Setting condition]
ECL overflows from H'FF to H'00 while CH2 is set to 1
[Clearing condition]
Writing of 0 to bit OVL after reading OVL = 1
5

0
R/W
Reserved
Although this bit is readable/writable, it should not be
set to 1.
4
CH2
0
R/W
Channel Select
Selects how ECH and ECL event counters are used
0: ECH and ECL are used together as a single-channel
16-bit event counter
1: ECH and ECL are used as two-channel 8-bit event
counter
3
CUEH
0
R/W
Count-Up Enable H
Enables event clock input to ECH.
0: ECH event clock input is disabled (ECH value is
retained)
1: ECH event clock input is enabled
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 325 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
CUEL
0
R/W
Count-Up Enable L
Enables event clock input to ECL.
0: ECL event clock input is disabled (ECL value is
retained)
1: ECL event clock input is enabled
1
CRCH
0
R/W
Counter Reset Control H
Controls resetting of ECH.
0: ECH is reset
1: ECH reset is cleared and count-up function is
enabled
0
CRCL
0
R/W
Counter Reset Control L
Controls resetting of ECL.
0: ECL is reset
1: ECL reset is cleared and count-up function is
enabled
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 326 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.3.6
Event Counter H (ECH)
ECH is an 8-bit read-only up-counter that operates as an independent 8-bit event counter. ECH
also operates as the upper 8-bit up-counter of a 16-bit event counter configured in combination
with ECL. When word access is performed for ECH, the upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits of a 16-bit
event counter can be read from in one bus cycle.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ECH7
0
R
6
ECH6
0
R
5
ECH5
0
R
4
ECH4
0
R
Either the external asynchronous event AEVH pin, φ/2,
φ/4, or φ/8, or the overflow signal from lower 8-bit
counter ECL can be selected as the input clock source.
ECH can be cleared to H'00 by the CRCH bit in
ECCSR.
3
ECH3
0
R
2
ECH2
0
R
1
ECH1
0
R
0
ECH0
0
R
15.3.7
Event Counter L (ECL)
ECL is an 8-bit read-only up-counter that operates as an independent 8-bit event counter. ECL
also operates as the upper 8-bit up-counter of a 16-bit event counter configured in combination
with ECH. When word access is performed for ECL, the upper 8 bits and lower 8 bits of a 16-bit
event counter can be read from in one bus cycle.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ECL7
0
R
6
ECL6
0
R
Either the external asynchronous event AEVL pin, φ/2,
φ/4, or φ/8 can be selected as the input clock source.
ECL can be cleared to H'00 by the CRCL bit in ECCSR.
5
ECL5
0
R
4
ECL4
0
R
3
ECL3
0
R
2
ECL2
0
R
1
ECL1
0
R
0
ECL0
0
R
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 327 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.4
Operation
15.4.1
16-Bit Counter Operation
When bit CH2 is cleared to 0 in ECCSR, ECH and ECL operate as a 16-bit event counter.
Any of four input clock sources—φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVL pin input—can be selected by means of
bits ACKL1 and ACKL0 in ECCR. When AEVL pin input is selected, input sensing is selected
with bits ALEGS1 and ALEGS0.
Note that the input clock is enabled when IRQAEC is high or IECPWM is high. When IRQAEC is
low or IECPWM is low, the input clock is not input to the counter, which therefore does not
operate. Figure 15.2 shows the software procedure when ECH and ECL are used as a 16-bit event
counter.
Start
Clear CH2 to 0
Set ACKL1, ACKL0, ALEGS1, and ALEGS0
Clear CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 0
Clear OVH and OVL to 0
Set CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 1
End
Figure 15.2 Software Procedure when Using ECH and ECL as 16-Bit Event Counter
As CH2 is cleared to 0 by a reset, ECH and ECL operate as a 16-bit event counter after a reset,
and as ACKL1 and ACKL0 are cleared to B'00, the operating clock is asynchronous event input
from the AEVL pin (using falling edge sensing).
When the next clock is input after the count value reaches H'FF in both ECH and ECL, ECH and
ECL overflow from H'FFFF to H'0000, the OVH flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECH and ECL
count values each return to H'00, and counting up is restarted. When an overflow occurs, the
IRREC bit is set to 1 in IRR2. If the IENEC bit in IENR2 is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is
sent to the CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 328 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.4.2
8-Bit Counter Operation
When bit CH2 is set to 1 in ECCSR, ECH and ECL operate as independent 8-bit event counters.
φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVH pin input can be selected as the input clock source for ECH by means of
bits ACKH1 and ACKH0 in ECCR, and φ/2, φ/4, φ/8, or AEVL pin input can be selected as the
input clock source for ECL by means of bits ACKL1 and ACKL0 in ECCR. Input sensing is
selected with bits AHEGS1 and AHEGS0 when AEVH pin input is selected, and with bits
ALEGS1 and ALEGS0 when AEVL pin input is selected.
Note that the input clock is enabled when IRQAEC is high or IECPWM is high. When IRQAEC is
low or IECPWM is low, the input clock is not input to the counter, which therefore does not
operate. Figure 15.3 shows the software procedure when ECH and ECL are used as 8-bit event
counters.
Start
Set CH2 to 1
Set ACKH1, ACKH0, ACKL1, ACKL0,
AHEGS1, AHEGS0, ALEGS1, and ALEGS0
Clear CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 0
Clear OVH and OVL to 0
Set CUEH, CUEL, CRCH, and CRCL to 1
End
Figure 15.3 Software Procedure when Using ECH and ECL as 8-Bit Event Counters
When the next clock is input after the ECH count value reaches H'FF, ECH overflows, the OVH
flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECH count value returns to H'00, and counting up is restarted.
Similarly, when the next clock is input after the ECL count value reaches H'FF, ECL overflows,
the OVL flag is set to 1 in ECCSR, the ECL count value returns to H'00, and counting up is
restarted. When an overflow occurs, the IRREC bit is set to 1 in IRR2. If the IENEC bit in IENR2
is 1 at this time, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 329 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.4.3
IRQAEC Operation
When the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is 0, the ECH and ECL input clocks are enabled when
IRQAEC goes high. When IRQAEC goes low, the input clocks are not input to the counters, and
so ECH and ECL do not count. ECH and ECL count operations can therefore be controlled from
outside by controlling IRQAEC. In this case, ECH and ECL cannot be controlled individually.
IRQAEC can also operate as an interrupt source.
Interrupt enabling is controlled by IENEC2 in IENR1. When an IRQAEC interrupt is generated,
IRR1 interrupt request flag IRREC2 is set to 1. If IENEC2 in IENR1 is set to 1 at this time, an
interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Rising, falling, or both edge sensing can be selected for the IRQAEC input pin with bits AIAGS1
and AIAGS0 in AEGSR.
15.4.4
Event Counter PWM Operation
When the ECPWME bit in AEGSR is 1, the ECH and ECL input clocks are enabled when event
counter PWM output (IECPWM) is high. When IECPWM is low, the input clocks are not input to
the counters, and so ECH and ECL do not count. ECH and ECL count operations can therefore be
controlled cyclically from outside by controlling event counter PWM. In this case, ECH and ECL
cannot be controlled individually.
IECPWM can also operate as an interrupt source.
Interrupt enabling is controlled by IENEC2 in IENR1. When an IECPWM interrupt is generated,
IRR1 interrupt request flag IRREC2 is set to 1. If IENEC2 in IENR1 is set to 1 at this time, an
interrupt request is sent to the CPU.
Rising, falling, or both edge detection can be selected for IECPWM interrupt sensing with bits
AIAGS1 and AIAGS0 in AEGSR.
Figure 15.4 and table 15.2 show examples of event counter PWM operation.
toff = T × (Ndr +1)
ton
tcm = T × (Ncm +1)
Clock input enable time
Clock input disable time
One conversion period
ECPWM input clock cycle
Value of ECPWDR
Fixed low when Ndr =H'FFFF
Ncm: Value of ECPWCR
ton:
toff:
tcm:
T:
Ndr:
Figure 15.4 Event Counter Operation Waveform
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 330 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
Note: Ndr and Ncm above must be set so that Ndr < Ncm. If the settings do not satisfy this
condition, the output of the event counter PWM is fixed low.
Table 15.2 Examples of Event Counter PWM Operation
Conditions: fosc = 4 MHz, fφ = 4 MHz, high-speed active mode, ECPWCR value (Ncm) =
H'7A11, ECPWDR value (Ndr) = H'16E3
Clock
Source
Selection
Clock
Source
Cycle (T)*
toff = T ×
ECPWDR
ECPWCR
Value (Ncm) Value (Ndr) (Ndr + 1)
φ/2
0.5 µs
H'7A11
H'16E3
φ/4
1 µs
D'31249
D'5859
φ/8
tcm = T ×
(Ncm + 1)
ton = tcm –
toff
2.93 ms
15.625 ms
12.695 ms
5.86 ms
31.25 ms
25.39 ms
2 µs
11.72 ms
62.5 ms
50.78 ms
φ/16
4 µs
23.44 ms
125.0 ms
101.56 ms
φ/32
8 µs
46.88 ms
250.0 ms
203.12 ms
φ/64
16 µs
93.76 ms
500.0 ms
406.24 ms
Note:
15.4.5
*
toff minimum width
Operation of Clock Input Enable/Disable Function
The clock input to the event counter can be controlled by the IRQAEC pin when ECPWME in
AEGSR is 0, and by the event counter PWM output, IECPWM when ECPWME in AEGSR is 1.
As this function forcibly terminates the clock input by each signal, a maximum error of one count
will occur depending on the IRQAEC or IECPWM timing. Figure 15.5 shows an example of the
operation.
Input event
IRQAEC or IECPWM
Edge generated by clock return
Actually counted clock source
Counter value
N
N+1
N+2
N+3
N+4
N+5
N+6
Clock stopped
Figure 15.5 Example of Clock Control Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 331 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.5
Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter
The operating states of the asynchronous event counter are shown in table 15.3.
Table 15.3 Operating States of Asynchronous Event Counter
Operating
Mode
Reset Active
AEGSR
Reset
ECCR
ECCSR
ECH
Reset
Reset
Reset
Sleep
Watch
Functioning Functioning Retained*
1
Functioning Functioning Retained*
1
Functioning Functioning Retained*
1
Sub-active Sub-sleep
Standby
Functioning
Retained*
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
1 2
Functioning Functioning Functioning* * Functioning*
2
Retained
1
Retained
1
Retained*
2
Retained
1 2
Functioning* Functioning* * Halted
ECL
Reset
Functioning Functioning Functioning* * Functioning
Functioning*2 Functioning*1*2 Halted
IRQAEC
Reset
Functioning Functioning Retained*3
Functioning
Functioning
Retained*3
Retained*4
Functioning Functioning Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Event counter Reset
1 2
1
Retained*
Functioning
2
Module
Standby
PWM
Notes: 1. When an asynchronous external event is input, the counter increments. In addition,
when an overflow occurs, an interrupt is requested.
2. Functions when asynchronous external events are selected; halted and retained
otherwise.
3. Clock control by IRQAEC operates, but interrupts do not.
4. As the clock is stopped in module standby mode, IRQAEC has no effect.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 332 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
15.6
Usage Notes
1. When reading the values in ECH and ECL, first clear bits CUEH and CUEL to 0 in ECCSR in
8-bit mode and clear bit CUEL to 0 in 16-bit mode to prevent asynchronous event input to the
counter. The correct value will not be returned if the event counter increments while being
read.
2. For input to the AEVH and AEVL pins, use a clock with a frequency of up to 4.2 MHz within
the range from 1.8 to 3.6 V and up to 10 MHz within the range from 2.7 to 3.6 V. For the high
and low widths of the clock, see section 26, Electrical Characteristics. The duty cycle is
arbitrary.
Table 15.4 shows a maximum clock frequency.
Table 15.4 Maximum Clock Frequency
Mode
Maximum Clock Frequency
Input to AEVH/AEVL Pin
Active (high-speed), sleep (high-speed)
10 MHz
Active (medium-speed), sleep (medium-speed)
(φOSC/8)
2 fOSC
(φOSC/16) fOSC
(φOSC/32) 1/2 fOSC
fOSC = 2 MHz to 4 MHz
(φOSC/64) 1/4 fOSC
Watch, subactive, subsleep, standby
(φW/2)
1000 kHz
(φW/4)
500 kHz
(φW/8)
250 kHz
φW = 32.768 kHz or 38.4 kHz
3. When AEC uses with 16-bit mode, set CUEH in ECCSR to 1 first, set CRCH in ECCSR to 1
second, or set both CUEH and CRCH to 1 at same time before clock input. When AEC is
operating on 16-bit mode, do not change CUEH. Otherwise, ECH will be miscounted up.
4. When ECPWME in AEGSR is 1, the event counter PWM is operating and therefore ECPWCR
and ECPWDR should not be modified.
When changing the data, clear the ECPWME bit in AEGSR to 0 (halt the event counter PWM)
before modifying these registers.
5. The event counter PWM data register and event counter PWM compare register must be set so
that event counter PWM data register < event counter PWM compare register. If the settings
do not satisfy this condition, do not set ECPWME to 1 in AEGSR.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 333 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 15 Asynchronous Event Counter (AEC)
6. As synchronization is established internally when an IRQAEC interrupt is generated, a
maximum error of 1 tcyc will occur between clock halting and interrupt acceptance.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 334 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
This LSI incorporates the watchdog timer (WDT). The WDT is an 8-bit timer that can generate an
internal reset signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing to the timer counter, thus
allowing it to overflow.
When this watchdog timer function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In
interval timer operation, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
16.1
Features
The WDT features are described below.
• Selectable from eleven counter input clocks
Ten internal clock sources (φ/64, φ/128, φ/256, φ/512, φ/1024, φ/2048, φ/4096, φ/8192, φW/16,
and φW/256) or the on-chip watchdog timer oscillator can be selected as the timer-counter
clock.
• Watchdog timer mode
If the counter overflows, this LSI is internally reset.
• Interval timer mode
If the counter overflows, an interval timer interrupt is generated.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when not used. (The WDT is operating as the initial value. For details, refer to section 6.4,
Module Standby Function.)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 335 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the WDT.
On-chip
WDT
oscillator
φ
TCSRWD1
PSS
TCWD
Internal data bus
TMWD
TCSRWD2
[φw/16 or φw/256]
Interrupt/reset control
[Legend]
TCSRWD1:
TCSRWD2:
TCWD:
TMWD:
PSS:
Timer control/status register WD1
Timer control/status register WD2
Timer counter WD
Timer mode register WD
Prescaler S
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
16.2
Register Descriptions
The watchdog timer has the following registers.
• Timer control/status register WD1 (TCSRWD1)
• Timer control/status register WD2 (TCSRWD2)
• Timer counter WD (TCWD)
• Timer mode register WD (TMWD)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 336 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal reset signal or
interrupt request signal
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.2.1
Timer Control/Status Register WD1 (TCSRWD1)
TCSRWD1 performs the TCSRWD1 and TCWD write control. TCSRWD1 also controls the
watchdog timer operation and indicates the operating state. TCSRWD1 must be rewritten by using
the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction cannot be used to change the setting value.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
B6WI
1
R/W
Bit 6 Write Inhibit
The TCWE bit can be written only when the write value of
the B6WI bit is 0.
This bit is always read as 1.
6
TCWE
0
R/W
Timer Counter WD Write Enable
TCWD can be written when the TCWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the write value for bit 7 must
be 0.
5
B4WI
1
R/W
Bit 4 Write Inhibit
The TCSRWE bit can be written only when the write
value of the B4WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
4
TCSRWE
0
R/W
Timer Control/Status Register WD Write Enable
The WDON and WRST bits can be written when the
TCSRWE bit is set to 1.
When writing data to this bit, the write value for bit 5 must
be 0.
3
B2WI
1
R/W
Bit 2 Write Inhibit
The WDON bit can be written only when the write value
of the B2WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 337 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
WDON
1
R/W
Watchdog Timer On
TCWD starts counting up when the WDON bit is set to 1
and halts when the WDON bit is cleared to 0.
[Setting condition]
•
When 1 is written to the WDON bit and 0 to the B2WI
bit while the TCSRWE bit is 1
•
Reset by RES pin
[Clearing condition]
•
1
B0WI
1
R/W
When 0 is written to the WDON bit and 0 to the B2WI
bit while the TCSRWE bit is 1
Bit 0 Write Inhibit
The WRST bit can be written only when the write value of
the B0WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
0
WRST
0
R/W
Watchdog Timer Reset
Indicates whether a reset caused by the watchdog timer
is generated. This bit is not cleared by a reset caused by
the watchdog timer.
[Setting condition]
When TCWD overflows and an internal reset signal is
generated
[Clearing conditions]
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 338 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
•
Reset by RES pin
•
When 0 is written to the WRST bit and 0 to the B0WI
bit while the TCSRWE bit is 1
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.2.2
Timer Control/Status Register WD2 (TCSRWD2)
TCSRWD2 performs the TCSRWD2 write control, mode switching, and interrupt control.
TCSRWD2 must be rewritten by using the MOV instruction. The bit manipulation instruction
cannot be used to change the setting value.
Bit
7
Bit Name
OVF
Initial
Value
0
R/W
Description
1
R/(W)* Overflow Flag
Indicates that TCWD has overflowed (changes from H'FF
to H'00).
[Setting condition]
TCWD overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in
watchdog timer mode, this bit is cleared automatically by
the internal reset after it has been set.
[Clearing condition]
•
6
B5WI
1
TCSRWD2 is read when OVF = 1, then 0 is written to
OVF
2
R/(W)* Bit 5 Write Inhibit
The WT/IT bit can be written only when the write value of
the B5WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
5
WT/IT
0
3
R/(W)* Timer Mode Select
Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or
interval timer.
0: Watchdog timer mode
1: Interval timer mode
4
B3WI
1
2
R/(W)* Bit 3 Write Inhibit
The IEOVF bit can be written only when the write value of
the B3WI bit is 0. This bit is always read as 1.
3
IEOVF
0
3
R/(W)* Overflow Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables an overflow interrupt request in
interval timer mode.
0: Disables an overflow interrupt
1: Enables an overflow interrupt
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 339 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2 to 0

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
2. Write operation is necessary because this bit controls data writing to other bit. This bit is
always read as 1.
3. Writing is possible only when the write conditions are satisfied.
16.2.3
Timer Counter WD (TCWD)
TCWD is an 8-bit readable/writable up-counter. When TCWD overflows from H'FF to H'00, the
internal reset signal is generated and the WRST bit in TCSRWD1 is set to 1. TCWD is initialized
to H'00.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 340 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.2.4
Timer Mode Register WD (TMWD)
TMWD selects the input clock.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
3
CKS3
0
R/W
Clock Select 3 to 0
2
CKS2
0
R/W
Select the clock to be input to TCWD.
1
CKS1
0
R/W
00xx: On-chip WDT oscillator
0
CKS0
0
R/W
0100: Internal clock: counts on φW/16
0101: Internal clock: counts on φW/256
011x: Reserved
1000: Internal clock: counts on φ/64
1001: Internal clock: counts on φ/128
1010: Internal clock: counts on φ/256
1011: Internal clock: counts on φ/512
1100: Internal clock: counts on φ/1024
1101: Internal clock: counts on φ/2048
1110: Internal clock: counts on φ/4096
1111: Internal clock: counts on φ/8192
For the overflow periods of the on-chip WDT oscillator,
see section 26, Electrical Characteristics.
In active (medium-speed), sleep (medium-speed),
subactive, and subsleep modes, the 00xx value and the
interval timer mode cannot be set simultaneously.
In subactive and subsleep modes, when the subclock
frequency is φW/8, the 010x value and the interval timer
mode cannot be set simultaneously.
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 341 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.3
Operation
16.3.1
Watchdog Timer Mode
The watchdog timer is provided with an 8-bit up-counter. To use it as the watchdog timer, clear
the WT/IT bit in TCSRWD2 to 0. (To write the WT/IT bit, two write accesses are required.) If 1 is
written to the WDON bit and 0 to the B2WI bit simultaneously when the TCSRWE bit in
TCSRWD1 is set to 1, TCWD begins counting up. (To operate the watchdog timer, two write
accesses to TCSRWD1 are required.) When a clock pulse is input after the TCWD count value has
reached H'FF, the watchdog timer overflows and an internal reset signal is generated. The internal
reset signal is output for a period of 512 clock cycles of the on-chip watchdog timer oscillator.
TCWD is a writable counter, and when a value is set in TCWD, the count-up starts from that
value. An overflow period in the range of 1 to 256 input clock cycles can therefore be set,
according to the TCWD set value.
Figure 16.2 shows an example of watchdog timer operation.
Example:
With 30-ms overflow period when φ = 4 MHz
4 × 106
8192
× 30 × 10–3 = 14.6
Therefore, 256 – 15 = 241 (H'F1) is set in TCWD.
TCWD overflow
H'FF
H'F1
TCWD
count value
H'00
Start
H'F1 written
to TCWD
H'F1 written to TCWD
Reset generated
Internal reset
signal
512 clock cycles
(on-chip WDT oscillator)
Figure 16.2 Example of Watchdog Timer Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 342 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.3.2
Interval Timer Mode
Figure 16.3 shows the operation in interval timer mode. To use the WDT as an interval timer, set
the WT/IT bit in TCSRWD2 to 1.
When the WDT is used as an interval timer, an interval timer interrupt request is generated each
time the TCWD overflows. Therefore, an interval timer interrupt can be generated at intervals.
H'FF
TCWD
count value
Time
H'00
WT/IT = 1
Interval timer
Interval timer
Interval timer
Interval timer
Interval timer
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
interrupt
request generated request generated request generated request generated request generated
Figure 16.3 Interval Timer Mode Operation
16.3.3
Timing of Overflow Flag (OVF) Setting
Figure 16.4 shows the timing of the OVF flag setting. The OVF flag in TCSRWD2 is set to 1 if
TCWD overflows. At the same time, a reset signal is output in watchdog timer mode and an
interval timer interrupt is generated in interval timer mode.
φ
H'FF
TCWD
H'00
Overflow signal
OVF
Figure 16.4 Timing of OVF Flag Setting
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 343 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
16.4
Interrupt
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt. The
interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in TCSRWD2. The OVF
flag must be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine.
16.5
Usage Notes
16.5.1
Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If modes are switched between watchdog timer and interval timer, while the WDT is operating, an
error may occur in the count value. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the
WDON bit to 0) before switching modes.
16.5.2
Module Standby Mode Control
The WDCKSTP bit in CKSTPR2 is valid when the WDON bit in the timer control/status register
WD1 (TCSRWD1) is cleared to 0. The WDCKSTP bit can be cleared to 0 while the WDON bit is
set to 1 (while the watchdog timer is operating). However, the watchdog timer does not enter
module standby mode but continues operating. When the WDON bit is cleared to 0 by software
after the watchdog timer stops operating, the WDCKSTP bit is valid at the same time and the
watchdog timer enters module standby mode.
16.5.3
Writing to Timer Counter WD (TCWD) with the On-Chip Watchdog Timer
Oscillator Selected
When the timer counter WD (TCWD) is written to with the on-chip watchdog timer oscillator
selected as the clock to drive the counter, updating of values read from TCWD requires up to (onchip watchdog timer oscillator overflow time)/256. The watchdog timer does not overflow
between writing of the new value to the register and updating of the read values.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 344 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
The serial communications interface 3 (SCI3) can handle both asynchronous and clock
synchronous serial communications. The asynchronous method allows the handling of serial data
communications with standard asynchronous communications chips such as Universal
Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and Asynchronous Communications Interface
Adapters (ACIAs). A function is also provided for serial communications between processors
(multiprocessor communication function) on three channels (SCI3_1, SCI3_2, and SCI3_3). Table
17.1 shows the configuration of the SCI3 channels.
The SCI3_1 can transmit and receive IrDA signals that conform to version 1.0 of the Infrared Data
Association (IrDA) standard.
17.1
Features
• Choice of asynchronous or clock synchronous serial communications mode
• Full-duplex communications capability
The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception to
be executed simultaneously.
Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data.
• On-chip baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• On-chip baud rate generator, internal clock, or external clock can be selected as a transfer
clock source.
• Six interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, overrun error, framing error, and parity
error.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when it is not in use (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Asynchronous mode
• Data length: 7, 8, or 5 bits
• Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
• Parity: Even, odd, or none
• Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
• Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the RXD31, RXD32, or RXD33 pin level
directly in the case of a framing error
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 345 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Clock synchronous mode
• Data length: 8 bits
• Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
Note: When using this function, do not use the on-chip oscillator for the system clock.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 346 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.1 SCI3 Channel Configuration
Channel
Abbreviation
Pin*
Channel 1
SCI3_1
Channel 2
Channel 3
SCI3_2
SCI3_3
1
2
Register*
Register Address
SCK31
SMR3_1
H'FFFF98
RXD31
BRR3_1
H'FFFF99
TXD31
SCR3_1
H'FFFF9A
TDR3_1
H'FFFF9B
SSR3_1
H'FFFF9C
RDR3_1
H'FFFF9D
RSR3_1

TSR3_1

SEMR
H'FFFFA6
IrCR
H'FFFFA7
SCK32
SMR3_2
H'FFFFA8
RXD32
BRR3_2
H'FFFFA9
TXD32
SCR3_2
H'FFFFAA
TDR3_2
H'FFFFAB
SSR3_2
H'FFFFAC
RDR3_2
H'FFFFAD
RSR3_2

TSR3_2

SCK33
SMR3_3
H'FFF088
RXD33
BRR3_3
H'FFF089
TXD33
SCR3_3
H'FFF08A
TDR3_3
H'FFF08B
SSR3_3
H'FFF08C
RDR3_3
H'FFF08D
RSR3_3

TSR3_3

Notes: 1. Pin names SCK3, RXD3, and TXD3 are used in the text for all channels, omitting the
channel designation.
2. In the text, channel description is omitted for registers and bits.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 347 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Figures 17.1 (1), 17.1 (2), and 17.1 (3) show block diagrams of the SCI3_1, SCI3_2, and SCI3_3,
respectively.
Internal clock (φ/64, φ/16, φw/2, φ)
External clock
Baud rate generator
BRC3_1
Clock
BRR3_1
SEMR
SMR3_1
Transmit/receive
control circuit
SCR3_1
SSR3_1
TXD31
TSR3_1
TDR3_1
RSR3_1
RDR3_1
Internal data bus
SCK31
SPCR
IrCR
RXD31
[Legend]
RSR3_1: Receive shift register 3_1
RDR3_1:Receive data register 3_1
TSR3_1: Transmit shift register 3_1
TDR3_1: Transmit data register 3_1
SMR3_1:Serial mode register 3_1
SCR3_1: Serial control register 3_1
SSR3_1: Serial status register 3_1
BRR3_1: Bit rate register 3_1
BRC3_1: Bit rate counter 3_1
SPCR: Serial port control register
IrDA control register
IrCR:
SEMR: Serial extended mode register
Figure 17.1 (1) Block Diagram of SCI3_1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 348 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Interrupt request
(TEI31, TXI31, RXI31, ERI31)
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
SCK32
Internal clock (φ/64, φ/16, φw/2, φ)
External clock
Baud rate generator
BRC3_2
BRR3_2
SMR3_2
Transmit/receive
control circuit
SCR3_2
SSR3_2
TXD32
RXD32
TSR3_2
TDR3_2
RSR3_2
RDR3_2
Internal data bus
Clock
SPCR
Interrupt request
(TEI32, TXI32, RXI32, ERI32)
[Legend]
RSR3_2:
RDR3_2:
TSR3_2:
TDR3_2:
SMR3_2:
SCR3_2:
SSR3_2:
BRR3_2:
BRC3_2:
SPCR:
Receive shift register 3_2
Receive data register 3_2
Transmit shift register 3_2
Transmit data register 3_2
Serial mode register 3_2
Serial control register 3_2
Serial status register 3_2
Bit rate register 3_2
Bit rate counter 3_2
Serial port control register
Figure 17.1 (2) Block Diagram of SCI3_2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 349 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
SCK33
Internal clock (φ/64, φ/16, φw/2, φ)
External clock
Baud rate generator
BRC3_3
BRR3_3
SMR3_3
Transmit/receive
control circuit
SCR3_3
SSR3_3
TXD33
RXD33
TSR3_3
TDR3_3
RSR3_3
RDR3_3
Internal data bus
Clock
SPCR2
Interrupt request
(TEI33, TXI33, RXI33, ERI33)
[Legend]
RSR3_3:
RDR3_3:
TSR3_3:
TDR3_3:
SMR3_3:
SCR3_3:
SSR3_3:
BRR3_3:
BRC3_3:
SPCR2:
Receive shift register 3_3
Receive data register 3_3
Transmit shift register 3_3
Transmit data register 3_3
Serial mode register 3_3
Serial control register 3_3
Serial status register 3_3
Bit rate register 3_3
Bit rate counter 3_3
Serial port control register 2
Figure 17.1 (3) Block Diagram of SCI3_3
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 350 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 17.2 shows the SCI3 pin configuration.
Table 17.2 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation I/O
Function
SCI3 clock
SCK31,
SCK32,
SCK33
I/O
SCI3 clock input/output
SCI3 receive data
input
RXD31,
RXD32,
RXD33
Input
SCI3 receive data input
SCI3 transmit data
output
TXD31,
TXD32,
TXD33
Output
SCI3 transmit data output
17.3
Register Descriptions
The SCI3 has the following registers for each channel.
• Receive shift register 3 (RSR3)*
• Receive data register 3 (RDR3)*
• Transmit shift register 3 (TSR3)*
• Transmit data register 3 (TDR3)*
• Serial mode register 3 (SMR3)*
• Serial control register 3 (SCR3)*
• Serial status register 3 (SSR3)*
• Bit rate register 3 (BRR3)*
• Serial port control register (SPCR)
• Serial port control register 2 (SPCR2)
• IrDA control register (IrCR)
• Serial extended mode register (SEMR)
Note: * These register names are abbreviated to RSR, RDR, TSR, TDR, SMR, SCR, SSR, and
BRR in the text.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 351 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.1
Receive Shift Register (RSR)
RSR is a shift register that receives serial data input from the RXD3 pin and converts it into
parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
17.3.2
Receive Data Register (RDR)
RDR is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI3 has received one byte of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR to RDR, where it is stored. After this, RSR is
receive-enabled. As RSR and RDR function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive
operations are possible. After confirming that the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, read RDR only
once. RDR cannot be written to by the CPU. RDR is initialized to H'00.
RDR is initialized to H'00 by a reset or in standby mode, watch mode, or module standby mode.
17.3.3
Transmit Shift Register (TSR)
TSR is a shift register that transmits serial data. To perform serial data transmission, the SCI3 first
transfers transmit data from TDR to TSR automatically, and then sends the data that starts from
the LSB to the TXD3 pin. Data transfer from TDR to TSR is not performed if no data has been
written to TDR (if the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1). TSR cannot be directly accessed by the CPU.
17.3.4
Transmit Data Register (TDR)
TDR is an 8-bit register that stores data for transmission. When the SCI3 detects that TSR is
empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR to TSR and starts transmission. The doublebuffered structure of TDR and TSR enables continuous serial transmission. If the next transmit
data has already been written to TDR during transmission of one-frame data, the SCI3 transfers
the written data to TSR to continue transmission. To achieve reliable serial transmission, write
transmit data to TDR only once after confirming that the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1. TDR is
initialized to H'FF.
TDR is initialized to H'FF by a reset or in standby mode, watch mode, or module standby mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 352 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.5
Serial Mode Register (SMR)
SMR sets the SCI3's serial communication format and selects the clock source for the on-chip
baud rate generator.
SMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset or in standby mode, watch mode, or module standby mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
COM
0
R/W
Description
Communication Mode
0: Asynchronous mode
1: Clock synchronous mode
6
CHR
0
R/W
Character Length (enabled only in asynchronous
mode)
0: Selects 8 or 5 bits as the data length
1: Selects 7 or 5 bits as the data length
When 7-bit data is selected. the MSB (bit 7) in TDR is
not transmitted. To select 5 bits as the data length, set
1 to both the PE and MP bits. The three most
significant bits (bits 7, 6, and 5) in TDR are not
transmitted.
In clock synchronous mode, the data length is fixed to
8 bits regardless of the CHR bit setting.
5
PE
0
R/W
Parity Enable (enabled only in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, the parity bit is added to
transmit data before transmission, and the parity bit is
checked in reception. In clock synchronous mode,
parity bit addition and checking is not performed
regardless of the PE bit setting.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 353 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
PM
0
R/W
Parity Mode (enabled only when the PE bit is 1 in
asynchronous mode)
0: Selects even parity
1: Selects odd parity
When even parity is selected, a parity bit is added in
transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the
transmit data plus the parity bit is an even number, in
reception, a check is carried out to confirm that the
number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit is
an even number.
When odd parity is selected, a parity bit is added in
transmission so that the total number of 1 bits in the
transmit data plus the parity bit is an odd number, in
reception, a check is carried out to confirm that the
number of 1bits in the receive data plus the parity bit is
an odd number.
If parity bit addition and checking is disabled in clock
synchronous mode and asynchronous mode, the PM
bit setting is invalid.
3
STOP
0
R/W
Stop Bit Length (enabled only in asynchronous mode)
Selects the stop bit length in transmission.
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
For reception, only the first stop bit is checked,
regardless of the value in the bit. If the second stop bit
is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit
character.
2
MP
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Mode
When this bit is set to 1, the multiprocessor
communication function is enabled. The PE bit and PM
bit settings are invalid.
In clock synchronous mode, this bit should be cleared
to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 354 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select 0 and 1
0
CKS0
0
R/W
These bits select the clock source for the on-chip baud
rate generator.
00: φ clock (n = 0)
01: φW/2 clock (n = 0)
10: φ/16 clock (n = 2)
11: φ/64 clock (n = 3)
When φW/2 clock is selected in subactive mode and
subsleep mode, the SCI3 is only enabled when φW/2
clock is selected for the CPU operating clock.
For the relationship between the bit rate register setting
and the baud rate, see section 17.3.8, Bit Rate
Register (BRR). n is the decimal representation of the
value of n in BRR (see section 17.3.8, Bit Rate
Register (BRR)).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 355 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.6
Serial Control Register (SCR)
SCR enables or disables SCI3 transfer operations and interrupt requests, and selects the transfer
clock source. For details on interrupt requests, refer to section 17.8, Interrupt Requests.
SCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset or in standby mode, watch mode, or module standby mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TIE
0
R/W
Description
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TXI3 interrupt request is
enabled. TXI3 can be released by clearing the TDRE
bit or TIE bit to 0.
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, RXI3 and ERI3 interrupt
requests are enabled.
RXI3 and ERI3 can be released by clearing the RDRF
bit or the FER, PER, or OER error flag to 0, or by
clearing the RIE bit to 0.
5
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
When this bit is set to 1, transmission is enabled. When
this bit is 0, the TDRE bit in SSR is fixed at 1. When
transmit data is written to TDR while this bit is 1, Bit
TDRE in SSR is cleared to 0 and serial data
transmission is started.
Be sure to carry out SMR settings, and setting of bit
SPC3 in SPCR or SPCR2, to decide the transmission
format before setting bit TE to 1.
4
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
When this bit is set to 1, reception is enabled. In this
state, serial data reception is started when a start bit is
detected in asynchronous mode or serial clock input is
detected in clock synchronous mode.
Be sure to carry out the SMR settings to decide the
reception format before setting bit RE to 1.
Note that the RDRF, FER, PER, and OER flags in SSR
are not affected when bit RE is cleared to 0, and retain
their previous state.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 356 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
MPIE
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (enabled only when the
MP bit in SMR is 1 in asynchronous mode)
When this bit is set to 1, receive data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 0 is skipped, and setting of the
RDRF, FER, and OER status flags in SSR is
prohibited. On receiving data in which the
multiprocessor bit is 1, this bit is automatically cleared
and normal reception is resumed. For details, refer to
section 17.6, Multiprocessor Communication Function.
2
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
When this bit is set to 1, the TEI3 interrupt request is
enabled. TEI3 can be released by clearing bit TDRE to
0 and clearing bit TEND to 0 in SSR, or by clearing bit
TEIE to 0.
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Clock Enable 0 and 1
0
CKE0
0
R/W
Select the clock source.
Asynchronous mode:
00: Internal baud rate generator (The SCK3 pin
functions as an I/O port)
01: Internal baud rate generator (Outputs a clock of the
same frequency as the bit rate from the SCK3 pin)
10: External clock (Inputs a clock with a frequency 16
times the bit rate from the SCK3 pin)
11: Reserved
Clock synchronous mode:
00: Internal clock (The SCK3 pin functions as clock
output)
01: Reserved
10: External clock (The SCK3 pin functions as clock
input)
11: Reserved
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 357 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.7
Serial Status Register (SSR)
SSR consists of status flags of the SCI3 and multiprocessor bits for transfer. 1 cannot be written to
flags TDRE, RDRF, OER, PER, and FER; they can only be cleared.
SSR is initialized to H'84 by a reset or in standby mode, watch mode, or module standby mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty
Description
Indicates that transmit data is stored in TDR.
[Setting conditions]
•
The TE bit in SCR is 0
•
Data is transferred from TDR to TSR
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
•
Writing of 0 to bit TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
The transmit data is written to TDR
R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full
Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR.
[Setting condition]
•
Serial reception ends normally and receive data is
transferred from RSR to RDR
[Clearing condition]
•
Writing of 0 to bit RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
When data is read from RDR
If an error is detected in reception, or if the RE bit in
SCR has been cleared to 0, RDR and bit RDRF are not
affected and retain their previous state.
Note that if data reception is completed while bit RDRF
is still set to 1, an overrun error (OER) will occur and
the receive data will be lost.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 358 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
5
OER
0
R/(W)* Overrun Error
Description
[Setting condition]
•
An overrun error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
•
Writing of 0 to bit OER after reading OER = 1
When bit RE in SCR is cleared to 0, bit OER is not
affected and retains its previous state.
When an overrun error occurs, RDR retains the receive
data it held before the overrun error occurred, and data
received after the error is lost.
Reception cannot be continued with bit OER set to 1,
and in clock synchronous mode, transmission cannot
be continued either.
4
FER
0
R/(W)* Framing Error
[Setting condition]
•
A framing error occurs in reception
[Clearing condition]
•
Writing of 0 to bit FER after reading FER = 1
When bit RE in SCR is cleared to 0, bit FER is not
affected and retains its previous state.
Note that, in 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is
checked for a value of 1, and the second stop bit is not
checked.
When a framing error occurs, the receive data is
transferred to RDR but bit RDRF is not set. Reception
cannot be continued with bit FER set to 1.
In clock synchronous mode, neither transmission nor
reception is possible when bit FER is set to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 359 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
3
PER
0
R/(W)* Parity Error
Description
[Setting condition]
•
A parity error is generated during reception
[Clearing condition]
•
Writing of 0 to bit PER after reading PER = 1
When bit RE in SCR is cleared to 0, bit PER is not
affected and retains its previous state.
Receive data in which a parity error has occurred is still
transferred to RDR, but bit RDRF is not set.
Reception cannot be continued with bit PER set to 1. In
clock synchronous mode, neither transmission nor
reception is possible when bit PER is set to 1.
2
TEND
1
R
Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
The TE bit in SCR is 0
•
TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte
serial transmit character
[Clearing conditions]
1
MPBR
0
R
•
Writing of 0 to bit TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
The transmit data is written to TDR
Multiprocessor Bit Receive
MPBR stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive
character data. When the RE bit in SCR is cleared to 0,
its previous state is retained.
0
MPBT
0
R/W
Multiprocessor Bit Transfer
MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to the
transmit character data.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 360 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.8
Bit Rate Register (BRR)
BRR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that specifies the bit rate. BRR is initialized to H'FF.
Tables 17.3 and 17.4 show examples of the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and
CKS0 in SMR in asynchronous mode. Table 17.6 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency
in asynchronous mode. The values shown in these tables are values in active (high-speed) mode.
When the ABCS bit in SEMR is set to 1 in asynchronous mode, the maximum bit rate is twice the
values shown in table 17.6.
Tables 17.7 (1) and (2) show examples of the N setting in BRR and the n setting in bits CKS1 and
CKS0 in SMR in clock synchronous mode. The values shown in these tables are values in active
(high-speed) mode. The N setting in BRR and error for other operating frequencies and bit rates
can be obtained by the following formulas:
[Asynchronous Mode, ABCS = 0]
N=
φ
–1
32 × 22n × B
Error (%) =
B (bit rate obtained from n, N, φ) – R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 17.3)
R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 17.3)
× 100
[Asynchronous Mode, ABCS = 1*]
N=
φ
–1
16 × 22n × B
Error (%) =
[Legend]
B:
N:
φ:
n:
Note:
*
B (bit rate obtained from n, N, φ) – R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 17.4)
R (bit rate in left-hand column in table 17.4)
× 100
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (Hz)
Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 2, or 3)
(The correspondence between n and the clock is shown in table 17.5)
Only supported by the SCI3_1 interface.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 361 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (1)
32.8 kHz
38.4 kHz
2 MHz
2.097152 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
110
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
35
–1.36
150
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
2
25
0.16
200
—
—
—
0
2
0.00
2
19
–2.34
250
0
1
2.50
—
—
—
0
249
300
—
—
—
0
1
0.00
0
600
—
—
—
0
0
0.00
1200
—
—
—
—
—
2400
—
—
—
—
—
N
Error
(%)
2
36
0.64
2
26
1.14
2
19
2.40
0.00
2
15
2.40
207
0.16
0
217
0.21
0
103
0.16
0
108
0.21
—
0
51
0.16
0
54
–0.70
—
0
25
0.16
0
26
1.14
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
4800
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
12
0.16
0
13
–2.48
9600
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
6
–2.48
19200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
31250
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
1
0.00
—
—
—
38400
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 362 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (2)
2.4576 MHz
3 MHz
3.6864 MHz
4 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
43
–0.83
2
52
0.50
2
64
0.70
2
70
0.03
150
2
31
0.00
2
38
0.16
2
47
0.00
2
51
0.16
200
2
23
0.00
2
28
1.02
2
35
0.00
2
38
0.16
250
2
18
1.05
2
22
1.90
2
28
–0.69
2
30
0.81
300
0
255
0.00
2
19
–2.34
2
23
0.00
2
25
0.16
600
0
127
0.00
0
155
0.16
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
1200
0
63
0.00
0
77
0.16
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
2400
0
31
0.00
0
38
0.16
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
4800
0
15
0.00
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
9600
0
7
0.00
0
9
–2.34
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
19200
0
3
0.00
0
4
–2.34
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
31250
—
—
—
0
2
0.00
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
38400
0
1
0.00
—
—
—
0
2
0.00
—
—
—
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 363 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (3)
4.194304 MHz
4.9152MHz
5 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
73
0.64
2
86
0.31
2
150
2
54
–0.70
2
63
0.00
2
200
2
40
–0.10
2
47
0.00
2
250
2
32
–0.70
2
37
1.05
300
2
26
1.14
2
31
600
0
217
0.21
0
1200
0
108
0.21
2400
0
54
–0.70
4800
0
26
1.14
0
31
0.00
0
9600
0
13
–2.48
0
15
0.00
0
19200
0
6
–2.48
0
7
0.00
0
31250
—
—
—
0
4
–1.70
38400
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
88
–0.25
2
106
–0.44
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
48
–0.35
2
58
–0.69
2
38
0.16
2
46
–0.27
0.00
2
32
–1.36
2
38
0.16
255
0.00
2
15
1.73
2
19
–2.34
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00
0
3
1.73
0
4
–2.34
n
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 364 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
6 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.3 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 0) (4)
Bit
Rate
(bit/s) n
6.144 MHz
7.3728 MHz
8 MHz
9.8304 MHz
10 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
108
0.08
2
130
–0.07
2
141
0.03
2
174
–0.26
2
177
–0.25
150
2
79
0.00
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
200
2
59
0.00
2
71
0.00
2
77
0.16
2
95
0.00
2
97
–0.35
250
2
47
0.00
2
57
–0.69
2
62
–0.79
2
76
–0.26
2
77
0.16
300
2
39
0.00
2
47
0.00
2
51
0.16
2
63
0.00
2
64
0.16
600
2
19
0.00
2
23
0.00
2
25
0.16
2
31
0.00
2
32
–1.36
1200
0
159
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
2
15
1.73
2400
0
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
4800
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
9600
0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
19200 0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
31250 0
5
2.40
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0.00
38400 0
4
0.00
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 365 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (1)
32.8 kHz
38.4 kHz
2 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
110
—
—
—
0
10
–0.83
2
150
0
6
–2.38
0
7
0.00
2
200
0
4
2.50
0
5
0.00
2
250
0
3
2.50
—
—
—
300
—
—
—
0
3
600
—
—
—
0
1200
—
—
—
2400
—
—
4800
—
9600
—
19200
2.097152 MHz
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
70
0.03
2
73
0.64
51
0.16
2
54
–0.70
38
0.16
2
40
–0.10
2
30
0.81
2
32
–0.70
0.00
2
25
0.16
2
26
1.14
1
0.00
0
207 0.16
0
217
0.21
0
0
0.00
0
103 0.16
0
108
0.21
—
—
—
—
0
51
0.16
0
54
–0.70
—
—
—
—
—
0
25
0.16
0
26
1.14
—
—
—
—
—
0
12
0.16
0
13
–2.48
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
6
–2.48
31250
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
3
0.00
—
—
—
38400
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
N
Error
(%)
n
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 366 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (2)
2.4576 MHz
3 MHz
3.6864 MHz
4 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
86
0.31
2
106
–0.44
2
130
–0. 07
2
141
0.03
150
2
63
0.00
2
77
0.16
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
200
2
47
0.00
2
58
–0.69
2
71
0.00
2
77
0.16
250
2
37
1.05
2
46
–0.27
2
57
–0.69
2
62
–0.79
300
2
31
0.00
2
38
0.16
2
47
0.00
2
51
0.16
600
0
255
0.00
2
19
–2.34
2
23
0.00
2
25
0.16
1200
0
127
0.00
0
155
0.16
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
2400
0
63
0.00
0
77
0.16
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
4800
0
31
0.00
0
38
0.16
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
9600
0
15
0.00
0
19
–2.34
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
19200
0
7
0.00
0
9
–2.34
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
31250
0
4
–1.70
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
0
7
0.00
38400
0
3
0.00
0
4
–2.34
0
5
0.00
—
—
—
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 367 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (3)
4.194304 MHz
4.9152MHz
5 MHz
6 MHz
Bit
Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
148
–0.04
2
174
–0.26
2
177
–0.25
2
212
0.03
150
2
108
0.21
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
2
155
0.16
200
2
81
–0.10
2
95
0.00
2
97
–0.35
2
116
0.16
250
2
65
–0.70
2
76
–0.26
2
77
0.16
2
93
–0.27
300
2
54
–0.70
2
63
0.00
2
64
0.16
2
77
0.16
600
2
26
1.14
2
31
0.00
2
32
–1.36
2
38
0.16
1200
0
217
0.21
0
255
0.00
2
15
1.73
2
19
–2.34
2400
0
108
0.21
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
0
155
0.16
4800
0
54
–0.70
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
0
77
0.16
9600
0
26
1.14
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
0
38
0.16
19200
0
13
–2.48
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
0
19
–2.34
31250
—
—
—
0
9
–1.70
0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
38400
0
6
–2.48
0
7
0.00
0
7
1.73
0
9
–2.34
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 368 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.4 Examples of BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode,
ABCS = 1) (4)
Bit
Rate
(bit/s) n
6.144 MHz
7.3728 MHz
8 MHz
N
Error
(%)
n
N
Error
(%)
n
N
9.8304 MHz
Error
(%)
n
Error
(%)
N
10 MHz
n
N
Error
(%)
110
2
217
0.08
3
64
0.70
3
70
0.03
3
86
0.31
3
88
–0.25
150
2
159
0.00
2
191
0.00
2
207
0.16
2
255
0.00
3
64
0.16
200
2
119
0.00
2
143
0.00
2
155
0.16
2
191
0.00
2
194
0.16
250
2
95
0.00
2
114
0.17
2
124
0.00
2
153
–0.26
2
155
0.16
300
2
79
0.00
2
95
0.00
2
103
0.16
2
127
0.00
2
129
0.16
600
2
39
0.00
2
47
0.00
2
51
0.16
2
63
0.00
2
64
0.16
1200
2
19
0.00
2
23
0.00
2
25
0.16
2
31
0.00
2
32
–1.36
2400
0
159
0.00
0
191
0.00
0
207
0.16
0
255
0.00
2
15
1.73
4800
0
79
0.00
0
95
0.00
0
103
0.16
0
127
0.00
0
129
0.16
9600
0
39
0.00
0
47
0.00
0
51
0.16
0
63
0.00
0
64
0.16
19200 0
19
0.00
0
23
0.00
0
25
0.16
0
31
0.00
0
32
–1.36
31250 0
11
2.40
0
14
–1.70
0
15
0.00
0
19
–1.70
0
19
0.00
38400 0
9
0.00
0
11
0.00
0
12
0.16
0
15
0.00
0
15
1.73
Table 17.5 Correspondence between n and Clock
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
φ
0
0
0
φW/2*
0
1
2
φ/16
1
0
φ/64
1
1
3
Note:
In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3_1, SCI3_2, and SCI3_3 interfaces can operate
only when the CPU clock is φW/2.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 369 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.6 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
Maximum Bit Rate (bit/s)
φ (MHz)
ABCS = 0
ABCS = 1*
0.0328*
1
512
0.0384*
1
600
2
2
Setting
n
N
1025
0
0
1200
0
0
62500
125000
0
0
2.097152
65536
131072
0
0
2.4576
76800
153600
0
0
3
93750
187500
0
0
3.6864
115200
230400
0
0
4
125000
250000
0
0
4.194304
131072
262144
0
0
4.9152
153600
307200
0
0
5
156250
312500
0
0
6
187500
375000
0
0
6.144
192000
384000
0
0
7.3728
230400
460800
0
0
8
250000
500000
0
0
9.8304
307200
614400
0
0
312500
625000
0
0
10
Note:
1. When CKS1 = 0 and CKS0 = 1 in SMR
2. Only supported by the SCI3_1 interface.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 370 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.7 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (1)
φ
32.8 kHz
38.4 kHz
2 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
Error (%)
200
0
20
–2.38
0
23
0.00
2
155
0.16
250
0
15
2.50
0
18
1.05
2
124
0.00
300
0
13
–2.38
0
15
0.00
2
103
0.16
500
0
7
2.50



2
62
–0.79
1k
0
3
2.50



2
30
0.81
2.5 k






0
199
0.00
5k






0
99
0.00
10 k






0
49
0.00
25 k






0
19
0.00
50 k






0
9
0.00
100 k






0
4
0.00
250 k






0
1
0.00
500 k






0*
0*
0.00*









1M
Note:
*
Continuous transmission/reception is not possible.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 371 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.7 BRR Settings for Various Bit Rates (Clock Synchronous Mode) (2)
φ
4 MHz
8 MHz
Bit Rate
(bit/s)
n
N
Error (%)
n
N
200
3
77
0.16
3
250
2
249 0.00
300
2
500
n
N
Error (%)
155 0.16
3
194
0.16
3
124 0.00
3
155
0.16
207 0.16
3
103 0.16
3
129
0.16
2
124 0.00
2
249 0.00
3
77
0.16
1k
2
62
–0.79
2
124 0.00
2
155
0.16
2.5 k
2
24
0.00
2
49
0.00
2
62
–0.79
5k
0
199 0.00
2
24
0.00
2
30
0.81
10 k
0
99
0.00
0
199 0.00
0
249
0.00
25 k
0
39
0.00
0
79
0.00
0
99
0.00
50 k
0
19
0.00
0
39
0.00
0
49
0.00
100 k
0
9
0.00
0
19
0.00
0
24
0.00
250 k
0
3
0.00
0
7
0.00
0
9
0.00
500 k
0
1
0.00
0
3
0.00
0
4
0.00
0*
0*
0.00*
0
1
0.00



1M
Note:
*
Error (%)
10 MHz
Continuous transmission/reception is not possible.
[Clock Synchronous Mode]
N=
[Legend]
B:
N:
φ:
n:
φ
–1
4 × 22n × B
Bit rate (bit/s)
BRR setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
Operating frequency (Hz)
Baud rate generator input clock number (n = 0, 2, or 3)
(The correspondence between n and the clock is shown in table 17.8.)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 372 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.8 Correspondence between n and Clock
SMR Setting
n
Clock
CKS1
CKS0
0
φ
0
0
0
φW/2*
0
1
2
φ/16
1
0
3
φ/64
1
1
Note: In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3_1, SCI3_2, and SCI3_3 interfaces can operate
only when the CPU clock is φW/2.
17.3.9
Serial Port Control Register (SPCR)
SPCR selects the functions of the TXD32 and TXD31/IrTXD pins, selects whether input data of
the RXD32 pin and RXD31/IrRXD pin is inverted or not, and selects output data of the TXD32
pin and TXD31/IrTXD pin is inverted or not.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7

1

Reserved
6

1

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
5
SPC32
0
R/W
P32/TXD32/SCL (PE5/TXD32) Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin P32/TXD32/SCL (PE5/TXD32) is
used as P32/SCL (PE5) or as TXD32.
0: P32/SCL (PE5) I/O pin
1: TXD32 output pin
Set the TE bit in SCR3_2 after having set this bit to 1.
4
SPC31
0
R/W
P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH (PF3/TXD31/IrTXD) Pin
Function Switch
Selects whether pin P42/TXD31/IrTXD/TMOFH
(PF3/TXD31/IrTXD) is used as P42/TMOFH (PF3) or
as TXD31/IrTXD.
0: P42 (PF3) I/O pin or TMOFH output pin
1: TXD31/IrTXD output pin
Set the TE bit in SCR3_1 after having set this bit to 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 373 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
SCINV3
0
R/W
TXD32 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Selects whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD32 pin is inverted or not.
0: TXD32 output data is not inverted.
1: TXD32 output data is inverted.
2
SCINV2
0
R/W
RXD32 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Selects whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD32 pin is inverted or not.
0: RXD32 input data is not inverted.
1: RXD32 input data is inverted.
1
SCINV1
0
R/W
TXD31/IrTXD Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Selects whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD31/IrTXD pin is inverted or not.
0: TXD31/IrTXD output data is not inverted.
1: TXD31/IrTXD output data is inverted.
0
SCINV0
0
R/W
RXD31/IrRXD Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Selects whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD31/IrRXD pin is inverted or not.
0: RXD31/IrRXD input data is not inverted.
1: RXD31/IrRXD input data is inverted.
Note: When the serial port control register is modified, the data being input or output up to that
point is inverted immediately after the modification, and an invalid data change is input or
output. When modifying the serial port control register, modification must be made in a state
in which data changes are invalidated.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 374 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.10 Serial Port Control Register 2 (SPCR2)
SPCR2 selects the function of the TXD33 pin and selects whether or not data input on the RXD33
pin and output via the TXD33 pin are inverted.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 5

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
4
SPC33
0
R/W
PE2/TXD33 Pin Function Switch
Selects whether pin PE2/TXD33 is used as PE2 or as
TXD33.
0: PE2 I/O pin
1: TXD33 output pin
Set the TE bit in SCR3_3 after having set this bit to 1.
3

1

Reserved
2

1

These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
1
SCINV5
0
R/W
TXD33 Pin Output Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of output data of the
TXD33 pin is inverted.
0: TXD33 output data is not inverted
1: TXD33 output data is inverted
0
SCINV4
0
R/W
RXD33 Pin Input Data Inversion Switch
Specifies whether the logic level of input data of the
RXD33 pin is inverted.
0: RXD33 input data is not inverted
1: RXD33 input data is inverted
Note: When the values in bits 1 and 0 of serial port control register 2 are changed, the data being
input or output up to that point is inverted immediately after the change, and this may lead
to the input or output of invalid data. Values in this control register must only be changed
while changes to the data have no effect.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 375 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.11 IrDA Control Register (IrCR)
IrCR controls the IrDA operation of the SCI3_1.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
IrE
0
R/W
Description
IrDA Enable
Selects whether the SCI3_1 I/O pins function as the
SCI or IrDA.
0: TXD31/IrTXD or RXD31/IrRXD pin functions as
TXD31 or RXD31
1: TXD31/IrTXD or RXD31/IrRXD pin functions as
IrTXD or IrRXD
6
IrCKS2
0
R/W
IrDA Clock Select
5
IrCKS1
0
R/W
4
IrCKS0
0
R/W
If the IrDA function is enabled, these bits set the highpulse width when encoding the IrTXD output pulse.
000: Bit rate × 3/16
001: φ/2
010: φ/4
011: φ/8
100: φ/16
101: Setting prohibited
11x: Setting prohibited
3 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 376 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.3.12 Serial Extended Mode Register (SEMR)
SEMR controls extended functions of the SCI3_1, i.e. specifies the basic clock in asynchronous
mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7 to 4

All 0

Reserved
3
ABCS
0
R/W
The write value should always be 0.
Asynchronous Mode Basic Clock Select
Selects the basic clock for one-bit interval in
asynchronous mode. The ABCS setting is enabled in
asynchronous mode (COM = 0 in SMR3)
0: Basic clock with a frequency 16 times the transfer
rate
1: Basic clock with a frequency 8 times the transfer rate
Clear this bit to 0 when the IrDA function is enabled.
2 to 0

All 0

Reserved
These bits are always read as 0 and cannot be
modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 377 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.4
Operation in Asynchronous Mode
Figure 17.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication. Each frame consists
of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and
finally stop bits (high level). In reception in asynchronous mode, synchronization is with falling
edges of the start bits. The data is sampled on the 8th pulse of a clock signal with a frequency 16
times the bit rate, so that the transferred data is latched at the center of each bit. When the ABCS
bit in SEMR is set to 1, data is sampled on the 4th pulse of a clock with a frequency 8 times the bit
rate*. Internally, the SCI3 has independent transmitter and receiver units, which enables full
duplex operation. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so
data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data transfer.
Table 17.9 shows the 16 data transfer formats that can be set in asynchronous mode. The format is
selected by the settings in SMR as shown in table 17.10.
Note: Only supported by the SCI3_1 interface.
LSB
Serial Start
data
bit
1 bit
MSB
Transmit/receive data
5, 7, or 8 bits
1
Parity
bit
1 bit,
or none
Stop bit
1 or
2 bits
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 17.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 378 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Mark state
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.4.1
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external clock input at
the SCK3 pin can be selected as the SCI3's serial clock source, according to the setting of the
COM bit in SMR and the CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When an external clock signal is input on
the SCK3 pin, its frequency should be 16 times the bit rate (or 8 times the bit rate when the ABCS
bit in SEMR is set to 1*). For details on selection of the clock source, see table 17.11. When the
SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK3 pin. The frequency
of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that rising edges of the
clock signal are in the middle of each bit of the data to be transferred, as shown in figure 17.3.
Note: * Only supported by the SCI3_1 interface.
Clock
Serial data
0
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
0/1
1
1
1 character (frame)
Figure 17.3 Relationship between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode) (Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 379 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.9 Data Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
SMR
Serial Data Transfer Format and Frame Length
CHR
PE
MP
STOP
1
0
0
0
0
START
8-bit data
STOP
0
0
0
1
START
8-bit data
STOP
STOP
0
0
1
0
START
8-bit data
MPB
STOP
0
0
1
1
START
8-bit data
MPB
STOP
0
1
0
0
START
8-bit data
P
STOP
0
1
0
1
START
8-bit data
P
STOP
0
1
1
0
START
5-bit data
STOP
0
1
1
1
START
5-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
0
START
7-bit data
STOP
1
0
0
1
START
7-bit data
STOP
STOP
1
0
1
0
START
7-bit data
MPB
STOP
1
0
1
1
START
7-bit data
MPB
STOP
1
1
0
0
START
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
0
1
START
7-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
1
0
START
5-bit data
P
STOP
1
1
1
1
START
5-bit data
P
STOP
2
3
4
[Legend]
START: Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
Parity bit
P:
Multiprocessor bit
MPB:
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 380 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
STOP
STOP
STOP
STOP
12
STOP
STOP
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.10 SMR Settings and Corresponding Data Transfer Formats
SMR
Data Transfer Format
Bit 7
COM
Bit 6
CHR
Bit 2
MP
Bit 5
PE
Bit 3
STOP
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Mode
Asynchronous mode
Data
Length
Multiprocessor Parity
Bit
Bit
8-bit data
No
No
0
0
Yes
0
No
7-bit data
1
0
0
Yes
0
8-bit data
Yes
No
0
5-bit data
0
No
1 bit
2 bits
0
7-bit data
Yes
1 bit
1
1
2 bits
0
5-bit data
No
Yes
1
1
x
0
x
x
1 bit
2 bits
1
1
1 bit
2 bits
1
1
1 bit
2 bits
1
0
1 bit
2 bits
1
1
1 bit
2 bits
1
1
Stop Bit
Length
1 bit
2 bits
Clock
synchronous
mode
8-bit data
No
No
No
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 381 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Table 17.11 SMR and SCR Settings and Clock Source Selection
SMR
SCR
Bit 7
Bit 1
Bit 0
Transmit/Receive Clock
COM
CKE1
CKE0
Mode
Clock Source
SCK Pin Function
0
0
0
Asynchronous
mode
Internal
I/O port pins (pins are not
assigned to the SCK31 or
SCK32 functions)
1
Output for clock with same
frequency as bit rate
1
0
External
0
0
1
0
Clock synchronous Internal
mode
External
0
1
1
Reserved (Do not specify these combinations)
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Note:
Input for clock with frequency 16
times bit rate*
Output for serial clock
Input for serial clock
The input clock may have a frequency 8 times the bit rate when the ABCS bit in SEMR is
set to 1 (only supported for SCI3_1).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 382 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.4.2
SCI3 Initialization
Follow the flowchart as shown in figure 17.4 to initialize the SCI3. When the TE bit is cleared to
0, the TDRE flag is set to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit to 0 does not initialize the contents of
the RDRF, PER, FER, and OER flags, or the contents of RDR. When the external clock is used in
asynchronous mode, the clock must be supplied even during initialization. When the external
clock is used in clock synchronous mode, the clock must not be supplied during initialization.
[1]
Start initialization
When the clock output is selected in
asynchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1 and CKE0
settings are made. When the clock
output is selected at reception in clocked
synchronous mode, clock is output
immediately after CKE1, CKE0, and RE
are set to 1.
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
[1]
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR3
Set data transfer format in SMR
[2]
Set value in BRR
[3]
Wait
[2]
Set the data transfer format in SMR.
[3]
Write a value corresponding to the bit
rate to BRR. Not necessary if an
external clock is used.
[4]
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR to 1. Setting bits
TE and RE enables the TXD3 and RXD3
pins to be used. Also set the RIE, TIE,
TEIE, and MPIE bits, depending on
whether interrupts are required. In
asynchronous mode, the bits are marked
at transmission and idled at reception to
wait for the start bit.
No
1-bit interval elapsed?
Yes
Set SPC3 bit in SPCR or SPCR2 to 1
Set TE and RE bits in
SCR to 1, and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits.
[4]
Set the clock selection in SCR.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
End
Figure 17.4 Sample SCI3 Initialization Flowchart
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 383 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.4.3
Data Transmission
Figure 17.5 shows an example of operation for transmission in asynchronous mode. In
transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR. If the flag is cleared to 0, the SCI3 recognizes that
data has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. After transferring data from TDR to TSR, the SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TXI3 interrupt request is
generated. Continuous transmission is possible because the TXI3 interrupt routine writes next
transmit data to TDR before transmission of the current transmit data has been completed.
3. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
4. If the TDRE flag is 0, the data is transferred from TDR to TSR, the stop bit is sent, and then
serial transmission of the next frame is started.
5. If the TDRE flag is 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the “mark
state” is entered, in which 1 is output. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI
interrupt request is generated.
Figure 17.6 shows a sample flowchart for transmission in asynchronous mode.
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
1 frame
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit bit
0/1
1
0
Transmit
data
D0
D1
D7
Parity Stop
bit
bit
0/1
1
Mark
state
1
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI
TXI3 interrupt
operation request
generated
User
processing
TDRE flag
cleared to 0
TXI3 interrupt request
generated
TEI3 interrupt request
generated
Data written
to TDR
Figure 17.5 Example SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 384 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Start transmission
Set SPC3 bit in SPCR or SPCR2 to 1
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
TDRE = 1
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
[2]
Continue data transmission?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
[1] Read SSR and check that the
TDRE flag is set to 1, then write
transmit data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
(After the TE bit is set to 1, one
frame of 1 is output, then
transmission is possible.)
[2] To continue serial transmission,
read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible,
then write data to TDR. When data
is written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automaticaly cleared to 0.
[3] To output a break in serial
transmission, after setting PCR to 1
and PDR to 0, clear the TE bit in
SCR to 0.
No
TEND = 1
Yes
[3]
No
Break output?
Yes
Clear PDR to 0 and
set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 17.6 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 385 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.4.4
Serial Data Reception
Figure 17.7 shows an example of operation for reception in asynchronous mode. In serial
reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the communication line. If a start bit is detected, the SCI3 performs
internal synchronization, receives data in RSR, and checks the parity bit and stop bit.
• Parity check
The SCI3 checks that the number of 1 bits in the receive data conforms to the parity (odd or
even) set in bit PM in the serial mode register (SMR).
• Stop bit check
The SCI3 checks that the stop bit is 1. If two stop bits are used, only the first is checked.
• Status check
The SCI3 checks that bit RDRF is set to 0, indicating that the receive data can be transferred
from RSR to RDR.
2. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an
ERI3 interrupt request is generated. Receive data is not transferred to RDR.
3. If a parity error is detected, the PER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive data is transferred to
RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI3 interrupt request is generated.
4. If a framing error is detected (when the stop bit is 0), the FER bit in SSR is set to 1 and receive
data is transferred to RDR. If the RIE3 bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an ERI3 interrupt
request is generated.
5. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI3 interrupt request is
generated. Continuous reception is possible because the RXI3 interrupt routine reads the
receive data transferred to RDR before reception of the next receive data has been completed.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 386 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Receive
data
D0
D1
D7
Parity Stop Start
bit
bit bit
0/1
1
0
Receive
data
D0
D1
1 frame
Parity Stop
bit
bit
D7
0/1
Mark state
(idle state)
0
1
1 frame
RDRF
FER
LSI
operation
RXI3 interrupt
request
generated
User
processing
0 stop bit
detected
RDRF
cleared to 0
RDR data read
ERI3 request in
response to
framing error
Framing error
processing
Figure 17.7 Example SCI3 Operation in Reception in Asynchronous Mode
(8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Table 17.12 shows the states of the SSR status flags and receive data handling when a receive
error is detected. If a receive error is detected, the RDRF flag retains its state before receiving
data. Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the
OER, FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 17.8 shows a sample
flowchart for serial data reception.
Table 17.12 SSR Status Flags and Receive Data Handling
SSR Status Flag
RDRF*
OER
FER
PER
Receive Data
Receive Error Type
1
1
0
0
Lost
Overrun error
0
0
1
0
Transferred to RDR
Framing error
0
0
0
1
Transferred to RDR
Parity error
1
1
1
0
Lost
Overrun error + framing error
1
1
0
1
Lost
Overrun error + parity error
0
0
1
1
Transferred to RDR
Framing error + parity error
1
1
1
1
Lost
Overrun error + framing error +
parity error
Note:
*
The RDRF flag retains the state it had before data reception. However, note that if RDR
is read after an overrun error has occurred in a frame because reading of the receive
data in the previous frame was delayed, the RDRF flag will be cleared to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 387 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Start reception
Read OER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR
[1]
Yes
OER+PER+FER = 1
[4]
No
Error processing
(Continued on next page)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[2]
No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
[1] Read the OER, PER, and FER flags in
SSR to identify the error. If a receive
error occurs, performs the appropriate
error processing.
[2] Read SSR and check that RDRF = 1,
then read the receive data in RDR.
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[3] To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is
received, read the RDRF flag and read
RDR.
The RDRF flag is cleared automatically.
[4] If a receive error occurs, read the OER,
PER, and FER flags in SSR to identify
the error. After performing the
appropriate error processing, ensure
that the OER, PER, and FER flags are
all cleared to 0. Reception cannot be
resumed if any of these flags are set to
1. In the case of a framing error, a
break can be detected by reading the
value of the input port corresponding to
the RXD3 pin.
Yes
Continue data reception?
[3]
No
(A)
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 17.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 388 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
[4]
Error processing
No
OER = 1
Yes
Overrun error processing
No
FER = 1
Yes
Yes
Break?
No
Framing error processing
No
PER = 1
Yes
Parity error processing
(A)
Clear OER, PER, and
FER flags in SSR to 0
End
Figure 17.8 Sample Serial Data Reception Flowchart (Asynchronous Mode) (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 389 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.5
Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode
Figure 17.9 shows the general format for clock synchronous communication. In clock
synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received synchronous with clock pulses. A single
character in the transmit data consists of the 8-bit data starting from the LSB. In clock
synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge of
the serial clock to the next. In clock synchronous mode, the SCI3 receives data in synchronous
with the rising edge of the serial clock. After 8-bit data is output, the transmission line holds the
MSB state. In clock synchronous mode, no parity or multiprocessor bit is added. Inside the SCI3,
the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex communication through
the use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered
structure, so data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
8-bit
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
*
*
Synchronization
clock
LSB
Bit 0
Serial data
MSB
Bit 1
Don't care
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Don't care
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Figure 17.9 Data Format in Clock Synchronous Communications
17.5.1
Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the on-chip baud rate generator or an external
synchronization clock input at the SCK3 pin can be selected, according to the setting of the COM
bit in SMR and CKE0 and CKE1 bits in SCR. When the SCI3 is operated on an internal clock, the
serial clock is output from the SCK3 pin. Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one
character, and when no transfer is performed the clock is fixed high.
17.5.2
SCI3 Initialization
Before transmitting and receiving data, the SCI3 should be initialized as described in a sample
flowchart in figure 17.4.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 390 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.5.3
Serial Data Transmission
Figure 17.10 shows an example of SCI3 operation for transmission in clock synchronous mode. In
serial transmission, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 monitors the TDRE flag in SSR, and if the flag is 0, the SCI3 recognizes that data
has been written to TDR, and transfers the data from TDR to TSR.
2. The SCI3 sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts transmission. If the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at
this time, a TXI3 interrupt request is generated.
3. 8-bit data is sent from the TXD3 pin synchronized with the output clock when output clock
mode has been specified, and synchronized with the input clock when use of an external clock
has been specified. Serial data is transmitted sequentially from the LSB (bit 0), from the TXD3
pin.
4. The SCI3 checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
5.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR to TSR, and serial transmission
of the next frame is started.
6.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR is set to 1, and the TDRE flag maintains
the output state of the last bit. If the TEIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, a TEI3 is
generated.
7.
The SCK3 pin is fixed high.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
1 frame
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
TXI3 interrupt
LSI
operation request
generated
TDRE flag
cleared
to 0
User
processing
Data written
to TDR
TXI3 interrupt request
generated
TEI3 interrupt request
generated
Figure 17.10 Example of SCI3 Operation in Transmission in Clock Synchronous Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 391 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Figure 17.11 shows a sample flowchart for serial data transmission. Even if the TDRE flag is
cleared to 0, transmission will not start while a receive error flag (OER, FER, or PER) is set to 1.
Make sure that the receive error flags are cleared to 0 before starting transmission.
Start transmission
Set SPC3 bit in SPCR or SPCR2 to 1
[1]
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
TDRE = 1
[2]
Yes
Write transmit data to TDR
[2]
Continue data reception?
Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is
set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
is automatically cleared to 0. When clock
output is selected and data is written to
TDR, clocks are output to start the data
transmission.
To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the TDRE flag
is automatically cleared to 0.
Yes
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1
Yes
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 17.11 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 392 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.5.4
Serial Data Reception (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Figure 17.12 shows an example of SCI3 operation for reception in clock synchronous mode. In
serial reception, the SCI3 operates as described below.
1. The SCI3 performs internal initialization synchronous with a synchronous clock input or
output, starts receiving data.
2. The SCI3 stores the received data in RSR.
3. If an overrun error occurs (when reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR is still set to 1), the OER bit in SSR is set to 1. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this
time, an ERI3 interrupt request is generated, receive data is not transferred to RDR, and the
RDRF flag remains to be set to 1.
4. If reception is completed successfully, the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, and receive data is
transferred to RDR. If the RIE bit in SCR is set to 1 at this time, an RXI3 interrupt request is
generated.
Serial
clock
Serial
data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
1 frame
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
RDRF
OER
LSI
operation
User
processing
RXI3 interrupt
request
generated
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RDR data read
RXI3 interrupt
request generated
ERI interrupt request
generated by
overrun error
RDR data has
not been read
(RDRF = 1)
Overrun error
processing
Figure 17.12 Example of SCI3 Reception Operation in Clock Synchronous Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 393 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Reception cannot be resumed while a receive error flag is set to 1. Accordingly, clear the OER,
FER, PER, and RDRF bits to 0 before resuming reception. Figure 17.13 shows a sample flowchart
for serial data reception.
Start reception
[1]
[1]
Read OER flag in SSR
[2]
Yes
OER = 1?
[4]
No
[3]
Overrun error processing
(Continued below)
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[2]
[4]
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read the OER flag in SSR to determine if
there is an error. If an overrun error has
occurred, execute overrun error processing.
Read SSR and check that the RDRF flag is
set to 1, then read the receive data in RDR.
When data is read from RDR, the RDRF
flag is automatically cleared to 0.
To continue serial reception, before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,
reading the RDRF flag and reading RDR
should be finished. When data is read from
RDR, the RDRF flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
If an overrun error occurs, read the OER
flag in SSR, and after performing the
appropriate error processing, clear the OER
flag to 0. Reception cannot be resumed if
the OER flag is set to 1.
Read receive data in RDR
Yes
Data reception continued?
[3]
No
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
<End>
[4]
Start overrun error processing
Overrun error processing
Clear OER flag in SSR to 0
End
Figure 17.13 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart (Clock Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 394 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.5.5
Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception
Figure 17.14 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations. To switch from transmit mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after
checking that the SCI3 has finished transmission and the TDRE and TEND flags are set to 1, clear
TE to 0. Then simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction. To switch from receive
mode to simultaneous transmit and receive mode, after checking that the SCI3 has finished
reception, clear RE to 0. Then after checking that the RDRF and receive error flags (OER, FER,
and PER) are cleared to 0, simultaneously set TE and RE to 1 with a single instruction.
Start transmission/reception
[1]
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, then write transmit
data to TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0.
[2] Read SSR and check that the RDRF
TDRE = 1
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR.
Yes
When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
Write transmit data to TDR
0.
[3] To continue serial transmission/
reception, before the MSB (bit 7) of
Read OER flag in SSR
the current frame is received, finish
reading the RDRF flag, reading RDR.
Yes
Also, before the MSB (bit 7) of the
OER = 1
[4]
current frame is transmitted, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that
Overrun error processing
No
writing is possible. Then write data to
TDR.
When data is written to TDR, the
Read RDRF flag in SSR
[2]
TDRE flag is automatically cleared to
0. When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
RDRF = 1
0.
[4] If an overrun error occurs, read the
Yes
OER flag in SSR, and after
performing the appropriate error
processing, clear the OER flag to 0.
Read receive data in RDR
Transmission/reception cannot be
resumed if the OER flag is set to 1.
For overrun error processing, see
figure 17.13.
Set SPC3 bit in SPCR or SPCR2 to 1
No
No
Yes
Data transmission/reception
continued?
[3]
No
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR to 0
End
Figure 17.14 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
(Clock Synchronous Mode)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 395 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.6
Multiprocessor Communication Function
Use of the multiprocessor communication function enables data transfer between a number of
processors sharing communication lines by asynchronous serial communication using the
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data. When
multiprocessor communication is performed, each receiving station is addressed by a unique ID
code. The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles; an ID transmission cycle
that specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used to
differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle. If the
multiprocessor bit is 1, the cycle is an ID transmission cycle; if the multiprocessor bit is 0, the
cycle is a data transmission cycle. Figure 17.15 shows an example of inter-processor
communication using the multiprocessor format. The transmitting station first sends the ID code
of the receiving station with which it wants to perform serial communication as data with a 1
multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose IDs do not
match continue to skip data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received.
The SCI3 uses the MPIE bit in SCR to implement this function. When the MPIE bit is set to 1,
transfer of receive data from RSR to RDR, error flag detection, and setting the SSR status flags,
RDRF, FER, and OER to 1, are inhibited until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On
reception of a receive character with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the MPBR bit in SSR is set to 1 and
the MPIE bit is automatically cleared, thus normal reception is resumed. If the RIE bit in SCR is
set to 1 at this time, an RXI3 interrupt is generated.
When the multiprocessor format is selected, the parity bit setting is rendered invalid. All other bit
settings are the same as those in normal asynchronous mode. The clock used for multiprocessor
communication is the same as that in normal asynchronous mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 396 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Transmitting
station
Serial transmission line
Receiving
station A
Receiving
station B
Receiving
station C
Receiving
station D
(ID = 01)
(ID = 02)
(ID = 03)
(ID = 04)
Serial
data
H'01
H'AA
(MPB = 1)
[Legend]
MPB: Multiprocessor bit
(MPB = 0)
ID transmission cycle = Data transmission cycle =
receiving station
Data transmission to
specification
receiving station specified by ID
Figure 17.15 Example of Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 397 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.6.1
Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 17.16 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission. For an ID
transmission cycle, set the MPBT bit in SSR to 1 before transmission. For a data transmission
cycle, clear the MPBT bit in SSR to 0 before transmission. All other SCI3 operations are the same
as those in asynchronous mode.
Start transmission
Set SPC3 bit in SPCR or SPCR2 to 1
[1]
[1]
Read TDRE flag in SSR
No
TDRE = 1
[2]
Yes
Set MPBT bit in SSR
[3]
Write transmit data to TDR
Yes
[2]
Read SSR and check that the TDRE
flag is set to 1, set the MPBT bit in
SSR to 0 or 1, then write transmit
data to TDR. When data is written to
TDR, the TDRE flag is automatically
cleared to 0.
To continue serial transmission, be
sure to read 1 from the TDRE flag to
confirm that writing is possible, then
write data to TDR. When data is
written to TDR, the TDRE flag is
automatically cleared to 0.
To output a break in serial
transmission, set the port PCR to 1,
clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit
in SCR to 0.
Data transmission continued?
No
Read TEND flag in SSR
No
TEND = 1?
Yes
No
[3]
Break output?
Yes
Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR to 0
End
Figure 17.16 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 398 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.6.2
Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figure 17.17 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data reception. If the MPIE bit in
SCR is set to 1, data is skipped until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received. On receiving data
with a 1 multiprocessor bit, the receive data is transferred to RDR. An RXI3 interrupt request is
generated at this time. All other SCI3 operations are the same as in asynchronous mode. Figure
17.18 shows an example of SCI3 operation for multiprocessor format reception.
Start reception
[1]
[1] Set the MPIE bit in SCR to 1.
Set MPIE bit in SCR to 1
[2] Read OER and FER flags in SSR
[3]
[2] Read OER and FER in SSR to check
for errors. Receive error processing is
performed in cases where a receive
error occurs.
Yes
OER + FER = 1?
Read RDRF flag in SSR
No
RDRF = 1?
Yes
[3] Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the receive
data in RDR and compare it with this
station's ID.
If the data is not this station's ID, set
the MPIE bit to 1 again.
When data is read from RDR, the
RDRF flag is automatically cleared to
0.
No
[4] Read SSR and check that the RDRF
flag is set to 1, then read the data in
RDR.
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
No
This station's ID?
Yes
Read OER and FER flags in SSR
OER + FER = 1?
[4]
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read receive data in RDR
[5]
Data reception
continued?
[5] If a receive error occurs, read the OER
and FER flags in SSR to identify the
error. After performing the appropriate
error processing, ensure that the OER
and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if either of
these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a break
can be detected by reading the RXD3
pin value.
Receive error
processing
Yes
(A)
No
Clear RE bit in SCR to 0
End
Start receive error processing
OER = 1?
Yes
Overrun error
processing
Yes
Break?
No
FER = 1?
No
Yes
No
Framing error
processing
Clear OER and FER flags
in SSR to 0
End
(A)
Figure 17.17 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 399 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Receive
data (ID1)
D0
D1
D7
MPB
1
Stop Start
bit bit
1
0
Receive data
(Data1)
D0
D1
D7
MPB
Stop
bit
Mark state
(idle state)
0
1
1
1 frame
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
ID1
LSI
operation
RXI3 interrupt
request generated
MPIE cleared
to 0
User
processing
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RXI3 interrupt request
is not generated, and
RDR retains its state
RDR data read
When data is not
this station's ID,
MPIE is set to 1
again
(a) When data does not match this receiver's ID
Start
bit
Serial
data
1
0
Receive
data (ID2)
D0
D1
D7
MPB
1
Stop Start
bit bit
1
0
Receive data
(Data2)
D0
1 frame
D1
D7
MPB
Stop
bit
Mark state
(idle state)
0
1
1
1 frame
MPIE
RDRF
RDR
value
LSI
operation
User
processing
ID1
ID2
RXI3 interrupt
request generated
MPIE cleared
to 0
RXI3 interrupt RDRF flag
cleared
request
to 0
generated
RDRF flag
cleared
to 0
RDR data read
Data2
When data is
this station's
ID, reception
is continued
RDR data read
MPIE set to 1
again
(b) When data matches this receiver's ID
Figure 17.18 Example of SCI3 Operation in Reception Using Multiprocessor Format
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 400 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.7
IrDA Operation
IrDA operation can be used with the SCI3_1. Figure 17.19 shows an IrDA block diagram.
If the IrDA function is enabled using the IrE bit in IrCR, the TXD31 and RXD31 pins in the
SCI3_1 are allowed to encode and decode the waveform based on the IrDA standard version 1.0
(function as the IrTXD and IrRXD pins). Connecting these pins to the infrared data
transceiver/receiver achieves infrared data communication based on the system defined by the
IrDA standard version 1.0.
In the system defined by the IrDA standard version 1.0, communication is started at a transfer rate
of 9600 bps, which can be modified as required. The IrDA interface provided by this LSI does not
incorporate the capability of automatic modification of the transfer rate; the transfer rate must be
modified through programming.
IrDA
TXD31/IrTXD
Pulse encoder
RXD31/IrRXD
Pulse encoder
SPCR
SCI3_1
TXD
RXD
IrCR
Figure 17.19 IrDA Block Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 401 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.7.1
Transmission
During transmission, the output signals from the SCI (UART frames) are converted to IR frames
using the IrDA interface (see figure 17.20).
For serial data of level 0, a high-level pulse having a width of 3/16 of the bit rate (1-bit interval) is
output (initial setting). The high-level pulse can be selected using the IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 bits in
IrCR.
According to the standard, the high-level pulse width is defined to be 1.41 µs at minimum and
(3/16 + 2.5%) × bit rate or (3/16 × bit rate) + 1.08 µs at maximum. For example, when the
frequency of system clock φ is 10 MHz, being equal to or greater than 1.41 µs, the high-level
pulse width at minimum can be specified as 1.6 µs.
For serial data of level 1, no pulses are output.
UART frame
Data
Start
bit
0
1
0
1
0
0
Stop
bit
1
Transmission
1
0
1
Reception
IR frame
Data
Start
bit
0
1
Bit
cycle
0
1
0
0
Stop
bit
1
1
0
Pulse width is 1.6 µs to
3/16 bit cycle
Figure 17.20 IrDA Transmission and Reception
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 402 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
1
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.7.2
Reception
During reception, IR frames are converted to UART frames using the IrDA interface before
inputting to the SCI3_1.
Data of level 0 is output each time a high-level pulse is detected and data of level 1 is output when
no pulse is detected in a bit cycle. If a pulse has a high-level width of less than 1.41 µs, the
minimum width allowed, the pulse is not recognized.
17.7.3
High-Level Pulse Width Selection
Table 17.12 shows possible settings for bits IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 (minimum pulse width), and this
LSI's operating frequencies and bit rates, for making the pulse width shorter than 3/16 times the bit
rate in transmission.
Table 17.13 IrCKS2 to IrCKS0 Bit Settings
Bit Rate (bps) (Upper Row) / Bit Interval × 3/16 (µs) (Lower Row)
Operating
Frequency
2400
9600
19200
38400
φ (MHz)
78.13
19.53
9.77
4.88
2
010
010
010
010
2.097152
010
010
010
010
2.4576
010
010
010
010
3
011
011
011
011
3.6864
011
011
011
011
4.9152
011
011
011
011
5
011
011
011
011
6
100
100
100
100
6.144
100
100
100
100
7.3728
100
100
100
100
8
100
100
100
100
9.8304
100
100
100
100
10
100
100
100
100
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 403 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.8
Interrupt Requests
The SCI3 creates the following six interrupt requests: transmit end, transmit data empty, receive
data full, and receive errors (overrun error, framing error, and parity error). Table 17.14 shows the
interrupt sources.
Table 17.14 SCI3 Interrupt Requests
Interrupt Requests
Abbreviation
Interrupt Sources
Receive data full
RXI3
Setting RDRF in SSR
Transmit data empty
TXI3
Setting TDRE in SSR
Transmission end
TEI3
Setting TEND in SSR
Receive error
ERI3
Setting OER, FER, and PER in SSR
Each interrupt request can be enabled or disabled by means of bits TIE and RIE in SCR.
When the TDRE bit in SSR is set to 1, a TXI3 interrupt is requested. When the TEND bit in SSR
is set to 1, a TEI3 interrupt is requested. These two interrupts are generated during transmission.
The initial value of the TDRE flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TIE bit in SCR is set to 1 before
transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TXI3 interrupt request is generated even if the transmit
data is not ready. The initial value of the TEND flag in SSR is 1. Thus, when the TEIE bit in SCR
is set to 1 before transferring the transmit data to TDR, a TEI3 interrupt request is generated even
if the transmit data has not been sent. It is possible to make use of the most of these interrupt
requests efficiently by transferring the transmit data to TDR in the interrupt routine. To prevent
the generation of these interrupt requests (TXI3 and TEI3), set the enable bits (TIE and TEIE) that
correspond to these interrupt requests to 1, after transferring the transmit data to TDR.
When the RDRF bit in SSR is set to 1, an RXI3 interrupt is requested, and if any of bits OER,
PER, and FER is set to 1, an ERI3 interrupt is requested. These two interrupt requests are
generated during reception.
The SCI3 can carry out continuous reception using an RXI3 and continuous transmission using a
TXI3.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 404 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
These interrupts are shown in table 17.15.
Table 17.15 Transmit/Receive Interrupts
Interrupt
Flags
Interrupt Request Conditions
Notes
RXI3
RDRF
When serial reception is
performed normally and receive
data is transferred from RSR to
RDR, bit RDRF is set to 1, and if
bit RIE is set to 1 at this time, an
RXI3 is enabled and an interrupt
is requested. (See figure 17.21
(a).)
The RXI3 interrupt routine reads
the receive data transferred to
RDR and clears bit RDRF to 0.
Continuous reception can be
performed by repeating the above
operations until reception of the
next RSR data is completed.
When TSR is found to be empty
(on completion of the previous
transmission) and the transmit
data placed in TDR is transferred
to TSR, bit TDRE is set to 1. If bit
TIE is set to 1 at this time, a TXI3
is enabled and an interrupt is
requested. (See figure 17.21 (b).)
The TXI3 interrupt routine writes
the next transmit data to TDR and
clears bit TDRE to 0. Continuous
transmission can be performed by
repeating the above operations
until the data transferred to TSR
has been transmitted.
When the last bit of the character
in TSR is transmitted, if bit TDRE
is set to 1, bit TEND is set to 1. If
bit TEIE is set to 1 at this time, a
TEI3 is enabled and an interrupt
is requested. (See figure 17.21
(c).)
A TEI3 indicates that the next
transmit data has not been written
to TDR when the last bit of the
transmit character in TSR is
transmitted.
RIE
TXI3
TDRE
TIE
TEI3
TEND
TEIE
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 405 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
RDR
RDR
RSR (reception in progress)
RSR↑ (reception completed, transfer)
RXD3 pin
RDRF
RDRF = 0
→
RXD3 pin
1
(RXI3 request when RIE = 1)
Figure 17.21 (a) RDRF Setting and RXI3 Interrupt
TDR (next transmit data)
TDR
TSR (transmission in progress)
↓
TSR (transmission completed, transfer)
TXD3 pin
TXD3 pin
TDRE
→
TDRE = 0
1
(TXI3 request when TIE = 1)
Figure 17.21 (b) TDRE Setting and TXI3 Interrupt
TDR
TDR
TSR (transmission in progress)
TSR (transmission completed)
TXD3 pin
TEND = 0
TEND
→
TXD3 pin
1
(TEI3 request when TEIE = 1)
Figure 17.21 (c) TEND Setting and TEI3 Interrupt
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 406 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.9
Usage Notes
17.9.1
Break Detection and Processing
When framing error detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the RXD3 pin
value directly. In a break, the input from the RXD3 pin becomes all 0, setting the FER flag, and
possibly the PER flag. Note that as the SCI3 continues the receive operation after receiving a
break, even if the FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
17.9.2
Mark State and Break Sending
When TE is 0, the TXD3 pin is used as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) and level are
determined by PCR and PDR. This can be used to set the TXD3 pin to mark state (high level) or
send a break during serial data transmission. To maintain the communication line at mark state
until TE is set to 1, set both PCR and PDR to 1. As TE is cleared to 0 at this point, the TXD3 pin
becomes an I/O port, and 1 is output from the TXD3 pin. To send a break during serial
transmission, first set PCR to 1 and PDR to 0, and then clear TE to 0. When TE is cleared to 0, the
transmitter is initialized regardless of the current transmission state, the TXD3 pin becomes an I/O
port, and 0 is output from the TXD3 pin.
17.9.3
Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clock Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (OER, PER, or FER) is set to 1, even if
the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before starting
transmission. Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared
to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 407 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.9.4
Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI3 operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the
transfer rate (8 times the transfer rate when the ABCS bit in SEMR is set to 1). In reception, the
SCI3 samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and performs internal
synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the 8th pulse of the basic
clock (4th pulse of the basic clock when the ABCS bit in SEMR is set to 1*) as shown in figure
17.22.The reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
Note: Only supported by the SCI3_1 interface.


1
D – 0.5
M = (0.5 –
)–
– (L – 0.5) F × 100(%)
2N
N


Where N:
D:
L:
F:
... Formula (1)
Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
Clock duty (D = 0.5 to 1.0)
Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F (absolute value of clock rate deviation) = 0 and D (clock duty) = 0.5 in
formula (1), the reception margin can be given by the formula.
M = {0.5 – 1/(2 × 16)} × 100 [%] = 46.875%
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed for in
system design.
16 clocks
8 clocks
0
7
15 0
7
15 0
Internal basic
clock
Receive data
(RXD3)
Start bit
D0
D1
Synchronization
sampling timing
Data sampling
timing
Figure 17.22 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 408 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.9.5
Note on Switching SCK3 Pin Function
If pin SCK3 is used as a clock output pin by the SCI3 in clock synchronous mode and is then
switched to a general input/output pin (a pin with a different function), the pin outputs a low level
signal for half a system clock (φ) cycle immediately after it is switched.
This can be prevented by either of the following methods according to the situation.
(1)
When SCK3 Function is Switched from Clock Output to Non Clock-Output
When stopping data transfer, issue one instruction to clear bits TE and RE to 0 and to set bits
CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR to 1 and 0, respectively.
In this case, bit COM in SMR should be left 1. The above prevents the SCK3 pin from being used
as a general input/output pin. To avoid an intermediate level of voltage from being applied to the
SCK3 pin, the line connected to the SCK3 pin should be pulled up to the VCC level via a resistor, or
supplied with output from an external device.
(2)
When SCK3 Function is Switched from Clock Output to General Input/Output
When stopping data transfer,
1. Issue one instruction to clear bits TE and RE to 0 and to set bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR to 1
and 0, respectively.
2. Clear bit COM in SMR to 0
3. Clear bits CKE1 and CKE0 in SCR to 0. Note that special care is also needed here to avoid an
intermediate level of voltage from being applied to the SCK3 pin.
17.9.6
Relation between Writing to TDR and Bit TDRE
Bit TDRE in the serial status register (SSR) is a status flag that indicates that data for serial
transmission has not been prepared in TDR. When data is written to TDR, bit TDRE is cleared to
0 automatically. When the SCI3 transfers data from TDR to TSR, bit TDRE is set to 1.
Data can be written to TDR irrespective of the state of bit TDRE, but if new data is written to
TDR while bit TDRE is cleared to 0, the data previously stored in TDR will be lost if it has not yet
been transferred to TSR. Accordingly, to ensure that serial transmission is performed dependably,
you should first check that bit TDRE is set to 1, then write the transmit data to TDR only once (not
two or more times).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 409 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.9.7
Relation between RDR Reading and bit RDRF
In a receive operation, the SCI3 continually checks the RDRF flag. If bit RDRF is cleared to 0
when reception of one frame ends, normal data reception is completed. If bit RDRF is set to 1, this
indicates that an overrun error has occurred.
When the contents of RDR are read, bit RDRF is cleared to 0 automatically. Therefore, if RDR is
read more than once, the second and subsequent read operations will be performed while bit
RDRF is cleared to 0. Note that, when an RDR read is performed while bit RDRF is cleared to 0,
if the read operation coincides with completion of reception of a frame, the next frame of data may
be read. This is shown in figure 17.23.
Communication line
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 1
Data 2
RDRF
RDR
(A)
RDR read
(B)
RDR read
Data 1 is read at point (A)
Data 2 is read at point (B)
Figure 17.23 Relation between RDR Read Timing and Data
In this case, only a single RDR read operation (not two or more) should be performed after first
checking that bit RDRF is set to 1. If two or more reads are performed, the data read the first time
should be transferred to RAM, etc., and the RAM contents used. Also, ensure that there is
sufficient margin in an RDR read operation before reception of the next frame is completed. To be
precise in terms of timing, the RDR read should be completed before bit 7 is transferred in clock
synchronous mode, or before the STOP bit is transferred in asynchronous mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 410 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
17.9.8
Transmit and Receive Operations when Making State Transition
Make sure that transmit and receive operations have completely finished before carrying out state
transition processing.
17.9.9
Setting in Subactive or Subsleep Mode
In subactive or subsleep mode, the SCI3 interface can operate only when the CPU clock is φW/2.
The SA1 and SA0 bits in SYSCR2 should be set to 1 and 0, respectively.
17.9.10 Oscillator when Serial Communications Interface 3 is Used
When the serial communications interface 3 is used, do not use the on-chip oscillator for the
system clock. For details on selecting the system clock oscillator or on-chip oscillator for the
system clock, see section 5.2.4, Selecting On-Chip Oscillator for System Clock.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 411 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 17 Serial Communications Interface 3 (SCI3, IrDA)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 412 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
The serial communication interface 4 (SCI4) can handle clock synchronous serial communication
with the 8-bit buffer. The SCI4 is supported only by the F-ZTAT version. When the on-chip
emulator debugger etc. is used, the SCK4, SI4, and SO4 pins of the SCI4 are used by the system,
and the SCI4 is not available for the user.
18.1
Features
• Eight internal clocks (φ/1024, φ/256, φ/64, φ/32, φ/16, φ/8, φ/4, φ/2) or external clock can be
selected as a clock source.
• Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
• Four interrupt sources
Transmit-end, transmit-data-empty, receive-data-full, and overrun error
• Full-duplex communication capability
Buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous transmission
and continuous reception of serial data.
• When the on-chip emulator debugger etc. is not used, the SCI4 is available for the user.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when it is not in use. (For details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function.)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 413 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI4.
φ
PSS
SCSR4
SCK4
SCR4
TDR4
SR4
SI4
SO4
Internal data bus
Transmit/receive
control circuit
RDR4
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
[Legend]
SCSR4: Serial control status register 4
SCR4: Serial control register 4
TDR4: Transmit data register 4
SR4:
Shift register 4
RDR4: Receive data register 4
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of SCI4
18.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 18.1 shows the SCI4 pin configuration.
Table 18.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
SCI4 clock
SCK4
I/O
SCI4 clock input/output
SCI4 data input
SI4
Input
SCI4 receive data input
SCI4 data output
SO4
Output
SCI4 transmit data output
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 414 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.3
Register Descriptions
The SCI4 has the following registers.
• Serial control register 4 (SCR4)
• Serial control/status register 4 (SCSR4)
• Transmit data register 4 (TDR4)
• Receive data register 4 (RDR4)
• Shift Register 4 (SR4)
18.3.1
Serial Control Register 4 (SCR4)
SCR4 enables or disables interrupt requests and controls SCI4 transfer operations.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables a transmit data empty interrupt
(TXI) request when serial transmit data is transferred
from TDR4 to SR4 and the TDRE flag in SCSR4 is set
to 1. TXI can be cleared by clearing the TDRE flag in
SCSR4 to 0 after the flag is read as 1 or clearing this
bit to 0.
0: Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled
1: Transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled
6
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables a receive data full interrupt (RXI)
request and receive error interrupt (ERI) request when
serial receive data is transferred from SR4 to RDR4
and the RDRF flag in SCSR4 is set to 1. RXI and ERI
can be cleared by clearing the RDRF or ORER flag in
SCSR4 to 0 after the flag is read as 1 or clearing this
bit to 0.
0: Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive
error interrupt (ERI) request disabled
1: Receive data full interrupt (RXI) request and receive
error interrupt (ERI) request enabled
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 415 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
Enables or disables a transmit end interrupt (TEI)
request when there is no valid transmit data in TDR4
during transmission of MSB data. TEI can be cleared
by clearing the TEND flag in SCSR4 to 0 after the flag
is read as 1 or clearing this bit to 0.
0: Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request disabled
1: Transmit end interrupt (TEI) request enabled
4
SOL
0
R/W
Extended Data
Sets the output level of the SO4 pin. When this bit is
read, the output level of the SO4 pin is read. The
output of the SO4 pin retains the value of the last bit of
transmit data after transmission is completed.
However, if this bit is changed before or after
transmission, the output level of the SO4 pin can be
changed. When the output level of the SO4 pin is
changed, the SOLP bit should be cleared to 0 and the
MOV instruction should be used. Note that this bit
should not be changed during transmission because
incorrect operation may occur.
[When reading]
0: The output level of the SO4 pin is low.
1: The output level of the SO4 pin is high.
[When writing]
0: The output level of the SO4 pin is changed to low.
1: The output level of the SO4 pin is changed to high.
3
SOLP
1
R/W
SOL Write Protect
Controls change of the output level of the SO4 pin due
to the change of the SOL bit. When the output level of
the SO4 pin is changed, the setting of SOL = 1 and
SOLP = 0 or SOL = 0 and SOLP = 0 is made by the
MOV instruction. This bit is always read as 1.
0: When writing, the output level is changed according
to the value of the SOL pin.
1: When reading, this bit is always read as 1 and
cannot be modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 416 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
SRES
0
R/W
Forcible Reset
When the internal sequencer is forcibly initialized, 1
should be written to this bit. When 1 is written to this
flag, the internal sequencer is forcibly reset and then
this flag is automatically cleared to 0. Note that the
values of the internal registers are retained. (The
TDRE flag in SCSR4 is set to 1 and the RDRF, ORER,
and TEND flags are cleared to 0. The TE and RE bits
in SCR4 are cleared to 0.)
0: Normal operation
1: Internal sequencer is forcibly reset
1
TE
0
R/W
Transmit Enable
Enables or disables start of the SCI4 serial
transmission. When this bit is cleared to 0, the TERE
flag in SCSR4 is fixed to 1. When transmit data is
written to TDR4 while this bit is set to 1, the TDRE flag
in SCSR4 is automatically cleared to 0 and serial data
transmission is started.
0: Transmission disabled (SO4 pin functions as I/O
port)
1: Transmission enabled (SO4 pin functions as
transmit data pin)
0
RE
0
R/W
Receive Enable
Enables or disables start of the SCI4 serial reception.
Note that the RDRF and ORER flags in SCSR4 are not
affected even if this bit is cleared to 0, and retain their
previous state. Serial data reception is started when
the synchronous clock input is detected while this bit is
set to 1 (when an external clock is selected). When an
internal clock is selected, the synchronous clock is
output and serial data reception is started.
0: Reception disabled (SI4 pin functions as I/O port)
1: Reception enabled (SI4 pin functions as receive data
pin)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 417 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.3.2
Serial Control/Status Register 4 (SCSR4)
SCSR4 indicates the operating state and error state, selects the clock source, and controls the
prescaler division ratio.
SCSR4 can be read from or written to by the CPU at any time. 1 cannot be written to flags TDRE,
RDRF, ORER, and TEND. To clear these flags to 0, 1 should be read from them in advance.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)* Transmit Data Empty
Description
Indicates that data is transferred from TDR4 to SR4
and the next serial transmit data can be written to
TDR4.
[Setting conditions]
•
The TE bit in SCR4 is 0
•
Data is transferred from TDR4 to SR4 and data can
be written to TDR4
[Clearing conditions]
6
RDRF
0
•
Writing of 0 to bit TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
Data is written to TDR4
R/(W)* Receive Data Full
Indicates that the receive data is stored in RDR4.
[Setting condition]
•
Serial reception ends normally and receive data is
transferred from SR4 to RDR4
[Clearing conditions]
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 418 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
•
Writing of 0 to bit RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
Data is read from RDR4
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
5
ORER
0
R/(W)* Overrun Error
Description
Indicates that an overrun error occurs during reception
and then abnormal termination occurs. In transfer
mode, the output level of the SO4 pin is fixed to low
while this flag is set to 1. When the RE bit in SCR4 is
cleared to 0, the ORER flag is not affected and retains
its previous state. When RDR4 retains the receive data
it held before the overrun error occurred, and data
received after the error is lost. Reception cannot be
continued with the ORER flag set to 1, and
transmission cannot be continued either.
[Setting condition]
•
Next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition]
•
4
TEND
0
Writing of 0 to bit ORER after reading ORER = 1
R/(W)* Transmit End
Indicates that the TDRE flag has been set to 1 at
transmission of the last bit of transmit data.
[Setting condition]
•
TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of transmit
data
[Clearing conditions]
•
Writing of 0 to bit to TEND after reading TEND = 1
•
Data is written to TDR4 with an instruction
3
CKS3
1
R/W
Clock Source Select and Pin Function
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
Select the clock source to be supplied and set the
input/output for the SCK4 pin. The prescaler division
ratio and transfer clock cycle when an internal clock is
selected are shown in table 18.2. When an external
clock is selected, the external clock cycle should be at
least 4/φ.
Note:
*
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 419 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Table 18.2 shows a prescaler division ratio and transfer clock cycle.
Table 18.2 Prescaler Division Ratio and Transfer Clock Cycle (Internal Clock)
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
0
0
0
Transfer Clock Cycle
Function
CKS0
Prescaler
Division
Ratio
φ=
5 MHz
φ=
2.5 MHz
Clock
Source
Pin
Function
0
0
φ/1024
204.8 µs
409.6 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
0
1
φ/256
51.2 µs
102.4 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
0
1
0
φ/64
12.8 µs
25.6 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
0
1
1
φ/32
6.4 µs
12.8 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
1
0
0
φ/16
3.2 µs
6.4 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
1
0
1
φ/8
1.6 µs
3.2 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
1
1
0
φ/4
0.8 µs
1.6 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
0
1
1
1
φ/2

0.8 µs
Internal
clock
SCK4
output pin
1
0
0
0



I/O port (initial value)
1
0
0
1



I/O port
1
0
1
0



I/O port
1
0
1
1



I/O port
1
1
0
0



I/O port
1
1
0
1



I/O port
1
1
1
0



I/O port
1
1
1
1



Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 420 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
External
clock
SCK4 input
pin
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.3.3
Transmit Data Register 4 (TDR4)
TDR4 is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission. When the SCI4 detects that SR4
is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR4 to SR4 and starts serial transmission. If the
next transmit data is written to TDR4 while serial data in SR4 is being transmitted, continuous
serial transmission is possible. TDR4 can be read from or written to by the CPU at any time.
TDR4 is initialized to H'FF.
18.3.4
Receive Data Register 4 (RDR4)
RDR4 is an 8-bit register that stores receive data. When the SCI4 has received one byte of serial
data, it transfers the received serial data from SR4 to RDR4, where it is stored. Then receive
operation is completed. After this, SR4 is receive-enabled. RDR4 cannot be written to by the CPU.
RDR4 is initialized to H'00.
18.3.5
Shift Register 4 (SR4)
SR4 is a register that receives or transmits serial data. SR4 cannot be directly read from or written
to by the CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 421 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.4
Operation
The SCI4 is a serial communication interface that transmits and receives data in synchronization
with a clock pulse and is suitable for high-speed serial communications. The data transfer format
is fixed to 8-bit data. The internal clock or external clock can be selected as a clock source. An
overrun error during reception can be detected. The transmit and receive units are configured with
double buffering mechanism. Since the mechanism enables to write data during transmission and
to read data during reception, data is consecutively transmitted and received.
18.4.1
Clock
The eight internal clocks or an external clock can be selected as a transfer clock. When the
external clock is selected, the SCK4 pin is a clock input pin. When the internal clock is selected,
the SCK4 pin is a synchronous clock output pin. The synchronous clock is output eight pulses for
1-character transmission or reception. While neither transmission nor reception is being
performed, the signal is fixed high.
When the internal clock or external clock is not selected according to the combination of the
CKS3 to CKS0 bits in SCSR4, the SCK4 pin functions as an I/O port.
18.4.2
Data Transfer Format
Figure 18.2 shows the SCI4 transfer format.
SCK4
SO4/SI4
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 18.2 Data Transfer Format
In clock synchronous communication, data on the communication line is output from the falling
edge to the next falling edge of the synchronous clock. The data is guaranteed to be settled at the
rising edge of the synchronous clock. One character starts with the LSB and ends with the MSB.
After transmitting the MSB, the communication line retains the MSB level.
The SCI4 latches data at the rising edge of the synchronous clock on reception. The data transfer
format is fixed to 8-bit data. While transmission is stopped, the output level on the SO4 pin can be
changed by the SOL setting in SCR4.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 422 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.4.3
Data Transmission/Reception
Before data transmission and reception, clear the TE and RE bits in SCR4 to 0 and then initialize
as the following procedure of figure 18.3.
Note: Before changing operating modes or communication format, the TE and RE bits must be
cleared to 0. Clearing the TE bit to 0 sets the TDRE flag to 1. Note that clearing the RE bit
to 0 does not affect the RDRF or ORER flag and the contents of RDR4.
When the external clock is used, the clock must not be supplied during operation including
initialization.
Start of Initialization
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR4 to 0
Clear CKS3 to CKS0 bits in
SCSR4 to 0
Set TE and RE bits in SCR4 to 1.
Set RIE, TIE, and TEIE bits.
<Transmission/reception started>
Figure 18.3 Flowchart Example of SCI4 Initialization
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 423 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.4.4
Data Transmission
Figure 18.4 shows an example flowchart of data transmission. Data transmission should be
performed as the following procedure after the SCI4 initialization.
Initialization
[1]
[1]
Start transmission (TE = 1)
Read TDRE in SCSR4
[2]
[2]
[3]
TDRE = 1?
No
Pin SO4 functions as output pin for transmit
data
After reading SCSR4 and confirming TDRE
= 1, write transmit data in TDR4. Writing data
in TDR4 clears the TDRE bit to 0 automatically. At this time, the clock is output to start
data transmission.
To consecutively transmit data, read TDRE
= 1 to confirm that TDR4 is ready. After that,
write data in TDR4. Writing data in TDR4
clears the TDRE bit to 0 automatically.
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR4
TDRE bit cleared to 0 automatically
Data transferred from TDR4 to SR4
Start transmission by setting
TDRE bit to 1
Transmission will
continue?
Yes
[3]
No
Read TEND in SCSR4
TEND = 1?
No
Yes
TEI occurs (TEIE = 1)
Clear TE bit in SCR4 to 0
<Transmission completed>
Note: Hatching area indicates SCI internal operation.
Figure 18.4 Flowchart Example of Data Transmission
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 424 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
During transmission, the SCI4 operates as shown below.
1. The SCI4 sets the TE bit to 1 and clears the TDRE flag to 0 when transmit data is written to in
TDR4 to transmit data from TDR4 to SR4. After that, the SCI4 sets the TDRE flag to 1 to start
transmission. At this time, when the TIE bit in SCR4 is set to 1, a TXI is generated.
2. In clock output mode, the SCI4 outputs eight pulses of the synchronous clock. When the
external clock is selected, the SCI4 outputs data in synchronization with the input clock.
3. Serial data is output from the LSB (bit 0) to MSB (bit 7) on pin SO4. The SCI4 checks the
TDRE flag at the timing of outputting the MSB (bit 7).
4. When TDRE = 0, data in TDR4 is transmitted to SR4 and then the data of the next frame starts
to be transmitted. When TDRE = 1, the SCI4 sets the TEND bit to 1 and holds the output level
after transmitting the MSB (bit 7). At this time, when the TEIE bit in SCR4 is set to 1, a TEI is
generated.
5. After the transmission, the output level on pin SCK4 is fixed high.
Note: Transmission cannot be performed when the error flag (ORER) which indicates the data
reception status is set to 1. Before transmission, confirm that the ORER flag is cleared to
0.
Figure 18.5 shows the example of transmission operation.
Synchronous clock
Serial data
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
LSI operation
User operation
TXI
generated
TDRE
cleared
TXI
generated
TEI
generated
Data written
to TDR4
Figure 18.5 Transmit Operation Example
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 425 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.4.5
Data Reception
Figure 18.6 shows an example flowchart of data reception. Data reception should be performed as
the following procedure after the SCI4 initialization.
Initialization
[1]
[1]
Start reception (RE = 1)
Read ORER in SCSR4
ORER = 1?
[2]
Yes
[3]
Error
processing
No
Read RDRF in SCSR4
No
(Shown below)
[4]
Pin SI4 functions as input pin for receive
data
[2][3] When a reception error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SCSR4 and then clears the ORER flag
to 0 after executing the error processing. When
the ORER flag is set to 1, both transmission
and reception cannot be restarted.
[4]
After reading SCSR4 and confirming RDRF = 1,
read the receive data in RDR4. The RDRF flag
is automatically cleared to 0. Changes in the
RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can be notified by an RXI
interrupt.
[5]
To consecutively receive data, reading the RDRF
flag and RDR4 must be completed before
receiving the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame.
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read received data in RDR4
RDRF cleared to 0 automatically
Yes
Data transfer will
continue?
[5]
No
Clear RE bit in SCR4 to 0
<Reception completed>
Error processing
[3]
Overrun error processing
Clear ORER flag in SCSR4 to 0
<Completed>
Note: Hatching area indicates SCI internal operation.
Figure 18.6 Flowchart Example of Data Reception
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 426 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
During reception, the SCI4 operates as shown below.
1. The SCI4 initialization is performed in synchronization with the synchronous clock input or
output and starts reception.
2. The SCI4 stores received data from the LSB to MSB of SR4.
3. After reception, the SCI4 checks that RDRF = 0 and whether receive data is ready for being
transferred from SR4 to RDR4.
4. When confirms that an overrun error has not occurred, the RDRF bit is set to 1 and the
received data is stored in RDR4. At this time, when the RIE bit in SCR4 is set to 1, an RXI is
generated. When an overrun error is detected by checking, the ORER flag is set to 1. The
RDRF bit retains the previously set value. If the RIE bit in SCR4 is set to 1, an ERI is
generated.
5. An overrun error is detected when the next data reception is completed with the RDRF bit in
SCSR4 set to 1. The received data is not transferred from SR4 to RDR4.
Note: Reception cannot be performed when the error flag is set to 1. Before reception, confirm
that the ORER and RDRF flags are cleared to 0.
Figure 18.7 shows an operation example of reception.
Synchronous clock
Serial data
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 7
1 frame
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 frame
RDRF
ORER
LSI operation
User operation
RXI
generated
RDRF
cleared
Data read
from RDR4
RXI
generated
ERI generated
by overrun error
RDR4 has not
been read from
(RDRF = 1)
Overrun error
processing
Figure 18.7 Receive Operation Example
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 427 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.4.6
Simultaneous Data Transmission and Reception
Figure 18.8 shows an example flowchart of simultaneous data transmission and reception.
Simultaneous data transmission and reception should be performed as the following procedure
after the SCI4 initialization.
[1]
[1]
Initialization
Start transmission (TE = 1, RE = 1)
[2]
[2]
Read TDRE in SCSR4
TDRE = 1?
No
[3]
Yes
Write transmit data in TDR4
[4]
TDRE bit cleared to 0 automatically
Data transferred from TDR4 to SR4
[5]
Start transmission/reception
by setting TDRE bit to 1
Read ORER in SCSR4
ORER = 1?
Yes
Error
processing
No
Read RDRF in SCSR4
No
Pin SO4 functions as output pin for transmit
data and pin SI4 functions as input pin for
receive data. Simultaneous transmission and
reception is enabled.
After reading SCSR4 and confirming TDRE
= 1, write transmit data in TDR4. Writing data
in TDR4 clears the TDRE bit to 0 automatically. At this time, the clock is output to start
data transfer.
When a reception error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SCSR4 and then clear the ORER flag
to 0 after executing the error processing. When
the ORER flag is set to 1, both transmission
and reception cannot be restarted.
After reading SCSR4 and confirming RDRF = 1,
read receive data in RDR4 and clear the RDRF
flag to 0. An RXI interrupt can also be used to
confirm that the RDRF flag value has been changed
from 0 to 1.
To consecutively transmit and receive data, the
following operation must be completed: reading
the RDRF flag and reading RDR4 before receiving
the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame: confirming
that TDR4 is ready for writing by reading TDRE
= 1 before transmitting the MSB (bit 7) and writing
data to TDR4 to clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[3]
[4]
RDRF = 1?
Yes
Read received data in RDR4
RDRF cleared to 0 automatically
Data transfer will
continue?
Yes
[5]
No
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR4 to 0
Note: Hatching area indicates SCI internal operation.
<Transmission and reception completed>
Figure 18.8 Flowchart Example of Simultaneous Transmission and Reception
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 428 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Notes: 1. When switching from transmission to simultaneous data transmission and reception,
confirm that the SCI4 completes transmission and both the TDRE and TEND bits are
set to 1. After that, clear the TE bit to 0 and then set both the TE and RE bits to 1.
2. When switching from reception to simultaneous data transmission and reception,
confirm that the SCI4 completes reception and both the RDRF and ORER flags are
cleared to 0 after clearing the RE bit to 0. After that, set both the TE and RE bits to 1.
18.5
Interrupt Sources
The SCI4 has four interrupt sources: transmit end, transmit data empty, receive data full, and
receive error (overrun error).
Table 18.3 lists the descriptions of the interrupt sources.
Table 18.3 SCI4 Interrupt Sources
Abbreviation
Condition
Interrupt Source
RXI
RIE = 1
Receive data full (RDRF)
TXI
TIE = 1
Transmit data empty (TDRE)
TEI
TEIE = 1
Transmit end (TEND)
ERI
RIE = 1
Receive error (ORER)
The interrupt requests can be enabled/disabled by the TIE and RIE bits in SCR4.
When the TDRE flag in SCSR4 is set to 1, a TXI is generated. When the TEND bit in SCSR4 is
set to 1, a TEI is generated. These two interrupt requests are generated during transmission.
The TDRE flag in SCSR4 is initialized to 1. Therefore, if a TXI request is enabled by setting the
TIE bit in SCR4 to 1 before transmit data is transferred to TDR4, a TXI is generated even when
transmit data is not ready.
If transmit data is transferred to TDR4 in the interrupt handling routine, these interrupt requests
can be effectively used.
To avoid the occurrence of the interrupt requests (TXI and TEI), clear the corresponding interrupt
enable bits (TIE and TEIE) to 0 after transmit data is transferred to TDR4.
When the RDRF bit in SCSR4 is set to 1, an RXI is generated. When the ORER flag is set to 1, an
ERI is generated. These two interrupt requests are generated during reception.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 429 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
18.6
Usage Notes
When using the SCI4, keep in mind the following.
18.6.1
Relationship between Writing to TDR4 and TDRE
The TDRE flag in SCSR4 is a status flag that indicates that data to be transmitted has not been
stored in TDR4. When writing data to TDR4, the TDRE flag is automatically cleared to 0. The
TDRE flag is set to 1 when the SCI4 transfers data from TDR4 to SR4.
Data is written to TDR4 regardless of the TDRE flag value. However, if data is written to TDR4
with TDRE = 0, the previous data is lost unless the previous data has been transferred to SR4.
Accordingly, to ensure transmission, writing transmit data to TDR4 must be performed once after
confirming that the TDRE flag has been set to 1. (Do not write more than once.)
18.6.2
Receive Error Flag and Transmission
While the receive error flag (ORER) is set to 1, transmission cannot be started even if the TDRE
flag is cleared to 0. To start transmission, the ORER flag must be cleared to 0.
Note that the ORER flag cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
18.6.3
Relationship between Reading RDR4 and RDRF
The SCI4 always checks the RDRF flag status during reception. When the RDRF flag is cleared to
0 at the end of a frame, the reception is completed without error. When the RDRF flag is set to 1,
it indicates that an overrun has occurred.
Since reading RDR4 clears the RDRF flag to 0 automatically, if RDR4 is read twice or more, the
data is read with the RDRF flag cleared to 0. In this case, when the timing of the read operation
matches that of the data reception of the next frame, the read data may be the next frame data.
Figure 18.9 shows this operation.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 430 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Number of transfer
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 1
Data 2
RDRF
RDR4
(A)
RDR4 read
(B)
RDR4 read
At the timing of (A), data 1 is read.
At the timing of (B), data 2 is read.
Figure 18.9 Relationship between Reading RDR4 and RDRF
In this case, RDR4 must be read only once after confirming RDRF = 1. If reading RDR4 twice or
more, store the read data in the RAM, and use the stored data. In addition, there should be a
margin from the timing of reading RDR4 to completion of the next frame reception (reading
RDR4 should be completed before the bit 7 transfer).
18.6.4
SCK4 Output Waveform when Internal Clock of φ/2 is Selected
When the internal clock of φ/2 is selected by the CKS3 to CKS0 bits in SCSR4 and continuous
transmission or reception is performed, one pulse of high period is lengthened after eight pulses of
the clock has been output as shown in figure 18.10.
SCK4
SO4/SI4
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Bit5
Bit6
Bit7
Bit0
Bit1
Bit2
Figure 18.10 Transfer Format when Internal Clock of φ/2 is Selected
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 431 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 18 Serial Communication Interface 4 (SCI4)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 432 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
This LSI has an on-chip 14-bit pulse width modulator (PWM) with four channels. Connecting the
PWM to the low-pass filter enables the PWM to be used as a D/A converter. The standard PWM
or pulse-division type PWM can be selected by software. Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of
the 14-bit PWM.
19.1
Features
• Choice of four conversion periods
A conversion period of 131,072/φ with a minimum modulation width of 8/φ, a conversion
period of 65,536/φ with a minimum modulation width of 4/φ, a conversion period of 32,768/φ
with a minimum modulation width of 2/φ, or a conversion period of 16,384/φ with a minimum
modulation width of 1/φ, can be selected.
• Pulse division method for less ripple
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when not used (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
• The standard PWM or pulse-division type PWM can be selected by software.
φ/2
φ/4
φ/8
φ/16
Internal data bus
PWDR
PWM waveform
generator
PWCR
PWM
Pulse-division type waveform
Standard waveform
AEC
[Legend]
PWDR:
PWCR:
PWM data register
PWM control register
PWM waveform
generator
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 433 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
19.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 19.1 shows the 14-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 19.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
PWM1 output pin
PWM1
Output
Standard PWM/pulse-division type
PWM waveform output (PWM1)
PWM2 output pin
PWM2
Output
Standard PWM/pulse-division type
PWM waveform output (PWM2)
PWM3 output pin
PWM3
Output
Standard PWM/pulse-division type
PWM waveform output (PWM3)
PWM4 output pin
PWM4
Output
Standard PWM/pulse-division type
PWM waveform output (PWM4)
19.3
Register Descriptions
The 14-bit PWM has the following registers.
• PWM1 control register (PWCR1)
• PWM1 data register (PWDR1)
• PWM2 control register (PWCR2)
• PWM2 data register (PWDR2)
• PWM3 control register (PWCR3)
• PWM3 data register (PWDR3)
• PWM4 control register (PWCR4)
• PWM4 data register (PWDR4)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 434 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
19.3.1
PWM Control Register (PWCR)
PWCR selects the input clocks and selects whether the standard PWM or pulse-division type
PWM is used.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7 to 3

All 1

Description
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
PWCRm2
0
W
PWM Output Waveform Select
Selects whether the standard PWM waveform or pulsedivision type PWM waveform is output.
0: Pulse-division type PWM waveform is output
1: Standard PWM waveform is output
1
PWCRm1
0
W
Clock Select 1 and 0
0
PWCRm0
0
W
Select the clock supplied to the 14-bit PWM. These bits
are write-only bits and always read as 1.
00: The input clock is φ/2
 A conversion period is 16,384/φ, with a
minimum modulation width of 1/φ
01: The input clock is φ/4
 A conversion period is 32,768/φ, with a
minimum modulation width of 2/φ
10: The input clock is φ/8
 A conversion period is 65,536/φ, with a
minimum modulation width of 4/φ
11: The input clock is φ/16
 A conversion period is 131,072/φ, with a
minimum modulation width of 8/φ
Note:
m = 4 to 1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 435 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
19.3.2
PWM Data Register (PWDR)
PWDR is a 14-bit write-only register. PWDR indicates the high-level width in one pulse period of
the PWM waveform when the pulse-division type PWM is selected.
When data is written to the lower 14 bits of PWDR, the contents are latched in the PWM
waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated.
PWDR is initialized to 0 and always read as H'FFFF. Writing to this register should be in a word
unit.
19.4
Operation
19.4.1
Principle of Pulse-Division Type PWM
In pulse-division type PWM, the high-level and low-level periods of the ordinary PWM waveform
are divided and output alternately. This can reduce the ripples generated when the PWM module is
used as a D/A converter by connecting a low-pass filter to it.
Figure 19.2 shows an example of waveform when the pulse is divided into four. The 14-bit PWM
module divides the pulse into 64.
One coversion period
Ordinary PWM
(1)
Pulse-division
type PWM
(Example: When
divided into four)
(1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(4)
(7) (8)
(8)
Figure 19.2 Example of Waveform Produced by Pulse-Division Type PWM (Division by 4)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 436 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
19.4.2
Setting for Pulse-Division Type PWM Operation
When using the pulse-division type PWM, set the registers in this sequence:
1. In accord with the PWM channel to be used, set the PWM1, PWM2, PWM3, or PWM4 bit (the
former two bits are in PMR9 and the latter two in PFCR) to 1 to specify the P90/PWM1,
P91/PWM2, P92/IRQ4/PWM3, or P93/PWM4 pin, respectively, to function as a PWM output
pin.
2. Set PWCR to select a conversion period.
3. Set the data for output waveform in PWDR. When the data is written to PWDR, the contents
are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the PWM waveform generation data is
updated.
19.4.3
Operation of Pulse-Division Type PWM
One conversion period consists of 64 pulses, as shown in figure 19.3. The total high-level width
during this period (TH) corresponds to the data in PWDR. This relation is given in table 19.2.
One conversion period
tf1
tH1
tf2
tH2
tf63
tH3
tH63
tf64
tH64
TH = tH1 + tH2 + tH3 + . . . tH64
tf1 = tf2 = tf3
. . . = tH64
Figure 19.3 Waveform Output by PWM
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 437 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
Table 19.2 Relationship between PWCR, PWDR and Output Waveform
PWCRm Setting Value
Tfn
[tcyc]
Minimum
Variation
Width [tcyc]
PWCRm1
PWCRm0
One Conversion TH
[tcyc]
Period [tcyc]
0
0
16384
(PWDRm+64) × 1
256
1
0
1
32768
(PWDRm+64) × 2
512
2
1
0
65536
(PWDRm+64) × 4
1024
4
1
1
131072
(PWDRm+64) × 8
2048
8
Note:
19.4.4
m = 1 to 4, n = 1 to 64
Setting for Standard PWM Operation
When using the standard PWM, set the registers in this sequence:
1. According to the PWM channel used, set the PWM1, PWM2, PWM3, or PWM4 bit (the
former two bits are in PMR9 and the latter two in PFCR) to 1 to set the P90/PWM1,
P91/PWM2, P92/IRQ4/PWM3, or P93/PWM4 pin to function as a PWM pin.
2. Set PWCRm2 to 1 to select the standard PWM waveform. (m = 4 to 1)
3. Set the event counter PWM in the asynchronous event counter. For the setting method, see
section 15.4.4, Event Counter PWM Operation.
4. The PWM pin outputs the PWM waveform set by the event counter.
Note: When the standard waveform is used, 16-bit counter operation, 8-bit counter operation,
and IRQAEC operation for the asynchronous event counter are not available because the
PWM for the asynchronous event counter is used.
When the IECPWM signal of the asynchronous event counter goes high, ECH and ECL
increment. However, when the signal goes low, these counters stop. (For details, refer to
section 15.4, Operation.)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 438 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
19.4.5
PWM Operating States
The states of PWM module registers in each operating mode are shown in table 19.3.
Table 19.3 PWM Operating States
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
Subactive Subsleep Standby
Module
Standby
PWCRm
Reset
Functioning
Functioning Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
PWDRm
Reset
Functioning
Functioning Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Watch
Note: m = 4 to 1
19.5
Usage Notes
19.5.1
Timing of Writing to PWDR and Reflection in the PWM Waveform
If the PWDR register is rewritten while a PWM waveform is output, the operation will be as
follows depending on in which state of the PWM waveform the writing was performed.
• During low level output:
The new PWDR value is reflected from the next pulse.
• During high level output:
 When the new value increases the duty cycle
The new PWDR value is reflected immediately after writing.
 When the new value decreases the duty cycle
• If the high-level width of the pulse at the time of rewriting exceeds the high-level width
specified by the new PWDR value, a high level is output for a single pulse period.
• If the high-level width of the pulse at the time of rewriting does not exceed the highlevel width specified by the new PWDR value, the new value is reflected immediately
after writing.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 439 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 440 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
Section 20 A/D Converter
This LSI includes a successive approximation type 10-bit A/D converter that allows up to eight
analog input channels to be selected. The block diagram of the A/D converter is shown in figure
20.1.
20.1
Features
• 10-bit resolution
• Input channels: Eight channels
• High-speed conversion: 12.4 µs per channel (in 10-MHz operation)
• Sample and hold function
• Conversion start method
A/D conversion can be started by software and external trigger.
• Interrupt source
An A/D conversion end interrupt request can be generated.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when it is not in use (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 441 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
ADTRG
AMR
AN0
ADSR
AN1
AN2
Internal data bus
Multiplexer
AN3
AN4
AN5
AVCC
AN6
AN7
+
Comparator
Control logic
-
AVCC
Reference
voltage
AVSS
ADRR
AVSS
[Legend]
AMR:
ADSR:
ADRR:
IRRAD:
A/D mode register
A/D start register
A/D result register
A/D conversion end interrupt request flag
Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 442 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
IRRAD
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 20.1 shows the input pins used by the A/D converter.
Table 20.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Analog power supply pin
AVcc
Input
Power supply and reference voltage of
analog part
Analog ground pin
AVss
Input
Ground and reference voltage of analog
part
Analog input pin 0
AN0
Input
Analog input pins
Analog input pin 1
AN1
Input
Analog input pin 2
AN2
Input
Analog input pin 3
AN3
Input
Analog input pin 4
AN4
Input
Analog input pin 5
AN5
Input
Analog input pin 6
AN6
Input
Analog input pin 7
AN7
Input
External trigger input pin
ADTRG
Input
20.3
External trigger input that controls the
A/D conversion start.
Register Descriptions
The A/D converter has the following registers.
• A/D result register (ADRR)
• A/D mode register (AMR)
• A/D start register (ADSR)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 443 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.3.1
A/D Result Register (ADRR)
ADRR is a 16-bit read-only register that stores the results of A/D conversion. The data is stored in
the upper 10 bits of ADRR. ADRR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADRR value
during A/D conversion is undefined. After A/D conversion is completed, the conversion result is
stored as 10-bit data, and this data is retained until the next conversion operation starts. The initial
value of ADRR is undefined.
ADRR should be read in word size.
20.3.2
A/D Mode Register (AMR)
AMR sets the A/D conversion time, and selects the external trigger and analog input pins.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7

0

Description
Reserved
This bit is always read as 0 and cannot be modified.
6
TRGE
0
R/W
External Trigger Select
Enables or disables the A/D conversion start by the
external trigger input.
0: Disables the A/D conversion start by the external
trigger input.
1: Starts A/D conversion at the rising or falling edge of
the ADTRG pin
The edge of the ADTRG pin is selected by the
ADTRGNEG bit in IEGR.
5
CKS1
0
R/W
Clock Select
4
CKS0
0
R/W
Selects the clock source for A/D conversion.
00: φ/8 (conversion time = 124 states (max.)
(basic clock = φ))
01: φ/4 (conversion time = 62 states (max.)
(basic clock = φ))
10: φ/2 (conversion time = 31 states (max.)
(basic clock = φ))
11: Not selectable (use prohibited)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 444 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
3
CH3
0
R/W
Channel Select 3 to 0
2
CH2
0
R/W
Select the analog input channel.
1
CH1
0
R/W
00xx: No channel selected
0
CH0
0
R/W
0100: AN0
0101: AN1
0110: AN2
0111: AN3
1000: AN4
1001: AN5
1010: AN6
1011: AN7
11xx: Use prohibited
The channel selection should be made while the ADSF
bit is cleared to 0.
[Legend]
x: Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 445 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.3.3
A/D Start Register (ADSR)
ADSR starts and stops the A/D conversion.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ADSF
0
R/W
When this bit is set to 1, A/D conversion is started.
When conversion is completed, the converted data is
set in ADRR and at the same time this bit is cleared to
0. If this bit is written to 0, A/D conversion can be
forcibly terminated.
6
LADS
0
R/W
Resistor Ladder Select
0: Resistor ladder operational while the A/D converter
is in the wait state
1: Resistor ladder not operational while the A/D
converter is in the wait state
Resistor ladder is always halted in standby mode,
watch mode, module standby mode, or on reset.
5 to 0

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
20.4
Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximation with 10-bit resolution. When changing
the conversion time or analog input channel, in order to prevent incorrect operation, first clear the
bit ADSF to 0 in ADSR.
20.4.1
A/D Conversion
1.
A/D conversion is started from the selected channel when the ADSF bit in ADSR is set to 1,
according to software.
2.
When A/D conversion is completed, the result is transferred to the A/D result register.
3.
On completion of conversion, the IRRAD flag in IRR2 is set to 1. If the IENAD bit in IENR2
is set to 1 at this time, an A/D conversion end interrupt request is generated.
4.
The ADSF bit remains set to 1 during A/D conversion. When A/D conversion ends, the
ADSF bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the A/D converter enters the wait state.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 446 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.4.2
External Trigger Input Timing
The A/D converter can also start A/D conversion by input of an external trigger signal. External
trigger input is enabled at the ADTRG pin when the ADTSTCHG bit in PMRB is set to 1* and
TRGE bit in AMR is set to 1. Then when the input signal edge designated in the ADTRGNEG bit
in IEGR is detected at the ADTRG pin, the ADSF bit in ADSR will be set to 1, starting A/D
conversion.
Figure 20.2 shows the timing.
Note: * The ADTRG input pin is shared with the TEST pin. Therefore when the pin is used as
the ADTRG pin, reset should be cleared while the 0-fixed or 1-fixed signal is input to
the TEST pin. Then the ADTSTCHG bit should be set to 1 after the TEST signal is
fixed.
φ
ADTRG
(when
ADTRGNEG = 0)
ADSF
A/D conversion
Figure 20.2 External Trigger Input Timing
20.4.3
Operating States of A/D Converter
Table 20.2 shows the operating states of the A/D converter.
Table 20.2 Operating States of A/D Converter
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
AMR
Reset
ADSR
ADRR
Note:
*
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
Standby
Module
Standby
Functioning Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Reset
Functioning Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained*
Functioning Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained
Sleep
Undefined at a power-on reset.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 447 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.5
Example of Use
An example of how the A/D converter can be used is given below, using channel 1 (pin AN1) as
the analog input channel. Figure 20.3 shows the operation timing.
1.
Bits CH3 to CH0 in the A/D mode register (AMR) are set to 0101, making pin AN1 the
analog input channel. A/D interrupts are enabled by setting bit IENAD to 1, and A/D
conversion is started by setting bit ADSF to 1.
2.
When A/D conversion is completed, bit IRRAD is set to 1, and the A/D conversion result is
stored in ADRR. At the same time bit ADSF is cleared to 0, and the A/D converter goes to the
idle state.
3.
Bit IENAD = 1, so an A/D conversion end interrupt is requested.
4.
The A/D interrupt handling routine starts.
5.
The A/D conversion result is read and processed.
6.
The A/D interrupt handling routine ends.
If bit ADSF is set to 1 again afterward, A/D conversion starts and steps 2 through 6 take place.
Figures 20.4 and 20.5 show flowcharts of procedures for using the A/D converter.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 448 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Idle
A/D conversion starts
A/D conversion (1)
Set*
Set*
Note: * ↓ indicates instruction execution by software.
ADRR
Channel 1
(AN1)
operating
state
ADSF
IENAD
Interrupt
(IRRAD)
A/D conversion result (1)
↓ Read conversion result
Idle
A/D conversion (2)
Set*
↓ Read conversion result
A/D conversion result (2)
Idle
Section 20 A/D Converter
Figure 20.3 Example of A/D Conversion Operation
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 449 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
Start
Set A/D conversion speed and input channel
Disable A/D conversion end interrupt
Start A/D conversion
Read ADSR
No
ADSF = 0?
Yes
Read ADRR data
Yes
Perform A/D conversion?
No
End
Figure 20.4 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Polling by Software)
Start
Set A/D conversion speed and input channel
Enable A/D conversion end interrupt
Start A/D conversion
A/D conversion end
interrupt generated?
Yes
No
Clear IRRAD bit in IRR2 to 0
Read ADRR data
Yes
Perform A/D conversion?
No
End
Figure 20.5 Flowchart of Procedure for Using A/D Converter (Interrupts Used)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 450 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.6
A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions
This LSI's A/D conversion accuracy definitions are given below.
• Resolution
The number of A/D converter digital output codes
• Quantization error
The deviation inherent in the A/D converter, given by 1/2 LSB (see figure 20.6).
• Offset error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from the minimum voltage value 0000000000 to 0000000001
(see figure 20.7).
• Full-scale error
The deviation of the analog input voltage value from the ideal A/D conversion characteristic
when the digital output changes from 1111111110 to 1111111111 (see figure 20.7).
• Nonlinearity error
The error with respect to the ideal A/D conversion characteristics between zero voltage and
full-scale voltage. Does not include offset error, full-scale error, or quantization error.
• Absolute accuracy
The deviation between the digital value and the analog input value. Includes offset error, fullscale error, quantization error, and nonlinearity error.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 451 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
Digital output
Ideal A/D conversion
characteristic
111
110
101
100
011
010
Quantization error
001
000
1
8
2
8
3
8
4
8
5
8
6
8
7 FS
8
Analog
input voltage
Figure 20.6 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (1)
Digital output
Full-scale error
Ideal A/D conversion
characterist
Nonlinearity
error
Actual A/D conversion
characteristic
Offset error
FS
Analog
input voltage
Figure 20.7 A/D Conversion Accuracy Definitions (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 452 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.7
Usage Notes
20.7.1
Permissible Signal Source Impedance
This LSI's analog input is designed such that conversion accuracy is guaranteed for an input signal
for which the signal source impedance is 10 kΩ or less. This specification is provided to enable
the A/D converter's sample-and-hold circuit input capacitance to be charged within the sampling
time; if the sensor output impedance exceeds 10 kΩ, charging may be insufficient and it may not
be possible to guarantee A/D conversion accuracy.
As a countermeasure, with a large capacitance provided externally, the input load will essentially
comprise only the internal input resistance of 10 kΩ, and the signal source impedance is ignored.
However, as a low-pass filter effect is obtained in this case, it may not be possible to follow an
analog signal with a large differential coefficient (e.g., 5 mV/µs or greater) (see figure 20.8).
When converting a high-speed analog signal, a low-impedance buffer should be inserted.
20.7.2
Influences on Absolute Accuracy
Adding capacitance results in coupling with GND, and therefore noise in GND may adversely
affect absolute accuracy. Be sure to make the connection to an electrically stable GND.
Care is also required to ensure that filter circuits do not interfere with digital signals or act as
antennas on the mounting board.
This LSI
Sensor output
impedance
up to 10 kΩ
A/D converter
equivalent circuit
10 kΩ
Sensor input
Low-pass
filter C
up to 0.1 µF
Cin =
15 pF
48 pF
Figure 20.8 Example of Analog Input Circuit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 453 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 20 A/D Converter
20.7.3
Other Usage Notes
1.
ADRR should be read only when the ADSF bit in ADSR is cleared to 0.
2.
Changing the digital input signal at an adjacent pin during A/D conversion may adversely
affect conversion accuracy.
3.
When A/D conversion is started after clearing module standby mode, wait for 10φ clock
cycles before starting A/D conversion.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 454 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
This LSI has an on-chip segment-type LCD control circuit, LCD driver, and power supply circuit,
enabling it to directly drive an LCD panel.
21.1
Features
• Display capacity
Duty Cycle
Internal Driver
Static
40 SEG
1/2
40 SEG
1/3
40 SEG
1/4
40 SEG
• LCD RAM capacity
8 bits × 20 bytes (160 bits)
• Word access to LCD RAM
• The segment output pins can be used as ports.
SEG40 to SEG1 pins can be used as ports in groups of four.
• Common output pins not used because of the duty cycle can be used for common doublebuffering (parallel connection).
With 1/2 duty, parallel connection of COM1 to COM2, and of COM3 to COM4, can be used
In static mode, parallel connection of COM1 to COM2, COM3, and COM4 can be used
• Choice of 11 frame frequencies
• A or B waveform selectable by software
• On-chip power supply split-resistor
• Display possible in operating modes other than standby mode
• On-chip 3-V constant-voltage power supply circuit
This power circuit can constantly supply 3 V to LCD drive power supply without using Vcc
voltage.
• Output of the 3-V constant-voltage power supply circuit adjustable
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when it is not in use (for details, see section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 455 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the LCD controller/driver.
Vcc
LCD drive
power supply
(On-chip 3-V
constant-voltage
power supply circuit)
C1
C2
V1
V2
V3
Vss
φ/2 to φ/256
Common
data latch
φw, φw/2, and φw/4
Common
driver
LTRMR
LPCR
Internal data bus
COM4
SEG40
SEG39
SEG38
SEG37
SEG36
BGRMR
LCR
LCR2
Display timing generator
40-bit
shift
register
Segment
driver
LCD RAM
20 bytes
SEG1
SEGn (n = 1 to 40)
[Legend]
LPCR: LCD port control register
LCD control register
LCR:
LCR2: LCD control register 2
LTRMR: LCD trimming register
BGRMR: BGR control register
Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of LCD Controller/Driver
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 456 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
COM1
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.2
Input/Output Pins
Table 21.1 shows the LCD controller/driver pin configuration.
Table 21.1 Pin Configuration
Name
Symbol
Segment output
pins
SEG40 to SEG1 Output
Common output
pins
COM4 to COM1 Output
LCD power supply
pins
V1, V2, V3
—
Used when a bypass capacitor is connected
externally, and when an external power supply
circuit is used
LCD step-up
capacitance pins
C1, C2
—
Capacitance pins for stepping up the LCD drive
power supply
21.3
I/O
Function
LCD segment drive pins
All pins are multiplexed as port pins (setting
programmable)
LCD common drive pins
Pins can be used in parallel with static or
1/2 duty
Register Descriptions
The LCD controller/driver has the following registers.
• LCD port control register (LPCR)
• LCD control register (LCR)
• LCD control register 2 (LCR2)
• LCD trimming register (LTRMR)
• BGR control register (BGRMR)
• LCDRAM
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 457 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.3.1
LCD Port Control Register (LPCR)
LPCR selects the duty cycle, LCD driver, and pin functions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
DTS1
0
R/W
Duty Cycle Select 1 and 0
6
DTS0
0
R/W
Common Function Select
5
CMX
0
R/W
The combination of DTS1 and DTS0 selects static, 1/2,
1/3, or 1/4 duty. CMX specifies whether or not the
same waveform is to be output from multiple pins to
increase the common drive power when not all
common pins are used due to the selected duty.
For details, see table 21.2.
4
—
1
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
3
SGS3
0
R/W
Segment Driver Select 3 to 0
2
SGS2
0
R/W
Select the segment drivers to be used.
1
SGS1
0
R/W
For details, see table 21.3.
0
SGS0
0
R/W
Table 21.2 Duty Cycle and Common Function Selection
Bit 7:
DTS1
Bit 6:
DTS0
Bit 5:
CMX
Duty Cycle
Common Drivers
Notes
0
0
0
Static
COM1
Do not use COM4, COM3, and
COM2
COM4 to COM1
COM4, COM3, and COM2
output the same waveform as
COM1
COM2 to COM1
Do not use COM4 and COM3
COM4 to COM1
COM4 outputs the same
waveform as COM3, and COM2
outputs the same waveform as
COM1
1/3 duty
COM3 to COM1
Do not use COM4
COM4 to COM1
Do not use COM4
1/4 duty
COM4 to COM1
—
1
1
0
1/2 duty
1
1
0
0
1
x
1
[Legend]
x:
Don't care
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 458 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Table 21.3 Segment Driver Selection
Function of Pins SEG40 to SEG1
Bit 3: Bit 2: Bit 1: Bit 0: SEG40
SGS3 SGS2 SGS1 SGS0 to
SEG37
SEG36
to
SEG33
SEG32
to
SEG29
SEG28
to
SEG25
SEG24
to
SEG21
SEG20
to
SEG17
SEG16
to
SEG13
SEG12
to
SEG9
SEG8
to
SEG5
SEG4
to
SEG1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
1
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
0
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
1
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
SEG
0
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
1
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
0
Port
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
1
Port
Port
Port
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
0
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
1
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
0
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
1
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
Port
0
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
Port
Port
1
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
0
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
1
SEG
SEG
SEG
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Port
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 459 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.3.2
LCD Control Register (LCR)
LCR controls LCD drive power supply and display data, and selects the frame frequency.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
—
1
—
Description
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
6
PSW
0
R/W
LCD Drive Power Supply Control
Can be used to turn off the LCD drive power supply when
LCD display is not required in power-down mode, or when
an external power supply is used. When the ACT bit is
cleared to 0 or in standby mode, the LCD drive power
supply is turned off regardless of the setting of this bit.
0: LCD drive power supply is turned off
1: LCD drive power supply is turned on
5
ACT
0
R/W
Display Function Activate
Specifies whether or not the LCD controller/driver is used.
Clearing this bit to 0 halts operation of the LCD
controller/driver. The LCD drive power supply is also
turned off, regardless of the setting of the PSW bit.
However, register contents are retained.
0: LCD controller/driver halts
1: LCD controller/driver operates
4
DISP
0
R/W
Display Data Control
Specifies whether the LCD RAM contents are displayed or
blank data is displayed regardless of the LCD RAM
contents.
0: Blank data is displayed
1: LCD RAM data is displayed
3
CKS3
0
R/W
Frame Frequency Select 3 to 0
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
Select the operating clock and the frame frequency.
However, in subactive mode, watch mode, and subsleep
mode, the system clock (φ) is halted. Therefore display
operations are not performed if one of the clocks from φ/2
to φ/256 is selected. If LCD display is required in these
modes, φW, φW/2, or φW/4 must be selected as the operating
clock.
For details, see table 21.4.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 460 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Table 21.4 Frame Frequency Selection
Frame Frequency*
Bit 3:
CKS3
Bit 2:
CKS2
Bit 1:
CKS1
Bit 0:
CKS0
Operating Clock
φ = 2 MHz
0
x
0
0
φW
128 Hz*
1
φW/2
64 Hz*
2
64 Hz*
2
1
x
φW/4
32 Hz*
2
32 Hz*
2
0
0
φ/2
—
244 Hz
1
φ/4
977 Hz
122 Hz
0
φ/8
488 Hz
61 Hz
1
φ/16
244 Hz
30.5 Hz
0
φ/32
122 Hz
—
1
φ/64
61 Hz
—
0
φ/128
30.5 Hz
—
1
φ/256
—
—
1
0
1
1
0
1
2
1
φ = 250 kHz*
128 Hz*
3
2
[Legend]
x:
Don't care
Notes: 1. When 1/3 duty is selected, the frame frequency is 4/3 times the value shown.
2. This is the frame frequency when φW = 32.768 kHz.
3. This is the frame frequency in active (medium-speed, φOSC/8) mode when φOSC = 2 MHz.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 461 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.3.3
LCD Control Register 2 (LCR2)
LCR2 controls switching between the A waveform and B waveform, selection of the step-up clock
for the 3-V constant-voltage circuit, connection with the LCD power-supply split resistor, and
turning on or off 3-V constant-voltage power supply.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
LCDAB
0
R/W
A Waveform/B Waveform Switching Control
Specifies whether the A waveform or B waveform is used
as the LCD drive waveform.
0: Drive using A waveform
1: Drive using B waveform
6
HCKS
0
R/W
Step-Up Clock Selection for 3-V Constant-Voltage Power
Supply Circuit
Selects a step-up clock for use in the 3-V constantvoltage power supply circuit. The step-up clock is
obtained by dividing the clock selected by the CKS3 to
CKS0 bits in LCR into 4 or 8.
0: Divided into 4
1: Divided into 8
5
CHG
0
R/W
Connection Control of LCD Power-Supply Split Resistor
Selects whether an LCD power-supply split resistor is
disconnected or connected from or to LCD drive power
supply.
0: Disconnected
1: Connected
4
SUPS
0
R/W
3-V Constant-Voltage Power Supply Control
Can be used to turn off the 3-V constant-voltage power
supply when LCD display is not required in power-down
mode, or when an external power supply is used. When
the BGRSTPN bit in BGRMR is cleared to 0 or in standby
mode, the 3-V constant-voltage power supply is turned off
regardless of the setting of this bit.
0: 3-V constant-voltage power supply is turned off
1: 3-V constant-voltage power supply is turned on
3 to 0
—
1
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 462 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.3.4
LCD Trimming Register (LTRMR)
LTRMR adjusts the 3-V constant-voltage used for LCD drive power supply and the output voltage
of 3-V constant-voltage power supply circuit.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TRM3
0
R/W
6
TRM2
0
R/W
Output Voltage Adjustment of 3-V Constant-Voltage
1 2
Power Supply Circuit* *
5
TRM1
0
R/W
4
TRM0
0
R/W
By adjusting reference voltage that generates 3-V
constant voltage, LCD drive power supply can be set to
3 V. Following values* indicate the voltage of the V1
pin. Set this register so that the voltage on the V1 pin
should be 3 V.
0000: ±0 V
1000: 0.48 V
0001: -0.06 V 1001: 0.42 V
0010: -0.12 V 1010: 0.36 V
0011: -0.15 V 1011: 0.30 V
0100: -0.21 V 1100: 0.24 V
0101: -0.24 V 1101: 0.18 V
0110: -0.30 V 1110: 0.12 V
0111: -0.33 V 1111: 0.06 V
3
—
1
—
Reserved
This bit is always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 463 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
CTRM2
0
R/W
1
CTRM1
0
R/W
Variable Voltage Adjustment of 3-V Constant-Voltage
1 2
Power Supply* *
0
CTRM0
0
R/W
The LCD drive power supply adjusted by the TRM bits
can further be adjusted.
If an LCD panel does not function normally due to a
temperature in which LCD is used, set these bits to
adjust it.
000: ±0 V
001: 0.09 V
010: 0.18 V
011: 0.27 V
100: -0.36 V
101: -0.27 V
110: -0.18 V
111: -0.09 V
Note:
1. These are approximate values and are not guaranteed. That is, the values are for
reference only.
2. Setting of LTRMR
The standard of the voltage after it trims becomes the following.
V1 Initial state output voltage
:A
LTRMR Register TRM3 to TRM0
:B
LTRMR Register CTRM3 to CTRM0 : C
V1 Output voltage = A + B + C
V2 Output voltage = (A + B + C)*2/3
V3 Output voltage = (A + B + C)/3
Please set A, B, and C so that the V1 voltage may become 3-V.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 464 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.3.5
BGR Control Register (BGRMR)
BGRMR controls whether the band-gap reference circuit (BGR) which generates the reference
voltage of the 3-V constant-voltage power supply operates or halts, and adjusts the reference
voltage.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
BGRSTPN
0
R/W
Description
Band-Gap Reference Circuit Control
Controls whether the band-gap reference circuit
operates or halts.
0: Band-gap reference circuit halts
1: Band-gap reference circuit operates
6 to 3

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be
modified.
2
BTRM2
0
R/W
BGR Output Voltage Trimming
1
BTRM1
0
R/W
BGR Output Voltage Trimming
0
BTRM0
0
R/W
Adjust approximately 1.2-V BGR output voltage.
000: ±0 V
001: +0.14 V
010: +0.09 V
011: +0.04 V
100: −0.04 V
101: −0.09 V
110: −0.14 V
111: −0.18 V
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 465 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.4
Operation
21.4.1
Settings up to LCD Display
To perform LCD display, the hardware and software related items described below must first be
determined.
(1)
Hardware Settings
(a)
Using 1/2 duty
When 1/2 duty is used, interconnect pins V2 and V3 as shown in figure 21.2.
VCC
V1
V2
V3
VSS
Figure 21.2 Handling of LCD Drive Power Supply when Using 1/2 Duty
(b)
Large-Panel Display
As the impedance of the on-chip power supply split-resistor is large, it may not be suitable for
driving a panel which requires a current more than the current value calculated by the on-chip
power supply split-resistor and voltage of the LCD power supply. If the display lacks sharpness
when using a large panel, refer to section 21.4.5, Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply and Fine
Adjustment. When static or 1/2 duty is selected, the common output drive capability can be
increased. Set CMX to 1 when selecting the duty cycle. In this mode, with a static duty cycle pins
COM4 to COM1 output the same waveform, and with 1/2 duty the COM1 waveform is output
from pins COM2 and COM1, and the COM2 waveform is output from pins COM4 and COM3.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 466 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
(c)
LCD Drive Power Supply Setting
With this LSI, there are two ways of providing LCD power: by using the on-chip power supply
circuit, or by using an external power supply circuit.
When an external power supply circuit is used for the LCD drive power supply, connect the
external power supply to the V1 pin.
(2)
Software Settings
(a)
Duty Selection
Any of four duty cycles—static, 1/2 duty, 1/3 duty, or 1/4 duty—can be selected with bits DTS1
and DTS0.
(b)
Segment Driver Selection
The segment drivers to be used can be selected with bits SGS3 to SGS0.
(c)
Frame Frequency Selection
The frame frequency can be selected by setting bits CKS3 to CKS0. The frame frequency should
be selected in accordance with the LCD panel specification. For the clock selection method in
watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleep mode, see section 21.4.4, Operation in Power-Down
Modes.
(d)
A or B Waveform Selection
Either the A or B waveform can be selected as the LCD waveform to be used by means of
LCDAB.
(e)
LCD Drive Power Supply Selection
When an external power supply circuit is used, turn the LCD drive power supply off with the PSW
bit.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 467 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.4.2
Relationship between LCD RAM and Display
The relationship between the LCD RAM and the display segments differs according to the duty
cycle. LCD RAM maps for the different duty cycles are shown in figures 21.3 to 21.6.
After setting the registers required for display, data is written to the part corresponding to the duty
using the same kind of instruction as for ordinary RAM, and display is started automatically when
turned on. Word- or byte-access instructions can be used for RAM setting.
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
H'FFF360
SEG2
SEG2
SEG2
SEG2
SEG1
SEG1
SEG1
SEG1
H'FFF373
SEG40
SEG40
SEG40
SEG40
SEG39
SEG39
SEG39
SEG39
COM4
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM4
COM3
COM2
COM1
Figure 21.3 LCD RAM Map (1/4 Duty)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 468 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
H'FFF360
SEG2
SEG2
H'FFF373
SEG40
COM3
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SEG2
SEG1
SEG1
SEG1
SEG40
SEG40
SEG39
SEG39
SEG39
COM2
COM1
COM3
COM2
COM1
Space not used for display
Figure 21.4 LCD RAM Map (1/3 Duty)
H'FFF360
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SEG4
SEG4
SEG3
SEG3
SEG2
SEG2
SEG1
SEG1
Display space
H'FFF369
SEG40
SEG40 SEG39
SEG39
SEG38
SEG38
SEG37
SEG37
Space not used
for display
H'FFF373
COM2
COM1
COM2
COM1
COM2
COM1
COM2
COM1
Figure 21.5 LCD RAM Map (1/2 Duty)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 469 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
H'FFF360
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
SEG8
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
Display space
SEG40
H'FFF364
SEG39
SEG38
SEG37
SEG36
SEG35
SEG34
SEG33
Space not used
for display
H'FFF373
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Figure 21.6 LCD RAM Map (Static Mode)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 470 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Figure 21.7 shows output waveforms for each duty cycle (A waveform).
1 frame
1 frame
M
M
Data
Data
COM1
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM1
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM2
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM2
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM3
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM3
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM4
V1
V2
V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2
V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2
V3
VSS
(b) Waveform with 1/3 duty
(a) Waveform with 1/4 duty
1 frame
1 frame
M
M
Data
Data
COM1
V1
V2,V3
VSS
COM1
COM2
V1
V2,V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2,V3
VSS
SEGn
(c) Waveform with 1/2 duty
V1
VSS
V1
VSS
(d) Waveform with static output
M: LCD alternation signal
Figure 21.7 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (A Waveform)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 471 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Figure 21.8 shows output waveforms for each duty cycle (B waveform).
1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame
1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame
M
M
Data
Data
COM1
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM1
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM2
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM2
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM3
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM3
V1
V2
V3
VSS
COM4
V1
V2
V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2
V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2
V3
VSS
(a) Waveform with 1/4 duty
(b) Waveform with 1/3 duty
1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame
1 frame 1 frame 1 frame 1 frame
M
M
Data
Data
COM1
COM2
V1
V2,V3
VSS
COM1
V1
V2,V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
V2,V3
VSS
SEGn
V1
VSS
V1
VSS
(d) Waveform with static output
M: LCD alternation signal
(c) Waveform with 1/2 duty
Figure 21.8 Output Waveforms for Each Duty Cycle (B Waveform)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 472 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Table 21.5 shows output levels.
Table 21.5 Output Levels
Static
1/2 duty
1/3 duty
1/4 duty
M:
21.4.3
Data
0
0
1
1
M
0
1
0
1
Common output
V1
VSS
V1
VSS
Segment output
V1
VSS
VSS
V1
Common output
V2, V3
V2, V3
V1
VSS
Segment output
V1
VSS
VSS
V1
Common output
V3
V2
V1
VSS
Segment output
V2
V3
VSS
V1
Common output
V3
V2
V1
VSS
Segment output
V2
V3
VSS
V1
LCD alternation signal
3-V Constant-Voltage Power Supply Circuit
This LSI incorporates a 3-V constant-voltage power supply circuit consisting of a band gap
reference circuit (BGR), a triple step-up circuit, etc. This allows the 3 V constant voltage to drive
LCD driver independently of Vcc.
Before activating a step-up circuit, operate the LCD controller/driver, and set the duty cycle, pin
function, display data, frame frequencies, etc. Insert a capacitance of 0.1 µF between the C1 pin
and C2 pin, and connect a capacitance of 0.1 µF to each of V1, V2, and V3 pins. (See figure 21.9.)
After this setting, setting the BGRSTPN bit in the BGR control register (BGRMR) to 1 activates
the band gap reference circuit, generating 1 V constant voltage (VLCD3) at the V3 pin. Furthermore,
selecting the step-up circuit clock of the LCD control register 2 (LCR2) and setting the SUPS bit
to 1 activates the triple step-up circuit, generating 2 V constant voltage, twice VLCD3, at the V2 pin,
and generating 3 V constant voltage, triple VLCD3, at the V1 pin.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 473 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Notes: 1. Power supply might be insufficient when a large panel is driven. In this case, use Vcc
for power supply, or use an external power supply circuit.
2. Do not use a polarized capacitance such as an electrolytic capacitor for connection
between the C1 pin and C2 pin.
3. A 3-V constant-voltage power supply circuit is turned on by SUSP bit regardless of the
setting of the PSW bit.
4. The step-up circuit output voltage in the initial state is different in an individual device
according to the manufacturing difference.
Please set and adjust LCD trimming register (LTRMR) of each individual device.
C1
C
C2
V1
V2
V3
C
C
C
C: 0.1 µF
Figure 21.9 Capacitance Connection when Using 3-V Constant-Voltage
Power Supply Circuit
21.4.4
Operation in Power-Down Modes
In this LSI, the LCD controller/driver can be operated even in the power-down modes. The
operating state of the LCD controller/driver in the power-down modes is summarized in table
21.6.
In subactive mode, watch mode, and subsleep mode, the system clock oscillator stops, and
therefore, unless φW, φW/2, or φW/4 has been selected by bits CKS3 to CKS0, the clock will not be
supplied and display will halt. The subclock can be turned on or off by setting the 32KSTOP bit in
the SUB32k control register (SUB32CR). When it is turned off, display will halt. Since there is a
possibility that a direct current will be applied to the LCD panel in this case, it is essential to
ensure that the subclock is turned on and φW, φW/2, or φW/4 is selected.
In active (medium-speed) mode, the system clock is switched, and therefore bits CKS3 to CKS0
must be modified to ensure that the frame frequency does not change.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 474 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Table 21.6 Power-Down Modes and Display Operation
Module
Mode
Clock
Display
operation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
φ
Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted
φw
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning*
ACT = 0 Halted
ACT = 1 Halted
5
Halted
Displayed
Halted
Displayed
Halted
3 5
Displayed* *
Subactive
Subsleep
Standby
Standby
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted*
5
5
4
Functioning* Functioning* Halted*
1
Halted*
Halted
2
Halted
2
Halted
Halted
3 5
Displayed* *
Halted*
3 5
Displayed* *
Halted*
4
Notes: 1. The subclock oscillator does not stop, but clock supply is halted.
2. The LCD drive power supply is turned off regardless of the setting of the PSW bit.
3. Display operation is performed only if φW, φW/2, or φW/4 is selected as the operating
clock.
4. The clock supplied to the LCD stops.
5. When the 32KSTOP bit in SUB32CR is set to 1, the subclock φW halts and display
operation halts.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 475 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.4.5
Boosting LCD Drive Power Supply and Fine Adjustment
When a large panel is driven, the on-chip power supply capacity may be insufficient. In this case,
the power supply impedance must be reduced. This can be done by connecting bypass capacitors
of around 0.1 to 0.3 µF to pins V1 to V3, as shown in figure 21.10, or by adding a split resistor
externally. The voltage on the V1 pin can further be adjusted by connecting a variable resistor
(VR) between the VCC and V1 pins.
VCC
VR
V1
R
This LSI
R = several kΩ to
several MΩ
V2
R
C = 0.1 to 0.3 µF
V3
R
VSS
Figure 21.10 Connection of External Split Resistor
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 476 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
21.5
Usage Notes
21.5.1
Pin Handling when LCD Controller/Driver is not Used
(1)
V1, V2, and V3 Pins
Connect these pins to the GND, though the CHG bit in LCR2 should not be changed from the
initial value of 0. (The split resistor should be left disconnected.)
(2)
C1 and C2 Pins
These pins should be left open.
21.5.2
Pin Handling when 3-V Constant-Voltage Power Supply Circuit is not Used
The C1 and C2 pins should be left open.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 477 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 21 LCD Controller/Driver
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 478 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
2
Section 22 I C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
2
2
The I C bus interface 2 conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I C bus (inter-IC bus)
2
interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I C bus differs partly from the
2
Philips configuration, however. Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the I C bus interface 2.
Figure 22.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits.
22.1
Features
• Selection of I C format or clock synchronous serial format
2
• Continuous transmission/reception
Since the shift register, transmit data register, and receive data register are independent from
each other, the continuous transmission/reception can be performed.
• Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby mode independently
when not used (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
2
I C bus format
• Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode
• Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving
• Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting
• Bit synchronization/wait function
In master mode, the state of SCL is monitored per bit, and the timing is synchronized
automatically.
If transmission/reception is not yet possible, set the SCL to low until preparations are
completed.
• Six interrupt sources
Transmit data empty (including slave-address match), transmit end, receive data full (including
slave-address match), arbitration lost, NACK detection, and stop condition detection
• Direct bus drive
Two pins, SCL and SDA pins, function as CMOS outputs in normal operation (when the
port/serial function is selected) and NMOS outputs when the bus drive function is selected.
Clock synchronous format
• Four interrupt sources
Transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and overrun error
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 479 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Transfer clock
generation
circuit
SCL
Transmission/
reception
control circuit
Output
control
ICCR1
ICCR2
ICMR
Internal data bus
Noise canceler
ICDRT
SDA
Output
control
SAR
ICDRS
Address
comparator
Noise canceler
ICDRR
Bus state
decision circuit
Arbitration
decision circuit
[Legend]
ICCR1:
ICCR2:
ICMR:
ICSR:
ICIER:
ICDRT:
ICDRR:
ICDRS:
SAR:
I2C bus control register 1
I2C bus control register 2
I2C bus mode register
I2C bus status register
I2C bus interrupt enable register
I2C bus transmit data register
I2C bus receive data register
I2C bus shift register
Slave address register
ICSR
ICIER
Interrupt
generator
2
Figure 22.1 Block Diagram of I C Bus Interface 2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 480 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Interrupt request
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Vcc
SCL in
Vcc
SCL
SCL
SDA
SDA
SDA in
SCL
SDA
SDA out
SCL in
(Master)
SCL out
SCL
SDA
SCL out
SCL in
SCL out
SDA in
SDA in
SDA out
SDA out
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
Figure 22.2 External Circuit Connections of I/O Pins
22.2
Input/Output Pins
2
Table 22.1 shows the input/output pins of the I C bus interface 2.
Table 22.1 Pin Configuration
Pin Name
Abbreviation
I/O
Function
Serial clock pin
SCL
I/O
IIC serial clock input/output
Serial data pin
SDA
I/O
IIC serial data input/output
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 481 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3
Register Descriptions
2
The I C bus interface 2 has the following registers.
• I C bus control register 1 (ICCR1)
2
• I C bus control register 2 (ICCR2)
2
• I C bus mode register (ICMR)
2
• I C bus interrupt enable register (ICIER)
2
• I C bus status register (ICSR)
2
• Slave address register (SAR)
• I C bus transmit data register (ICDRT)
2
• I C bus receive data register (ICDRR)
2
• I C bus shift register (ICDRS)
2
22.3.1
2
I C Bus Control Register 1 (ICCR1)
2
ICCR1 enables or disables the I C bus interface 2, controls transmission or reception, and selects
master or slave mode, transmission or reception, and transfer clock frequency in master mode.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
ICE
0
R/W
I C Bus Interface 2 Enable
2
0: This module is halted. (SCL and SDA pins are set to
the port/serial function.)
1: This bit is enabled for transfer operations. (SCL and
SDA pins are bus drive state.)
6
RCVD
0
R/W
Reception Disable
This bit enables or disables the next operation when
TRS is 0 and ICDRR is read.
0: Enables next reception
1: Disables next reception
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 482 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
5
MST
0
R/W
Master/Slave Select
4
TRS
0
R/W
Transmit/Receive Select
2
In master mode with the I C bus format, when
arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by
hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode.
Modification of the TRS bit should be made between
transfer frames.
After data reception has been started in slave receive
mode, when the first seven bits of the receive data
agree with the slave address that is set to SAR and the
eighth bit is 1, TRS is automatically set to 1. If an
overrun error occurs in master mode with the clock
synchronous serial format, MST is cleared to 0 and
slave receive mode is entered.
Operating modes are described below according to
MST and TRS combination. When clock synchronous
serial format is selected and MST is 1, clock is output.
00: Slave receive mode
01: Slave transmit mode
10: Master receive mode
11: Master transmit mode
3
CKS3
0
R/W
Transfer Clock Select 3 to 0
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
In master mode, set these bits according to the
necessary transfer rate (see table 22.2, Transfer Rate).
In slave mode, these bits are used to secure the data
setup time in transmission mode. When CKS3 = 0, the
data setup time is 10 tcyc and when CKS3 = 1, the data
setup time is 20 tcyc.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 483 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Table 22.2 Transfer Rate
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
Clock
φ = 2 MHz
φ = 5 MHz
φ = 10 MHz
0
0
0
0
φ/28
71.4 kHz
179 kHz
357 kHz
1
φ/40
50.0 kHz
125 kHz
250 kHz
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
φ/48
41.7 kHz
104 kHz
208 kHz
1
φ/64
31.3 kHz
78.1 kHz
156 kHz
0
φ/80
25.0 kHz
62.5 kHz
125 kHz
1
φ/100
20.0 kHz
50.0 kHz
100 kHz
0
φ/112
17.9 kHz
44.6 kHz
89.3 kHz
1
φ/128
15.6 kHz
39.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
0
φ/56
35.7 kHz
89.3 kHz
179 kHz
1
φ/80
25.0 kHz
62.5 kHz
125 kHz
0
φ/96
20.8 kHz
52.1 kHz
104 kHz
1
φ/128
15.6 kHz
39.1 kHz
78.1 kHz
0
φ/160
12.5 kHz
31.3 kHz
62.5 kHz
1
φ/200
10.0 kHz
25.0 kHz
50.0 kHz
0
φ/224
8.9 kHz
22.3 kHz
44.6 kHz
1
φ/256
7.8 kHz
19.5 kHz
39.1 kHz
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 484 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Transfer Rate
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3.2
2
I C Bus Control Register 2 (ICCR2)
ICCR1 issues start/stop conditions, handles the SDA pin, monitors the SCL pin, and controls reset
2
in the control part of the I C bus interface 2.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
BBSY
0
R/W
Bus Busy
2
This bit enables to confirm whether the I C bus is
occupied or released and to issue start/stop conditions
in master mode. This bit has no functional role when the
clock synchronous serial format is selected. When the
2
I C bus format is selected, this bit is set to 1 when the
SDA level changes from high to low under the condition
of SCL = high, assuming that the start condition has
been issued. This bit is cleared to 0 when the SDA level
changes from low to high under the condition of SCL =
high, assuming that the stop condition has been issued.
Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP to issue a start condition.
The same procedure also applies to re-transmitting a
start condition. Write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP to issue a
stop condition. To issue start/stop conditions, use the
MOV instruction.
6
SCP
1
R/W
Start/Stop Issue Condition Disable
The SCP bit controls the issue of start/stop conditions in
master mode.
To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in
SCP. A retransmit start condition is issued in the same
way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in
SCP. This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the
data is not stored.
5
SDAO
1
R/W
SDA Output Value Control
This bit is used with SDAOP when modifying output
level of SDA. This bit should not be manipulated during
transfer.
0: When reading, SDA pin outputs low.
When writing, SDA pin is changed to output low.
1: When reading, SDA pin outputs high.
When writing, SDA pin is changed to output Hi-Z
(outputs high by external pull-up resistance).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 485 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
4
SDAOP
1
R/W
SDAO Write Protect
This bit controls change of output level of the SDA pin
by modifying the SDAO bit. To change the output level,
clear SDAO and SDAOP to 0 or set SDAO to 1 and
clear SDAOP to 0 by the MOV instruction. This bit is
always read as 1.
3
SCLO
1
R
This bit monitors SCL output level. When SCLO is 1,
SCL pin outputs high. When SCLO is 0, SCL pin
outputs low.
2

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
1
IICRST
0
R/W
IIC Control Part Reset
2
This bit resets the control part except for I C registers. If
this bit is set to 1 when hang-up occurs because of
2
2
communication failure during I C operation, I C control
part can be reset without setting ports and initializing
registers.
0

1

Reserved
This bit is always read as 1.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 486 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3.3
2
I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
ICMR selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred first, performs master mode wait control,
and selects the transfer bit count.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
MLS
0
R/W
MSB-First/LSB-First Select
0: MSB-first
1: LSB-first
2
Set this bit to 0 when the I C bus format is used.
6
WAIT
0
R/W
Wait Insertion Bit
2
In master mode with the I C bus format, this bit selects
whether to insert a wait after data transfer except the
acknowledge bit. When WAIT is set to 1, after the fall of
the clock for the final data bit, low period is extended for
two transfer clocks. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and
acknowledge bits are transferred consecutively with no
wait inserted.
The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode with the
2
I C bus format or with the clock synchronous serial
format.
5, 4

All 1

Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
3
BCWP
1
R/W
BC Write Protect
This bit controls the BC2 to BC0 modifications. When
modifying BC2 to BC0, this bit should be cleared to 0
and use the MOV instruction. In clock synchronous
serial mode, BC should not be modified.
0: When writing, values of BC2 to BC0 are set.
1: When reading, 1 is always read.
When writing, settings of BC2 to BC0 are invalid.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 487 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
2
BC2
0
R/W
Bit Counter 2 to 0
1
BC1
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
These bits specify the number of bits to be transferred
next. When read, the remaining number of transfer bits
2
is indicated. With the I C bus format, the data is
transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2
to BC0 settings should be made during an interval
between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a
value other than 000, the setting should be made while
the SCL pin is low. The value returns to 000 at the end
of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit. With
the clock synchronous serial format, these bits should
not be modified.
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 488 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
I C Bus Format
Clock Synchronous Serial Format
000: 9 bits
000: 8 bits
001: 2 bits
001: 1 bits
010: 3 bits
010: 2 bits
011: 4 bits
011: 3 bits
100: 5 bits
100: 4 bits
101: 6 bits
101: 5 bits
110: 7 bits
110: 6 bits
111: 8 bits
111: 7 bits
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3.4
2
I C Bus Interrupt Enable Register (ICIER)
ICIER enables or disables interrupt sources and acknowledge bits, sets acknowledge bits to be
transferred, and confirms acknowledge bits to be received.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
TIE
0
R/W
Transmit Interrupt Enable
When the TDRE bit in ICSR is set to 1, this bit enables
or disables the transmit data empty interrupt (TXI).
0: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is
disabled.
1: Transmit data empty interrupt request (TXI) is
enabled.
6
TEIE
0
R/W
Transmit End Interrupt Enable
This bit enables or disables the transmit end interrupt
(TEI) at the rising of the ninth clock while the TDRE bit
in ICSR is 1. TEI can be canceled by clearing the TEND
bit or the TEIE bit to 0.
0: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is disabled.
1: Transmit end interrupt request (TEI) is enabled.
5
RIE
0
R/W
Receive Interrupt Enable
This bit enables or disables the receive data full
interrupt request (RXI) and the overrun error interrupt
request (ERI) with the clock synchronous format, when
a receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and
the RDRF bit in ICSR is set to 1. RXI can be canceled
by clearing the RDRF or RIE bit to 0.
0: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and overrun
error interrupt request (ERI) with the clock
synchronous format are disabled.
1: Receive data full interrupt request (RXI) and overrun
error interrupt request (ERI) with the clock
synchronous format are enabled.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 489 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
4
NAKIE
0
R/W
Description
NACK Receive Interrupt Enable
This bit enables or disables the NACK receive interrupt
request (NAKI) and the overrun error (setting of the
OVE bit in ICSR) interrupt request (ERI) with the clock
synchronous format, when the NACKF and AL bits in
ICSR are set to 1. NAKI can be canceled by clearing
the NACKF, OVE, or NAKIE bit to 0.
0: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is disabled.
1: NACK receive interrupt request (NAKI) is enabled.
3
STIE
0
R/W
Stop Condition Detection Interrupt Enable
0: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is
disabled.
1: Stop condition detection interrupt request (STPI) is
enabled.
2
ACKE
0
R/W
Acknowledge Bit Judgment Select
0: The value of the receive acknowledge bit is ignored,
and continuous transfer is performed.
1: If the receive acknowledge bit is 1, continuous
transfer is halted.
1
ACKBR
0
R
Receive Acknowledge
In transmit mode, this bit stores the acknowledge data
that are returned by the receive device. This bit cannot
be modified.
0: Receive acknowledge = 0
1: Receive acknowledge = 1
0
ACKBT
0
R/W
Transmit Acknowledge
In receive mode, this bit specifies the bit to be sent at
the acknowledge timing.
0: 0 is sent at the acknowledge timing.
1: 1 is sent at the acknowledge timing.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 490 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3.5
2
I C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
ICSR performs confirmation of interrupt request flags and status.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
TDRE
0
R/(W)* Transmit Data Register Empty
Description
[Setting conditions]
•
Data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS and
ICDRT becomes empty
•
TRS is set
•
A start condition (including re-transfer) has been
issued
•
Transmit mode is entered from receive mode in
slave mode
[Clearing conditions]
6
TEND
0
•
Writing of 0 to bit TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
•
Data is written to ICDRT with an instruction
R/(W)* Transmit End
[Setting conditions]
•
The ninth clock of SCL rises with the I C bus format
while the TDRE flag is 1
•
The final bit of transmit frame is sent with the clock
synchronous serial format
2
[Clearing conditions]
5
RDRF
0
•
Writing of 0 to bit TEND after reading TEND = 1
•
Data is written to ICDRT with an instruction
R/(W)* Receive Data Register Full
[Setting condition]
•
A receive data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR
[Clearing conditions]
•
Writing of 0 to bit RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
•
ICDRR is read with an instruction
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 491 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
4
NACKF
0
R/(W)* No Acknowledge Detection Flag
Description
[Setting condition]
•
No acknowledge is detected from the receive device
in transmission while the ACKE bit in ICIER is 1
[Clearing condition]
•
3
STOP
0
Writing of 0 to bit NACKF after reading NACKF = 1
R/(W)* Stop Condition Detection Flag
[Setting conditions]
•
In master mode, a stop condition is detected after
frame transferred
•
In slave mode, the slave address in the first byte
after the general call and detecting start condition
matches the address set in SAR, and then the stop
condition is detected
[Clearing condition]
•
2
AL/OVE
0
Writing of 0 to bit STOP after reading STOP = 1
R/(W)* Arbitration Lost Flag/Overrun Error Flag
This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master
2
mode with the I C bus format and that the final bit has
been received while RDRF = 1 with the clock
synchronous format.
When two or more master devices attempt to seize the
2
bus at nearly the same time, if the I C bus interface
detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL to
1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another
master.
[Setting conditions]
•
The internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise
of SCL in master transmit mode
•
The SDA pin outputs high in master mode while a
start condition is detected
•
The final bit is received with the clock synchronous
format while RDRF = 1
[Clearing condition]
•
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 492 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Writing of 0 to bit AL/OVE after reading AL/OVE=1
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
1
AAS
0
R/(W)* Slave Address Recognition Flag
Description
In slave receive mode, this flag is set to 1 if the first
frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to
SVA0 in SAR.
[Setting conditions]
•
The slave address is detected in slave receive
mode
•
The general call address is detected in slave
receive mode
[Clearing condition]
•
0
ADZ
0
Writing of 0 to bit AAS after reading AAS=1
R/(W)* General Call Address Recognition Flag
2
This bit is valid in I C bus format slave receive mode.
[Setting condition]
•
The general call address is detected in slave
receive mode
[Clearing conditions]
•
Writing of 0 to bit ADZ after reading ADZ=1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 493 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.3.6
Slave Address Register (SAR)
SAR selects the communication format and sets the slave address. When the chip is in slave mode
2
with the I C bus format, if the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame
received after a start condition, the chip operates as the slave device.
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
SVA6 to
SVA0
All 0
R/W
Slave Address 6 to 0
FS
0
Bit
Bit Name
7 to 1
0
These bits set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0,
differing form the addresses of other slave devices
2
connected to the I C bus.
R/W
Format Select
2
0: I C bus format is selected.
1: Clock synchronous serial format is selected.
22.3.7
2
I C Bus Transmit Data Register (ICDRT)
ICDRT is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the transmit data. When ICDRT detects the
space in the shift register (ICDRS), it transfers the transmit data which is written in ICDRT to
ICDRS and starts transferring data. If the next transfer data is written to ICDRT during
transferring data of ICDRS, continuous transfer is possible. If the MLS bit of ICMR is set to 1 and
when the data is written to ICDRT, the MSB/LSB inverted data is read. The initial value of
ICDRT is H'FF.
22.3.8
2
I C Bus Receive Data Register (ICDRR)
ICDRR is an 8-bit register that stores the receive data. When data of one byte is received, ICDRR
transfers the receive data from ICDRS to ICDRR and the next data can be received. ICDRR is a
receive-only register, therefore the CPU cannot write to this register. The initial value of ICDRR is
H'FF.
22.3.9
2
I C Bus Shift Register (ICDRS)
ICDRS is a register that is used to transfer/receive data. In transmission, data is transferred from
ICDRT to ICDRS and the data is sent from the SDA pin. In reception, data is transferred from
ICDRS to ICDRR after data of one byte is received. This register cannot be read directly from the
CPU.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 494 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.4
Operation
2
2
The I C bus interface 2 can communicate either in I C bus mode or clock synchronous serial mode
by setting the FS bit in the slave address register (SAR).
22.4.1
2
I C Bus Format
2
2
Figure 22.3 shows the I C bus formats. Figure 22.4 shows the I C bus timing. The first frame
following a start condition always consists of 8 bits.
(a) I2C bus format (FS = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A
A/A
P
1
7
1
1
n
1
1
1
n: Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
m: Transfer frame count
(m ≥ 1)
m
1
(b) I2C bus format (Start condition retransmission, FS = 0)
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A/A
S
SLA
R/W
A
DATA
A/A
P
1
7
1
1
n1
1
1
7
1
1
n2
1
1
1
m1
1
m2
n1 and n2: Transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8)
m1 and m2: Transfer frame count (m1 and m2 ≥ 1)
2
Figure 22.3 I C Bus Formats
SDA
SCL
S
1 to 7
8
9
SLA
R/W
A
1 to 7
8
DATA
9
1 to 7
A
DATA
8
9
A
P
2
Figure 22.4 I C Bus Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 495 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
[Legend]
S:
Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is high.
SLA:
Slave address
R/W:
Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device when
R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0.
A:
Acknowledge. The receive device drives SDA to low.
DATA:
Transfer data
P:
Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high.
22.4.2
Master Transmit Operation
In master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For master transmit mode operation timing, refer to
figures 22.5 and 22.6. The transmission procedure and operations in master transmit mode are
described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0
bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting)
2. Read the BBSY flag in ICCR2 to confirm that the bus is free. Set the MST and TRS bits in
ICCR1 to select master transmit mode. Then, write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP using MOV
instruction. (Start condition issued) This generates the start condition.
3. After confirming that TDRE in ICSR has been set, write the transmit data (the first byte data
show the slave address and R/W) to ICDRT. At this time, TDRE is automatically cleared to 0,
and data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS. TDRE is set again.
4. When transmission of one byte data is completed while TDRE is 1, TEND in ICSR is set to 1
at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse. Read the ACKBR bit in ICIER, and confirm that the
slave device has been selected. Then, write second byte data to ICDRT. When ACKBR is 1,
the slave device has not been acknowledged, so issue the stop condition. To issue the stop
condition, write 0 to BBSY and SCP using MOV instruction. SCL is fixed low until the
transmit data is prepared or the stop condition is issued.
5. The transmit data after the second byte is written to ICDRT every time TDRE is set.
6. Write the number of bytes to be transmitted to ICDRT. Wait until TEND is set (the end of last
byte data transmission) while TDRE is 1, or wait for NACK (NACKF in ICSR = 1) from the
receive device while ACKE in ICIER is 1. Then, issue the stop condition to clear TEND or
NACKF.
7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, the operation returns to the slave receive mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 496 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
SCL
(Master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
SDA
(Master output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
7
8
Bit 1
Slave address
9
1
Bit 0
2
Bit 7
Bit 6
R/W
SDA
(Slave output)
A
TDRE
TEND
Address + R/W
ICDRT
ICDRS
Data 1
Address + R/W
User
processing
[2] Instruction of start
condition issuance
Data 2
Data 1
[4] Write data to ICDRT (second byte)
[5] Write data to ICDRT (third byte)
[3] Write data to ICDRT (first byte)
Figure 22.5 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1)
SCL
(Master output)
9
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
8
9
Bit 0
A/A
A
TDRE
TEND
Data n
ICDRT
ICDRS
Data n
User
[5] Write data to ICDRT
processing
[6] Issue stop condition. Clear TEND.
[7] Set slave receive mode
Figure 22.6 Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 497 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.4.3
Master Receive Operation
In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data from the slave
device, and returns an acknowledge signal. For master receive mode operation timing, refer to
figures 22.7 and 22.8. The reception procedure and operations in master receive mode are shown
below.
1. Clear the TEND bit in ICSR to 0, then clear the TRS bit in ICCR1 to 0 to switch from master
transmit mode to master receive mode. Then, clear the TDRE bit to 0 and set the ACKBT bit
in ICIER.
2. When ICDRR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output,
and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. The master device outputs the
level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the 9th receive clock pulse.
3. After the reception of first frame data is completed, the RDRF bit in ICST is set to 1 at the rise
of 9th receive clock pulse. At this time, the receive data is read by reading ICDRR, and RDRF
is cleared to 0.
4. The continuous reception is performed by reading ICDRR every time RDRF is set. If 8th
receive clock pulse falls after reading ICDRR by the other processing while RDRF is 1, SCL is
fixed low until ICDRR is read.
5. If next frame is the last receive data, set the RCVD bit in ICCR1 and set the ACKBT bit in
ICIER. to 1 before reading ICDRR. This enables the issuance of the stop condition after the
next reception.
6. When the RDRF bit is set to 1 at rise of the 9th receive clock pulse, and clearing the STOP bit
in ICSR issue the stage condition.
7. When the STOP bit in ICSR is set to 1, read ICDRR. Then clear the RCVD bit to 0.
8. Clear the MST bit in ICCR1 and then, the operation returns to the slave receive mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 498 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Master transmit mode
SCL
(Master output)
Master receive mode
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
9
1
A
A
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TRS
RDRF
ICDRS
Data 1
ICDRR
User
processing
Data 1
[3] Read ICDRR
[1] Clear TDRE after clearing [2] Read ICDRR (dummy read)
TEND and TRS
Figure 22.7 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 499 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
SCL
(Master output)
9
SDA
(Master output)
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A/A
SDA
(Slave output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
RDRF
RCVD
ICDRS
Data n
Data n-1
ICDRR
User
processing
Data n
Data n-1
[5] Read ICDRR after setting RCVD
[7] Read ICDRR,
and clear RCVD
[6] Issue stop
condition [8] Set slave
receive mode
Figure 22.8 Master Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)
22.4.4
Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, while the master device outputs
the receive clock and returns an acknowledge signal. For slave transmit mode operation timing,
refer to figures 22.9 and 22.10.
The transmission procedure and operations in slave transmit mode are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0
bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR1 to select slave receive
mode, and wait until the slave address matches.
2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition,
the slave device outputs the level specified by the ACKBT bit in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of
the 9th clock pulse. At this time, if the 8th bit data (R/W) is 1, the TRS and ICSR bits in
ICCR1 are set to 1, and the mode changes to slave transmit mode automatically. The
continuous transmission is performed by writing transmit data to ICDRT every time TDRE is
set.
3. If TDRE is set after writing last transmit data to ICDRT, wait until TEND in ICSR is set to 1,
with TDRE = 1. When the TEND bit is set, clear the TEND bit.
4. Clear the TRS bit for the end processing, and read ICDRR (dummy read). SCL is free.
5. Clear the TDRE bit.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 500 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Slave receive mode
SCL
(Master output)
Slave transmit mode
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDA
(Master output)
9
1
A
SCL
(Slave output)
SDA
(Slave output)
A
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Bit 7
TDRE
TEND
TRS
ICDRT
ICDRS
Data 1
Data 2
Data 1
Data 3
Data 2
ICDRR
User
processing
[2] Write data to ICDRT (data 1)
[2] Write data to ICDRT (data 2)
[2] Write data to ICDRT (data 3)
Figure 22.9 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 501 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Slave receive
mode
Slave transmit mode
SCL
(Master output)
9
SDA
(Master output)
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
SCL
(Slave output)
SDA
(Slave output)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TDRE
TEND
TRS
ICDRT
ICDRS
Data n
ICDRR
User
processing
[3] Clear TEND
[4] Read ICDRR (dummy read) [5] Clear TDRE
after clearing TRS
Figure 22.10 Slave Transmit Mode Operation Timing (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 502 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.4.5
Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. For slave receive mode operation timing, refer to
figures 22.11 and 22.12. The reception procedure and operations in slave receive mode are
described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MLS and WAIT bits in ICMR and the CKS3 to CKS0
bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial setting) Set the MST and TRS bits in ICCR1 to select slave receive
mode, and wait until the slave address matches.
2. When the slave address matches in the first frame following detection of the start condition,
the slave device outputs the level specified by ACKBT in ICIER to SDA, at the rise of the 9th
clock pulse. At the same time, RDRF in ICSR is set to read ICDRR (dummy read). (Since the
read data show the slave address and R/W, it is not used.)
3. Read ICDRR every time RDRF is set. If 8th receive clock pulse falls while RDRF is 1, SCL is
fixed low until ICDRR is read. The change of the acknowledge before reading ICDRR, to be
returned to the master device, is reflected to the next transmit frame.
4. The last byte data is read by reading ICDRR.
SCL
(Master output)
9
SDA
(Master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
1
Bit 7
SCL
(Slave output)
SDA
(Slave output)
A
A
RDRF
ICDRS
Data 1
Data 2
ICDRR
User
processing
Data 1
[2] Read ICDRR
[2] Read ICDRR (dummy read)
Figure 22.11 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 503 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
SCL
(Master output)
9
SDA
(Master output)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
9
SCL
(Slave output)
SDA
(Slave output)
A
A
RDRF
ICDRS
Data 2
Data 1
ICDRR
Data 1
User
processing
[3] Set ACKBT
[3] Read ICDRR [4] Read ICDRR
Figure 22.12 Slave Receive Mode Operation Timing (2)
22.4.6
Clock Synchronous Serial Format
This module can be operated with the clock synchronous serial format, by setting the FS bit in
SAR to 1. When the MST bit in ICCR1 is 1, the transfer clock output from SCL is selected. When
MST is 0, the external clock input is selected.
(1)
Data Transfer Format
Figure 22.13 shows the clock synchronous serial transfer format.
The transfer data is output from the rise to the fall of the SCL clock, and the data at the rising edge
of the SCL clock is guaranteed. The MLS bit in ICMR sets the order of data transfer, in either the
MSB first or LSB first. The output level of SDA can be changed during the transfer wait, by the
SDAO bit in ICCR2.
SCL
SDA
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5 Bit 6
Bit 7
Figure 22.13 Clock Synchronous Serial Transfer Format
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 504 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
(2)
Transmit Operation
In transmit mode, transmit data is output from SDA, in synchronization with the fall of the transfer
clock. The transfer clock is output when MST in ICCR1 is 1, and is input when MST is 0. For
transmit mode operation timing, refer to figure 22.14. The transmission procedure and operations
in transmit mode are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MST and CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial
setting)
2. Set the TRS bit in ICCR1 to select the transmit mode. Then, TDRE in ICSR is set.
3. Confirm that TDRE has been set. Then, write the transmit data to ICDRT. The data is
transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS, and TDRE is set automatically. The continuous
transmission is performed by writing data to ICDRT every time TDRE is set. When changing
from transmit mode to receive mode, clear the TRS bit while the TDRE bit is 1.
SCL
1
2
7
8
1
7
8
1
SDA
(Output)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
TRS
TDRE
ICDRT
ICDRS
User
processing
Data 1
Data 2
Data 1
[3] Write data [3] Write data
to ICDRT
to ICDRT
[2] Set TRS
Data 3
Data 2
Data 3
[3] Write data
to ICDRT
[3] Write data
to ICDRT
Figure 22.14 Transmit Mode Operation Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 505 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
(3)
Receive Operation
In receive mode, data is latched at the rise of the transfer clock. The transfer clock is output when
MST in ICCR1 is 1, and is input when MST is 0. For receive mode operation timing, refer to
figure 22.15. The reception procedure and operations in receive mode are described below.
1. Set the ICE bit in ICCR1 to 1. Set the MST and CKS3 to CKS0 bits in ICCR1 to 1. (Initial
setting)
2. When the transfer clock is output, set MST to 1 to start outputting the receive clock.
3. When the receive operation is completed, data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR and
RDRF in ICSR is set. When MST = 1, the next byte can be received, so the clock is
continually output. The continuous reception is performed by reading ICDRR every time
RDRF is set. When the 8th clock is risen while RDRF is 1, the overrun is detected and
AL/OVE in ICSR is set. At this time, the previous reception data is retained in ICDRR.
4. To stop receiving when MST = 1, set RCVD in ICCR1 to 1, then read ICDRR. Then, SCL is
fixed high after receiving the next byte data.
SCL
1
2
7
8
1
7
8
1
2
SDA
(Input)
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
MST
TRS
RDRF
Data 1
ICDRS
Data 1
ICDRR
User
processing
Data 2
[2] Set MST
(when outputting the clock)
[3] Read ICDRR
Figure 22.15 Receive Mode Operation Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 506 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Data 3
Data 2
[3] Read ICDRR
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.4.7
Noise Canceller
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancellers before being latched
internally. Figure 22.16 shows a block diagram of the noise canceller circuit.
The noise canceller consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the
outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
Sampling clock
C
SCL or SDA
input signal
D
C
Q
Q
D
Latch
Latch
Match detector
Internal
SCL or SDA
signal
System clock
period
Sampling
clock
Figure 22.16 Block Diagram of Noise Canceller
22.4.8
Example of Use
2
Flowcharts in respective modes that use the I C bus interface are shown in figures 22.17 to 22.20.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 507 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Start
Initialize
[1]
Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.
[2]
Set master transmit mode.
[3]
Issue the start condition.
[2]
[4]
Set the first byte (slave address + R/W) of transmit data.
Write 1 to BBSY
and 0 to SCP.
[3]
[5]
Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
Write transmit data
in ICDRT
[4]
[6]
Test the acknowledge transferred from the specified slave device.
[7]
Set the second and subsequent bytes (except for the final byte) of transmit data.
[8]
Wait for ICDRT empty.
[9]
Set the last byte of transmit data.
Read BBSY in ICCR2
[1]
No
BBSY=0 ?
Yes
Set MST and TRS
in ICCR1 to 1.
Read TEND in ICSR
[5]
No
TEND=1 ?
Yes
Read ACKBR in ICIER
[6]
ACKBR=0 ?
[10] Wait for last byte to be transmitted.
No
[11] Clear the TEND flag.
Yes
Transmit
mode?
Yes
No
Write transmit data in ICDRT
Mater receive mode
[7]
[13] Issue the stop condition.
Read TDRE in ICSR
[8]
No
TDRE=1 ?
Yes
No
[12] Clear the STOP flag.
[14] Wait for the creation of stop condition.
[15] Set slave receive mode. Clear TDRE.
Last byte?
[9]
Yes
Write transmit data in ICDRT
Read TEND in ICSR
[10]
No
TEND=1 ?
Yes
Clear TEND in ICSR
[11]
Clear STOP in ICSR
[12]
Write 0 to BBSY
and SCP
[13]
Read STOP in ICSR
[14]
No
STOP=1 ?
Yes
Set MST to 0 and TRS
to 0 in ICCR1
[15]
Clear TDRE in ICSR
End
Figure 22.17 Sample Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 508 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Mater receive mode
[1]
Clear TEND, select master receive mode, and then clear TDRE.*
[2]
Set acknowledge to the transmit device.*
[3]
Dummy-read ICDRR.*
[4]
Wait for 1 byte to be received
[5]
Check whether it is the (last receive - 1).
[6]
Read the receive data.
[7]
Set acknowledge of the final byte. Disable continuous reception (RCVD = 1).
[8]
Read the (final byte - 1) of receive data.
[9]
Wait for the last byte to be receive.
Clear TEND in ICSR
Clear TRS in ICCR1 to 0
[1]
Clear TDRE in ICSR
Clear ACKBT in ICIER to 0
[2]
Dummy-read ICDRR
[3]
Read RDRF in ICSR
No
[4]
RDRF=1 ?
Yes
Last receive
- 1?
No
Read ICDRR
Yes
[5]
[10] Clear the STOP flag.
[6]
[11] Issue the stop condition.
[12] Wait for the creation of stop condition.
Set ACKBT in ICIER to 1
[7]
Set RCVD in ICCR1 to 1
Read ICDRR
[13] Read the last byte of receive data.
[14] Clear RCVD.
[8]
[15] Set slave receive mode.
Read RDRF in ICSR
No
RDRF=1 ?
[9]
Yes
Clear STOP in ICSR.
Write 0 to BBSY
and SCP
[10]
[11]
Read STOP in ICSR
No
[12]
STOP=1 ?
Yes
Read ICDRR
[13]
Clear RCVD in ICCR1 to 0
[14]
Clear MST in ICCR1 to 0
[15]
Note: When 1 byte is received, skip steps [2] to [6] after [1] and then jump
to step [7].
In step [8], dummy-read ICDRR.
* Do not activate an interrupt during the execution of steps [1] to [3].
End
Figure 22.18 Sample Flowchart for Master Receive Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 509 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
[1] Clear the AAS flag.
Slave transmit mode
Clear AAS in ICSR
[1]
Write transmit data
in ICDRT
[2]
[3] Wait for ICDRT empty.
[4] Set the last byte of transmit data.
Read TDRE in ICSR
[5] Wait for the last byte to be transmitted.
[3]
No
TDRE=1 ?
Yes
Yes
[6] Clear the TEND flag .
[7] Set slave receive mode.
Last
byte?
No
[2] Set transmit data for ICDRT (except for the last data).
[8] Dummy-read ICDRR to release the SCL line.
[4]
[9] Clear the TDRE flag.
Write transmit data
in ICDRT
Read TEND in ICSR
[5]
No
TEND=1 ?
Yes
Clear TEND in ICSR
[6]
Clear TRS in ICCR1 to 0
[7]
Dummy read ICDRR
[8]
Clear TDRE in ICSR
[9]
End
Figure 22.19 Sample Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 510 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Slave receive mode
[1] Clear the AAS flag.
Clear AAS in ICSR
[1]
Clear ACKBT in ICIER to 0
[2]
Dummy-read ICDRR
[3]
[2] Set acknowledge to the transmit device.
[3] Dummy-read ICDRR.
[5] Check whether it is the (last receive - 1).
Read RDRF in ICSR
No
[4]
RDRF=1 ?
[6] Read the receive data.
[7] Set acknowledge of the last byte.
Yes
Last receive
- 1?
[4] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
Yes
No
Read ICDRR
[5]
[8] Read the (last byte - 1) of receive data.
[9] Wait the last byte to be received.
[6]
[10] Read for the last byte of receive data.
Set ACKBT in ICIER to 1
[7]
Read ICDRR
[8]
Read RDRF in ICSR
No
[9]
RDRF=1 ?
Yes
Read ICDRR
[10]
Note: When 1 byte is received, skip steps [2] to [6]
after [1] and then jump to step [7].
In step [8], dummy-read ICDRR.
End
Figure 22.20 Sample Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 511 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.5
Interrupt Request
There are six interrupt requests in this module; transmit data empty, transmit end, receive data full,
NACK receive, STOP recognition, and arbitration lost/overrun. Table 22.3 shows the contents of
each interrupt request.
Table 22.3 Interrupt Requests
Interrupt Request
Abbreviation
Interrupt Condition
I C Mode
Clock
Synchronous
Mode
Transmit data empty
TXI
(TDRE=1) • (TIE=1)
Available
Available
Transmit end
TEI
(TEND=1) • (TEIE=1)
Available
Available
Receive data full
RXI
(RDRF=1) • (RIE=1)
Available
Available
STOP recognition
STPI
(STOP=1) (STIE=1)
Available
Not available
NACK receive
NAKI
{(NACKF=1)+(AL=1)}
(NAKIE=1)
Available
Not available
Available
Available
Arbitration
lost/overrun
2
•
•
When interrupt conditions described in table 22.3 are 1 and the I bit in CCR is 0, the CPU
executes interrupt exception processing. Interrupt sources should be cleared in the exception
processing. TDRE and TEND are automatically cleared to 0 by writing the transmit data to
ICDRT. RDRF are automatically cleared to 0 by reading ICDRR. TDRE is set to 1 again at the
same time when transmit data is written to ICDRT. When TDRE is cleared to 0, then an excessive
data of one byte may be transmitted.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 512 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.6
Bit Synchronous Circuit
In master mode, this module has a possibility that high level period may be short in the two states
described below.
• When SCL is driven to low by the slave device
• When the rising speed of SCL is lowered by the load of the SCL line (load capacitance or pullup resistance)
Therefore, it monitors SCL and communicates by bit with synchronization.
Figure 22.21 shows the timing of the bit synchronous circuit and table 22.4 shows the time when
SCL output changes from low to Hi-Z then SCL is monitored.
SCL monitor
timing reference
clock
VIH
SCL
Internal SCL
Figure 22.21 Timing of Bit Synchronous Circuit
Table 22.4 Time for Monitoring SCL
CKS3
CKS2
Time for Monitoring SCL
0
0
7.5 tcyc
1
19.5 tcyc
1
0
17.5 tcyc
1
41.5 tcyc
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 513 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.7
Usage Notes
22.7.1
Note on Issuing Stop Condition and Start (Re-Transmit) Condition
The stop condition or start (re-transmit) condition should be issued after recognizing the falling
edge of the ninth clock. The falling edge of the ninth clock can be recognized by checking the
2
SCLO bit in the I C control register 2 (ICCR2). Note that if the stop condition or start (re-transmit)
condition is issued in a particular timing and the situations shown below, these conditions may not
correctly output.
1. The rising edge of the SCL becomes less sharp and longer due to the SCL bus load (load
capacitor and pull-up resistor) than the period defined in section 22.6, Bit Synchronous
Circuit.
2. When the slave device elongates the low level period between the eighth and ninth clocks and
activates the bit synchronous circuit.
22.7.2
2
Note on Setting WAIT Bit in I C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
2
The WAIT bit in the I C bus mode register (ICMR) should be set to 0. Note that if the WAIT bit is
set to 1, when a slave device holds the SCL signal low more than one transfer clock cycle during
the eighth clock, the high level period of the ninth clock may be shorter than a given period.
22.7.3
Restriction on Transfer Rate Setting in Multimaster Operation
In multimaster operation, if the IIC transfer rate setting in this LSI is slower than those of the other
masters, SCL may be output with an unexpected width. To avoid this phenomenon, set the transfer
rate by 1/1.8 or faster than the fastest rate of the other masters. For example, if the fastest transfer
rate of the other masters is set to 400 kbps, the IIC transfer rate in this LSI should be set to 223
kbps (= 400/1.18) or more.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 514 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
22.7.4
Restriction on the Use of Bit Manipulation Instructions for MST and TRS Setting
in Multimaster Operation
In multimaster operation, if the master transmit is set with bit manipulation instructions in the
order from the MST bit to the TRS bit, the AL bit in the ICSR register will be set to 1 but the
master transmit mode (MST = 1, TRS = 1) may be set, depending on the arbitration lost timing. To
avoid this phenomenon, the following actions should be performed:
• In multimaster operation, use the MOV instruction to set bits MST and TRS.
• When arbitration is lost, confirm the contents of bits MST and TRS. If the contents are other
than MST = 0 and TRS = 0, set MST = 0 and TRS = 0 again.
22.7.5
Usage Note on Master Receive Mode
In master receive mode, SCL is fixed low on the falling edge of the 8th clock while the RDRF bit
is set to 1. When ICDRR is read around the falling edge of the 8th clock, the clock is only fixed
low in the 8th clock of the next round of data reception. The SCL is then released from its fixed
state without reading ICDRR and the 9th clock is output. As a result, some receive data is lost.
To avoid this phenomenon, the following actions should be performed:
• Read ICDRR in master receive mode before the rising edge of the 8th clock.
• Set RCVD to 1 in master receive mode and perform communication in units of one byte.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 515 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 22 I2C Bus Interface 2 (IIC2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 516 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 23 Power-On Reset Circuit
Section 23 Power-On Reset Circuit
This LSI has an on-chip power-on reset circuit. A block diagram of the power-on reset circuit is
shown in figure 23.1.
23.1
Feature
• Power-on reset circuit
An internal reset signal is generated at turning the power on by externally connecting a
capacitor.
Vcc
φ
Vcc
CK
R
3-bit
counter
COUT
Rp
RES
R
Voltage
detector
Q
S
Internal
reset signal
CRES
Figure 23.1 Power-On Reset Circuit
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 517 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 23 Power-On Reset Circuit
23.2
Operation
23.2.1
Power-On Reset Circuit
The operation timing of the power-on reset circuit is shown in figure 23.2. As the power supply
voltage rises, the capacitor, which is externally connected to the RES pin, is gradually charged
through the on-chip pull-up resistor (Rp). The low level of the RES pin is sent to the LSI and the
whole LSI is reset. When the level of the RES pin reaches to the predetermined level, a voltage
detection circuit detects it. Then a 3-bit counter starts counting up. When the 3-bit counter counts
φ for 8 times, an overflow signal is generated and an internal reset signal is negated.
The capacitance (CRES) which is connected to the RES pin can be computed using the following
formula; where the RES rising time is t. For the on-chip resistor (Rp), see section 26, Electrical
Characteristics. The power supply rising time (t_vtr) should be shorter than half the RES rising
time (t). The RES rising time (t) is also should be longer than the oscillation stabilization time
(trc).
CRES =
t
Rp
(t > trc, t > t_vtr × 2)
Note that the power supply voltage (Vcc) must fall below Vpor = 100 mV and rise after charge on
the RES pin is removed. To remove charge on the RES pin, it is recommended that the diode
should be placed near Vcc. If the power supply voltage (Vcc) rises from the point above Vpor, a
power-on reset may not occur.
t_vtr
Vcc
t_vtr × 2
RES
V_rst
Internal reset
signal
t_cr
t_out (eight states)
Figure 23.2 Power-On Reset Circuit Operation Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 518 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
Section 24 Address Break
The address break simplifies on-board program debugging. It requests an address break interrupt
when the set break condition is satisfied. The interrupt request is not affected by the I bit in CCR.
Break conditions that can be set include instruction execution at a specific address and a
combination of access and data at a specific address. With the address break function, the
execution start point of a program containing a bug is detected and execution is branched to the
correcting program. Use of module standby mode enables this module to be placed in standby
mode independently when not used (for details, refer to section 6.4, Module Standby Function).
Figure 24.1 shows a block diagram of the address break.
Internal address bus
Comparator
BAR2H
BAR2L
ABRKCR2
Interrupt
generation
control circuit
ABRKSR2
BDR2H
Internal data bus
BAR2E
BDR2L
Comparator
Interrupt
[Legend]
BAR2E, BAR2H, BAR2L:
BDR2H, BDR2L:
ABRKCR2:
ABRKSR2:
Break address register 2
Break data register 2
Address break control register 2
Address break status register 2
Figure 24.1 Block Diagram of Address Break
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 519 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
24.1
Register Descriptions
The address break has the following registers.
• Address break control register 2 (ABRKCR2)
• Address break status register 2 (ABRKSR2)
• Break address register 2 (BAR2E, BAR2H, BAR2L)
• Break data register 2 (BDR2H, BDR2L)
24.1.1
Address Break Control Register 2 (ABRKCR2)
ABRKCR2 sets address break conditions.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
7
RTINTE2
1
R/W
RTE Interrupt Enable
When this bit is 0, the interrupt immediately after
executing RTE is masked and then one instruction must
be executed. When this bit is 1, the interrupt is not
masked.
6
CSEL21
0
R/W
Condition Select 1 and 0
5
CSEL20
0
R/W
These bits set address break conditions.
00: Instruction execution cycle (no data comparison)
01: CPU data read cycle
10: CPU data write cycle
11: CPU data read/write cycle
4
ACMP22
0
R/W
Address Compare Condition Select 2 to 0
3
ACMP21
0
R/W
2
ACMP20
0
R/W
These bits set the comparison condition between the
address set in BAR2 and the internal address bus.
000: Compares all of 24-bit addresses
001: Compares upper 20-bit addresses
010: Compares upper 16-bit addresses
011: Compares upper 12-bit addresses
100: Compares upper 8-bit addresses
101: Compares upper 4-bit addresses
11x: Setting prohibited
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 520 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
Description
1
DCMP21
0
R/W
Data Compare Condition Select 1 and 0
0
DCMP20
0
R/W
These bits set the comparison condition between the
data set in BDR2 and the internal data bus.
00: No data comparison
01: Compares lower 8-bit data between BDR2L and
data bus
10: Compares upper 8-bit data between BDR2H and
data bus
11: Compares 16-bit data between BDR2 and data bus
[Legend]
x: Don't care
When an address break is set in the data read cycle or data write cycle, the data bus used will
depend on the combination of the byte/word access and address. Table 24.1 shows the access and
data bus used. When an I/O register space with an 8-bit data bus width is accessed in word size, a
byte access is generated twice. For details on data widths of each register, see section 25.1,
Register Addresses (Address Order).
Table 24.1 Access and Data Bus Used
Word Access
Byte Access
Even Address
Odd Address
Even Address
Odd Address
ROM space
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
RAM space
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
I/O register with
8-bit data bus width
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
I/O register with
1
16-bit data bus width*
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
—
—
I/O register with
2
16-bit data bus width*
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Upper 8 bits
Notes: 1. Registers whose addresses do not range from H'FFFF96 and H'FFFF97, and
H'FFFFB8 to H'FFFFBB with 16-bit data bus width.
2. Registers whose addresses range from H'FFFF96 and H'FFFF97, and H'FFFFB8 to
H'FFFFBB.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 521 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
24.1.2
Address Break Status Register 2 (ABRKSR2)
ABRKSR2 consists of the address break interrupt flag and the address break interrupt enable bit.
Bit
Bit Name
Initial
Value
R/W
7
ABIF2
0
R/W
Description
Address Break Interrupt Flag
[Setting condition]
When the condition set in ABRKCR2 is satisfied
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after ABIF2=1 is read
6
ABIE2
0
R/W
Address Break Interrupt Enable
When this bit is 1, an address break interrupt request is
enabled.
5 to 0
—
All 1
—
Reserved
These bits are always read as 1.
24.1.3
Break Address Registers 2 (BAR2E, BAR2H, BAR2L)
BAR2E, BAR2H, and BAR2L are 24-bit read/write registers that set the address for generating an
address break interrupt. When setting the address break condition to the instruction execution
cycle, set the first byte address of the instruction. The initial value of this register is H'FFFFFF.
24.1.4
Break Data Registers 2 (BDR2H, BDR2L)
BDR2H and BDR2L are 16-bit read/write registers that set the data for generating an address
break interrupt. BDR2H is compared with the upper 8-bit data bus. BDR2L is compared with the
lower 8-bit data bus. When memory or registers are accessed by byte, the upper 8-bit data bus is
used for even and odd addresses in the data transmission. Therefore, comparison data must be set
in BDR2H for byte access. For word access, the data bus used depends on the address. See section
24.1.1, Address Break Control Register 2 (ABRKCR2), for details. The initial value of this
register is undefined.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 522 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
24.2
Operation
When the ABIF2 and ABIE2 bits in ABRKSR2 are set to 1, the address break function generates
an interrupt request to the CPU. The ABIF2 bit in ABRKSR2 is set to 1 by the combination of the
address set in BAR2, the data set in BDR2, and the conditions set in ABRKCR2. When the
interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after the instruction being
executed ends. The address break interrupt is not masked by the I bit in CCR of the CPU.
Figures 24.2 show the operation examples of the address break interrupt setting.
When the address break is specified in instruction execution cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR2 = H'80
• BAR2 = H'00025A
Program
000258
* 00025A
00025C
000260
000262
:
NOP
* The address break condition is set
NOP
MOV.W @H'00025A,R0
Underline indicates the address
NOP
to be stacked.
NOP
:
NOP
NOP
MOV
MOV
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruction
tion
tion 1
tion 2
Internal
prefetch prefetch prefetch prefetch processing
Stack save
φ
Address
bus
000258
00025A 00025C
00025E
SP-2
SP-4
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 24.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 523 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 24 Address Break
When the address break is specified in the data read cycle
Register setting
• ABRKCR2 = H'A0
• BAR2 = H'00025A
Program
000258
00025A
* 00025C
000260
000262
:
NOP
NOP
MOV.W @H'00025A,R0 * The address break condition is set
NOP
NOP
Underline indicates the address
:
to be stacked.
MOV
MOV
NOP
MOV
NOP
Next
instruc- instruc- instruc- instruc- instrucinstrution 1
tion 2
tion
tion
tion
ction
Internal Stack
prefetch prefetch prefetch execution prefetch prefetch processing save
φ
Address
bus
00025C
00025E 000260
00025A
000262
000264
SP-2
Interrupt
request
Interrupt acceptance
Figure 24.2 Address Break Interrupt Operation Example (2)
24.3
Operating States of Address Break
The operating states of the address break are shown in table 24.2.
Table 24.2 Operating States of Address Break
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Sub-active
Sub-sleep Standby
Module
Standby
ABRKCR2
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
ABRKSR2
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
BAR2E
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
BAR2H
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
BAR2L
Reset
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
BDR2H
Retained*
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
Retained*
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Retained
Retained
BDR2L
Note:
*
Undefined at a power-on reset
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 524 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Section 25 List of Registers
The register list gives information on the on-chip register addresses, how the register bits are
configured, and the register states in each operating mode. The information is given as shown
below.
1. Register addresses (address order)
• Registers are listed from the lower allocation addresses.
• Registers are classified by functional modules.
• The data bus width is indicated.
• The number of access states is indicated.
2. Register bits
• Bit configurations of the registers are described in the same order as the register addresses.
• Reserved bits are indicated by  in the bit name column.
• When registers consist of 16 bits, bits are described from the MSB side.
3. Register states in each operating mode
• Register states are described in the same order as the register addresses.
• The register states described here are for the basic operating modes. If there is a specific reset
for an on-chip peripheral module, refer to the section on that on-chip peripheral module.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 525 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
25.1
Register Addresses (Address Order)
The data bus width indicates the number of bits by which the register is accessed.
The number of access states indicates the number of states based on the specified reference clock.
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Serial control register 4
SCR4
8
H'F00C
SCI4
8
2
Serial control/status register 4
SCSR4
8
H'F00D
SCI4
8
2
Transmit data register 4
TDR4
8
H'F00E
SCI4
8
2
Receive data register 4
RDR4
8
H'F00F
SCI4
8
2
Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1
8
H'F020
ROM
8
2
Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2
8
H'F021
ROM
8
2
Flash memory power control
register
FLPWCR
8
H'F022
ROM
8
2
Erase block register 1
EBR1
8
H'F023
ROM
8
2
Flash memory enable register
FENR
8
H'F02B
ROM
8
2
Erase block register 2
EBR2
8
H'F02C
ROM
8
2
System control register 3
SYSCR3
8
H'F02F
SYSTEM
8
2
Timer start register
TSTR
8
H'F030
TPU
8
2
Timer synchro register
TSYR
8
H'F031
TPU
8
2
Port data register E
PDRE
8
H'F033
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register F
PDRF
8
H'F034
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register E
PCRE
8
H'F037
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register F
PCRF
8
H'F038
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register E
PMRE
8
H'F03B
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register F
PMRF
8
H'F03C
I/O ports
8
2
Timer control register_1
TCR_1
8
H'F040
TPU_1
8
2
Timer mode register_1
TMDR_1
8
H'F041
TPU_1
8
2
Timer I/O control register_1
TIOR_1
8
H'F042
TPU_1
8
2
Timer interrupt enable
register_1
TIER_1
8
H'F044
TPU_1
8
2
Timer status register_1
TSR_1
8
H'F045
TPU_1
8
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 526 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
1
Section 25 List of Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Timer counter_1
TCNT_1
16
H'F046
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register A_1
TGRA_1
16
H'F048
TPU_1
16
2
Timer general register B_1
TGRB_1
16
H'F04A
TPU_1
16
2
PWM3 control register
PWCR3
8
H'F04C
14-bit PWM_3
8
2
PWM3 data register
PWDR3
16
H'F04E
14-bit PWM_3
16
2
Timer control register_2
TCR_2
8
H'F050
TPU_2
8
2
Timer mode register_2
TMDR_2
8
H'F051
TPU_2
8
2
Timer I/O control register_2
TIOR_2
8
H'F052
TPU_2
8
2
Timer interrupt enable
register_2
TIER_2
8
H'F054
TPU_2
8
2
Timer status register_2
TSR_2
8
H'F055
TPU_2
8
2
Timer counter_2
TCNT_2
16
H'F056
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register A_2
TGRA_2
16
H'F058
TPU_2
16
2
Timer general register B_2
TGRB_2
16
H'F05A
TPU_2
16
2
PWM4 control register
PWCR4
8
H'F05D
14-bit PWM_4
8
2
PWM4 data register
PWDR4
16
H'F05E
14-bit PWM_4
16
2
RTC Interrupt flag register
RTCFLG
8
H'F067
RTC
8
2
Second data register/free
running counter data register
RSECDR
8
H'F068
RTC
8
2
Minute data register
RMINDR
8
H'F069
RTC
8
2
Hour data register
RHRDR
8
H'F06A
RTC
8
2
Day-of-week data register
RWKDR
8
H'F06B
RTC
8
2
RTC control register 1
RTCCR1
8
H'F06C
RTC
8
2
RTC control register 2
RTCCR2
8
H'F06D
RTC
8
2
SUB32k control register
SUB32CR
8
H'F06E
Clock pulse
generator
8
2
Clock source select register
1
RTCCSR
8
H'F06F
RTC
8
2
2
ICCR1
8
H'F078
IIC2
8
2
2
ICCR2
8
H'F079
IIC2
8
2
2
ICMR
8
H'F07A
IIC2
8
2
I C bus interrupt enable register ICIER
8
H'F07B
IIC2
8
2
I C bus control register 1
I C bus control register 2
I C bus mode register
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 527 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
I C bus status register
ICSR
8
H'F07C
IIC2
8
2
Slave address register
IIC2
8
2
Register Name
2
1
SAR
8
H'F07D
2
ICDRT
8
H'F07E
IIC2
8
2
I C bus receive data register
2
ICDRR
8
H'F07F
IIC2
8
2
Interrupt priority register A
IPRA
8
H'F080
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt priority register B
IPRB
8
H'F081
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt priority register C
IPRC
8
H'F082
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt priority register D
IPRD
8
H'F083
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt priority register E
IPRE
8
H'F084
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt priority register F
IPRF
8
H'F085
Interrupts
8
2
Serial mode register 3_3
SMR3_3
8
H'F088
SCI3_3
8
3
Bit rate register 3_3
BRR3_3
8
H'F089
SCI3_3
8
3
Serial control register 3_3
SCR3_3
8
H'F08A
SCI3_3
8
3
Transmit data register 3_3
TDR3_3
8
H'F08B
SCI3_3
8
3
Serial status register 3_3
SSR3_3
8
H'F08C
SCI3_3
8
3
Receive data register 3_3
RDR3_3
8
H'F08D
SCI3_3
8
3
Address break control register 2 ABRKCR2 8
H'F096
Address break 8
2
Address break status register 2 ABRKSR2 8
H'F097
Address break 8
2
I C bus transmit data register
Break address register 2H
BAR2H
8
H'F098
Address break 8
2
Break address register 2L
BAR2L
8
H'F099
Address break 8
2
Break data register 2H
BDR2H
8
H'F09A
Address break 8
2
Break data register 2L
BDR2L
8
H'F09B
Address break 8
2
Break address register 2E
BAR2E
8
H'F09D
Address break 8
2
Timer mode register G
TMG
8
H'FF84
Timer G
8
2
Input capture register GF
ICRGF
8
H'FF85
Timer G
8
2
Input capture register GR
ICRGR
8
H'FF86
Timer G
Event counter PWM compare
register
ECPWCR
16
H'FF8C
AEC*
2
Event counter PWM data
register
ECPWDR
16
H'FF8E
AEC*
2
Wakeup edge select register
WEGR
8
H'FF90
Interrupts
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 528 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
8
2
16
2
16
2
8
2
Section 25 List of Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Serial port control register
SPCR
8
H'FF91
SCI3
Input pin edge select register
AEGSR
8
1
H'FF92
8
2
AEC*
2
8
2
Event counter control register
ECCR
8
H'FF94
AEC*
2
8
2
Event counter control/status
register
ECCSR
8
H'FF95
AEC*
2
8
2
Event counter H
ECH
8
H'FF96
AEC*
2
8/16
2
2
8/16
2
Event counter L
ECL
8
H'FF97
AEC*
Serial mode register 3_1
SMR3_1
8
H'FF98
SCI3_1
8
3
Bit rate register 3_1
BRR3_1
8
H'FF99
SCI3_1
8
3
Serial control register 3_1
SCR3_1
8
H'FF9A
SCI3_1
8
3
Transmit data register 3_1
TDR3_1
8
H'FF9B
SCI3_1
8
3
Serial status register 3_1
SSR3_1
8
H'FF9C
SCI3_1
8
3
Receive data register 3_1
RDR3_1
8
H'FF9D
SCI3_1
LCD port control register
LCD control register
LCD control register 2
LCD trimming register
LPCR
LCR
LCR2
LTRMR
8
8
8
8
H'FFA0
H'FFA1
H'FFA2
H'FFA3
8
3
LCD*
4
8
2
LCD*
4
8
2
LCD*
4
8
2
LCD*
4
8
2
4
BGR control register
BGRMR
8
H'FFA4
LCD*
8
2
Serial extended mode register
SEMR
8
H'FFA6
SCI3_1
8
3
IrDA control register
IrCR
8
H'FFA7
IrDA
8
3
Serial mode register 3_2
SMR3_2
8
H'FFA8
SCI3_2
8
3
Bit rate register 3_2
BRR3_2
8
H'FFA9
SCI3_2
8
3
Serial control register 3_2
SCR3_2
8
H'FFAA
SCI3_2
8
3
Transmit data register 3_2
TDR3_2
8
H'FFAB
SCI3_2
8
3
Serial status register 3_2
SSR3_2
8
H'FFAC
SCI3_2
8
3
Receive data register 3_2
RDR3_2
8
H'FFAD
SCI3_2
8
3
Timer mode register WD
TMWD
8
H'FFB0
WDT*
3
8
2
Timer control/status register
WD1
TCSRWD1 8
H'FFB1
WDT*
3
8
2
Timer control/status register
WD2
TCSRWD2 8
H'FFB2
WDT*
3
8
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 529 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Timer counter WD
TCWD
8
H'FFB3
WDT*
Timer mode register C
TMC
8
H'FFB4
Timer counter C/Timer load
register C
TCC/TLC
8
Timer control register F
TCRF
Timer control/status register F
1
3
8
2
Timer C
8
2
H'FFB5
Timer C
8
2
8
H'FFB6
Timer F
8
2
TCSRF
8
H'FFB7
Timer F
8
2
Timer counter FH
TCFH
8
H'FFB8
Timer F
8/16
2
Timer counter FL
TCFL
8
H'FFB9
Timer F
8/16
2
Output compare register FH
OCRFH
8
H'FFBA
Timer F
8/16
2
Output compare register FL
OCRFL
8
H'FFBB
Timer F
8/16
2
A/D result register
ADRR
16
H'FFBC
A/D converter
16
2
A/D mode register
AMR
8
H'FFBE
A/D converter
8
2
A/D start register
ADSR
8
H'FFBF
A/D converter
8
2
Port mode register 1
PMR1
8
H'FFC0
I/O ports
8
2
Oscillator control register
OSCCR
8
H'FFC1
Clock pulse
generator
8
2
Port mode register 3
PMR3
8
H'FFC2
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register 4
PMR4
8
H'FFC3
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register 5
PMR5
8
H'FFC4
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register 9
PMR9
8
H'FFC8
I/O ports
8
2
Port mode register B
PMRB
8
H'FFCA
I/O ports
8
2
Port function control register
PFCR
8
H'FFCB
I/O ports
8
2
Serial port control register 2
SPCR2
8
H'FFCC
SCI3
8
2
PWM2 control register
PWCR2
8
H'FFCD
14-bit PWM_2
8
2
PWM2 data register
PWDR2
16
H'FFCE
14-bit PWM_2
16
2
PWM1 control register
PWCR1
8
H'FFD0
14-bit PWM_1
8
2
PWM1 data register
PWDR1
16
H'FFD2
14-bit PWM_1
16
2
Port data register 1
PDR1
8
H'FFD4
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 3
PDR3
8
H'FFD6
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 4
PDR4
8
H'FFD7
I/O ports
8
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 530 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Port data register 5
PDR5
8
H'FFD8
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 6
PDR6
8
H'FFD9
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 7
PDR7
8
H'FFDA
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 8
PDR8
8
H'FFDB
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register 9
PDR9
8
H'FFDC
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register A
PDRA
8
H'FFDD
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register B
PDRB
8
H'FFDE
I/O ports
8
2
Port data register C
PDRC
8
H'FFDF
I/O ports
8
2
Port pull-up control register 1
PUCR1
8
H'FFE0
I/O ports
8
2
Port pull-up control register 3
PUCR3
8
H'FFE1
I/O ports
8
2
Port pull-up control register 5
PUCR5
8
H'FFE2
I/O ports
8
2
Port pull-up control register 6
PUCR6
8
H'FFE3
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 1
PCR1
8
H'FFE4
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 3
PCR3
8
H'FFE6
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 4
PCR4
8
H'FFE7
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 5
PCR5
8
H'FFE8
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 6
PCR6
8
H'FFE9
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 7
PCR7
8
H'FFEA
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 8
PCR8
8
H'FFEB
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register 9
PCR9
8
H'FFEC
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register A
PCRA
8
H'FFED
I/O ports
8
2
Port control register C
PCRC
8
H'FFEE
I/O ports
8
2
System control register 1
SYSCR1
8
H'FFF0
SYSTEM
8
2
System control register 2
SYSCR2
8
H'FFF1
SYSTEM
8
2
Interrupt edge select register
IEGR
8
H'FFF2
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt enable register 1
IENR1
8
H'FFF3
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt enable register 2
IENR2
8
H'FFF4
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt mask register
INTM
8
H'FFF5
Interrupts
8
2
Interrupt request register 1
IRR1
8
H'FFF6
Interrupts
8
2
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 531 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register Name
Abbreviation
Bit
No.
Address*
Data
Bus
Access
Module Name Width State
Interrupt request register 2
IRR2
8
H'FFF7
Interrupts
8
2
Wakeup interrupt request
register
IWPR
8
H'FFF9
Interrupts
8
2
Clock halt register 1
CKSTPR1
8
H'FFFA
SYSTEM
8
2
Clock halt register 2
CKSTPR2
8
H'FFFB
SYSTEM
8
2
Clock halt register 3
CKSTPR3
8
H'FFFC
SYSTEM
8
2
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
Indicates the lower 16-bit address.
AEC: Asynchronous event counter
WDT: Watchdog timer
LCD: LCD controller/driver
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 532 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
1
Section 25 List of Registers
25.2
Register Bits
Register bit names of the on-chip peripheral modules are described below.
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
SCR4
TIE
RIE
TEIE
SOL
SOLP
SRES
TE
RE
SCI4
SCSR4
TDRE
RDRF
ORER
TEND
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TDR4
TDR47
TDR46
TDR45
TDR44
TDR43
TDR42
TDR41
TDR40
RDR4
RDR47
RDR46
RDR45
RDR44
RDR43
RDR42
RDR41
RDR40
FLMCR1

SWE
ESU
PSU
EV
PV
E
P
FLMCR2
FLER







FLPWCR
PDWND







EBR1
EB7
EB6
EB5
EB4
EB3
EB2
EB1
EB0
FENR
FLSHE







EBR2






EB9
EB8
SYSCR3







STS3
SYSTEM
TSTR





CST2
CST1

TPU
ROM
TSYR





SYNC2
SYNC1

PDRE
PE7
PE6
PE5
PE4
PE3
PE2
PE1
PE0
PDRF




PF3
PF2
PF1
PF0
PCRE
PCRE7
PCRE6
PCRE5
PCRE4
PCRE3
PCRE2
PCRE1
PCRE0
PCRF




PCRF3
PCRF2
PCRF1
PCRF0
PMRE



TMIC
IRQ0
UD
IRQ1
IRQ3
PMRF





IRQ4
NCS
TMIG
TCR_1

CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_1






MD1
MD0
TIOR_1
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_1



TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_1



TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNT_1
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
TGRA_1
I/O ports
TPU_1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 533 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
TGRB_1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
TPU_1
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PWCR3





PWCR32
PWCR31
PWCR30
PWDR3


PWDR313 PWDR312 PWDR311 PWDR310 PWDR39
PWDR38
PWDR37
PWDR36
PWDR35
PWDR34
PWDR33
PWDR32
PWDR31
PWDR30
TCR_2

CCLR1
CCLR0
CKEG1
CKEG0
TPSC2
TPSC1
TPSC0
TMDR_2






MD1
MD0
TIOR_2
IOB3
IOB2
IOB1
IOB0
IOA3
IOA2
IOA1
IOA0
TIER_2



TCIEV


TGIEB
TGIEA
TSR_2



TCFV


TGFB
TGFA
TCNT_2
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
Bit15
Bit14
Bit13
Bit12
Bit11
Bit10
Bit9
Bit8
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit1
Bit0
PWCR4





PWCR42
PWCR41
PWCR40
PWDR4


PWDR413 PWDR412 PWDR411 PWDR410 PWDR49
PWDR48
PWDR47
PWDR46
PWDR45
PWDR44
PWDR43
PWDR42
PWDR41
PWDR40
RTCFLG
FOIFG
WKIFG
DYIFG
HRIFG
MNIFG
SEIFG
05SEIFG
025SEIFG RTC
RSECDR
BSY
SC12
SC11
SC10
SC03
SC02
SC01
SC00
RMINDR
BSY
MN12
MN11
MN10
MN03
MN02
MN01
MN00
RHRDR
BSY

HR11
HR10
HR03
HR02
HR01
HR00
RWKDR
BSY




WK2
WK1
WK0
RTCCR1
RUN
12/24
PM
RST




RTCCR2
FOIE
WKIE
DYIE
HRIE
MNIE
1SEIE
05SEIE
025SEIE
SUB32CR
32KSTOP 






TGRA_2
TGRB_2
14-bit PWM_3
TPU_2
14-bit PWM_4
Clock pulse
generator
RTCCSR

RCS6
RCS5
SUB32K
RCS3
RCS2
RCS1
RCS0
RTC
ICCR1
ICE
RCVD
MST
TRS
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
IIC2
ICCR2
BBSY
SCP
SDAO
SDAOP
SCLO

IICRST

Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 534 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
ICMR
MLS
WAIT


BCWP
BC2
BC1
BC0
IIC2
ICIER
TIE
TEIE
RIE
NAKIE
STIE
ACKE
ACKBR
ACKBT
ICSR
TDRE
TEND
RDRF
NACKF
STOP
AL/OVE
AAS
ADZ
SAR
SVA6
SVA5
SVA4
SVA3
SVA2
SVA1
SVA0
FS
ICDRT
ICDRT7
ICDRT6
ICDRT5
ICDRT4
ICDRT3
ICDRT2
ICDRT1
ICDRT0
ICDRR
ICDRR7
ICDRR6
ICDRR5
ICDRR4
ICDRR3
ICDRR2
ICDRR1
ICDRR0
IPRA
IPRA7
IPRA6
IPRA5
IPRA4
IPRA3
IPRA2
IPRA1
IPRA0
IPRB
IPRB7
IPRB6
IPRB5
IPRB4
IPRB3
IPRB2
IPRB1
IPRB0
IPRC
IPRC7
IPRC6
IPRC5
IPRC4
IPRC3
IPRC2
IPRC1
IPRC0
IPRD
IPRD7
IPRD6
IPRD5
IPRD4
IPRD3
IPRD2
IPRD1
IPRD0
IPRE
IPRE7
IPRE6
IPRE5
IPRE4




IPRF
IPRF7
IPRF6
IPRF5
IPRF4
IPRF3
IPRF2


SMR3_3
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
BRR3_3
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
SCR3_3
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDR3_3
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
Interrupts
SCI3_3
SSR3_3
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
RDR3_3
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
ABRKCR2
RTINTE2
CSEL21
CSEL20
ACMP22
ACMP21
ACMP20
DCMP21
DCMP20
Address
ABRKSR2
ABIF2
ABIE2






break
BAR2H
BARH27
BARH26
BARH25
BARH24
BARH23
BARH22
BARH21
BARH20
BAR2L
BARL27
BARL26
BARL25
BARL24
BARL23
BARL22
BARL21
BARL20
BDR2H
BDRH27
BDRH26
BDRH25
BDRH24
BDRH23
BDRH22
BDRH21
BDRH20
BDR2L
BDRL27
BDRL26
BDRL25
BDRL24
BDRL23
BDRL22
BDRL21
BDRL20
BAR2E
BARE27
BARE26
BARE25
BARE24
BARE23
BARE22
BARE21
BARE20
TMG
OVFH
OVFL
OVIE
IIEGS
CCLR1
CCLR0
CKS1
CKS0
ICRGF
ICRGF7
ICRGF6
ICRGF5
ICRGF4
ICRGF3
ICRGF2
ICRGF1
ICRGF0
ICRGR
ICRGR7
ICRGR6
ICRGR5
ICRGR4
ICRGR3
ICRGR2
ICRGR1
ICRGR0
ECPWCR
ECPWCR15 ECPWCR14 ECPWCR13 ECPWCR12 ECPWCR11 ECPWCR10 ECPWCR9 ECPWCR8
Timer G
AEC*1
ECPWCR7 ECPWCR6 ECPWCR5 ECPWCR4 ECPWCR3 ECPWCR2 ECPWCR1 ECPWCR0
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 535 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
ECPWDR
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
ECPWDR15 ECPWDR14 ECPWDR13 ECPWDR12 ECPWDR11 ECPWDR10 ECPWDR9 ECPWDR8
Module
Name
1
AEC*
ECPWDR7 ECPWDR6 ECPWDR5 ECPWDR4 ECPWDR3 ECPWDR2 ECPWDR1 ECPWDR0
WEGR
WKEGS7
WKEGS6
WKEGS5
WKEGS4
WKEGS3
WKEGS2
WKEGS1
WKEGS0
Interrupts
SPCR


SPC32
SPC31
SCINV3
SCINV2
SCINV1
SCINV0
SCI3
AEGSR
AHEGS1
AHEGS0
ALEGS1
ALEGS0
AIEGS1
AIEGS0
ECPWME 
ECCR
ACKH1
ACKH0
ACKL1
ACKL0
PWCK2
PWCK1
PWCK0

ECCSR
OVH
OVL

CH2
CUEH
CUEL
CRCH
CRCL
ECH
ECH7
ECH6
ECH5
ECH4
ECH3
ECH2
ECH1
ECH0
ECL
ECL7
ECL6
ECL5
ECL4
ECL3
ECL2
ECL1
ECL0
SMR3_1
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
BRR3_1
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
SCR3_1
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDR3_1
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
SSR3_1
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
RDR3_1
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
LPCR
DTS1
DTS0
CMX

SGS3
SGS2
SGS1
SGS0
LCR

PSW
ACT
DISP
CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
LCR2
LCDAB
HCKS
CHG
SUPS




LTRMR
TRM3
TRM2
TRM1
TRM0

CTRM2
CTRM1
CTRM0
BGRMR
BGRSTPN 



BTRM2
BTRM1
BTRM0
SEMR




ABCS



SCI3_1
IrCR
IrE
IrCKS2
IrCKS1
IrCKS0




IrDA
SMR3_2
COM
CHR
PE
PM
STOP
MP
CKS1
CKS0
SCI3_2
BRR3_2
BRR7
BRR6
BRR5
BRR4
BRR3
BRR2
BRR1
BRR0
SCR3_2
TIE
RIE
TE
RE
MPIE
TEIE
CKE1
CKE0
TDR3_2
TDR7
TDR6
TDR5
TDR4
TDR3
TDR2
TDR1
TDR0
SSR3_2
TDRE
RDRF
OER
FER
PER
TEND
MPBR
MPBT
RDR3_2
RDR7
RDR6
RDR5
RDR4
RDR3
RDR2
RDR1
RDR0
TMWD




CKS3
CKS2
CKS1
CKS0
TCSRWD1
B6WI
TCWE
B4WI
TCSRWE
B2WI
WDON
BOWI
WRST
TCSRWD2
OVF
B5WI
WT/IT
B3WI
IEOVF



Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 536 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
AEC*
1
SCI3_1
LCD*3
WDT*2
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
TCWD
TCW7
TCW6
TCW5
TCW4
TCW3
TCW2
TCW1
TCW0
WDT*2
TMC
TMC7
TMC6
TMC5

TMC3
TMC2
TMC1
TMC0
Timer C
TCC/TLC
TCC7/
TCC6/
TCC5/
TCC4/
TCC3/
TCC2/
TCC1/
TCC0/
TLC7
TLC6
TLC5
TLC4
TLC3
TLC2
TLC1
TLC0
TCRF
TOLH
CKSH2
CKSH1
CKSH0
TOLL
CKSL2
CKSL1
CKSL0
TCSRF
OVFH
CMFH
OVIEH
CCLRH
OVFL
CMFL
OVIEL
CCLRL
TCFH
TCFH7
TCFH6
TCFH5
TCFH4
TCFH3
TCFH2
TCFH1
TCFH0
TCFL
TCFL7
TCFL6
TCFL5
TCFL4
TCFL3
TCFL2
TCFL1
TCFL0
OCRFH
OCRFH7
OCRFH6
OCRFH5
OCRFH4
OCRFH3
OCRFH2
OCRFH1
OCRFH0
OCRFL
OCRFL7
OCRFL6
OCRFL5
OCRFL4
OCRFL3
OCRFL2
OCRFL1
OCRFL0
ADRR
ADR9
ADR8
ADR7
ADR6
ADR5
ADR4
ADR3
ADR2
ADR1
ADR0






AMR

TRGE
CKS1
CKS0
CH3
CH2
CH1
CH0
ADSR
ADSF
LADS






PMR1






AEVL
AEVH
I/O ports
OSCCR

RFCUT



IRQAECF
OSCF

Clock pulse
Timer F
A/D converter
generator
PMR3







TMOW
PMR4





TMOFH
TMOFL
TMIF
PMR5
WKP7
WKP6
WKP5
WKP4
WKP3
WKP2
WKP1
WKP0
PMR9





IRQ4
PWM2
PWM1
PMRB



ADTSTCHG 
IRQ3
IRQ1
IRQ0
PFCR
CLKOUT1 CLKOUT0 
PWM4
PWM3

SC32S
SC31S
SPCR2



SPC33


SCINV5
SCINV4
SCI3
PWCR2





PWCR22
PWCR21
PWCR20
14-bit PWM_2
PWDR2


PWDR213 PWDR212 PWDR211 PWDR210 PWDR29
PWDR28
PWDR27
PWDR26
PWDR25
PWDR24
PWDR23
PWDR22
PWDR21
PWDR20
PWCR1





PWCR12
PWCR11
PWCR10
PWDR1


PWDR113 PWDR112 PWDR111 PWDR110 PWDR19
PWDR18
PWDR17
PWDR16
PWDR15
PWDR10
PWDR14
PWDR13
PWDR12
PWDR11
I/O ports
14-bit PWM_1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 537 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
I/O ports
PDR1

P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
P10
PDR3
P37
P36



P32
P31
P30
PDR4





P42
P41
P40
PDR5
P57
P56
P55
P54
P53
P52
P51
P50
PDR6
P67
P66
P65
P64
P63
P62
P61
P60
PDR7
P77
P76
P75
P74
P73
P72
P71
P70
PDR8
P87
P86
P85
P84
P83
P82
P81
P80
PDR9




P93
P92
P91
P90
PDRA




PA3
PA2
PA1
PA0
PDRB
PB7
PB6
PB5
PB4
PB3
PB2
PB1
PB0
PDRC
PC7
PC6
PC5
PC4
PC3
PC2
PC1
PC0
PUCR1

PUCR16
PUCR15
PUCR14
PUCR13
PUCR12
PUCR11
PUCR10
PUCR3
PUCR37
PUCR36





PUCR30
PUCR5
PUCR57
PUCR56
PUCR55
PUCR54
PUCR53
PUCR52
PUCR51
PUCR50
PUCR6
PUCR67
PUCR66
PUCR65
PUCR64
PUCR63
PUCR62
PUCR61
PUCR60
PCR1

PCR16
PCR15
PCR14
PCR13
PCR12
PCR11
PCR10
PCR3
PCR37
PCR36



PCR32
PCR31
PCR30
PCR4





PCR42
PCR41
PCR40
PCR5
PCR57
PCR56
PCR55
PCR54
PCR53
PCR52
PCR51
PCR50
PCR6
PCR67
PCR66
PCR65
PCR64
PCR63
PCR62
PCR61
PCR60
PCR7
PCR77
PCR76
PCR75
PCR74
PCR73
PCR72
PCR71
PCR70
PCR8
PCR87
PCR86
PCR85
PCR84
PCR83
PCR82
PCR81
PCR80
PCR9




PCR93
PCR92
PCR91
PCR90
PCRA




PCRA3
PCRA2
PCRA1
PCRA0
PCRC
PCRC7
PCRC6
PCRC5
PCRC4
PCRC3
PCRC2
PCRC1
PCRC0
SYSCR1
SSBY
STS2
STS1
STS0
LSON
TMA3
MA1
MA0
SYSCR2



NESEL
DTON
MSON
SA1
SA0
IEGR
NMIEG
TMIFEG
ADTRGNEG IEG4
IEG3

IEG1
IEG0
IENR1
IENRTC

IENWP
IEN3
IENEC2
IEN1
IEN0
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 538 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
IEN4
SYSTEM
Interrupts
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Module
Name
Interrupts
IENR2
IENDT
IENAD

IENTG
IENTFH
IENTFL
IENTC
IENEC
INTM






INTM1
INTM0
IRR1



IRR4
IRR3
IRREC2
IRRI1
IRRI0
IRR2
IRRDT
IRRAD

IRRTG
IRRTFH
IRRTFL
IRRTC
IRREC
IWPR
IWPF7
IWPF6
IWPF5
IWPF4
IWPF3
IWPF2
IWPF1
IWPF0
S4CK
ADCKSTP 
CKSTPR1
S31CK
S32CK
STP*
STP
STP
IICCKSTP PW2CK
3
CKSTPR2
CKSTPR3
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
3
ADBCK
TPUCK
STP
STP
S33CK
TCCKSTP TGCKSTP PW4CK
STP
TFCKSTP FROMCK
STP
STP
RTCCK
STP*
STP
LDCKSTP
AECCK
WDCK
PW1CK
STP
STP
STP
PW3CK


SYSTEM

STP
AEC: Asynchronous event counter
WDT: Watchdog timer
LCD: LCD controller/driver
This bit is available only for the flash memory version. In the masked ROM version, this
bit is reserved.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 539 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
25.3
Register States in Each Operating Mode
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module
SCR4
Initialized






SCR4
SCSR4
Initialized






TDR4
Initialized






RDR4
Initialized






FLMCR1
Initialized





Initialized
FLMCR2
Initialized






FLPWCR
Initialized






EBR1
Initialized





Initialized
FENR
Initialized






EBR2
Initialized





Initialized
SYSCR3
Initialized






SYSTEM
TSTR
Initialized






TPU
TSYR
Initialized






PDRE
Initialized






PDRF
Initialized






PCRE
Initialized






PCRF
Initialized






PMRE
Initialized






PMRF
Initialized






TCR_1
Initialized






TMDR_1
Initialized






TIOR_1
Initialized






TIER_1
Initialized






TSR_1
Initialized






TCNT_1
Initialized






TGRA_1
Initialized






TGRB_1
Initialized






PWCR3
Initialized






PWDR3
Initialized






Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 540 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
ROM
I/O ports
TPU_1
14-bit
PWM_3
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module
TCR_2
Initialized






TPU_2
TMDR_2
Initialized






TIOR_2
Initialized






TIER_2
Initialized






TSR_2
Initialized






TCNT_2
Initialized






TGRA_2
Initialized






TGRB_2
Initialized






PWCR4
Initialized






PWDR4
Initialized






RTCFLG







RSECDR







RMINDR







RHRDR







RWKDR







RTCCR1







RTCCR2







SUB32CR
Initialized






Clock
pulse
generator
RTCCSR
Initialized






RTC
ICCR1
Initialized






IIC2
ICCR2
Initialized






ICMR
Initialized






ICIER
Initialized






ICSR
Initialized






SAR
Initialized






ICDRT
Initialized






ICDRR
Initialized






IPRA
Initialized






IPRB
Initialized






IPRC
Initialized






14-bit
PWM_4
RTC
Interrupts
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 541 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module
IPRD
Initialized






Interrupts
IPRE
Initialized






IPRF
Initialized






SMR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
BRR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SCR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
TDR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SSR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
RDR3_3
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
ABRKCR2
Initialized






ABRKSR2
Initialized






BAR2H
Initialized






BAR2L
Initialized






BDR2H







BDR2L







BAR2E
Initialized






TMG
Initialized






ICRGF
Initialized






ICRGR
Initialized






ECPWCR
Initialized






ECPWDR
Initialized






WEGR
Initialized






Interrupts
SPCR
Initialized






SCI3
AEGSR
Initialized






AEC*1
ECCR
Initialized






ECCSR
Initialized






ECH
Initialized






ECL
Initialized






SMR3_1
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
BRR3_1
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SCR3_1
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 542 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
SCI3_3
Address
break
Timer G
AEC*1
SCI3_1
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
TDR3_1
Initialized


Initialized 
SSR3_1
Initialized


Initialized 
RDR3_1
Initialized


LPCR
Initialized

LCR
Initialized
LCR2
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module

Initialized
SCI3_1

Initialized
Initialized 

Initialized











Initialized






LTRMR
Initialized






BGRMR
Initialized






SEMR
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SCI3_1
IrCR
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
IrDA
SMR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SCI3_2
BRR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SCR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
TDR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
SSR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
RDR3_2
Initialized


Initialized 

Initialized
TMWD
Initialized






TCSRWD1
Initialized






TCSRWD2
Initialized






TCWD
Initialized






TMC
Initialized






TCC/TLC
Initialized






TCRF
Initialized






TCSRF
Initialized






TCFH
Initialized






TCFL
Initialized






OCRFH
Initialized






OCRFL
Initialized






ADRR







AMR
Initialized






ADSR
Initialized






LCD*3
WDT*2
Timer C
Timer F
A/D
converter
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 543 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module
PMR1
Initialized






I/O ports
OSCCR
Initialized






Clock
pulse
generator
PMR3
Initialized






I/O ports
PMR4
Initialized






PMR5
Initialized






PMR9
Initialized






PMRB
Initialized






PFCR
Initialized






SPCR2
Initialized






SCI3
PWCR2
Initialized






PWDR2
Initialized






14-bit
PWM_2
PWCR1
Initialized






PWDR1
Initialized






PDR1
Initialized






PDR3
Initialized






PDR4
Initialized






PDR5
Initialized






PDR6
Initialized






PDR7
Initialized






PDR8
Initialized






PDR9
Initialized






PDRA
Initialized






PDRB
Initialized






PDRC
Initialized






PUCR1
Initialized






PUCR3
Initialized






PUCR5
Initialized






PUCR6
Initialized






PCR1
Initialized






Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 544 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
14-bit
PWM_1
I/O ports
Section 25 List of Registers
Register
Abbreviation
Reset
Active
Sleep
Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
Module
PCR3
Initialized






I/O ports
PCR4
Initialized






PCR5
Initialized






PCR6
Initialized






PCR7
Initialized






PCR8
Initialized






PCR9
Initialized






PCRA
Initialized






PCRC
Initialized






SYSCR1
Initialized






SYSCR2
Initialized






IEGR
Initialized






IENR1
Initialized






IENR2
Initialized






INTM
Initialized






IRR1
Initialized






IRR2
Initialized






IWPR
Initialized






CKSTPR1
Initialized






CKSTPR2
Initialized






CKSTPR3
Initialized






SYSTEM
Interrupts
SYSTEM
Notes:  is not initialized.
1. AEC: Asynchronous event counter
2. WDT: Watchdog timer
3. LCD: LCD controller/driver
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 545 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 25 List of Registers
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 546 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.1
Absolute Maximum Ratings for F-ZTAT Version
Table 26.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Note
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +4.3
V
*
Analog power supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +4.3
V
Input voltage
Other than port B
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
Port B
AVin
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Topr
–20 to +75
(general
2
specifications)*
°C
Operating temperature
1
–40 to +85
(wide temperature
range
2
specifications)*
Storage temperature
Tstg
–55 to +125
°C
Notes: 1. Permanent damage may occur to the chip if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded.
Normal operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics.
Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
2. When the operating voltage (Vcc) for reading the flash memory is from 2.7 V to 3.6 V,
the operating temperature (Ta) for programming/erasing ranges from –20 to +75°C.
When the operating voltage (Vcc) for reading the flash memory is from 1.8 V to 3.6 V,
the operating temperature (Ta) for programming/erasing ranges from –20 to +50°C.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 547 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2
Electrical Characteristics for F-ZTAT Version
26.2.1
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range
The power supply voltage and operating range are indicated by the shaded region in the figures.
(1) System clock oscillator selected (10-MHz version)
fW (kHz)
fosc (MHz)
10.0
38.4
32.768
2.0
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
1.8
• All operating modes
• Refer to note
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
fW (kHz)
fosc (MHz)
(2) System clock oscillator selected (4-MHz version)
4.2
38.4
32.768
2.0
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
1.8
• All operating modes
• Refer to note
Note: * When using a resonator, hold the Vcc level in the range from 2.2 V to 3.6 V until the oscillation
stabilization time has elapsed after switching on.
Figure 26.1 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 548 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(3) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
Rosc used (reference value)
fW (kHz)
fosc (MHz)
10.0
38.4
32.768
0.5
1.8
2.7
3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• All operating modes
• Refer to note
Note: * When using a resonator, hold the Vcc level in the range from 2.2 V to 3.6 V until the oscillation
stabilization time has elapsed after switching on.
Figure 26.2 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 549 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(1) System clock oscillator selected (10-MHz version)
10.0
φ (MHz)
φSUB (kHz)
19.2
16.384
9.6
8.192
4.2
4.8
4.096
2.0
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode (other than CPU)
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (other than CPU)
• Watch mode (other than CPU)
φ (kHz)
1250
525
31.25
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (medium-speed) mode
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (other than CPU)
Figure 26.3 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 550 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
φ SUB (kHz)
(2) System clock oscillator selected (4-MHz version)
19.2
16.384
9.6
10.0
φ (MHz)
8.192
4.2
4.8
4.096
2.0
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode (other than CPU)
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (other than CPU)
• Watch mode (other than CPU)
1250
φ (kHz)
525
31.25
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (medium-speed) mode
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (other than CPU)
Figure 26.4 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 551 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(3) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
φ (MHz)
Rosc used (reference value)
φ SUB (kHz)
19.2
16.384
9.6
8.192
4.8
10.0
4.096
0.5
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode (other than CPU)
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (other than CPU)
• Watch mode (other than CPU)
Rosc used (reference value)
φ (kHz)
1250
7.8125
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (medium-speed) mode
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (other than CPU)
Figure 26.5 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 552 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(1) System clock oscillator selected (10-MHz version)
φ (MHz)
10.0
4.2
2.0
1.8
2.7
3.6 AVcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
(2) System clock oscillator selected (4-MHz version)
φ (MHz)
10.0
4.2
2.0
1.8
2.7
3.6 AVcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
Figure 26.6 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (1)
(3) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
φ (MHz)
Rosc used (reference value)
10.0
0.5
1.8
2.7
3.6 AVcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
Figure 26.7 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 553 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.2
DC Characteristics
Table 26.2 lists DC characteristics.
Table 26.2 DC Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Input high
voltage
Test
Condition
Symbol
Applicable Pins
VIH
RES, TEST, NMI* ,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ4, AEVL, AEVH,
TMIC, TMIF, TMIG,
ADTRG, SCK33,
SCK32, SCK31,
SCK4
Max.
Unit
0.9 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
IRQ0*5, IRQ1*5, IRQ3*5
0.9 VCC 
AVCC + 0.3
V
RXD33, RXD32,
RXD31, IrRxD, UD
0.8 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
OSC1
0.9 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
X1
0.9 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
P90 to P93,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC, TIOCA1,
TIOCA2, TIOCB1,
TIOCB2, SCL, SDA
0.8 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
PB0 to PB7
0.8 VCC 
AVCC + 0.3
V
IRQAEC
0.9 VCC 
VCC + 0.3
V
3
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 554 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Values
Min.
Typ.
Note
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Input low
voltage
Symbol
Applicable Pins
VIL
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
RES, TEST, NMI* ,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3,
IRQ4, IRQAEC,
AEVL, AEVH, TMIC,
TMIF, TMIG,
ADTRG, SCK33,
SCK32, SCK31,
SCK4
–0.3

0.1 VCC
V
RXD33, RXD32,
RXD31, IrRXD, UD
–0.3

0.2 VCC
V
OSC1
–0.3

0.1 VCC
V
X1
–0.3

0.1 VCC
V
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
P90 to P93,
PA0 to PA3,
PB0 to PB7,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC, TIOCA1,
TIOCB1, TIOCA2,
TIOCB2, SCL, SDA
–0.3

0.2 VCC
V
3
Note
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 555 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol
Output
high
voltage
VOH
Output low VOL
voltage
Test
Applicable Pins Condition
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
V
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3
–IOH = 1.0 mA
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC – 1.0


–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.3


P90 to P93
IOH = 1.0mA
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC – 1.0


IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.3


P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3
IOL = 0.4 mA


0.5
V
P90 to P93
IOL = 15 mA
VCC=2.7 to 3.6 V


1.0
V
IOL = 10 mA
VCC = 2.2 to 3.6 V


0.5
IOL = 8 mA
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V


0.5
IOL = 3.0 mA


0.4


0.2VCC
SCL, SDA
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
IOL = 3.0 mA
VCC = 1.8 to 3.0 V
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 556 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
V
Note
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Input/output  IIL 
leakage
current
Pull-up
MOS
current
–Ip
Input
CIN
capacitance
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µA
TEST, NMI* ,
OSC1, X1,
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
IRQAEC,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
P90 to P93
VIN = 0.5 V to VCC –
0.5 V


1.0
PB0 to PB7
VIN = 0.5 V to AVCC –
0.5 V


1.0
P10 to P16,
P30,
P36, P37,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67
VCC = 3.0 V, VIN = 0 V
30

180
µA
All input pins
except power
supply pin
f = 1 MHz, VIN = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C


15.0
pF
3
Note
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 557 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Active mode IOPE1
supply
current
IOPE2
Sleep mode ISLEEP
supply
current
VCC
VCC
VCC
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 558 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max. Unit
Note
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz

1.1

Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
*4
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = Rosc

3.7

Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz

3.4

Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz

7.4
11.0
*1 *2
Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz, φosc/64

0.4

Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz, φosc/64

0.7

Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz, φosc/64

1.1
1.5
*1 *2
VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz

1.0

VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz

2.5

Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz

5.2
7.5
*1 *2
mA
mA
mA
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
*4
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ *1 *2
*4
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Subactive
ISUB
mode supply
current
VCC
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max. Unit
Note
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
(φSUB = φW/8)

9

*1 *2
Reference value
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
(φSUB = φW/2)

27
50
µA
*1 *2
Subsleep
ISUBSP
mode supply
current
VCC
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
(φSUB = φW/2)

5.5
9.0
µA
*1 *2
Watch mode IWATCH
supply
current
VCC
VCC = 1.8 V, Ta = 25°C 
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
0.5

µA
*1 *2
Reference value

1.5
5.0
VCC = 3.0 V, Ta = 25°C 
32-kHz crystal
resonator not used
0.1


1.0
5.0
1.5


VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
Standby
ISTBY
mode supply
current
VCC
32-kHz crystal
resonator not used
RAM data
retaining
voltage
VRAM
VCC
*1 *2
µA
*1 *2
Reference value
*1 *2
V
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 559 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max. Unit
Allowable
output low
current (per
pin)
IOL
Output pins
except port 9


0.5
P90 to P93


15.0
Allowable
output low
current
(total)
ΣIOL
Output pins
except port 9


20.0
Port 9


60.0
Allowable
output high
current (per
pin)
–IOH
Vcc = 2.7 to 3.6 V


2.0
Vcc = 1.8 to 3.6 V


0.2
Allowable
output high
current
(total)
Σ – IOH


10.0
Item
All output pins
All output pins
Note
mA
mA
mA
mA
Notes: 1. Pin states during current measurement.
Mode
RES Pin Internal State
Active (high-speed)
VCC
mode (IOPE1)
Only CPU operates
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
VCC
System clock oscillator:
crystal resonator
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Active (medium-speed)
Subclock oscillator:
mode (IOPE2)
Pin X1 = GND
Sleep mode
VCC
Only on-chip timers operate
VCC
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Subactive mode
VCC
Only CPU operates
VCC
Subsleep mode
VCC
Only on-chip timers operate, CPU
System clock oscillator:
crystal resonator
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
VCC
stops
Subclock oscillator:
crystal resonator
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Watch mode
VCC
Only time base operates, CPU stops VCC
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers both stop
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
32KSTOP = 1
VCC
System clock oscillator:
crystal resonator
Subclock oscillator:
crystal resonator
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 560 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excludes current in pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers.
Used for the determination of user mode or boot mode when the reset is released.
Only for 4-MHz version.
When IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ3 in PMRB are set to 0, and IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ3 in
PMRE are set to 1, the maximum value is VCC + 0.3 (V).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 561 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.3
AC Characteristics
Table 26.3 lists the control signal timing, table 26.4 lists the serial interface timing, and table 26.5
2
lists the I C bus interface timing.
Table 26.3 Control Signal Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Item
System clock
oscillation
frequency
Applicable
Symbol Pins
fOSC
OSC1, OSC2
System clock on- fRosc
chip oscillation
frequency
OSC clock (φOSC) tOSC
cycle time
OSC1, OSC2
System clock on- tROSC
chip oscillation
clock (φROSC)
cycle time
System clock (φ) tcyc
cycle time
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 562 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Values
Test Condition
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
2.0
—
10.0
MHz
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
2.0
—
4.2
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
selected
VCC = 1.8 to 3.0 V
0.5
—
10.0
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
100
—
500
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
238
—
500
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
selected
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
100
—
2000
1
—
64
tOSC
—
—
32
µs
Reference
Figure
*3
ns
Figure
26.14
*3
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Subclock
oscillation
frequency
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Values
Test Condition
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
fW
X1, X2
—
32.768 —
or 38.4
kHz
Watch clock (φW) tW
cycle time
X1, X2
—
30.5 or —
26.0
µs
Figure
26.14
2
—
8
tW
*1
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Ceramic resonator —
(Vcc = 2.2 to 3.6 V)
20
45
µs
Ceramic resonator
(other than above)
—
80
—
Crystal resonator
(VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V)
—
0.8
2.0
Crystal resonator
(VCC = 2.2 to 3.6 V)
—
1.2
3.0
Other than above
—
—
50
ms
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
At switching on
—
—
25
µs
*3
X1, X2
VCC = 2.2 to 3.6 V
—
—
2
s
Figure 5.5
Other than above
—
4
—
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
40
—
—
ns
Figure
26.14
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
95
—
—
—
15.26
or
13.02
—
Subclock (φSUB)
cycle time
tsubcyc
Instruction cycle
time
Oscillation
trc
stabilization time
External clock
high width
tCPH
OSC1, OSC2
OSC1
X1
Figure
26.23
ms
µs
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 563 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
External clock
low width
Applicable
Symbol Pins
tCPL
Values
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
40
—
—
ns
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
95
—
—
—
15.26
or
13.02
—
µs
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
—
—
10
ns
Figure
26.14
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
—
—
24
—
—
55.0
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
—
—
10
ns
Figure
26.14
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
—
—
24
X1
—
—
55.0
RES
10
—
—
tcyc
Figure
26.15
*2
OSC1
X1
External clock
rising time
tCPr
OSC1
X1
External clock
falling time
RES pin low
width
tCPf
tREL
OSC1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 564 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Reference
Figure
Test Condition
Figure
26.14
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Input pin high
width
Applicable
Symbol Pins
tIH
Input pin low
width
tIL
TCLKA,
TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
TCLKA,
TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
2
—
tcyc
—
tsubcyc
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
50
—
—
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
110
—
—
Single edge
specified
1.5
—
—
Both edges
specified
2.5
—
—
2
—
—
IRQ0, IRQ1,
NMI,
IRQ3, IRQ4,
IRQAEC,
WKP0 to
WKP7,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG,
ADTRG
AEVL, AEVH
tTCKWL
Test Condition
IRQ0, IRQ1,
NMI,
IRQ3, IRQ4,
IRQAEC,
WKP0 to
WKP7,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG,
ADTRG
AEVL, AEVH
tTCKWH
Values
50
—
—
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
(4-MHz version)
110
—
—
Single edge
specified
1.5
—
—
Both edges
specified
2.5
—
—
Figure
26.16
ns
tcyc
Figure
26.19
tcyc
Figure
26.16
tsubcyc
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
(10-MHz version)
Reference
Figure
ns
tcyc
Figure
26.19
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 565 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Values
Test Condition
UD pin minimum UD
transition width
Min. Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
4
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
Figure
26.21
—
Notes: 1. Selected with the SA1 and SA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
2. For details on the power-on reset characteristics, refer to table 26.8 and figure 26.18.
3. The specifications may vary due to the effects of temperature, power-supply voltage,
and dispersion of product lots. Thorough evaluation under the actual conditions of use
is essential in the design of systems. Please confirm with our sales representatives for
actual specification.
Table 26.4 Serial Interface Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Item
Input clock
cycle
Asynchronous
Symbol Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
tscyc
4
—
—
6
—
—
tcyc or
tsubcyc
Figure
26.17
Clock
synchronous
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
—
0.6
tscyc
Figure
26.17
Transmit data delay time
(clock synchronous)
tTXD
—
—
1
tcyc or
tsubcyc
Figure
26.18
Receive data setup time
(clock synchronous)
tRXS
100
—
—
ns
Figure
26.18
Receive data hold time
(clock synchronous)
tRXH
—
—
ns
Figure
26.18
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 566 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
Other than above
238
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
100
Other than above
238
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
2
Table 26.5 I C Bus Interface Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise
specified.
Item
Symbol
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
SCL input cycle time
tSCL
12tcyc + 600
—
—
ns
SCL input high width
tSCLH
3tcyc + 300
—
—
ns
SCL input low width
tSCLL
5tcyc + 300
—
—
ns
Falling time for SCL and SDA
inputs
tSf
—
—
300
ns
Pulse width of spike on SCL and
SDA to be suppressed
tSP
—
—
1tcyc
ns
SDA input bus-free time
tBUF
5tcyc
—
—
ns
Start condition input hold time
tSTAH
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Repeated start condition input
setup time
tSTAS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Stop condition input setup time
tSTOS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Data-input setup time
tSDAS
1tcyc + 20
—
—
ns
Data-input hold time
tSDAH
0
—
—
ns
Capacitive load of SCL and SDA
Cb
0
—
400
pF
Falling time of SCL and SDA
output
tSf
—
—
300
ns
Reference
Figure
Figure
26.20
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 567 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.4
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 26.6 lists the A/D converter characteristics.
Table 26.6 A/D Converter Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Analog power
supply voltage
AVCC
Analog input
voltage
Analog power
supply current
Values
Test Condition
Min.
Typ. Max.
Unit Notes
AVCC
1.8
—
3.6
V
AVIN
AN0 to AN7
–0.3
—
AVCC + 0.3
V
AIOPE
AVCC
—
—
1.0
mA
AISTOP1
AVCC
—
600
—
µA
*2
Reference
value
AISTOP2
AVCC
—
—
5
µA
*3
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN0 to AN7
—
—
15.0
pF
Allowable signal
source
impedance
RAIN
—
—
10.0
kΩ
—
—
10
bits
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
—
—
±3.5
LSB
AVCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
—
—
±5.5
Other than above
—
—
±7.5
—
—
±0.5
LSB
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
—
—
±4.0
LSB
AVCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
—
—
±6.0
Other than above
—
—
±8.0
AVCC = 3.0 V
Resolution (data
length)
Nonlinearity error
Quantization
error
Absolute
accuracy
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 568 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
*1
*4
*4
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Conversion time
Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Values
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Notes
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
12.4
—
124
µs
System clock
oscillator
selected
7.8
15.5
31
µs
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
selected
Reference
value
(fRosc = 4 MHz)
29.5
—
124
µs
System clock
oscillator
selected
31
62
124
µs
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
selected
Reference
value
(fRosc = 1 MHz)
Other than
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
Notes: 1. Connect AVCC to VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current flowing through the ladder resistor while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at a reset, in standby or watch mode while the A/D converter is
idle, or in the module standby state.
4. Conversion time is 29.5 µs.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 569 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.5
LCD Characteristics
Table 26.7 shows the LCD characteristics.
Table 26.7 LCD Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol
Pins
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Notes
Segment driver drop
VDS
SEG1 to
ID = 2 µA
—
—
0.6
V
*1
SEG40
V1 = 2.7 to 3.6 V
COM1 to
ID = 2 µA
—
—
0.3
V
*1
COM4
V1 = 2.7 to 3.6 V
1.5
3.0
7.0
MΩ
2.2
—
3.6
V
*2
voltage
Common driver drop
VDC
voltage
LCD power supply
RLCD
Between V1 and VSS
split-resistance
LCD display voltage
VLCD
V1
V3 power supply
VLCD3
V3
Between V3 and VSS
0.9
1.0
1.1
V
*3*4
VLCD2
V2
Between V2 and VSS
—
2.0
—
V
*3*4
—
V
*3*4
—
µA
Reference
voltage
V2 power supply
(VLCD3 × 2)
voltage
V1 power supply
VLCD1
V1
Between V1 and VSS
—
(VLCD3 × 3)
voltage
3-V constant voltage
3.0
ILCD
Vcc
LCD power supply
circuit supply current
Vcc = 2.7 V
—
12
4 5
Booster clock:
value* *
32.768 kHz
Notes: 1. The voltage drop from power supply pins V1, V2, V3, and VSS to each segment pin or
common pin.
2. When the LCD display voltage is supplied from an external power source, ensure that
the following relationship is maintained: V1 ≥ V2 ≥ V3 ≥ VSS.
3. The value when the LCD power supply split-resistor is separated and 3-V constant
voltage power supply circuit is driven.
4. For details on the register (BGRMR) setting range when the voltage of the V3 pin is set
to 1.0 V, refer to section 21.3.5, BGR Control Register (BGRMR).
5. Includes the supply current of the band-gap reference circuit (BGR) (operation).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 570 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.6
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
Table 26.8 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V,
Ta = −20 to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications), unless
otherwise specified.
Values
Item
Test
Symbol Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
Reset voltage
V_rst
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0.9VCC
V
Figure 23.2
Power supply rise time
t_vtr
The Vcc rise time should be shorter than
half the RES rise time.
Reset count time
t_out
0.8
—
4.0
µs
0.8
—
16.0
µs
Reset count time
t_cr
On-chip pull-up resistance
RP
On-chip
oscillator
for system
clock
selected
(Reference
value)
Adjustable by the value of the external
capacitor of the RES pin.
Vcc = 3.0 V
60
100
—
kΩ
Figure 23.1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 571 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.7
Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 26.9 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V,
Ta = −20 to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications),
unless otherwise specified.
Item
Symbol
On-chip watchdog
timer oscillator
overflow time
tovf
Note:
*
Applicable
Pins
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Item
Notes
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Indicates the period from the start of counting at 0 to the generation of an internal reset
when the counter reaches 255 in the case where the on-chip watchdog timer oscillator
is selected.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 572 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.2.8
Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 26.10 lists the flash memory characteristics.
Table 26.10 Flash Memory Characteristics
Condition A:
AVCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, VCC = 2.7 V to 3.6 V (operating voltage range in
reading), VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V (operating voltage range in programming/erasing),
Ta = –20 to +75°C (operating temperature range in programming/erasing: regular specifications,
wide-range specifications)
Condition B:
AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V (operating voltage range in
reading), VCC = 3.0 V to 3.6 V (operating voltage range in programming/erasing),
Ta = –20 to +50°C (operating temperature range in programming/erasing: regular specifications)
Values
Item
Symbol
1
2
Programming time (per 128 bytes)* * *
1
3
Erasing time (per block)* * *
4
6
Maximum programming count
Test Condition Min.
tP
—
tE
—
Max.
Unit
7
200
ms
1200
ms
—
Times
100
8
NWEC
Typ.
1000* *
11
10000*
9
100*8*12
10000*9 —
Data retention time
tDRP
10*10
—
—
Years
Programming
Wait time after setting
SWE bit*1
x
1
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting
PSU bit*1
y
50
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting P
bit*1*4
z1
1≤n≤6
28
30
32
µs
z2
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000
198
200
202
µs
z3
Additionalprogramming
8
10
12
µs
Wait time after clearing P
bit*1
α
5
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
PSU bit*1
β
5
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting PV γ
bit*1
4
—
—
µs
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 573 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Programming
Erase
Symbol
Test Condition Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Wait time after dummy
write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
PV bit*1
η
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
SWE bit*1
θ
100
—
—
µs
Maximum programming
count*1*4*5
N
—
—
1000
Times
Wait time after setting
SWE bit*1
x
1
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting
ESU bit*1
y
100
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting E
bit*1*6
z
10
—
100
ms
Wait time after clearing E
bit*1
α
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
ESU bit*1
β
10
—
—
µs
Wait time after setting EV γ
bit*1
20
—
—
µs
Wait time after dummy
write*1
ε
2
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
EV bit*1
η
4
—
—
µs
Wait time after clearing
SWE bit*1
θ
100
—
—
µs
Maximum erasing
count*1*6*7
N
—
—
120
Times
Notes: 1. Make the time settings in accordance with the programming/erasing algorithms.
2. The programming time for 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time for which the P bit in the
flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The programming-verifying time is not
included.)
3. The time required to erase one block. (Indicates the total time for which the E bit in the
flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) is set. The erasing-verifying time is not
included.)
4. Programming time maximum value (tP (max.)) = wait time after setting P bit (z) ×
maximum programming count (N)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 574 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
5. Set the maximum programming count (N) according to the actual set values of z1, z2,
and z3, so that it does not exceed the programming time maximum value (tP (max.)).
The wait time after setting P bit (z1, z2) should be changed as follows according to the
value of the programming count (n).
Programming count (n)
1≤n≤6
z1 = 30 µs
7 ≤ n ≤ 1000
z2 = 200 µs
6. Erasing time maximum value (tE (max.)) = wait time after setting E bit (z) × maximum
erasing count (N)
7. Set the maximum erasing count (N) according to the actual set value of (z), so that it
does not exceed the erasing time maximum value (tE (max.)).
8. The minimum number of times in which all characteristics are guaranteed following
reprogramming. (The guarantee covers the range from 1 to the minimum value.)
9. Reference value at 25°C. (Guideline showing programming count over which
functioning will be retained under normal circumstances.)
10. Data retention characteristics within the range indicated in the specifications, including
the minimum programming count.
11. Applies to an operating voltage range when reading data of 2.7 to 3.6 V.
12. Applies to an operating voltage range when reading data of 1.8 to 3.6 V.
26.3
Absolute Maximum Ratings for Masked ROM Version
Table 26.11 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 26.11 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item
Symbol
Value
Unit
Note
Power supply voltage
VCC
–0.3 to +4.3
V
*
Analog power supply voltage
AVCC
–0.3 to +4.3
V
Input voltage
Other than port B
Vin
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
Port B
AVin
–0.3 to AVCC +0.3
V
Topr
–20 to +75
(regular specifications)
°C
Operating temperature
–40 to +85
(wide-range specifications)
Storage temperature
Note:
*
Tstg
–55 to +125
°C
Permanent damage may occur to the chip if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded.
Normal operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics.
Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 575 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4
Electrical Characteristics for Masked ROM Version
26.4.1
Power Supply Voltage and Operating Range
The power supply voltage and operating range are indicated by the shaded region in the figures.
(1) System clock oscillator selected
fosc (MHz)
10.0
4.2
2.0
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode (other than CPU)
Figure 26.8 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (1)
(2) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
fW (kHz)
fosc (MHz)
Rosc used (reference value)
10.0
38.4
32.768
0.5
1.8
2.7
3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• All operating modes
• Refer to note
Note: * When using a resonator, hold the Vcc level in the range from 2.2 V to 3.6 V until the oscillation
stabilization time has elapsed after switching on.
Figure 26.9 Power Supply Voltage and Oscillation Frequency Range (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 576 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(1) System clock oscillator selected
10.0
φ (MHz)
φSUB (kHz)
19.2
16.384
9.6
8.192
4.2
4.8
4.096
2.0
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode (other than CPU)
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (other than CPU)
• Watch mode (other than CPU)
1250
φ (kHz)
525
31.25
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (medium-speed) mode
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode (other than CPU)
Figure 26.10 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 577 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
φ SUB (kHz)
(2) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
Rosc used (reference value)
19.2
16.384
9.6
φ (MHz)
8.192
10.0
4.8
4.096
0.5
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
1.8 2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Subactive mode
• Subsleep mode (other than CPU)
• Watch mode (other than CPU)
φ (kHz)
Rosc used (reference value)
1250
7.8125
1.8
2.7 3.6 Vcc (V)
• Active (medium-speed) mode
• Sleep (medium-speed) mode
Figure 26.11 Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range (2)
(1) System clock oscillator selected
φ (MHz)
10.0
4.2
2.0
1.8
2.7
3.6 AVcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
Figure 26.12 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 578 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
(2) On-chip oscillator for system clock selected
φ (MHz)
Rosc used (reference value)
10.0
0.5
1.8
2.7
3.6 AVcc (V)
• Active (high-speed) mode
• Sleep (high-speed) mode
Figure 26.13 Analog Power Supply Voltage and Operating Frequency Range of
A/D Converter (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 579 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4.2
DC Characteristics
Table 26.12 lists the DC characteristics.
Table 26.12 DC Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Input high
voltage
VIH
Values
Min.
Typ. Max.
Unit
RES, TEST, NMI,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ4, AEVL, AEVH,
TMIC, TMIF, TMIG, ADTRG,
SCK33, SCK32,
SCK31
0.9 VCC —
IRQ0∗4, IRQ1∗4, IRQ3∗4
0.9 VCC —
AVCC + 0.3 V
RXD33, RXD32,
RXD31, IrRXD, UD
0.8 VCC —
VCC + 0.3
V
OSC1
0.9 VCC —
VCC + 0.3
V
X1
0.9 VCC —
VCC + 0.3
V
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
P90 to P93,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC,
TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2,
TIOCB2, SCL, SDA
0.8 VCC —
VCC + 0.3
V
PB0 to PB7
0.8VCC
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
IRQAEC
0.9VCC
—
VCC + 0.3
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 580 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Test
Condition
VCC + 0.3
V
V
Note
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Input low
voltage
VIL
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Unit
RES, TEST, NMI,
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQ0, IRQ1, IRQ3,
IRQ4, IRQAEC,
AEVL, AEVH,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG, ADTRG,
SCK33, SCK32,
SCK31
–0.3
—
0.1VCC
V
RXD33, RXD32, RXD31,
IrRXD, UD
–0.3
—
0.2VCC
V
OSC1
–0.3
—
0.1VCC
V
X1
–0.3
—
0.1VCC
V
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
P90 to P93,
PA0 to PA3,
PB0 to PB7,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
TCLKA, TCLKB, TCLKC,
TIOCA1, TIOCB1, TIOCA2,
TIOCB2, SCL, SDA
–0.3
—
0.2VCC
V
Note
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 581 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Output
high
voltage
VOH
Output low VOL
voltage
Values
Min.
Unit
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3
–IOH = 1.0 mA
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6V
VCC – 1.0 —
—
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.3 —
—
P90 to P93
–IOH = 1.0 mA
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6V
VCC – 1.0 —
—
–IOH = 0.1 mA
VCC – 0.3 —
—
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3
IOL = 0.4 mA
—
—
0.5
V
P90 to P93
IOL = 15 mA
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6V
—
—
1.0
V
IOL = 10 mA
VCC = 2.2 to 3.6V
—
—
0.5
IOL = 8 mA
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6V
—
—
0.5
IOL = 3.0 mA
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6V
—
—
0.4
IOL = 3.0 mA
VCC = 1.8 to 2.0V
—
—
0.2 VCC
SCL, SDA
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 582 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Test
Condition
V
V
Note
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol
Input/output | IIL |
leakage
current
Pull-up
MOS
current
–Ip
Input
CIN
capacitance
Applicable Pins
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Unit
TEST, NMI,
OSC1, X1,
P10 to P16,
P30 to P32,
P36, P37,
P40 to P42,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
IRQAEC,
PA0 to PA3,
PC0 to PC7,
PE0 to PE7,
PF0 to PF3,
P90 to P93
VIN = 0.5 V to VCC –
0.5 V
—
—
1.0
PB0 to PB7
VIN = 0.5 V to AVCC –
0.5 V
—
—
1.0
P10 to P16,
P30,
P36, P37,
P50 to P57,
P60 to P67
VCC = 3 V, VIN = 0 V
30
—
180
µA
All input pins
except power
supply pin
f = 1 MHz, VIN = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
—
—
15.0
pF
Note
µA
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 583 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins
Active mode IOPE1
supply
current
IOPE2
Sleep mode ISLEEP
supply
current
VCC
VCC
VCC
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 584 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Unit Note
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz
—
0.7
—
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = ROSC
—
2.2
—
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz
—
2.6
—
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
Active (high-speed)
mode, VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
—
6.0
9.0
*1 *2
Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz, φosc/64
—
0.1
—
Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz, φosc/64
—
0.4
—
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
—
Active (mediumspeed) mode,
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz, φosc/64
0.6
0.8
*1 *2
VCC = 1.8 V,
fOSC = 2 MHz
—
0.3
—
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 4 MHz
—
1.2
—
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
VCC = 3.0 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
—
2.5
4.0
*1 *2
mA
mA
mA
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
Max. guideline
= 1.1 × typ.*1 *2
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Subactive
ISUB
mode supply
current
VCC
Values
Min.
Unit Note
µA
VCC = 1.8 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator
(φSUB = φW/2)
—
6.5
—
Reference value
*1 *2
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator
(φSUB = φW/8)
—
5.5
—
Reference value
*1 *2
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator
(φSUB = φW/2)
—
11
17
*1 *2
Subsleep
ISUBSP
mode supply
current
VCC
VCC = 2.7 V,
LCD lighting,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used
(φSUB = φW/2)
—
5.0
8.5
µA
*1 *2
Watch mode IWATCH
supply
current
VCC
VCC = 1.8 V, Ta = 25°C —
32-kHz crystal
resonator used,
LCD not used
0.5
—
µA
*1 *2
VCC = 2.7 V,
32-kHz crystal
resonator used,
LCD not used
—
1.5
5.0
VCC = 3.0 V, Ta =
25°C,
32-kHz crystal
resonator not used
—
0.1
—
32-kHz crystal
resonator not used
—
1.0
5.0
Standby
ISTBY
mode supply
current
VCC
Reference value
*1 *2
µA
Reference value
*1 *2
*1 *2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 585 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Test
Symbol Applicable Pins Condition
Min.
RAM data
retaining
voltage
VRAM
VCC
1.5
—
—
V
Permissible
output low
current
(per pin)
IOL
Output pins
except port 9
—
—
0.5
mA
P90 to P93
—
—
15.0
Permissible
output low
current
(total)
ΣIOL
Output pins
except port 9
—
—
20.0
Port 9
—
—
60.0
Permissible
output high
current
(per pin)
–IOH
Vcc = 2.7 to 3.6 V
—
—
2.0
Vcc = 1.8 to 3.6 V
—
—
0.2
Permissible
output high
current
(total)
Σ – IOH
—
—
10.0
Item
All output pins
All output pins
Unit Note
mA
mA
mA
Notes: 1. Pin states during current measurement.
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Active (high-speed)
VCC
Only CPU operates
VCC
System clock oscillator:
mode (IOPE1)
Crystal resonator
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Active (medium-speed)
Subclock oscillator:
mode (IOPE2)
Pin X1 = GND
Sleep mode
VCC
Only on-chip timers operate
VCC
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Subactive mode
VCC
Only CPU operates
VCC
Crystal resonator
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Subsleep mode
VCC
Only on-chip timers operate,
VCC
CPU stops
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Watch mode
VCC
Only time base operates, CPU
stops
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 586 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
System clock oscillator:
VCC
Subclock oscillator:
Crystal resonator
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Mode
RES Pin
Internal State
Other Pins
Oscillator Pins
Standby mode
VCC
CPU and timers both stop
VCC
System clock oscillator:
On-chip WDT oscillator is off
32KSTOP = 1
Crystal resonator
Subclock oscillator:
Crystal resonator
2. Excludes current in pull-up MOS transistors and output buffers.
3. When IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ3 in PMRB are set to 0, and IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ3 in
PMRE are set to 1, the maximum value is VCC + 0.3 (V).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 587 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4.3
AC Characteristics
Table 26.13 lists the control signal timing, table 26.14 lists the serial interface timing, and table
2
26.15 lists the I C bus interface timing.
Table 26.13 Control Signal Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
OSC1, OSC2 VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
2.0
—
10.0
MHz
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
2.0
—
4.2
System clock on- fRosc
chip oscillation
frequency
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
selected
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
0.5
—
10.0
OSC clock (φOSC) tOSC
cycle time
OSC1, OSC2 VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
100
—
500
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
238
—
500
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
selected
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
100
—
2000
1
—
64
tOSC
—
—
32
µs
System clock
oscillation
frequency
fOSC
System clock on- tROSC
chip oscillation
clock (φROSC) cycle
time
System clock (φ) tcyc
cycle time
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 588 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Test Condition
Reference
Figure
*3
ns
Figure
26.14
*3
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Values
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
fW
X1, X2
—
32.768 —
or 38.4
kHz
Watch clock (φW) tW
cycle time
X1, X2
—
30.5 or —
26.0
µs
Figure
26.14
2
—
8
tW
*1
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
OSC1, OSC2 Ceramic resonator —
(Vcc = 2.2 to 3.6 V)
20
45
µs
Ceramic resonator —
(Other than above)
80
—
Crystal resonator
—
(Vcc = 2.7 to 3.6 V)
0.8
2.0
Crystal resonator
—
(Vcc = 2.2 to 3.6 V)
1.2
3.0
Other than above
—
—
50
ms
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
At switching on
—
—
25
µs
*3
X1, X2
VCC = 2.2 to 3.6V
—
—
2
s
Figure 5.5
Other than above
—
4
—
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
40
—
—
ns
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V
95
—
—
Figure
26.14
—
15.26
or
13.02
—
Subclock
oscillator
oscillation
frequency
Subclock (φSUB)
cycle time
tsubcyc
Instruction cycle
time
Oscillation
trc
stabilization time
External clock
high width
tCPH
OSC1
X1
Figure
26.23
ms
µs
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 589 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Values
Item
Symbol Applicable Pins Test Condition
External clock
low width
tCPL
Typ.
Max.
Unit
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V 40
—
—
ns
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V 95
—
—
15.26
or
13.02
—
µs
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V —
—
10
ns
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V —
—
24
—
—
55.0
ns
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V —
—
10
ns
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V —
—
24
X1
—
—
55.0
ns
OSC1
X1
External clock
rising time
tCPr
OSC1
—
X1
External clock
falling time
tCPf
OSC1
Min.
Reference
Figure
Figure
26.14
Figure
26.14
Figure
26.14
RES pin low
width
tREL
RES
10
—
—
tcyc
Figure
26.15*2
Input pin high
width
tIH
IRQ0, IRQ1,
NMI,
IRQ3, IRQ4,
IRQAEC,
WKP0 to WKP7,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG,
ADTRG
2
—
—
tcyc
Figure
26.16
AEVL, AEVH
tTCKWH
TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 590 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
tsubcyc
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V 50
—
—
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V 110
—
—
Single edge
specified
1.5
—
—
Both edges
specified
2.5
—
—
ns
tcyc
Figure
26.19
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Input pin low
width
Applicable
Symbol Pins
tIL
UD pin minimum UD
transition width
Test Condition
IRQ0, IRQ1,
NMI,
IRQ3, IRQ4,
IRQAEC,
WKP0 to WKP7,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG,
ADTRG
AEVL, AEVH
tTCKWL
Values
TCLKA, TCLKB,
TCLKC,
TIOCA1,
TIOCB1,
TIOCA2,
TIOCB2
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
2
—
—
tcyc
tsubcyc
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V 50
—
—
VCC = 1.8 to 3.6 V 110
—
—
Single edge
specified
1.5
—
—
Both edges
specified
2.5
—
—
4
—
—
Reference
Figure
Figure
26.16
ns
tcyc
Figure
26.19
tcyc
tsubcyc
Figure
24.21
Notes: 1. Selected with the SA1 and SA0 bits in the system control register 2 (SYSCR2).
2. For details on the power-on reset characteristics, refer to table 26.18 and figure 26.15.
3. The specifications may vary due to the effects of temperature, power-supply voltage,
and dispersion of product lots. Thorough evaluation under the actual conditions of use
is essential in the design of systems. As for actual specification, please confirm with our
sales representatives.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 591 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Table 26.14 Serial Interface Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Item
Input clock cycl
Asynchronous
Symbol Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
tscyc
4
—
—
6
—
—
tcyc or
tsubcyc
Figure
26.17
Clock
synchronous
Input clock pulse width
tSCKW
0.4
—
0.6
tscyc
Figure
26.17
Transmit data delay time
(clock synchronous)
tTXD
—
—
1
tcyc or
tsubcyc
Figure
26.18
Receive data setup time
(clock synchronous)
tRXS
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
100
—
—
ns
Other than above
238
Figure
26.18
Receive data hold time
(clock synchronous)
tRXH
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
100
—
—
ns
Other than above
238
Figure
26.18
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 592 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
2
Table 26.15 I C Bus Interface Timing
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C, unless otherwise
specified.
Values
Item
Symbol Test Condition Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
SCL input cycle time
tSCL
12tcyc + 600
—
—
ns
SCL input high width
tSCLH
3tcyc + 300
—
—
ns
SCL input low width
tSCLL
5tcyc + 300
—
—
ns
SCL and SDA input fall time
tSf
—
—
300
ns
SCL and SDA input spike pulse
removal time
tSP
—
—
1tcyc
ns
SDA input bus-free time
tBUF
5tcyc
—
—
ns
Start condition input hold time
tSTAH
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Retransmission start condition
input setup time
tSTAS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Setup time for stop condition
input
tSTOS
3tcyc
—
—
ns
Data-input setup time
tSDAS
1tcyc + 20
—
—
ns
Data-input hold time
tSDAH
0
—
—
ns
Capacitive load of
SCL and SDA
Cb
0
—
400
pF
SCL and SDA output fall time
tSf
—
—
300
ns
Reference
Figure
Figure
26.20
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 593 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4.4
A/D Converter Characteristics
Table 26.16 lists the A/D converter characteristics.
Table 26.16 A/D Converter Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Test Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVCC
AVCC
1.8
—
3.6
V
*1
Analog input
voltage
AVIN
AN0 to AN7
–0.3
—
AVCC + 0.3 V
Analog power
supply current
AIOPE
AVCC
—
—
1.0
mA
AISTOP1
AVCC
—
600
—
µA
*2
Reference
value
AISTOP2
AVCC
—
—
5
µA
*3
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN
AN0 to AN7
—
—
15.0
pF
Allowable signal
source
impedance
RAIN
—
—
10.0
kΩ
—
—
10
bits
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
—
—
±3.5
LSB
AVCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
—
—
±5.5
Other than above
—
—
±7.5
—
—
±0.5
LSB
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
—
—
±4.0
LSB
AVCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.0 to 3.6 V
—
—
±6.0
Other than above
—
—
±8.0
Item
AVCC = 3.0 V
Resolution (data
length)
Nonlinearity error
Quantization
error
Absolute
accuracy
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 594 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
*4
*4
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
Item
Conversion time
Applicable
Symbol Pins
Test Condition
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
Other than
AVCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
VCC = 2.7 to 3.6 V
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Note
12.4
—
124
µs
System clock
oscillator
selected
7.8
15.5
31
µs
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
selected
Reference
value
(fRosc = 4 MHz)
29.5
—
124
µs
System clock
oscillator
selected
31
62
124
µs
On-chip
oscillator for
system clock
selected
Reference
value
(fRosc = 1MHz)
Notes: 1. Set AVCC = VCC when the A/D converter is not used.
2. AISTOP1 is the current in active and sleep modes while the A/D converter is idle.
3. AISTOP2 is the current at a reset, in standby or watch mode while the A/D converter is idle,
or in the module standby state.
4. Conversion time is 29.5 µs. Ta = −20 to +75°C
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 595 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4.5
LCD Characteristics
Table 26.17 shows the LCD characteristics.
Table 26.17 LCD Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V, unless otherwise specified.
Values
Applicable
Item
Symbol
Pins
Test Condition
Min. Typ.
Max. Unit
Notes
Segment driver drop
VDS
SEG1 to
ID = 2 µA
—
—
0.6
V
*1
SEG40
V1 = 2.7 V to 3.6 V
COM1 to
ID = 2 µA
—
—
0.3
V
*1
COM4
V1 = 2.7 V to 3.6 V
1.5
3.0
7.0
MΩ
2.2
—
3.6
V
*2
voltage
Common driver drop
VDC
voltage
LCD power supply split- RLCD
Between V1 and VSS
resistance
LCD display voltage
VLCD
V1
V3 power supply
VLCD3
V3
Between V3 and VSS
0.9
1.0
1.1
V
*3*4
VLCD2
V2
Between V2 and VSS
—
2.0
—
V
*3*4
—
V
*3*4
—
µA
Reference
voltage
V2 power supply
(VLCD3 × 2)
voltage
V1 power supply
VLCD1
V1
Between V1 and VSS
—
(VLCD3 × 3)
voltage
3-V constant voltage
3.0
ILCD
Vcc
LCD power supply
circuit supply current
VCC = 2.7 V
—
12
4 5
Booster clock:
value* *
32.768 kHz
Notes: 1. The voltage drop from power supply pins V1, V2, V3, and VSS to each segment pin or
common pin.
2. When the LCD display voltage is supplied from an external power source, ensure that
the following relationship is maintained: V1 ≥ V2 ≥ V3 ≥ VSS.
3. The value when the LCD power supply split-resistor is separated and 3-V constant
voltage power supply circuit is driven.
4. For details on the register (BGRMR) setting range when the voltage of the V3 pin is set
to 1.0 V, refer to section 21.3.5, BGR Control Register (BGRMR).
5. Includes the supply current of the band-gap reference circuit (BGR) (operation).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 596 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.4.6
Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
Table 26.18 Power-On Reset Circuit Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V,
Ta = −20 to +75°C (general specifications), Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide temperature range
specifications), unless otherwise specified.
Values
Test
Symbol Condition
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Reference
Figure
Reset voltage
V_rst
0.7VCC
0.8VCC
0.9VCC
V
Figure 23.2
Power supply rise time
t_vtr
The Vcc rise time should be shorter than
half the RES rise time.
Reset count time
t_out
0.8
—
4.0
µs
0.8
—
16.0
µs
Item
Count start time
t_cr
On-chip pull-up resistance
RP
26.4.7
On-chip oscillator
for system clock
selected
(Reference
value)
Adjustable by the value of the external
capacitor of the RES pin.
Vcc = 3.0 V 60
100
—
kΩ
Figure 23.1
Watchdog Timer Characteristics
Table 26.19 Watchdog Timer Characteristics
VCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, AVCC = 1.8 V to 3.6 V, VSS = AVSS = 0.0 V,
Ta = −20 to +75°C (regular specifications), Ta = −40 to +85°C (wide-range specifications),
unless otherwise specified.
Item
Symbol
On-chip watchdog
timer oscillator
overflow time
tovf
Note:
*
Applicable
Pins
Test
Condition
Values
Min.
Typ.
Max.
Unit
Note
0.2
0.4
—
s
*
Indicates the period from the start of counting at 0 to the generation of an internal reset
when the counter reaches 255 in the case where the on-chip watchdog timer oscillator
is selected.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 597 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.5
Operation Timing
Figures 26.14 to 26.21 show operation timings.
tOSC, tW
V IH
OSC1
X1
V IL
t CPH
t CPL
t CPr
t CPf
Figure 26.14 Clock Input Timing
RES
V IL
t REL
Figure 26.15 RES Low Width Timing
NMI,
IRQ0, IRQ1,
V
IRQ3, IRQ4,
TMIC, TMIF,
TMIG, ADTRG,
V
IH
IL
WKP0 to WKP7,
IRQAEC,
t
AEVL, AEVH
IL
t
IH
Figure 26.16 Input Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 598 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
t SCKW
SCK31
SCK32
SCK33
t scyc
Figure 26.17 SCK3 Input Clock Timing
t scyc
SCK31 VIH or VOH*
SCK32
SCK33 V or V *
IL
OL
t TXD
TXD31
TXD32
TXD33
(transmit data)
VOH*
VOL*
t RXS
t RXH
RXD31
RXD32
RXD33
(receive data)
Note: * Output timing reference levels
Output high
VOH = 1/2 Vcc + 0.2 V
Output low
VOL = 0.8 V
See figure 26.22 for load conditions.
Figure 26.18 SCI3 Input/Output Timing in Clock Synchronous Mode
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 599 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
TCLKA to TCLKC
tTCKWH
tTCKWL
Figure 26.19 Clock Input Timing for TCLKA to TCLKC Pins
VIH
SDA
VIL
tBUF
tSTAH
tSCLH
tSTAS
tSP
tSTOS
SCL
P*
S*
tSf
Sr*
tSCLL
P*
tSDAS
tSr
tSCL
tSDAH
Note: * S, P, and Sr represent the following:
S: Start condition
P: Stop condition
Sr: Retransmission start condition
2
Figure 26.20 I C Bus Interface Input/Output Timing
VIH
UD
VIL
tUDL
tUDH
Figure 26.21 UD Pin Minimum Transition Width Timing
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 600 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.6
Output Load Circuit
VCC
2.4 kΩ
LSI output pin
30 pF
12 kΩ
Figure 26.22 Output Load Condition
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 601 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Section 26 Electrical Characteristics
26.7
Recommended Resonators
(1) Recommended Crystal Resonators
Frequency (MHz)
Manufacturer
Product Type
4.194304
10
NIHON DEMPA KOGYO CO.,LTD.
NR-18
NR-18
NIHON DEMPA KOGYO CO.,LTD.
(2) Recommended Ceramic Resonators
Frequency (MHz)
2
4.19
10
Manufacturer
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.
Product Type
CSTCC2M00G53-B0
CSTCC2M00G56-B0
CSTLS4M19G53-B0
CSTLS4M19G56-B0
CSTLS10M0G53-B0
CSTLS10M0G56-B0
Figure 26.23 Recommended Resonators
26.8
Usage Note
The F-ZTAT and masked ROM versions satisfy the electrical characteristics shown in this
manual, but actual electrical characteristic values, operating margins, noise margins, and other
properties may vary due to differences in manufacturing process, on-chip ROM, layout patterns,
and so on.
When system evaluation testing is carried out using the F-ZTAT version, the same evaluation
testing should also be conducted for the masked ROM version when changing over to that version.
Connecting a bypass capacitor is recommended for noise suppression.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 602 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Appendix
A.
Instruction Set
A.1
Instruction List
Condition Code
Symbol
Description
Rd
General destination register
Rs
General source register
Rn
General register
ERd
General destination register (address register or 32-bit register)
ERs
General source register (address register or 32-bit register)
ERn
General register (32-bit register)
(EAd)
Destination operand
(EAs)
Source operand
PC
Program counter
SP
Stack pointer
CCR
Condition-code register
N
N (negative) flag in CCR
Z
Z (zero) flag in CCR
V
V (overflow) flag in CCR
C
C (carry) flag in CCR
disp
Displacement
→
Transfer from the operand on the left to the operand on the right, or transition from
the state on the left to the state on the right
+
Addition of the operands on both sides
–
Subtraction of the operand on the right from the operand on the left
×
Multiplication of the operands on both sides
÷
Division of the operand on the left by the operand on the right
∧
Logical AND of the operands on both sides
∨
Logical OR of the operands on both sides
⊕
Logical exclusive OR of the operands on both sides
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 603 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Symbol
Description
¬
NOT (logical complement)
( ), < >
Contents of operand
Note: General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L) and 16-bit registers
(R0 to R7 and E0 to E7).
Symbol
Description
↔
Condition Code Notation (cont)
Changed according to execution result
*
Undetermined (no guaranteed value)
0
Cleared to 0
1
Set to 1
—
Not affected by execution of the instruction
∆
Varies depending on conditions, described in notes
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 604 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Table A.1
Instruction Set
1. Data Transfer Instructions
Condition Code
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
B
4
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd8
— —
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
B
8
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd8
— —
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
B
@ERs → Rd8
ERs32+1 → ERs32
— —
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
B
2
@aa:8 → Rd8
— —
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
B
4
@aa:16 → Rd8
— —
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
B
6
@aa:24 → Rd8
— —
MOV.B Rs, @ERd
B
Rs8 → @ERd
— —
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
B
4
Rs8 → @(d:16, ERd)
— —
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
B
8
Rs8 → @(d:24, ERd)
— —
MOV.B Rs, @–ERd
B
ERd32–1 → ERd32
Rs8 → @ERd
— —
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
B
2
Rs8 → @aa:8
— —
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
B
4
Rs8 → @aa:16
— —
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
B
6
Rs8 → @aa:24
— —
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
#xx:16 → Rd16
— —
MOV.W Rs, Rd
W
Rs16 → Rd16
— —
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
W
@ERs → Rd16
— —
2
2
2
2
2
2
MOV.W @(d:16, ERs), Rd W
4
@(d:16, ERs) → Rd16
— —
MOV.W @(d:24, ERs), Rd W
8
@(d:24, ERs) → Rd16
— —
@ERs → Rd16
ERs32+2 → @ERd32
— —
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
W
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
W
4
@aa:16 → Rd16
— —
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
W
6
@aa:24 → Rd16
— —
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
W
Rs16 → @ERd
— —
2
2
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16, ERd) W
4
Rs16 → @(d:16, ERd)
— —
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24, ERd) W
8
Rs16 → @(d:24, ERd)
— —
0 —
0 —
0 —
Advanced
— —
B
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
@ERs → Rd8
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
— —
B
C
0 —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Rs8 → Rd8
MOV.B Rs, Rd
V
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Z
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
I
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
N
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
H
#xx:8 → Rd8
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
2
Rn
B
No. of
States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MOV MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
2
0 —
2
0 —
4
0 —
6
0 —
10
0 —
6
4
0 —
6
0 —
8
0 —
4
0 —
6
0 —
10
0 —
6
4
0 —
6
0 —
8
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
4
0 —
6
0 —
10
0 —
6
6
0 —
8
0 —
4
0 —
6
0 —
10
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 605 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
— —
@(d:24, ERs) → ERd32
— —
@ERs → ERd32
ERs32+4 → ERs32
— —
6
@aa:16 → ERd32
— —
8
@aa:24 → ERd32
— —
ERs32 → @ERd
— —
ERs32 → @(d:16, ERd)
— —
ERs32 → @(d:24, ERd)
— —
ERd32–4 → ERd32
ERs32 → @ERd
— —
6
ERs32 → @aa:16
— —
8
ERs32 → @aa:24
— —
0 —
0 —
POP POP.W Rn
W
2 @SP → Rn16
SP+2 → SP
— —
POP.L ERn
L
4 @SP → ERn32
SP+4 → SP
— —
0 —
PUSH PUSH.W Rn
W
2 SP–2 → SP
Rn16 → @SP
— —
0 —
PUSH.L ERn
L
4 SP–4 → SP
ERn32 → @SP
— —
0 —
MOVFPE
MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd
B
4
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Cannot be used in
this LSI
MOVTPE
MOVTPE Rs, @aa:16
B
4
Cannot be used in
this LSI
Cannot be used in
this LSI
W
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
W
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
W
MOV.L #xx:32, Rd
L
MOV.L ERs, ERd
L
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
L
MOV.L @(d:16, ERs), ERd
L
6
MOV.L @(d:24, ERs), ERd
L
10
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
L
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
L
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
L
MOV.L ERs, @ERd
L
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16, ERd)
L
6
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24, ERd)
L
10
MOV.L ERs, @–ERd
L
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
L
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
L
2
6
2
4
4
4
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 606 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
4
Advanced
@(d:16, ERs) → ERd32
↔
— —
↔
@ERs → ERd32
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
ERs32 → ERd32
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
#xx:32 → Rd32
0 —
↔ ↔ ↔
— —
↔ ↔ ↔
— —
Rs16 → @aa:24
↔
Rs16 → @aa:16
6
C
↔
4
V
↔
Z
↔
I
↔
N
— —
↔
H
ERd32–2 → ERd32
Rs16 → @ERd
0 —
MOV MOV.W Rs, @–ERd
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
6
6
0 —
8
0 —
6
0 —
2
0 —
8
0 —
10
0 —
14
0 —
10
10
0 —
12
0 —
8
0 —
10
0 —
14
0 —
10
10
0 —
12
0 —
6
10
6
10
Appendix
2. Arithmetic Instructions
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Z
V
C
↔ ↔
— (2)
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
ERd32+ERs32 →
ERd32
— (2)
↔
↔
(3)
↔ ↔
Rd16+Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
ERd32+#xx:32 →
ERd32
2
Rd8+#xx:8 +C → Rd8
—
2
B
2
Rd8+Rs8 +C → Rd8
—
ADDS ADDS.L #1, ERd
L
2
ERd32+1 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
ADDS.L #2, ERd
L
2
ERd32+2 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
ADDS.L #4, ERd
L
2
ERd32+4 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
INC.B Rd
B
2
Rd8+1 → Rd8
— —
INC.W #1, Rd
W
2
Rd16+1 → Rd16
— —
INC.W #2, Rd
W
2
Rd16+2 → Rd16
— —
INC.L #1, ERd
L
2
ERd32+1 → ERd32
— —
INC.L #2, ERd
L
2
ERd32+2 → ERd32
— —
DAA
DAA Rd
B
2
Rd8 decimal adjust
→ Rd8
— *
SUB
SUB.B Rs, Rd
B
2
Rd8–Rs8 → Rd8
—
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
Rd16–#xx:16 → Rd16
— (1)
SUB.W Rs, Rd
W
Rd16–Rs16 → Rd16
— (1)
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
L
SUB.L ERs, ERd
L
W 4
ADD.W Rs, Rd
W
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
L
ADD.L ERs, ERd
L
ADDX ADDX.B #xx:8, Rd
ADDX.B Rs, Rd
6
2
(3)
2
6
2
—
2
—
2
—
2
—
2
—
2
*
B
2
Rd8–Rs8–C → Rd8
—
SUBS SUBS.L #1, ERd
L
2
ERd32–1 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
SUBS.L #2, ERd
L
2
ERd32–2 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
SUBS.L #4, ERd
L
2
ERd32–4 → ERd32
— — — — — —
2
B
2
Rd8–1 → Rd8
— —
DEC.W #1, Rd
W
2
Rd16–1 → Rd16
— —
DEC.W #2, Rd
W
2
Rd16–2 → Rd16
— —
2
ERd32–ERs32 → ERd32 — (2)
Rd8–#xx:8–C → Rd8
—
(3)
(3)
↔ ↔ ↔
DEC DEC.B Rd
2
↔ ↔
SUBX.B Rs, Rd
B
ERd32–#xx:32 → ERd32 — (2)
6
↔ ↔ ↔
SUBX SUBX.B #xx:8, Rd
2
↔ ↔ ↔
2
↔
2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔
2
4
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
INC
B
2
2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
2
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
ADD.B Rs, Rd
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
ADD ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
— (1)
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Rd16+#xx:16 → Rd16
2
↔
—
↔ ↔
Rd8+Rs8 → Rd8
↔
—
Advanced
N
↔ ↔
I
Rd8+#xx:8 → Rd8
Normal
H
↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
2
@ERn
B
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
4
2
6
2
2
2
—
2
—
2
—
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 607 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
Advanced
V
C
ERd32–1 → ERd32
— —
L
2
ERd32–2 → ERd32
— —
↔ ↔
—
2
DAS.Rd
B
2
Rd8 decimal adjust
→ Rd8
— *
↔ ↔ ↔
2
DEC.L #2, ERd
↔ ↔ ↔
—
* —
2
B
2
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(unsigned multiplication)
— — — — — —
14
W
2
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(unsigned multiplication)
— — — — — —
22
B
4
Rd8 × Rs8 → Rd16
(signed multiplication)
— —
↔
W
4
Rd16 × Rs16 → ERd32
(signed multiplication)
— —
B
2
W
DIVXU DIVXU. B Rs, Rd
DIVXU. W Rs, ERd
DIVXS DIVXS. B Rs, Rd
DIVXS. W Rs, ERd
CMP CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
16
— —
24
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(unsigned division)
— — (6) (7) — —
14
2
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(unsigned division)
— — (6) (7) — —
22
B
4
Rd16 ÷ Rs8 → Rd16
(RdH: remainder,
RdL: quotient)
(signed division)
— — (8) (7) — —
16
W
4
ERd32 ÷ Rs16 → ERd32
(Ed: remainder,
Rd: quotient)
(signed division)
— — (8) (7) — —
24
Rd8–#xx:8
—
Rd8–Rs8
—
Rd16–#xx:16
— (1)
Rd16–Rs16
— (1)
ERd32–#xx:32
— (2)
ERd32–ERs32
— (2)
B
2
CMP.B Rs, Rd
B
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
CMP.W Rs, Rd
W
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
L
CMP.L ERs, ERd
L
2
2
6
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 608 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MULXS. W Rs, ERd
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MULXS MULXS. B Rs, Rd
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
MULXU. W Rs, ERd
↔ ↔
MULXU MULXU. B Rs, Rd
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
DAS
I
Normal
Z
2
↔
N
L
↔
H
DEC DEC.L #1, ERd
↔
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
2
2
4
2
4
2
Appendix
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
W
2
0–Rd16 → Rd16
—
NEG.L ERd
L
2
0–ERd32 → ERd32
—
EXTU EXTU.W Rd
W
2
0 → (<bits 15 to 8>
of Rd16)
— — 0
EXTU.L ERd
L
2
0 → (<bits 31 to 16>
of ERd32)
— — 0
EXTS EXTS.W Rd
W
2
(<bit 7> of Rd16) →
(<bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
— —
EXTS.L ERd
L
2
(<bit 15> of ERd32) →
(<bits 31 to 16> of
ERd32)
— —
Advanced
↔ ↔ ↔
NEG.W Rd
Normal
C
↔ ↔ ↔
—
↔ ↔ ↔
V
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
0–Rd8 → Rd8
2
0 —
2
↔
2
0 —
2
↔
H
B
0 —
2
↔
Z
↔
I
NEG NEG.B Rd
↔ ↔ ↔
N
↔
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
0 —
2
2
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 609 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
3. Logic Instructions
AND.B Rs, Rd
B
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
AND.W Rs, Rd
W
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
L
AND.L ERs, ERd
L
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
B
OR.B Rs, Rd
B
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
OR.W Rs, Rd
W
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
L
OR.L ERs, ERd
L
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
B
XOR.B Rs, Rd
B
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
W 4
XOR.W Rs, Rd
W
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
L
XOR.L ERs, ERd
L
4
ERd32⊕ERs32 → ERd32 — —
NOT.B Rd
B
2
¬ Rd8 → Rd8
— —
NOT.W Rd
W
2
¬ Rd16 → Rd16
— —
NOT.L ERd
L
2
¬ Rd32 → Rd32
— —
Z
Rd8∧Rs8 → Rd8
— —
Rd16∧#xx:16 → Rd16
— —
Rd16∧Rs16 → Rd16
— —
4
2
2
2
6
4
2
2
2
ERd32∧ERs32 → ERd32 — —
Rd8⁄#xx:8 → Rd8
— —
Rd8⁄Rs8 → Rd8
— —
Rd16⁄#xx:16 → Rd16
— —
Rd16⁄Rs16 → Rd16
— —
ERd32⁄#xx:32 → ERd32
— —
ERd32⁄ERs32 → ERd32
— —
Rd8⊕#xx:8 → Rd8
— —
Rd8⊕Rs8 → Rd8
— —
Rd16⊕#xx:16 → Rd16
— —
Rd16⊕Rs16 → Rd16
— —
ERd32⊕#xx:32 → ERd32 — —
6
V
C
Advanced
I
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
@aa
N
— —
ERd32∧#xx:32 → ERd32 — —
6
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 610 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
H
Rd8∧#xx:8 → Rd8
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
NOT
2
@(d, ERn)
2
@ERn
B
Rn
#xx
XOR
Condition Code
Operand Size
OR
No. of
States*1
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
Mnemonic
AND
@–ERn/@ERn+
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
0 —
2
0 —
2
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
6
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
2
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
6
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
2
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
6
0 —
4
0 —
2
0 —
2
0 —
2
Appendix
4. Shift Instructions
W
2
SHAL.L ERd
L
2
SHAR SHAR.B Rd
B
2
SHAR.W Rd
W
2
SHAR.L ERd
L
2
SHLL SHLL.B Rd
B
2
SHLL.W Rd
W
2
SHLL.L ERd
L
2
SHLR SHLR.B Rd
B
2
SHLR.W Rd
W
2
SHLR.L ERd
L
2
ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd
B
2
ROTXL.W Rd
W
2
ROTXL.L ERd
L
2
B
2
ROTXR.W Rd
W
2
ROTXR.L ERd
L
2
ROTL ROTL.B Rd
B
2
ROTL.W Rd
W
2
ROTL.L ERd
L
2
ROTR ROTR.B Rd
B
2
ROTR.W Rd
W
2
ROTR.L ERd
L
2
ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd
0
MSB
LSB
V
C
— —
— —
— —
C
MSB
— —
LSB
— —
— —
C
0
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
— —
0
C
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
— —
C
— —
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
C
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
— —
C
— —
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
C
MSB
LSB
— —
— —
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Advanced
Z
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
I
C
N
↔ ↔ ↔
SHAL.W Rd
H
— —
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
2
Condition Code
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B
No. of
States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
SHAL SHAL.B Rd
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 611 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
5. Bit-Manipulation Instructions
B
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BSET Rn, Rd
B
BSET Rn, @ERd
B
BSET Rn, @aa:8
B
B
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
B
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BCLR Rn, Rd
B
BCLR Rn, @ERd
B
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
B
BNOT BNOT #xx:3, Rd
B
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
B
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BNOT Rn, Rd
B
BNOT Rn, @ERd
B
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
B
BTST BTST #xx:3, Rd
B
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
B
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BTST Rn, Rd
B
BTST Rn, @ERd
B
BTST Rn, @aa:8
B
BLD #xx:3, Rd
B
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
H
N
Z
V
C
Advanced
I
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 612 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Condition Code
Operation
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 1
— — — — — —
2
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 1
— — — — — —
8
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 1
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 1
— — — — — —
2
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 1
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 1
— — — — — —
8
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ← 0
— — — — — —
2
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ← 0
— — — — — —
8
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ← 0
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of Rd8) ← 0
— — — — — —
2
(Rn8 of @ERd) ← 0
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ← 0
— — — — — —
8
(#xx:3 of Rd8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8)
— — — — — —
2
(#xx:3 of @ERd) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd)
— — — — — —
8
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of Rd8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of Rd8)
— — — — — —
2
(Rn8 of @ERd) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd)
— — — — — —
8
(Rn8 of @aa:8) ←
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8)
— — — — — —
8
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → Z
— — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → Z
— — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → Z
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @Rd8) → Z
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @ERd) → Z
— — —
¬ (Rn8 of @aa:8) → Z
— — —
(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
— —
2
— —
6
— —
6
— —
2
— —
6
— —
6
↔
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
BCLR BCLR #xx:3, Rd
BLD
B
No. of
States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BSET BSET #xx:3, Rd
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
2
Appendix
B
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BILD BILD #xx:3, Rd
BST
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
B
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BST #xx:3, Rd
B
BST #xx:3, @ERd
B
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BIST BIST #xx:3, Rd
B
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
B
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BAND BAND #xx:3, Rd
B
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
B
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BIAND BIAND #xx:3, Rd
BOR
B
B
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
B
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BOR #xx:3, Rd
B
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
B
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BIOR BIOR #xx:3, Rd
B
BIOR #xx:3, @ERd
B
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BXOR BXOR #xx:3, Rd
B
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
B
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B
BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
B
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
B
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
B
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
4
4
2
H
N
Z
V
C
(#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
— — — — —
6
(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd) → C
— — — — —
¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
— — — — — —
2
C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
— — — — — —
8
C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
— — — — — —
8
¬ C → (#xx:3 of Rd8)
— — — — — —
2
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @ERd24)
— — — — — —
8
¬ C → (#xx:3 of @aa:8)
— — — — — —
8
C∧(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
2
C∧(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
— — — — —
C∧(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C — — — — —
4
4
2
4
4
2
C∧ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
— — — — —
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C∨ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
C∨ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C — — — — —
4
4
2
4
4
2
C∨ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C⊕(#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
C⊕(#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C
— — — — —
C⊕(#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of Rd8) → C
— — — — —
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @ERd24) → C — — — — —
4
4
Advanced
I
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
Condition Code
Operation
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
No. of
States*1
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
BLD
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
C⊕ ¬ (#xx:3 of @aa:8) → C
— — — — —
6
2
6
6
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
2
6
6
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 613 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
6. Branching Instructions
Bcc
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
—
2
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
—
4
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
—
2
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
—
4
BHI d:8
—
2
BHI d:16
—
4
BLS d:8
—
2
BLS d:16
—
4
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
—
2
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
—
4
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
—
2
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
—
4
BNE d:8
—
2
BNE d:16
—
4
BEQ d:8
—
2
BEQ d:16
—
4
BVC d:8
—
2
BVC d:16
—
4
BVS d:8
—
2
BVS d:16
—
4
BPL d:8
—
2
BPL d:16
—
4
BMI d:8
—
2
BMI d:16
—
4
BGE d:8
—
2
BGE d:16
—
4
BLT d:8
—
2
BLT d:16
—
BGT d:8
I
H
N
Z
V
C
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
— — — — — —
6
— — — — — —
4
4
— — — — — —
6
—
2
Z∨ (N⊕V) = 0 — — — — — —
4
BGT d:16
—
4
— — — — — —
6
BLE d:8
—
2
Z∨ (N⊕V) = 1 — — — — — —
4
BLE d:16
—
4
— — — — — —
6
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 614 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
If condition Always
is true then
PC ← PC+d
Never
else next;
Advanced
Branch
Condition
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
C∨ Z = 0
C∨ Z = 1
C=0
C=1
Z=0
Z=1
V=0
V=1
N=0
N=1
N⊕V = 0
N⊕V = 1
Appendix
JMP
BSR
JSR
RTS
JMP @ERn
—
JMP @aa:24
—
JMP @@aa:8
—
BSR d:8
—
BSR d:16
—
JSR @ERn
—
JSR @aa:24
—
JSR @@aa:8
—
RTS
—
No. of
States*1
Condition Code
H
N
Z
V
C
Advanced
I
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
PC ← ERn
— — — — — —
PC ← aa:24
— — — — — —
PC ← @aa:8
— — — — — —
8
10
2
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:8
— — — — — —
6
8
4
PC → @–SP
PC ← PC+d:16
— — — — — —
8
10
PC → @–SP
PC ← ERn
— — — — — —
6
8
PC → @–SP
PC ← aa:24
— — — — — —
8
10
PC → @–SP
PC ← @aa:8
— — — — — —
8
12
2 PC ← @SP+
— — — — — —
8
10
2
4
2
2
4
2
4
6
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 615 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
7. System Control Instructions
@(d:24, ERs) → CCR
LDC @ERs+, CCR
W
LDC @aa:16, CCR
W
6
@aa:16 → CCR
LDC @aa:24, CCR
W
8
@aa:24 → CCR
4
@ERs → CCR
ERs32+2 → ERs32
2
↔
↔
↔
↔
Advanced
↔
Normal
↔
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
10
↔
W
↔ ↔
LDC @(d:24, ERs), CCR
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
@(d:16, ERs) → CCR
↔
6
↔ ↔
W
@ERs → CCR
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
LDC @(d:16, ERs), CCR
4
↔
W
Rs8 → CCR
10
2
↔ ↔
LDC @ERs, CCR
2
C
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
B
V
↔
#xx:8 → CCR
B
LDC Rs, CCR
Z
↔ ↔
2
LDC #xx:8, CCR
N
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
Transition to powerdown state
H
↔ ↔ ↔ ↔ ↔
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
—
I
2
2
6
8
12
8
8
10
CCR → Rd8
2
CCR → @ERd
6
STC CCR, Rd
B
STC CCR, @ERd
W
STC CCR, @(d:16, ERd)
W
6
STC CCR, @(d:24, ERd)
W
10
STC CCR, @–ERd
W
STC CCR, @aa:16
W
6
CCR → @aa:16
8
STC CCR, @aa:24
W
8
CCR → @aa:24
10
ANDC ANDC #xx:8, CCR
B
2
CCR∧#xx:8 → CCR
B
2
CCR∨#xx:8 → CCR
B
2
CCR⊕#xx:8 → CCR
2 PC ← PC+2
NOP
NOP
—
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 616 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
8
↔ ↔ ↔
ERd32–2 → ERd32
CCR → @ERd
↔ ↔ ↔
CCR → @(d:24, ERd)
↔ ↔ ↔
XORC XORC #xx:8, CCR
8
12
↔ ↔ ↔
ORC #xx:8, CCR
4
CCR → @(d:16, ERd)
↔ ↔ ↔
ORC
4
↔ ↔ ↔
STC
CCR ← @SP+
PC ← @SP+
↔
LDC
—
↔
SLEEP SLEEP
Condition Code
Operation
↔ ↔
RTE
No. of
States*1
↔ ↔
RTE
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
2
2
2
2
Appendix
8. Block Transfer Instructions
EEPMOV
No. of
States*1
H
N
Z
V
C
Normal
—
@@aa
@(d, PC)
I
EEPMOV. B
—
4 if R4L ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
R6+1 → R6
R4L–1 → R4L
until
R4L=0
else next
— — — — — — 8+
4n*2
EEPMOV. W
—
4 if R4 ≠ 0 then
repeat @R5 → @R6
R5+1 → R5
R6+1 → R6
R4–1 → R4
until
R4=0
else next
— — — — — — 8+
4n*2
Advanced
Condition Code
Operation
@aa
@–ERn/@ERn+
@(d, ERn)
@ERn
Rn
#xx
Mnemonic
Operand Size
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Length (bytes)
Notes: 1. The number of states in cases where the instruction code and its operands are located
in on-chip memory is shown here. For other cases, see appendix A.3, Number of
Execution States.
2. n is the value set in register R4L or R4.
(1) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11; otherwise cleared to 0.
(2) Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27; otherwise cleared to 0.
(3) Retains its previous value when the result is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(4) Set to 1 when the adjustment produces a carry; otherwise retains its previous value.
(5) The number of states required for execution of an instruction that transfers data in
synchronization with the E clock is variable.
(6) Set to 1 when the divisor is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
(7) Set to 1 when the divisor is zero; otherwise cleared to 0.
(8) Set to 1 when the quotient is negative; otherwise cleared to 0.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 617 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
REJ09B0309-0200
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 618 of 692
XOR
SUBX
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
B
C
D
E
F
BILD
CMP
BIAND
BIST
BLD
BST
TRAPA
BEQ
A
BIXOR
BAND
AND
RTE
BNE
MOV.B
Table A-2
(2)
LDC
7
ADDX
BIOR
BXOR
OR
BOR
BSR
BCS
RTS
BCC
AND.B
ANDC
6
9
BTST
DIVXU
BLS
XOR.B
XORC
5
ADD
BCLR
MULXU
BHI
OR.B
ORC
4
8
7
BNOT
DIVXU
MULXU
5
BSET
BRN
BRA
6
LDC
3
Table A-2 Table A-2 Table A-2 Table A-2
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
STC
Table A-2
(2)
NOP
4
3
2
1
0
2
1
0
MOV
BVS
9
B
JMP
BPL
BMI
MOV
Table A-2 Table A-2
(2)
(2)
Table A-2 Table A-2
(2)
(2)
A
Table A-2 Table A-2
EEPMOV
(2)
(2)
SUB
ADD
Table A-2
(2)
BVC
8
BSR
BGE
C
CMP
MOV
Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 1.
Instruction when most significant bit of BH is 0.
JSR
BGT
SUBX
ADDX
E
Table A-2
(3)
BLT
D
BLE
Table A-2
(2)
Table A-2
(2)
F
Table A.2
AL
1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
A.2
AH
Instruction code:
Appendix
Operation Code Map
Operation Code Map (1)
MOV
7A
BRA
58
MOV
DAS
1F
79
SUBS
1B
1
CMP
CMP
ADD
BHI
2
ADD
BRN
NOT
17
DEC
ROTXR
13
1A
ROTXL
12
DAA
0F
SHLR
ADDS
0B
11
INC
0A
SHLL
MOV
01
10
0
SUB
SUB
BLS
OR
OR
XOR
XOR
BCS
AND
AND
BEQ
BVC
SUB
9
BVS
NEG
NOT
DEC
ROTR
ROTXR
DEC
ROTL
ADDS
SLEEP
8
ROTXL
EXTU
INC
7
SHAR
BNE
6
SHLR
EXTU
INC
5
SHAL
BCC
LDC/STC
4
SHLL
3
1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
BPL
A
MOV
BMI
NEG
CMP
SUB
ROTR
ROTL
SHAR
C
D
BGE
BLT
DEC
EXTS
INC
Table A-2 Table A-2
(3)
(3)
ADD
SHAL
B
BGT
E
BLE
DEC
EXTS
INC
Table A-2
(3)
F
Table A.2
BH
AH AL
Instruction code:
Appendix
Operation Code Map (2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 619 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
REJ09B0309-0200
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 620 of 692
DIVXS
3
BSET
7Faa7 * 2
BNOT
BNOT
BCLR
BCLR
Notes: 1. r is the register designation field.
2. aa is the absolute address field.
BSET
7Faa6 * 2
BTST
BCLR
7Eaa7 * 2
BNOT
BTST
BSET
7Dr07 * 1
7Eaa6 * 2
BSET
7Dr06 * 1
BTST
BCLR
MULXS
2
7Cr07 * 1
BNOT
DIVXS
1
BTST
MULXS
0
7Cr06 * 1
01F06
01D05
01C05
01406
CL
BIOR
BOR
BIOR
BOR
OR
4
BIXOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BXOR
XOR
5
BIAND
BAND
BIAND
BAND
AND
6
7
BIST
BILD
BST
BLD
BIST
BILD
BST
BLD
1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte
AH AL BH BL CH CL DH DL
8
LDC
STC
9
A
LDC
STC
B
C
LDC
STC
D
E
LDC
STC
F
Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 1.
Instruction when most significant bit of DH is 0.
Table A.2
AH
ALBH
BLCH
Instruction code:
Appendix
Operation Code Map (3)
Appendix
A.3
Number of Execution States
The status of execution for each instruction of the H8/300H CPU and the method of calculating
the number of states required for instruction execution are shown below. Table A.4 shows the
number of cycles of each type occurring in each instruction, such as instruction fetch and data
read/write. Table A.3 shows the number of states required for each cycle. The total number of
states required for execution of an instruction can be calculated by the following expression:
Execution states = I × SI + J × SJ + K × SK + L × SL + M × SM + N × SN
Examples: When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, and an on-chip RAM is accessed.
BSET #0, @FF00
From table A.4:
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N= 0
From table A.3:
SI = 2, SL = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 2 × 2 = 8
When instruction is fetched from on-chip ROM, branch address is read from on-chip ROM, and
on-chip RAM is used for stack area.
JSR @@ 30
From table A.4:
I = 2, J = K = 1,
L=M=N=0
From table A.3:
SI = SJ = SK = 2
Number of states required for execution = 2 × 2 + 1 × 2+ 1 × 2 = 8
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 621 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Table A.3
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Access Location
Execution Status
(Instruction Cycle)
On-Chip Memory
On-Chip Peripheral Module
2
—
Instruction fetch
SI
Branch address read
SJ
Stack operation
SK
Byte data access
SL
2 or 3*
Word data access
SM
—
Internal operation
SN
Note:
*
1
Depends on which on-chip peripheral module is accessed. See section 25.1, Register
Addresses (Address Order).
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 622 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Table A.4
Number of Cycles in Each Instruction
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
ADD
ADD.B #xx:8, Rd
1
ADD.B Rs, Rd
1
ADD.W #xx:16, Rd
2
ADD.W Rs, Rd
1
ADD.L #xx:32, ERd
3
ADD.L ERs, ERd
1
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
ADDS
ADDS #1/2/4, ERd
1
ADDX
ADDX #xx:8, Rd
1
ADDX Rs, Rd
1
AND
AND.B #xx:8, Rd
1
AND.B Rs, Rd
1
AND.W #xx:16, Rd
2
AND.W Rs, Rd
1
AND.L #xx:32, ERd
3
AND.L ERs, ERd
2
ANDC
ANDC #xx:8, CCR
1
BAND
BAND #xx:3, Rd
1
BAND #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BAND #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
2
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
2
BHI d:8
2
BLS d:8
2
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
2
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
2
BNE d:8
2
BEQ d:8
2
BVC d:8
2
BVS d:8
2
BPL d:8
2
BMI d:8
2
BGE d:8
2
Bcc
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 623 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Bcc
BCLR
BIAND
BILD
Instruction
Fetch
I
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
BLT d:8
2
BGT d:8
2
BLE d:8
2
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
2
2
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
2
2
BHI d:16
2
2
BLS d:16
2
2
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
2
2
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
2
2
BNE d:16
2
2
BEQ d:16
2
2
BVC d:16
2
2
BVS d:16
2
2
BPL d:16
2
2
BMI d:16
2
2
BGE d:16
2
2
BLT d:16
2
2
BGT d:16
2
2
BLE d:16
2
2
BCLR #xx:3, Rd
1
BCLR #xx:3, @ERd
2
2
BCLR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BCLR Rn, Rd
1
BCLR Rn, @ERd
2
2
BCLR Rn, @aa:8
2
2
BIAND #xx:3, Rd
1
BIAND #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
1
BIAND #xx:3, @aa:8
2
BILD #xx:3, Rd
1
BILD #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BILD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 624 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
BIOR
BIOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIOR #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
1
BIST
BIXOR
BLD
BNOT
BOR
BSET
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
BIOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
BIST #xx:3, Rd
1
BIST #xx:3, @ERd
2
2
BIST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BIXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BIXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BLD #xx:3, Rd
1
BLD #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BLD #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BNOT #xx:3, Rd
1
BNOT #xx:3, @ERd
2
2
BNOT #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BNOT Rn, Rd
1
BNOT Rn, @ERd
2
2
BNOT Rn, @aa:8
2
2
BOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BOR #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BSET #xx:3, Rd
1
BSET #xx:3, @ERd
2
2
BSET #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
BSET Rn, Rd
1
BSET Rn, @ERd
2
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
2
2
BSET Rn, @aa:8
2
BSR
BSR d:8
2
1
BSR d:16
2
1
BST
BST #xx:3, Rd
1
BST #xx:3, @ERd
2
2
BST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
2
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 625 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
BTST
BTST #xx:3, Rd
1
BTST #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BTST #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BTST Rn, Rd
1
BTST Rn, @ERd
2
1
BTST Rn, @aa:8
2
1
BXOR #xx:3, Rd
1
BXOR #xx:3, @ERd
2
1
BXOR #xx:3, @aa:8
2
1
BXOR
CMP.B #xx:8, Rd
1
CMP.B Rs, Rd
1
CMP.W #xx:16, Rd
2
CMP.W Rs, Rd
1
CMP.L #xx:32, ERd
3
CMP.L ERs, ERd
1
DAA
DAA Rd
1
DAS
DAS Rd
1
DEC
DEC.B Rd
1
DEC.W #1/2, Rd
1
DEC.L #1/2, ERd
1
CMP
DUVXS
DIVXU
EEPMOV
EXTS
EXTU
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
DIVXS.B Rs, Rd
2
12
DIVXS.W Rs, ERd
2
20
DIVXU.B Rs, Rd
1
12
DIVXU.W Rs, ERd
1
20
1
EEPMOV.B
2
2n+2*
EEPMOV.W
2
2n+2*1
EXTS.W Rd
1
EXTS.L ERd
1
EXTU.W Rd
1
EXTU.L ERd
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 626 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
INC
JMP
JSR
LDC
MOV
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
INC.B Rd
1
INC.W #1/2, Rd
1
INC.L #1/2, ERd
1
JMP @ERn
2
JMP @aa:24
2
JMP @@aa:8
2
JSR @ERn
2
JSR @aa:24
2
JSR @@aa:8
2
LDC #xx:8, CCR
1
LDC Rs, CCR
1
LDC@ERs, CCR
2
1
LDC@(d:16, ERs), CCR
3
1
LDC@(d:24,ERs), CCR
5
1
LDC@ERs+, CCR
2
1
LDC@aa:16, CCR
3
1
LDC@aa:24, CCR
4
1
MOV.B #xx:8, Rd
1
MOV.B Rs, Rd
1
MOV.B @ERs, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @(d:16, ERs), Rd
2
1
MOV.B @(d:24, ERs), Rd
4
1
MOV.B @ERs+, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:8, Rd
1
1
MOV.B @aa:16, Rd
2
1
MOV.B @aa:24, Rd
3
1
MOV.B Rs, @Erd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @(d:16, ERd)
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @(d:24, ERd)
4
1
MOV.B Rs, @-ERd
1
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:8
1
1
Internal
Operation
N
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 627 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
MOV
MOV.B Rs, @aa:16
2
1
MOV.B Rs, @aa:24
3
1
MOV.W #xx:16, Rd
2
MOV.W Rs, Rd
1
MOV.W @ERs, Rd
1
1
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs), Rd
2
1
MOV.W @(d:24,ERs), Rd
4
1
MOV.W @ERs+, Rd
1
1
MOV.W @aa:16, Rd
2
1
MOV.W @aa:24, Rd
3
1
MOV.W Rs, @ERd
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @(d:16,ERd)
2
1
MOV.W Rs, @(d:24,ERd)
4
1
MOV.W Rs, @-ERd
1
1
MOV.W Rs, @aa:16
2
1
MOV.W Rs, @aa:24
3
1
MOV.L #xx:32, ERd
3
MOV.L ERs, ERd
1
MOV.L @ERs, ERd
2
2
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs), ERd
3
2
MOV.L @(d:24,ERs), ERd
5
2
MOV.L @ERs+, ERd
2
2
MOV.L @aa:16, ERd
3
2
MOV.L @aa:24, ERd
4
2
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
2
2
MOV.L ERs, @(d:16,ERd)
3
2
MOV.L ERs, @(d:24,ERd)
5
2
MOV.L ERs, @-ERd
2
2
MOV.L ERs, @aa:16
3
2
MOV.L ERs, @aa:24
4
2
MOV
MOVFPE
MOVFPE @aa:16, Rd*
MOVTPE
2
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16*
2
Byte Data
Access
L
2
1
2
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 628 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
2
2
2
2
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
MULXS
MULXS.B Rs, Rd
2
12
MULXS.W Rs, ERd
2
20
MULXU.B Rs, Rd
1
12
MULXU.W Rs, ERd
1
20
NEG.B Rd
1
NEG.W Rd
1
NEG.L ERd
1
MULXU
NEG
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
NOP
NOP
1
NOT
NOT.B Rd
1
NOT.W Rd
1
NOT.L ERd
1
OR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
OR.B Rs, Rd
1
OR.W #xx:16, Rd
2
OR.W Rs, Rd
1
OR.L #xx:32, ERd
3
OR.L ERs, ERd
2
ORC
ORC #xx:8, CCR
1
POP
POP.W Rn
1
1
2
POP.L ERn
2
2
2
PUSH.W Rn
1
1
2
PUSH.L ERn
2
2
2
OR
PUSH
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL
ROTL.B Rd
1
ROTL.W Rd
1
ROTL.L ERd
1
ROTR.B Rd
1
ROTR.W Rd
1
ROTR.L ERd
1
ROTXL.B Rd
1
ROTXL.W Rd
1
ROTXL.L ERd
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 629 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
ROTXR
ROTXR.B Rd
1
ROTXR.W Rd
1
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
ROTXR.L ERd
1
RTE
RTE
2
2
2
RTS
RTS
2
1
2
SHAL
SHAL.B Rd
1
SHAL.W Rd
1
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
SHAL.L ERd
1
SHAR.B Rd
1
SHAR.W Rd
1
SHAR.L ERd
1
SHLL.B Rd
1
SHLL.W Rd
1
SHLL.L ERd
1
SHLR.B Rd
1
SHLR.W Rd
1
SHLR.L ERd
1
SLEEP
SLEEP
1
STC
STC CCR, Rd
1
STC CCR, @ERd
2
1
STC CCR, @(d:16,ERd)
3
1
STC CCR, @(d:24,ERd)
5
1
STC CCR,@-ERd
2
1
STC CCR, @aa:16
3
1
1
SUB
SUBS
STC CCR, @aa:24
4
SUB.B Rs, Rd
1
SUB.W #xx:16, Rd
2
SUB.W Rs, Rd
1
SUB.L #xx:32, ERd
3
SUB.L ERs, ERd
1
SUBS #1/2/4, ERd
1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 630 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
2
Appendix
Instruction Mnemonic
Instruction
Fetch
I
SUBX
SUBX #xx:8, Rd
1
SUBX. Rs, Rd
1
XOR
XORC
XOR.B #xx:8, Rd
1
XOR.B Rs, Rd
1
XOR.W #xx:16, Rd
2
XOR.W Rs, Rd
1
XOR.L #xx:32, ERd
3
XOR.L ERs, ERd
2
XORC #xx:8, CCR
1
Branch
Stack
Addr. Read Operation
J
K
Byte Data
Access
L
Word Data
Access
M
Internal
Operation
N
Notes: 1. n: Specified value in R4L. The source and destination operands are accessed n+1
times respectively.
2. It cannot be used in this LSI.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 631 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
A.4
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table A.5
Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
—
—
Arithmetic
operations
BWL BWL
WL BWL
B
B
—
L
— BWL
ADD, CMP
SUB
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
MULXU,
MULXS,
DIVXU,
DIVXS
NEG
EXTU, EXTS
Logical
AND, OR, XOR
operations NOT
Shift operations
Bit manipulations
Branching
BCC, BSR
instructions JMP, JSR
RTS
System
RTE
control
SLEEP
instructions
LDC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
BW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
WL
BWL
BWL
BWL
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
W
—
—
W
—
—
W
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
W
—
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
W
—
W
—
W
—
W
—
—
—
W
—
W
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BW
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
B
XORC
NOP
—
—
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 632 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
—
—
BWL BWL
—
—
—
—
STC
ANDC, ORC,
Block data transfer instructions
@@aa:8
B
—
@(d:16.PC)
BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
@(d:8.PC)
Data
MOV
transfer
POP, PUSH
instructions
MOVFPE,
MOVTPE
@aa:24
@aa:16
@aa:8
@ERn+/@ERn
@(d:24.ERn)
@ERn
Rn
Instructions
#xx
Functions
@(d:16.ERn)
Addressing Mode
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Appendix
B.
I/O Ports
B.1
I/O Port Block Diagrams
SBY (Low at a reset or in standby mode)
PUCR1
(PUCR16)
VCC
Internal data bus
VCC
PDR1
(P16)
P16
VSS
PCR1
(PCR16)
SCI4 module
SCK4 output
SCK4 input
SCK4 input enable
SCK4 output enable
PDR1:
Port data register 1
PCR1:
Port control register 1
PUCR1: Port pull-up control register 1
TM
Figure B.1 (a) Port 1 Block Diagram (P16) (F-ZTAT
Version)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 633 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PDR1
(P16)
PCR1
(PCR16)
P16
Internal data bus
PUCR1
(PUCR16)
VCC
VSS
PDR1: Port data register 1
PCR1: Port control register 1
PUCR1: Port pull-up control register 1
Figure B.1 (b) Port 1 Block Diagram (P16) (Masked ROM Version)
SBY
TPU module
TIOCA1 output enable (P12)
TIOCB1 output enable (P13)
TIOCA2 output enable (P14)
TIOCB2 output enable (P15)
PUCR1
(PUCR1n)
VCC
PDR1
(P1n)
P1n
PCR1
(PCR1n)
VSS
Internal data bus
VCC
Port data register 1
PDR1:
Port control register 1
PCR1:
PUCR1: Port pull-up control register 1
n = 5 to 2
Figure B.1 (c) Port 1 Block Diagram (P15 to P12)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 634 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
TIOCA1 output (P12)
TIOCB1 output (P13)
TIOCA2 output (P14)
TIOCB2 output (P15)
TIOCA1 input (P12)
TIOCB1 input (P13)
TIOCA2 input (P14)
TIOCB2 input (P15)
TCLKA input (P12)
TCLKB input (P13)
TCLKC input (P14)
Appendix
SBY
PUCR1
(PUCR1n)
PMR1
(AEVL,
AEVH)
PDR1
(P1n)
P1n
PCR1
(PCR1n)
VSS
Internal data bus
VCC
VCC
AEC module
AEVH input (P10)
AEVL input (P11)
PDR1: Port data register 1
PCR1: Port control register 1
PMR1: Port mode register 1
PUCR1: Port pull-up control register 1
n = 1, 0
Figure B.1 (d) Port 1 Block Diagram (P11, P10)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 635 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PUCR3
(PUCR37)
VCC
Internal data bus
VCC
PDR3
(P37)
P37
PCR3
(PCR37)
VSS
SCI4 module
SO4 output
SO4 output enable
PDR3:
Port data register 3
PCR3:
Port control register 3
PUCR3: Port pull-up control register 3
TM
Figure B.2 (a) Port 3 Block Diagram (P37) (F-ZTAT
Version)
SBY
VCC
PUCR3
(PUCR37)
PDR3
(P37)
PCR3
(PCR37)
P37
VSS
PDR3: Port data register 3
PCR3: Port control register 3
PUCR3: Port pull-up control register 3
Figure B.2 (b) Port 3 Block Diagram (P37) (Masked ROM Version)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 636 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
VCC
Appendix
SBY
PUCR3
(PUCR36)
VCC
Internal data bus
VCC
PDR3
(P36)
P36
PCR3
(PCR36)
VSS
SCI4 module
SI4 input
SI4 input enable
PDR3: Port data register 3
PCR3: Port control register 3
PUCR3: Port pull-up control register 3
TM
Figure B.2 (c) Port 3 Block Diagram (P36) (F-ZTAT
Version)
SBY
VCC
VCC
PUCR3
(PUCR36)
Internal data bus
PDR3
(P36)
PCR3
(PCR36)
P36
VSS
PDR3:
Port data register 3
PCR3:
Port control register 3
PUCR3: Port pull-up control register 3
Figure B.2 (d) Port 3 Block Diagram (P36) (Masked ROM Version)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 637 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PFCR
(SC32S)
SPCR
(SPC32)
SCI3_2 module
VCC
PDR3
(P32)
P32
Internal data bus
TXD32 output
SPCR
(SCINV3)
PCR3
(PCR32)
VSS
IIC bus 2 module
IIC2 input/output enable
SCL output
SCL input
VSS
PDR3:
Port data register 3
PCR3:
Port control register 3
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR :
Port function control register
Figure B.2 (e) Port 3 Block Diagram (P32)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 638 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
SCI3_2 module
VCC
PFCR
(SC32S)
PCR3
(PCR31)
VSS
Internal data bus
PDR3
(P31)
P31
RXD32 input enable
RXD32 input
SPCR
(SCINV2)
VSS
I2C bus 2 module
IIC input/output enable
SDA output
SDA input
PDR3:
Port data register 3
PCR3:
Port control register 3
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR :
Port function control register
Figure B.2 (f) Port 3 Block Diagram (P31)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 639 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PUCR
(PUCR30)
VCC
VCC
PMR3
(TMOW)
RTC module
PDR3
(P30)
VSS
PCR3
(PCR30)
Internal data bus
TMOW output
P30
PFCR
(SC32S)
SCI3_2 module
SCK32 input enable
SCK32 output enable
SCK32 output
SCK32 input
PFCR
(CLKOUT1)
PFCR
(CLKOUT0)
PDR3:
Port data register 3
PCR3:
Port control register 3
PMR3:
Port mode register 3
CLKOUT output
φOSC, φOSC/2,
φOSC/4
PUCR3: Port pull-up control register 3
PFCR :
Port function control register
Figure B.2 (g) Port 3 Block Diagram (P30)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 640 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Timer F module
SBY
TMOFH output
PFCR
(SC31S)
SPCR
(SCINV1)
VCC
SPCR
(SPC31)
SCI3_1 module
PDR4
(P42)
P42
PCR4
(PCR42)
Internal data bus
TXD31/IrTXD output
VSS
PMR4
(TMOFH)
PDR4:
Port data register 4
PCR4:
Port contol register 4
PMR4:
Port mode register 4
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR:
Port function control register
Figure B.3 (a) Port 4 Block Diagram (P42)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 641 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PFCR
(SC31S)
SCI3_1 module
RXD31/IrRXD
input enable
VCC
PMR4
(TMOFL)
RXD31/IrRXD input
PCR4
(PCR41)
VSS
Internal data bus
PDR4
(P41)
P41
Timer F module
TMOFL output
PDR4:
Port data register 4
PCR4:
Port contol register 4
PMR4:
Port mode register 4
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR:
Port function control register
SPCR
(SCINV0)
Figure B.3 (b) Port 4 Block Diagram (P41)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 642 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PFCR
(SC31S)
SCI3_1 module
VCC
SCK31 input enable
SCK31 output enable
SCK31 output
P40
PCR4
(PCR40)
VSS
Internal data bus
SCK31 input
PDR4
(P40)
PMR4
(TMIF)
Timer F nodule
TMIF input
PDR4:
Port data register 4
PCR4:
Port control register 4
PMR4:
Port mode register 4
PFCR:
Port function control register
Figure B.3 (c) Port 4 Block Diagram (P40)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 643 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PUCR5
(PUCR5n)
VCC
VCC
PDR5
(P5n)
P5n
PCR5
(PCR5n)
VSS
Internal data bus
PMR5
(WKPn)
WKPn input
PDR5:
Port data register 5
PCR5:
Port control register 5
PMR5:
Port mode register 5
PUCR5: Port pull-up control register 5
n = 7 to 0
Figure B.4 Port 5 Block Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 644 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PDR6
(P6n)
VCC
PCR6
(PCR6n)
P6n
Internal data bus
PUCR6
(PUCR6n)
VSS
PDR6:
Port data register 6
PCR6:
Port control register6
PUCR6: Port pull-up control register 6
n = 7 to 0
Figure B.5 Port 6 Block Diagram
VCC
PDR7
(P7n)
PCR7
(PCR7n)
P7n
Internal data bus
SBY
VSS
PDR7:
Port data register 7
PCR7:
Port control register 7
n = 7 to 0
Figure B.6 Port 7 Block Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 645 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
Internal data bus
PDR8
(P8n)
PCR8
(PCR8n)
P8n
VSS
PDR8:
Port data register 8
PCR8:
Port control register 8
n = 7 to 0
Figure B.7 Port 8 Block Diagram
PWM module
PWM4 output
SBY
VCC
PDR9
(P93)
PCR9
(PCR93)
P93
VSS
PDR9:
Port data register 9
PCR9:
Port contol register 9
PFCR:
Port function control register
Figure B.8 (a) Port 9 Block Diagram (P93)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 646 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
PFCR
(PWM4)
Appendix
PWM module
PWM3 output
SBY
PFCR
(PWM3)
VCC
PDR9
(P92)
P92
PCR9
(PCR92)
VSS
Internal data bus
PMR9
(IRQ4)
IRQ4 input
PDR9:
Port data register 9
PCR9:
Port contol register 9
PMR9:
Port mode register 9
PFCR:
Port function control register
Figure B.8 (b) Port 9 Block Diagram (P92)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 647 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
PWM module
SBY
PWMn+1 output
VCC
Internal data bus
PMR9
(PWMn+1)
PDR9
(P9n)
P9n
PCR9
(PCR9n)
VSS
PDR9:
Port data register 9
PCR9:
Port contol register 9
PMR9:
Port mode register 9
n = 1, 0
Figure B.8 (c) Port 9 Block Diagram (P91, P90)
SBY
VCC
PCRA
(PCRAn)
PAn
VSS
PDRA:
Port data register A
PCRA:
Port contol register A
n = 3 to 0
Figure B.9 Port A Block Diagram
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 648 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
PDRA
(PAn)
Internal data bus
Appendix
PBn
A/D module
DEC
AMR3 to AMR0
VIN
n = 7 to 3
Figure B.10 (a) Port B Block Diagram (PB7 to PB3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 649 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
PMRB
(IRQm)
PBn
Internal data bus
IRQm input
A/D module
DEC
AMR3 to AMR0
VIN
PMRB:
Port mode register B
n = 2 to 0
m = 3, 1, 0
Figure B.10 (b) Port B Block Diagram (PB2 to PB0)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 650 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
PCn
PDRC
(PCn)
VSS
PCRC
(PCRCn)
PDRC:
Internal data bus
VCC
Port data register C
PCRC:
Port contol register C
n = 7 to 0
Figure B.11 Port C Block Diagram (PC7 to PC0)
SBY
PMRB
(IRQ0)
VCC
PMRE
(TMIC)
PE7
PDRE
(PE7)
VSS
Internal data bus
PMRE
(IRQ0)
PCRE
(PCRE7)
Timer C module
TMIC input
PDRE:
PCRE:
PMRE:
PMRB:
Port data register E
Port contol register E
Port mode register E
Port mode register B
IRQ0 input
Figure B.12 (a) Port E Block Diagram (PE7)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 651 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
Internal data bus
PMRE
(UD)
PE6
PDRE
(PE6)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE6)
Timer C module
PDRE:
Port data register E
PCRC:
Port contol register E
PMRE:
Port mode register E
UD input
Figure B.12 (b) Port E Block Diagram (PE6)
SBY
VCC
PFCR
(SC32S)
PDRE
(PE5)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE5)
PDRE:
Port data register E
PCRE:
Port contol register E
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR:
Port function control register
SPCR
(SCINV3)
Figure B.12 (c) Port E Block Diagram (PE5)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 652 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
SPCR
(SPC32)
PE5
SCI3_2 module
TXD32 output
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PDRE
(PE4)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE4)
PDRE:
PCRE:
SPCR:
PFCR:
Port data register E
Port contol register E
Serial port control register
Port function control register
SPCR
(SCINV2)
Internal data bus
PFCR
(SC32S)
PE4
SCI3_2 module
RXD32 input enable
RXD32 input
Figure B.12 (d) Port E Block Diagram (PE4)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 653 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PMRB
(IRQ1)
PDRE
(PE3)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE3)
PFCR
(SC32S)
Internal data bus
PMRE
(IRQ1)
PE3
SCI3_2 module
SCK32 input enable
SCK32 output enable
SCK32 output
PDRE:
PCRE:
PMRE:
PMRB:
PFCR:
Port data register E
Port contol register E
Port mode register E
Port mode register B
Port function control register
Figure B.12 (e) Port E Block Diagram (PE3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 654 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
SCK32 input
IRQ1 input
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PDRE
(PE2)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE2)
PDRE:
Port data register E
PCRE:
Port contol register E
Internal data bus
SPCR2
(SPC33)
PE2
SPCR2
(SCINV5)
SCI3_3 module
TXD33 output
SPCR2: Serial port control register 2
Figure B.12 (f) Port E Block Diagram (PE2)
SBY
VCC
PDRE
(PE1)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE1)
SPCR2
(SCINV4)
PDRE:
Port data register E
PCRE:
Port contol register E
Internal data bus
PE1
SCI3_3 module
RXD33 input enable
RXD33 input
SPCR2: Serial port control register 2
Figure B.12 (g) Port E Block Diagram (PE1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 655 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PMRE
(IRQ3)
PE0
PDRE
(PE0)
VSS
PCRE
(PCRE0)
Internal data bus
PMRB
(IRQ3)
SCI3_3 module
SCK33 input enable
SCK33 output enable
SCK33 output
PDRE:
PCRE:
PMRE:
PMRB:
Port data register E
Port contol register E
Port mode register E
Port mode register B
Figure B.12 (h) Port E Block Diagram (PE0)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 656 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
SCK33 input
IRQ3 input
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PFCR
(SC31S)
PDRF
(PF3)
VSS
PCRF
(PCRF3)
SPCR
(SCINV1)
PDRF:
Port data register F
PCRF:
Port contol register F
SPCR:
Serial port control register
PFCR:
Port function control register
Internal data bus
SPCR
(SPC31)
PF3
SCI3_1 module
TXD31/IrTXD output
Figure B.13 (a) Port F Block Diagram (PF3)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 657 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PDRF
(PF2)
VSS
PCRF
(PCRF2)
SPCR
(SCINV0)
PDRF:
PCRF:
SPCR:
PFCR:
Port data register F
Port contol register F
Serial port control register
Port function control register
Figure B.13 (b) Port F Block Diagram (PF2)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 658 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Internal data bus
PFCR
(SC32S)
PF2
SCI3_1 module
RXD31/IrRXD
input enable
RXD31/IrRXD input
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PMR9
(IRQ4)
PDRF
(PF1)
VSS
PCRF
(PCRF1)
PFCR
(SC31S)
PDRF:
PCRF:
PMRF:
PMR9:
PFCR:
Internal data bus
PMRF
(IRQ4)
PF1
SCI3_1 module
SCK31 input enable
SCK31 output enable
SCK31 output
Port data register F
Port contol register F
Port mode register F
Port mode register 9
Port function control register
SCK31 input
IRQ4 input
Figure B.13 (c) Port F Block Diagram (PF1)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 659 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
SBY
VCC
PF0
PDRF
(PF0)
VSS
PCRF
(PCRF0)
Internal data bus
PMRF
(TMIG)
Timer G module
PDRF:
PCRF:
PMRF:
Port data register F
Port contol register F
Port mode register F
Figure B.13 (d) Port F Block Diagram (PF0)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 660 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
TMIG input
Appendix
B.2
Port States in Each Operating State
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
(High-Speed/
(High-Speed/
Medium-Speed) Medium-Speed) Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
P16 to P10 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1*2
P37, P36,
P30
High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1*2
P32, P31
High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
P42 to P40 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
P57 to P50 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1*2
P67 to P60 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1*2
P77 to P70 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
P87 to P80 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
P93 to P90 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
PA3 to PA0 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 661 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
Operating
Mode
Reset
Active
Sleep
(High-Speed/
(High-Speed/
Medium-Speed) Medium-Speed) Watch
Subactive Subsleep
Standby
PB7 to PB0 High
High
impedance impedance*3
High
impedance*3
High
High
High
High
impedance impedance impedance impedance
*3
*3
*1
PC7 to PC0 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
PE7 to PE0 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
PF3 to PF0 High
Functioning
impedance
Retained
Retained
Functioning Retained
High
impedance
*1
Notes: 1. Registers are retained and output level is high impedance.
2. High-level output when the pull-up MOS is turned on.
3. The pin selected by the CH3 to CH0 bits in AMR is connected to the A/D converter.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 662 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Appendix
C.
Product Part No. Lineup
Product Part No.
Model Marking
Package
(Package Code)
Regular
specifications
HD64F38099FP4
F38099FP4
100 pin LQFP
HD64F38099FP10
F38099FP10
(PLQP0100KB-A)
Wide-range
specifications
HD64F38099FP10W
F38099FP10
100 pin LQFP
Regular
specifications
HD64338099FP
Wide-range
specifications
HD64338099FPW
38099(***)FP
100 pin LQFP
Regular
specifications
HD64338098FP
38098(***)FP
100 pin LQFP
Wide-range
specifications
HD64338098FPW
Product Classification
H8/38099
Flash
memory
version
Masked
ROM
version
H8/38098
Masked
ROM
version
(PLQP0100KB-A)
38099(***)FP
100 pin LQFP
(PLQP0100KB-A)
(PLQP0100KB-A)
(PLQP0100KB-A)
38098(***)FP
100 pin LQFP
(PLQP0100KB-A)
[Legend]
(***): ROM code
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 663 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
100
76
ZD
1
75
e
Index mark
*1
D
y
HD
*3
bp
25
51
x
26
50
Previous Code
100P6Q-A / FP-100U / FP-100UV
F
ZE
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 664 of 692
E
*2
RENESAS Code
PLQP0100KB-A
A
HE
REJ09B0309-0200
c1
Detail F
Terminal cross section
b1
bp
MASS[Typ.]
0.6g
A2
c
L1
L
e
x
y
ZD
ZE
L
L1
D
E
A2
HD
HE
A
A1
bp
b1
c
c1
Reference
Symbol
Min Nom Max
13.9 14.0 14.1
13.9 14.0 14.1
1.4
15.8 16.0 16.2
15.8 16.0 16.2
1.7
0.05 0.1 0.15
0.15 0.20 0.25
0.18
0.09 0.145 0.20
0.125
0°
8°
0.5
0.08
0.08
1.0
1.0
0.35 0.5 0.65
1.0
Dimension in Millimeters
NOTE)
1. DIMENSIONS "*1" AND "*2"
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH.
2. DIMENSION "*3" DOES NOT
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.
D.
A1
JEITA Package Code
P-LQFP100-14x14-0.50
Appendix
Package Dimensions
Figure D.1 Package Dimensions (PLQP0100KB-A)
c
Main Revisions and Additions in this Edition
Item
Page
Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 1 Overview
2
The description on the package, LGA-113, is deleted.
1.1 Features
•
Compact package
Figure 1.2 Pin Assignment of
4
H8/38099 Group (PLQP0100KBA)
Modified
Figure 1.3 Pin Assignment of
H8/38099 Group (PTLG0113JAA)
Deleted
Table 1.1 PTLG0113JA-A Pin
Correspondence
Deleted
Table 1.1 Pin Functions
5 to 10
The column on the PTLG0113JA-A is deleted.
Section 2 CPU
42
The programs for executing the instruction are modified.
49
Modified
2.8.3 Bit-Manipulation Instruction
Section 3 Exception Handling
3.2.1 Reset Exception Handling
:
2. The reset exception handling vector address (H'000000 to
H'000003) is read and transferred to the PC, and then
program execution starts from the address indicated by the
PC.
Section 4 Interrupt Controller
73
4.5 Interrupt Exception Handling
Vector Table
4.6 Operation
Deleted
Table 4.2 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector
addresses, and interrupt priorities. For default priorities, the
lower the vector number, the higher the mask level. Priorities
within a module are fixed. Interrupt mask levels other than NMI
and address break can be modified by IPR.
77
Modified
:
2. With referring to the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in INTM and
the I bit in CCR, control the following.
 The interrupt request is held pending when the I bit is
set to 1.
 When the I bit is cleared to 0 and INTM1 bit is set to 1,
interrupts with mask level 1 or less are held pending.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 665 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Table 4.4 Interrupt Response
Times (States)
81
Modified
No. Execution Status
Number of States
1
1 or 2*1
Interrupt mask level determination
Total
18 to 41
Notes: 1. One state in case of an internal interrupt
(2 states in case of an external interrupt).
2. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt
handling routine prefetch.
3. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and
internal processing after vector fetch.
Section 5 Clock Pulse Generator 91
Modified
5.3.1 Connecting 32.768kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator
Equivalent Series Resistance
Figure 5.5 Typical Connection to
32.768-kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal
Resonator
30 kΩ (max.)
35 kΩ (max.)
5.3.1 Connecting 32.76891
kHz/38.4-kHz Crystal Resonator
Added
1. When using a resonator other than the above, ensure
optimal conditions by conducting sufficient evaluation of
consistency in cooperation with the manufacturer of the
resonator. Even if the above resonators or products
equivalent to them are implemented, their oscillation
characteristics are affected by the board design. Be sure to
use the actual board to evaluate consistency as a system.
2. The consistency as a system has to be verified not only in a
reset state (i.e., the RES pin is driven low) but also in a state
where a reset state has been exited (i.e., the low-level RES
signal has been driven high).
Figure 5.6 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator.
Figure 5.6 Equivalent Circuit of
32.768-kHz Crystal Resonator
92
Added
CS
LS
RS
X1
X2
CO
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 666 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
C O = 0.9 pF (typ.)
R S = 50 kΩ (typ.)
φW = 32.768 kHz/38.4kHz
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
5.3.3 How to Input the External
Clock
93
The title of the section modified
5.4.1 Prescaler S
94
Deleted
… The output from prescaler S is shared by the on-chip
peripheral modules. The division ratio can be set separately for
each on-chip peripheral function. In active (medium-speed) mode
and sleep mode (medium-speed), …
5.5.1 Note on Resonators and
Resonator Circuits
95
Modified
5.5.3 Definition of Oscillation
Stabilization Wait Time
97, 98 The description in this section is modified.
5.5.5 Note on the Oscillation
Stabilization of Resonators
99
The title modified
5.5.6 Note on Using Power-On
Reset
99
Modified
Resonator characteristics are closely related to board design.
Therefore, resonators should be assigned after being carefully
evaluated by the user in the masked ROM version and flash
memory version, with referring to the examples shown in this
section.
The power-on reset circuit in this LSI adjusts the reset clear time
by the capacitor capacitance, which is externally connected to
the RES pin. The external capacitor capacitance should be
adjusted to secure the oscillation stabilization time before reset
clearing. For details, refer to section 23, Power-On Reset Circuit.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 667 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 6 Power-Down Modes
102,
6.1.1 System Control Register 1 103
(SYSCR1)
6.1.3 System Control Register 3 105
(SYSCR3)
Modified
Bit Bit Name Description
6
5
4
STS2
STS1
STS0
Standby Timer Select 2 to 0
1
MA1
Active Mode Clock Select 1 and 0
0
MA0
Select the operating clock frequency in active
(medium-speed) mode and sleep (mediumspeed) mode. The MA1 and MA0 bits should
be written to in active (high-speed) mode or
subactive mode.
…
When an external clock is to be used, the
minimum value (STS3 = 0, STS2 = 1, STS1 =
0, STS0 = 1) is recommended. When the onchip oscillator for the system clock is to be
used, four states (STS3 = 1, STS2 = 1, STS1
= 0, STS0 = 1) are recommended. If a setting
other than the recommended value is made,
operation may start before the end of the wait
time.
Modified
Bit Bit Name Description
0
STS3
Standby Timer Select 3
…
When an external clock is to be used, the
minimum value (STS3 = 0, STS2 = 1, STS1 =
0, STS0 = 1) is recommended. When the onchip oscillator for the system clock is to be
used, four states (STS3 = 1, STS2 = 1, STS1
= 0, STS0 = 1) is recommended. If a setting
other than the recommended value is made,
operation may start before the end of the wait
time.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 668 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.1.4 Clock Halt Registers 1 to 3 107
(CKSTPR1 to CKSTPR3)
Added
•
CKSTPR1
Bit Bit Name Description
1
FROMCK Flash Memory Module Standby
STP*1*3 Flash memory enters standby mode when this
bit is cleared to 0. When the addresses
H'000000 to H'0000FF of the flash memory
space is accessed while this bit is set to 0, the
RAM emulation function is enabled and the
addresses H'FFFC00 to H'FFFCFF of the
RAM space can be accessed. For details, see
section 7.4, Using RAM to Emulate Flash
Memory.
The RAM emulation function is supported only
by the F-ZTAT version.
109
Deleted
Notes:
:
4. This bit is valid when the WDON bit in TCSRW is 0. If this bit is
cleared to 0 while the WDON bit is set to 1 (while the
watchdog timer is operating), this bit is cleared to 0. However,
the watchdog timer does not enter module standby mode and
continues operating. When the watchdog timer stops
operating and the WDON bit is cleared to 0 by software, this
bit is valid and the watchdog timer enters module standby
mode.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 669 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Figure 6.1 Mode Transition
Diagram
111
Table 6.3 Internal State in Each
Operating Mode
115
Modified
Note: A transition between different modes cannot be made to
occur simply because an interrupt request is generated.
Make sure to enable the interrupt request.
Modified
Active Mode
Sleep Mode
Medium-
Watch
Subactive
Subsleep
Function
High-speed
speed
speed
speed
Mode
Mode
Mode
Mode
System clock oscillator
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Halted
Halted
Halted
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Subclock oscillator
CPU
Instructions
Medium-
High-
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
halted
halted
halted
halted
Functioning
Functioning
Halted
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
Retained
RAM
Stand-by
Functioning/
halted
Functioning
Halted
Halted
Retained
Retained
Registers
1
I/O
External
interrupts
Retained*
NMI
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
Retained
IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQAEC
WKP0 to WKP7
Peripheral
Timer C
2
modules
Timers F, G
2
retained*
retained*
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
3
retained*
Asynchronous
2
retained*
3
retained*
Retained
3
retained*
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning
Functioning/
Functioning/
Functioning/
Retained
event counter
RTC
8
TPU
WDT
8
8
retained*
retained*
retained*
Retained
Retained
Retained
Functioning/
4
Functioning/
4
Retained
Functioning/
4
Functioning/
5
retained*
retained*
retained*
retained*
SCI3/IrDA
Reset
Functioning/
Functioning/
Reset
retained*
retained*
IIC2
Retained
Retained
Retained
6
6
Retained
PWM
A/D converter
LCD
Functioning/
7
Address break
Notes: 1.
.…
8.
Retained
Retained
Functioning/
7
Functioning/
7
retained*
retained*
retained*
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Functions if the RTC operation is selected as a clock source. Halted and retained for
the free-running counter.
6.2.2 Standby Mode
116
Modified
… However, as long as the rated voltage is supplied, the
contents of CPU registers, on-chip RAM, and some on-chip
peripheral module registers are retained. …
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 670 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.2.2 Standby Mode
116
Modified
… or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable
bit.
When a reset source is generated in standby mode, the system
clock oscillator and the on-chip oscillator for the system clock
start. The RES pin must be kept low until the system clock
oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has elapsed. The
CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES pin is driven
high.
6.2.3 Watch Mode
117
Modified
… or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable
register.
When a reset source is generated in watch mode, the system
clock oscillator starts. The RES pin must be kept low until the
system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has
elapsed. The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES
pin is driven high.
6.2.4 Subsleep Mode
117
Modified
… or the requested interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable
register.
When a reset source is generated in subsleep mode, the system
clock oscillator starts. The RES pin must be kept low until the
system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has
elapsed. The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES
pin is driven high.
6.2.5 Subactive Mode
118
Modified
… on the combination of bits SSBY, LSON, and TMA3 in
SYSCR1 and bits MSON and DTON in SYSCR2. Subactive
mode is not cleared if the I bit in CCR is set to 1 or the requested
interrupt is disabled by the interrupt enable register.
When a reset source is generated in subactive mode, the system
clock oscillator starts. The RES pin must be kept low until the
system clock oscillator output stabilizes and the tREL period has
elapsed. The CPU starts reset exception handling when the RES
pin is driven high.
The operating frequency of subactive mode is selected from φW/2,
φW/4, and φW/8 by the SA1 and SA0 bits in SYSCR2. After the
SLEEP instruction is executed, the operating frequency changes
to the frequency which is set before the execution.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 671 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.2.6 Active (Medium-Speed)
Mode
118
The description in this section is modified.
6.3 Direct Transition
119
The description in this section is modified.
6.3.1 Direct Transition from
Active (High-Speed) Mode to
Active (Medium-Speed) Mode
119
Added
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed)
mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to
0 and the MSON and DTON bits in SYSCR2 are set to 1, a
transition is made to active (medium-speed) mode via sleep
mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (1).
:
Example: When φosc/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock
after the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 1tosc + 14 × 8tosc = 115tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
6.3.2 Direct Transition from
Active (High-Speed) Mode to
Subactive Mode
120
Added
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (high-speed)
mode while the SSBY, TMA3, and LSON bits in SYSCR1 are set
to 1 and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made
to subactive mode via watch mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (2).
:
Example: When φw/8 is selected as the subactive operating
clock after the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 1tosc + 14 × 8tw = 3tosc +
112tw
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 672 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.3.3 Direct Transition from
120
Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to
Active (High-Speed) Mode
Added
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed)
mode while the SSBY and LSON bits in SYSCR1 are cleared to
0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared to 0, and the DTON bit in
SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made to active (high-speed)
mode via sleep mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (3).
:
Example: When φosc/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock
before the transition
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tosc + 14 × 1tosc = 38tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
6.3.4 Direct Transition from
121
Active (Medium-Speed) Mode to
Subactive Mode
Added
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in active (medium-speed)
mode while the SSBY, LSON, and TMA3 bits in SYSCR1 are set
to 1 and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is made
to subactive mode via watch mode.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (4).
:
Example: When φosc/8 and φw/8 are selected as the CPU
operating clock before and after the transition, respectively
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tosc + 14 × 8tw = 24tosc +
112tw
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 673 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.3.5 Direct Transition from
121
Subactive Mode to Active (HighSpeed) Mode
Added and modified
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while
the SSBY and TMA3 bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1, the LSON bit
in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, the MSON bit in SYSCR2 is cleared
to 0, and the DTON bit in SYSCR2 is set to 1, a transition is
made directly to active (high-speed) mode via watch mode after
the waiting time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has
elapsed.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (5).
:
Direct transition time = {(Number of SLEEP instruction execution
states) + (Number of internal processing states)} × (tsubcyc
before transition) + (Wait time set in bits STS2 to STS0) +
(Number of interrupt exception handling execution states) × (tcyc
after transition)………………………………………..(5)
Example: When φw/8 is selected as the CPU operating clock
after the transition and wait time = 8192 states
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + (8192 + 14) ×1tosc =
24tw + 8206tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 674 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
6.3.6 Direct Transition from
Subactive Mode to Active
(Medium-Speed) Mode
122
Added
When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while
the SSBY and TMA3 bits in SYSCR1 are set to 1, the LSON bit
in SYSCR1 is cleared to 0, and the MSON and DTON bits in
SYSCR2 are set to 1, a transition is made directly to active
(medium-speed) mode via watch mode after the waiting time set
in bits STS2 to STS0 in SYSCR1 has elapsed.
The time from the start of SLEEP instruction execution to the end
of interrupt exception handling (the direct transition time) is
calculated by equation (6).
:
Example: When φw/8 and φosc/8 are selected as the CPU
operating clock before and after the transition, respectively,
and wait time = 8192 states
Direct transition time = (2 + 1) × 8tw + 8192 × 1tosc + 14 ×
8tosc = 24tw + 8304tosc
For the legend of symbols used above, refer to section 26,
Electrical Characteristics.
Section 7 ROM
Figure 7.4 and the description on the figure are deleted.
Figure 7.4 Flow of RAM
Emulation
7.9 Notes on Setting Module
Standby Mode
147
Modified
… Then the flash memory should be set to enter the module
standby mode.
When the RAM emulation is not in use, if an interrupt is
generated in module standby mode, the vector address cannot
be fetched. As a result, the program may run away.
:
When the RAM emulation is used (an interrupt vector is
provided), if an interrupt is generated in module standby mode,
the vector address can be set by assigning the interrupt vector to
the RAM, and this prevents the program to run away. For details,
see section 7.4, Using RAM to Emulate Flash Memory.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 675 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 9 I/O Ports
165
SCR3_2
9.2.5 Pin Functions
•
Modified
P30/SCK32/TMOW/CLKOUT
pin
PCR30
0
0
0
P30 input pin
1
P30 output pin
x
SCK32 output pin
1
0
1
•
170
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Modified
SCR3_1
P40/SCK31/TMIF pin
PCR40
0
0
0
P40 input pin
1
P40 output pin
x
SCK31 output pin
0
1
•
P57/WKP7/SEG8 to
P54/WKP4/SEG5 pins
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 676 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Pin Function
CKE0
1
173
PCR4
CKE1
1
9.4.5 Pin Functions
Pin Function
CKE0
1
9.3.4 Pin Functions
PCR3
CKE1
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Modified
PCR5
Pin Function
PCR5n
0
P5n input pin
1
P5n output pin
0
WKPn input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
SEGn+1 output pin
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
•
173
P53/WKP3/SEG4 to
P50/WKP0/SEG1 pins
Modified
PCR5
Pin Function
PCR5m
9.8.4 Pin Functions
•
185
P92/PWM3/IRQ4 pin
0
P5m input pin
1
P5m output pin
0
WKPm input pin
1
Setting prohibited
x
SEGm+1 output pin
PCR9
Pin Function
Modified
PCR92
0
9.10.3 Pin Functions
•
193
1
P92 output pin
x
PWM3 output pin
0
IRQ4 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Modified
AMR
PB2/AN2/IRQ3 pin
P92 input pin
Pin Function
CH3 to CH0
Other than
B'0110
•
PB1/AN1/IRQ1 pin
193
PB2 input pin
B'0110
AN2 input pin
Other than
B'0110
IRQ3 input pin
B'0110
Setting prohibited
Modified
AMR
Pin Function
CH3 to CH0
Other than
B'0101
PB1 input pin
B'0101
AN1 input pin
Other than
B'0101
IRQ1 input pin
B'0101
Setting prohibited
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 677 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
•
193
PB0/AN0/IRQ0 pin
Modified
AMR
Pin Function
CH3 to CH0
Other than
B'0100
9.12.4 Pin Functions
•
200
PB0 input pin
B'0100
AN0 input pin
Other than
B'0100
IRQ0 input pin
B'0100
Setting prohibited
Modified
SCR3_2
PE3 (/SCK32/IRQ1) pin
PCRE
CKE0
x
x
x
x
x
0
PE3 input pin
1
PE3 output pin
0
PE3 input pin
0
0
1
1
0
1
•
PE0/SCK33 (/IRQ3) pin
201
IRQ1 input pin
1
PE3 output pin
x
SCK32 output pin
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK32 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
SCR3_3
PCRE
CKE0
Pin Function
PCRE0
x
x
x
IRQ3 input pin
0
0
0
PE0 input pin
1
1
0
1
REJ09B0309-0200
PCRE3
Modified
CKE1
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 678 of 692
Pin Function
CKE1
1
PE0 output pin
x
SCK33 output pin
0
SCK33 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK33 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK33 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
9.13.4 Pin Functions
205
•
Modified
SCR3_1
PF1 (/SCK31/IRQ4) pin
PCRF
CKE0
x
x
x
x
x
0
PF1 input pin
1
PF1 output pin
0
0
1
1
0
1
9.16.1 How to Handle Unused
Pin
210
Pin Function
CKE1
PCRF1
IRQ4 input pin
0
PF1 input pin
1
PF1 output pin
x
SCK31 output pin
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 output pin
1
Setting prohibited
0
SCK31 input pin
1
Setting prohibited
Deleted
•
If an unused pin is an output pin, it is recommended to
handle it in one of the following ways:
 Set the output of the unused pin to high and pull it up to
Vcc with an on-chip pull-up MOS.
 Set the output of the unused pin to high and pull it up to
Vcc with an external resistor of approximately 100 kΩ.
9.16.2 Input Characteristics
Difference due to Pin Function
210
This section is newly added.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 679 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 10 Realtime Clock
(RTC)
220
Modified
RTCCSR selects clock source. A free running counter controls
start/stop of counter operation by the RUN bit in RTCCR1. When
a clock other than φw/4 is selected, the RTC is disabled and
operates as an 8-bit free running counter.
10.3.7 Clock Source Select
Register (RTCCSR)
Bit Bit Name Description
3
RCS3
Clock Source Selection
2
RCS2
0000: φ/8⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅Free running counter operation
1
RCS1
0001: φ/32⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0
RCS0
0010: φ/128⋅⋅⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0011: φ/256⋅⋅⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0100: φ/512⋅⋅⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0101: φ/2048⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0110: φ/4096⋅⋅Free running counter operation
0111: φ/8192⋅⋅Free running counter operation
1000 : φw/4⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅RTC operation
1001 to 1111: Setting prohibited
10.4.1 Initial Settings of
Registers after Power-On
222
10.5 Interrupt Sources
224
Modified
The RTC registers that store second, minute, hour, and day-ofweek data, control registers, and interrupt registers are not
initialized by a RES input, or by a reset source caused by a
watchdog timer.
Modified
… When using an interrupt, set the IENRTC (RTC interrupt
request enable) bit in IENR1 to 1 last after other registers are set.
10.6.2 Note when Using RTC
Interrupts
225
This section is newly added.
Section 11 Timer C
227
Modified
11.1 Features
•
Up/down-counter switching is selected either by the register
specification or the external input level specification.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 680 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
11.3.1 Timer Mode Register C
(TMC)
229
Modified
Bit Bit Name Description
6
TMC6
Counter Up/Down Control
5
TMC5
Specifies whether TCC functions as an upcounter or down-counter, or whether
selection of counting up or down is controlled
by the input signal level on the UD pin.
00: TCC is an up-counter
01: TCC is a down-counter
1x: Selection through the signal level on the
UD pin
UD pin input high: Down-counter
UD pin input low: Up-counter
11.4.1 Interval Timer Operation
232
Modified
… TCC up/down-count control can be specified by bits TMC6
and TMC5 in TMC, or selected by the input signal level on the
UD pin.
11.4.3 Event Counter Operation 233
Modified
Timer C can operate as an event counter, with the TMIC pin as
the event input pin. External event counting is selected by setting
bits TMC3 to TMC0 in the timer mode register C (TMC) to B'0111
or B'1111, and setting the TMIC bit in PMRE to 1. TCC counts
up/down at the rising/falling edge of an external event signal
input at the TMIC pin.
The external event input signal is not counted correctly if it does
not satisfy the high width or low width of the input pin.
11.4.4 TCC Up/Down Control by 233
the External Input Pin
The section title is modified.
Section 12 Timer F
Modified
243
… OCRF contents are constantly compared with TCF, and when
both values satisfy the compare match condition, CMFH is set to
1 in TCSRF.
12.4.1 Timer F Operation
(1) Operation in 16-Bit Timer
Mode
Figure 12.2 Count Timing for
Internal Clock Operation
244
Added
Figure 12.3 Count Timing for
External Event Operation
244
Added
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 681 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Figure 12.4 TMOFH/TMOFL
Output Timing
245
Modified
Figure 12.5 TCF Clear Timing
245
Added
Figure 12.6 Compare Match
Flag Set Timing
246
Added
12.6.1 16-Bit Timer Mode
248
Modified
… However, if the written data and the counter value match,
there is a probability of a compare match signal being generated
and not being generated.
12.6.2 8-Bit Timer Mode
248
(2) TCFL, OCRFL
Modified
… However, even if the written data and the counter value
match, there is a probability of a compare match signal being
generated and not being generated.
(1) TCFH, OCRFH
249
Modified
… However, even if the written data and the counter value
match, there is a probability of a compare match signal being
generated and not being generated.
12.6.4 Timer Counter (TCF)
Read/Write
251
Modified
When the internal clock φW/4 is selected as the counter input
clock in active (high-speed, medium-speed) mode, normal write
is not performed on TCF. And when reading TCF, as the system
clock and internal clock are mutually asynchronous, TCF
synchronizes with synchronization circuit. This results in a
maximum TCF read value error of ±1.
When reading or writing TCF in active (high-speed, mediumspeed) mode is needed, select the input clock except for φW/4
before read/write is performed.
Section 13 Timer G
262
Modified
Figure 13.6 Timing of Input
Capture by Input Capture Input
263
Modified
Figure 13.7 TCG Clear Timing
264
Modified
Figure 13.4 Input Capture Input
Timing (without Noise
Cancellation Function)
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 682 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 14 16-Bit Timer Pulse
Unit (TPU)
285
Deleted
TCNT is a 16-bit readable/writable counter. The TPU has a total
of two TCNT counters, one for each channel.
14.3.6 Timer Counter (TCNT)
TCNT is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or in hardware standby
mode.
Figure 14.2 16-Bit Register
Access Operation [CPU ↔
TCNT (16 Bits)]
288
Modified
Module data bus
Upper 8 bits
Lower 8 bits
TCNT
Figure 14.20 Example of PWM
Mode Operation (3)
304
14.6 Interrupt Sources
305
Modified
Modified
… Mask levels within a channel can be changed by the interrupt
controller. For details, see section 4, Interrupt Controller.
14.8.12 Interrupts when Module 318
Standby Function is Used
Modified
14.8.13 Output Conditions for
0% Duty and 100% Duty
Added
318
Section 15 Asynchronous Event 332
Counter (AEC)
Table 15.3 Operating States of
Asynchronous Event Counter
If the module standby function is used when an interrupt has
been requested, it will not be possible to clear the CPU interrupt
source with the interrupt request enabled. Interrupts should
therefore be disabled before using the module standby function.
Modified
Notes:
1. When an asynchronous external event is input, the counter
increments. In addition, when an overflow occurs, an interrupt
is requested.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 683 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 16 Watchdog Timer
338
16.2.1 Timer Control/Status
Register WD1 (TCSRWD1)
Added
Bit Bit Name Description
0
WRST
Watchdog Timer Reset
Indicates whether a reset caused by the
watchdog timer is generated. This bit is not
cleared by a reset caused by the watchdog
timer.
[Setting condition]
When TCWD overflows and an internal reset
signal is generated
Section 17 Serial
Communication Interface 3
(SCI3, IrDA)
377
Added
Bit Bit Name Description
3
17.3.12 Serial Extended Mode
Register (SEMR)
ABCS
Asynchronous Mode Basic Clock Select
Selects the basic clock for one-bit interval in
asynchronous mode. The ABCS setting is
enabled in asynchronous mode (COM = 0 in
SMR3)
0: Basic clock with a frequency 16 times the
transfer rate
1: Basic clock with a frequency 8 times the
transfer rate
Clear this bit to 0 when the IrDA function is
enabled.
Figure 17.19 IrDA Block
Diagram
401
Modified
17.7.1 Transmission
402
Modified
… According to the standard, the high-level pulse width is
defined to be 1.41 µs at minimum and (3/16 + 2.5%) x bit rate or
(3/16 x bit rate) + 1.08 µs at maximum. For example, when the
frequency of system clock φ is 10 MHz, being equal to or greater
than 1.41 µs, the high-level pulse width at minimum can be
specified as 1.6 µs.
17.7.2 Reception
403
Modified
… If a pulse has a high-level width of less than 1.41 µs, the
minimum width allowed, the pulse is not recognized.
Section 19 14-Bit PWM
433 to Entirely revised
440
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 684 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 20 A/D Converter
444
20.3.1 A/D Result Register
(ADRR)
20.7.3 Usage Notes
Modified
ADRR is a 16-bit read-only register that stores the results of A/D
conversion. The data is stored in the upper 10 bits of ADRR.
ADRR can be read by the CPU at any time, …
454
Deleted
:
3. When A/D conversion is started after clearing module standby
mode, wait for 10φ clock cycles before starting A/D
conversion.
4. Even when the resistor ladder is made operational by setting
the LADS bit in ADSR, wait for 10φ clocks before starting A/D
conversion.
Section 21
458
21.3.1 LCD Port Control
Register (LPCR)
Modified
Bit Bit Name Description
7
DTS1
Duty Cycle Select 1 and 0
6
DTS0
Common Function Select
5
CMX
The combination of DTS1 and DTS0 selects
static, 1/2, 1/3, or 1/4 duty. CMX specifies
whether or not the same waveform is to be
output from multiple pins to increase the
common drive power when not all common
pins are used due to the selected duty.
For details, see table 21.2.
21.3.4 LCD Trimming Register
(LTRMR)
463
Modified
LTRMR adjusts the 3-V constant-voltage used for LCD drive
power supply and the output voltage of 3-V constant-voltage
power supply circuit.
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 685 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
21.4.3 3-V Constant-Voltage
Power Supply Circuit
473
Modified
… Before activating a step-up circuit, operate the LCD
controller/driver, and set the duty cycle, pin function, display
data, frame frequencies, etc. Insert a capacitance of 0.1 µF
between the C1 pin and C2 pin, and connect a capacitance of
0.1 µF to each of V1, V2, and V3 pins.
474
Modified
Notes:
:
4. The step-up circuit output voltage in the initial state is different
in an individual device according to the manufacturing
difference.
21.5 Usage Notes
2
Section 22 I C Bus Interface 2
(IIC2)
477
Added
506
Modified
7
Figure 22.15 Receive Mode
Operation Timing
Figure 22.17 Sample Flowchart
for Master Transmit Mode
508
8
1
2
Bit 7
Bit 0
Bit 1
Modified
No
[14]
STOP=1 ?
Yes
Set MST to 0 and TRS
to 0 in ICCR1
Clear TDRE in ICSR
End
22.7.3 Restriction on Transfer
Rate Setting in Multimaster
Operation
514
Added
22.7.4 Restriction on the Use of
Bit Manipulation Instructions for
MST and TRS Setting in
Multimaster Operation
515
Added
22.7.5 Usage Note on Master
Receive Mode
515
Added
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 686 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
[15]
Item
Page Revisions (See Manual for Details)
Section 26 Electrical
Characteristics
554 to Modified
561
Table 26.2 DC Characteristics
Table 26.3 Control Signal Timing 562 to Modified
566
Table 26. 6 A/D Converter
Characteristics
569
Modified
595
Notes:
Table 26.16 A/D Converter
Characteristics
:
3. AISTOP2 is the current at a reset, in standby or watch
mode while the A/D converter is idle, or in the module
standby state.
Table 26.7 LCD Characteristics
570
Modified
Table 26.10 Flash Memory
Characteristics
573 to Modified
575
Table 26.12 DC Characteristics
580 to Modified
587
Table 26.13 Control Signal
Timing
588 to Modified
591
Table 26.16 A/D Converter
Characteristics
594 to Modified
595
Table 26.17 LCD Characteristics 596
Modified
26.8 Usage Note
Added
602
Connecting a bypass capacitor is recommended for noise
suppression.
Appendix
663
The list is modified.
C. Product Part No. Lineup
Figure D.2 Package Dimensions 665
(PTLG0113JA-A)
Deleted
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 687 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 688 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Index
Numerics
D
16-bit timer mode ................................... 242
16-bit timer pulse unit............................. 271
8-bit timer mode ..................................... 243
Data reading procedure ........................... 223
Data transfer instructions .......................... 22
A
A/D converter ......................................... 441
Absolute address....................................... 33
Acknowledge .......................................... 496
Address break ......................................... 519
Addressing modes..................................... 32
Arithmetic operations instructions............ 23
Asynchronous event counter (AEC) ....... 319
Asynchronous mode ............................... 378
B
Bit manipulation instructions.................... 26
Bit rate .................................................... 361
Bit synchronous circuit ........................... 513
Block data transfer instructions ................ 30
Boot mode............................................... 134
Boot program.......................................... 133
Branch instructions ................................... 28
Break....................................................... 407
C
Clock pulse generator ............................... 85
Clocked synchronous mode .................... 390
Clocked synchronous serial format......... 504
Condition field .......................................... 31
Condition-code register (CCR)................. 16
Counter operation ................................... 290
CPU .......................................................... 11
E
Effective address ....................................... 36
Effective address extension....................... 31
Erase/erase-verify ................................... 143
Erasing units ........................................... 128
Error protection....................................... 145
Exception handling ................................... 47
F
Flash memory.......................................... 127
Framing error .......................................... 386
Free-running count operation.................. 291
G
General registers ....................................... 15
H
Hardware protection................................ 145
I
I/O ports .................................................. 151
I2C bus format ......................................... 495
I2C bus interface 2 (IIC2)........................ 479
Immediate ................................................. 34
Initial setting procedure .......................... 222
Input capture function ............................. 294
Input capture signal timing ..................... 308
Instruction set............................................ 21
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 689 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
Interrupt mask bit (I)................................. 16
IrDA........................................................ 401
L
Large current ports...................................... 2
LCD controller/driver ............................. 455
LCD display............................................ 466
LCD RAM .............................................. 468
Logic operations instructions.................... 25
Power-on reset circuit ............................. 517
Prescaler W ............................................... 94
Program counter (PC) ............................... 16
Program/program-verify ......................... 140
Program-counter relative .......................... 34
Programmer mode................................... 146
Programming units.................................. 128
Programming/erasing in user program
mode ....................................................... 137
R
M
Mark state ............................................... 407
Memory indirect ....................................... 35
Memory map ............................................ 13
Module standby function ........................ 123
Multiprocessor communication
function................................................... 396
N
Noise canceler ........................................ 507
O
On-board programming modes............... 133
Operation field.......................................... 31
Output compare output timing................ 307
Overrun error .......................................... 386
P
Package....................................................... 2
Parity error.............................................. 386
Periodic count operation ......................... 291
Pin assignment............................................ 4
Power-down modes ................................ 101
Power-down states.................................. 146
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 690 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
RAM ....................................................... 149
Realtime clock (RTC) ............................. 211
Register direct ........................................... 33
Register field............................................. 31
Register indirect ........................................ 33
Register indirect with displacement .......... 33
Register indirect with post-increment ....... 33
Register indirect with pre-decrement ........ 33
Registers
ABRKCR2 .................. 520, 528, 535, 542
ABRKSR2 .................. 522, 528, 535, 542
ADRR ......................... 444, 530, 537, 543
ADSR.......................... 446, 530, 537, 543
AEGSR ....................... 323, 529, 536, 542
AMR ........................... 444, 530, 537, 543
BAR2H ....................... 522, 528, 535, 542
BAR2L........................ 522, 528, 535, 542
BDR2H ....................... 522, 528, 535, 542
BDR2L........................ 522, 528, 535, 542
BGRMR .............................................. 465
BRR ............................ 361, 529, 536, 543
CKSTPR1 ................... 107, 532, 539, 545
CKSTPR2 ................... 108, 532, 539, 545
CKSTPR3 ........................................... 109
EBR1........................... 131, 526, 533, 540
EBR2................................................... 132
ECCR .......................... 324, 529, 536, 542
ECCSR........................ 325, 529, 536, 542
ECH ............................ 327, 529, 536, 542
ECL............................. 327, 529, 536, 542
ECPWCR.................... 321, 528, 535, 542
ECPWDR.................... 322, 528, 536, 542
FENR .......................... 133, 526, 533, 540
FLMCR1..................... 129, 526, 533, 540
FLMCR2..................... 130, 526, 533, 540
FLPWCR .................... 132, 526, 533, 540
ICCR1......................... 482, 527, 534, 541
ICCR2......................... 485, 527, 534, 541
ICDRR ........................ 494, 528, 535, 541
ICDRS ................................................ 494
ICDRT ........................ 494, 528, 535, 541
ICIER.......................... 489, 527, 535, 541
ICMR .......................... 487, 527, 535, 541
ICRGF ................................................ 256
ICRGR ................................................ 256
ICSR ........................... 491, 528, 535, 541
IEGR............................. 61, 531, 538, 545
IENR............................. 63, 531, 538, 545
INTM............................ 71, 531, 539, 545
IPR................................ 70, 528, 535, 541
IrCR ............................ 376, 529, 536, 543
IRR ............................... 65, 531, 539, 545
IWPR ............................ 68, 532, 539, 545
LCR .................................................... 460
LCR2 .................................................. 462
LPCR .................................................. 458
LTRMR .............................................. 463
OCR ............................ 238, 530, 537, 543
OSCCR ......................... 87, 530, 537, 544
PCR1........................... 152, 531, 538, 544
PCR3........................... 161, 531, 538, 545
PCR4........................... 167, 531, 538, 545
PCR5........................... 171, 531, 538, 545
PCR6........................... 175, 531, 538, 545
PCR7........................... 179, 531, 538, 545
PCR8........................... 181, 531, 538, 545
PCR9........................... 184, 531, 538, 545
PCRA.......................... 187, 531, 538, 545
PCRC .................................................. 195
PCRE .................................................. 197
PCRF................................................... 203
PDR1........................... 152, 530, 538, 544
PDR3........................... 160, 530, 538, 544
PDR4........................... 166, 530, 538, 544
PDR5........................... 171, 531, 538, 544
PDR6........................... 175, 531, 538, 544
PDR7........................... 178, 531, 538, 544
PDR8........................... 181, 531, 538, 544
PDR9........................... 183, 531, 538, 544
PDRA.......................... 187, 531, 538, 544
PDRB .......................... 190, 531, 538, 544
PDRC .................................................. 194
PDRE .................................................. 196
PDRF .................................................. 202
PMR1 .......................... 153, 530, 537, 544
PMR3 .......................... 162, 530, 537, 544
PMR4 .......................... 168, 530, 537, 544
PMR5 .......................... 172, 530, 537, 544
PMR9 .......................... 184, 530, 537, 544
PMRB ......................... 191, 530, 537, 544
PMRE.................................................. 197
PMRF.................................................. 203
PUCR1 ........................ 153, 531, 538, 544
PUCR3 ........................ 162, 531, 538, 544
PUCR5 ........................ 172, 531, 538, 544
PUCR6 ........................ 176, 531, 538, 544
PWCR ......................... 435, 530, 537, 544
PWDR......................... 436, 530, 537, 544
RDR ............................ 352, 529, 536, 543
RHRDR....................... 215, 527, 534, 541
RMINDR..................... 214, 527, 534, 541
RSECDR ..................... 213, 527, 534, 541
RSR..................................................... 352
RTCCR1 ..................... 217, 527, 534, 541
RTCCR2 ..................... 219, 527, 534, 541
RTCCSR ..................... 220, 527, 534, 541
RTCFLG ..................... 221, 527, 534, 541
RWKDR...................... 216, 527, 534, 541
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 691 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
RWKDR ......................216, 527, 534, 541
SAR .............................494, 528, 535, 541
SCR3............................356, 529, 536, 542
SCR4............................415, 526, 533, 540
SCSR4 .........................418, 526, 533, 540
SMR.............................353, 529, 536, 542
SPCR ...........................373, 529, 536, 542
SSR ..............................358, 529, 536, 543
SUB32CR ......................86, 527, 534, 541
SYSCR1 ......................102, 531, 538, 545
SYSCR2 ......................104, 531, 538, 545
SYSCR3 ............................................. 105
TC................................237, 530, 537, 543
TCC .................................................... 231
TCG .................................................... 255
TCNT...........................285, 527, 533, 540
TCR .............................275, 526, 533, 540
TCRF ...........................239, 530, 537, 543
TCSRF.........................240, 530, 537, 543
TCSRWD1 ..................337, 529, 536, 543
TCSRWD2 ..................339, 529, 536, 543
TCWD .........................340, 530, 537, 543
TDR .............................352, 529, 536, 543
TGR .............................285, 527, 533, 540
TIER ............................283, 526, 533, 540
TIOR............................278, 526, 533, 540
TLC..................................................... 231
TMC ................................................... 229
TMDR..........................277, 526, 533, 540
TMG ................................................... 256
TMWD ........................341, 529, 536, 543
TSR..............................284, 526, 533, 540
TSTR ...........................286, 526, 533, 540
TSYR...........................287, 526, 533, 540
WEGR ...........................62, 528, 536, 542
ROM ....................................................... 127
Rev. 2.00 Jul. 04, 2007 Page 692 of 692
REJ09B0309-0200
S
Serial Communication Interface 3
(SCI3) ..................................................... 345
Serial Communication Interface 4
(SCI4) ..................................................... 413
Shift instructions ....................................... 25
Slave address........................................... 496
Sleep mode.............................................. 116
Software protection................................. 145
Stack pointer (SP) ..................................... 16
Standby mode ......................................... 116
Start condition......................................... 496
Stop condition ......................................... 496
Subactive mode....................................... 118
Subclock generator ................................... 91
Subsleep mode ........................................ 117
Synchronous operation............................ 296
System clock generator ............................. 88
System control instructions....................... 29
T
TCNT count timing................................. 306
Timer C ................................................... 227
Timer F ................................................... 235
Timer G................................................... 253
Toggle output.......................................... 292
Transfer rate............................................ 484
V
Vector address........................................... 48
W
Watchdog timer....................................... 335
Waveform output by compare match...... 292
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
Hardware Manual
H8/38099 Group
Publication Date: Rev.1.00, Mar. 28, 2006
Rev.2.00, Jul. 04, 2007
Published by:
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Edited by:
Customer Support Department
Global Strategic Communication Div.
Renesas Solutions Corp.
 2007. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
http://www.renesas.com
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information.
Renesas Technology America, Inc.
450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A
Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501
Renesas Technology Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K.
Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900
Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120
Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898
Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071
Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.
10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999
Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001
Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd.
Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea
Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
Colophon 6.0
H8/38099 Group
Hardware Manual